Guide Micro Station V7 1

MicroStation/J®
User Guide
DAA004450-1/0003
Trademarks
AccuDraw, Bentley, the "B" Bentley logo, MDL, MicroStation,
MicroStation/J, MicroStation MasterPiece, MicroStation Modeler,
MicroStation PowerDraft, MicroStation Review, MicroStation SE,
MicroStation Vault, PowerScope, QuickVision, SmartLine, and
TeamMate are registered trademarks; Bentley SELECT is a service
mark of Bentley Systems, Incorporated or Bentley Software, Inc.
Java™ and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks

or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in
the U.S. and other countries.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Acrobat logo, Distiller, Exchange,
and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation.
Other brands and product names are the trademarks of

their respective owners.
United States Patent Nos. 5,815,415 and 5,784,068.
Copyrights
©2000 Bentley Systems, Incorporated.
MicroStation ©1998 Bentley Systems, Incorporated.

IGDS file formats ©1981-1988 Intergraph Corporation.
Intergraph Raster File Formats ©1993 Intergraph Corporation.
Portions ©1992-1994 Summit Software Company.
Portions ©1992-1997 Spotlight Graphics, Inc.
Portions ©1993-1995 Criterion Software Ltd. and its licensors.
Portions ©1992-1998 Sun MicroSystems, Inc.
Portions © Unigraphics Solutions, Inc.
Icc ©1991-1995 by AT&T, Christopher W. Fraser, and David
R. Hanson. All rights reserved.
Portions ©1997–1999 HMR, Inc. All rights reserved.
Portions ©1992–1997 STEP Tools, Inc.
Sentry Spelling-Checker Engine ©1993 Wintertree Software Inc.
Unpublished – rights reserved under the copyright laws of the
United States and other countries. All rights reserved.
MicroStation/J User’s Guide

MicroStation/J User’s Guide
Table of Contents
1. Placing Elements in 2D
Setting the Active Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
What are element attributes? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
Element symbology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13
Line Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15
Line Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17
Line style modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17
General Procedure — To use a custom line style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–18
Activating line style modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19
Standard line styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–21
Level symbology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–21
Other element attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26
Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26
Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–28
Linear Elements tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–29
Place SmartLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–30
Place Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–36
Place Multi-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–37
Place Stream Line String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–40
Place Point or Stream Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–42
Construct Angle Bisector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–44
Construct Minimum Distance Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–45
Construct Line at Active Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–46
Ellipses tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–47
Place Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–48
Place Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–51
Polygons tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–54
Place Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–55
Place Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–57
Place Orthogonal Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–59
Place Regular Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–60
Points tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–63
Setting the Active Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–64
Place Active Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–65
MicroStation/J User’s Guide i

Table of Contents
Construct Active Points Between Data Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–67

Project Active Point Onto Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–68
Construct Active Point at Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–69
Construct Active Points Along Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–71
Construct Active Point at Distance Along Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–72
Arcs tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–74
Place Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–75
Place Half Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–77
Place Quarter Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–78
Modify Arc Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–79
Modify Arc Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–80
Modify Arc Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–81
Using the Select Settings Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–82
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–83
General Procedure — To work with drawing settings groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–84
Other categories of settings groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–84
Scale settings groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–85
Working units settings groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–85
2. Drafting Aids
Using Tentative Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
Snapping tentative points to elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
Snap Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
Snap Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
Snap Mode override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
Effect of Snap Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
Locate Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
Snapping to cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
Element keypoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
AccuDraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13
A simple example of using AccuDraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13
Learning AccuDraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
Activating AccuDraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
AccuDraw’s compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–18
The origin point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–19
The drawing plane indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–19
The X/Y axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–20
AccuDraw’s drawing plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–21
Drawing plane coordinate systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–21
The AccuDraw window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–22
AccuDraw’s window and the input focus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–23
AccuDraw’s Settings dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–23
ii MicroStation/J User’s Guide

Table of Contents
Working with AccuDraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–24

General Procedure for Using AccuDraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–25
Previewing and constraining data points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–26
AccuDraw and the Popup Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–26
Performing simple operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–27
Advanced uses of the popup calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–28
How AccuDraw reacts to pointer movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–30
Tolerance shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–31
Previous distance recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–33
Recalling previous values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–34
Settings manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–34
AccuDraw’s keyboard shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–34
AccuDraw defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–36
Create, edit and delete shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–36
General Procedure — To activate a keyboard shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–37
Smart Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–38
X and Y locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–40
Distance lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–41
Angle lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–42
Unit roundoffs and their effect on AccuDraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–43
Distance roundoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–43
Angle roundoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–44
Moving the AccuDraw compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–45
The floating origin option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–45
AccuDraw and the tentative point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–45
Tentative points and drawing plane orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–46
AccuDraw’s drawing plane orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–47
Rotating the drawing plane axes in 2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–48
Dynamically rotating the drawing plane axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–48
Rotation-sensitive tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–48
The Rotate Quick keyboard shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–48
Using shortcut snap modes with AccuDraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–50
The AccuDraw-enhanced Nearest snap mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–50
Setting the keypoint snap divisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–51
AccuDraw’s Effect on Various Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–51
AccuDraw and the Place Circle tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–51
AccuDraw and the Place Arc tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–52
AccuDraw and the Place Ellipse tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–53
AccuDraw and the Place Block tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–53
AccuDraw affects most tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–54
AccuDraw and the Place SmartLine Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–54
Complete List of AccuDraw Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–58
Using the Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–61
Using Grid Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–64
MicroStation/J User’s Guide iii

Table of Contents
Precision Input Key-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–65

Syntax notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–68
Measure tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–69
Measure Distance ........................................................................................................... 2–70
Measure Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–73
Measure Angle Between Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–74
Measure Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–75
Measure Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76
Measure Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–81
Mass Properties window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–82
Basic properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–85
3. Manipulating and Modifying Elements

Selecting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
Element Selection tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
Element Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
PowerSelector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
Manipulating and Modifying Selected Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
Specialized Manipulation and Modification Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–13
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–15
Identifying elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–16
Using the Fence to Manipulate and Modify Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–16
Specifying which elements are in the fence contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–17
Manipulations on many elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–20
Optimized fence clipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–20
Special fence manipulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–21
Fence tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–23
Place Fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–24
Modify Fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–28
Manipulate Fence Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–29
Delete Fence Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–32
Drop Complex Status of Fence Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–33
Manipulate tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–34
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–35
Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–38
Move Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–39
Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–41
Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–46
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–51
Align Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–53
Construct Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–55
Change Attributes tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–59
iv MicroStation/J User’s Guide

Table of Contents
Change Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . . 3–61

Change Element to Active Area . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . . 3–62
Change Element to Active Fill Type . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . . 3–63
Modify Line Style Attributes . . . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . . 3–65
CHANGE LINESTYLE SCALE . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . . 3–66
Change Multi-line to Active Definition ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . . 3–67
Match Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . . 3–68
SmartMatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . . 3–69
Match tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . . 3–70
Match Text Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . . 3–72
Match Multi-line Definition . . . . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . . 3–73
Match Dimension Settings . . . . . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . . 3–74
Match Curve Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . . 3–75
Match Surface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . . 3–76
Drop tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . . 3–77
Drop Complex Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . . 3–79
Drop Line String/Shape Status . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . . 3–80
Drop Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . . 3–81
Drop Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . . 3–82
Drop Line Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . . 3–83
Drop Associative Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . . 3–84
Drop Multi-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . . 3–85
Drop Dimension Element . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . . 3–86
Modify tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . . 3–87
Modify Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . . 3–89
Delete Part of Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . 3–100
Extend Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . 3–101
Extend Two Elements to Intersection . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . 3–102
Extend Element to Intersection . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . 3–103
Trim Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . 3–104
IntelliTrim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . 3–105
Insert Vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . 3–110
Delete Vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . 3–112
Construct Circular Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . 3–113
Construct Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . 3–115
Element Level Manipulations . . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . 3–116
4. Using Cells
Working with Cell Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
Creating and Editing Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
Cell type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
Placing Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
MicroStation/J User’s Guide v

Table of Contents
Controlling the level on which cells are placed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11

Shared cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4–11
What is a shared cell? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
Reasons to use shared cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
Cells tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
Place Active Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
Place Active Cell Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16
Select and Place Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18
Define Cell Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20
Identify Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20
Place Active Line Terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21
Replace Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–22
Hatching and Patterning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–26
Controlling the display of patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–26
Placing patterns in the design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–27
Associative patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–28
Snappable patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–29
Excluding areas inside a patterned area from patterning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–29
Cells used for patterning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–29
Pattern cells supplied with MicroStation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–30
Guidelines for creating pattern cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–31
Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–31
Patterns tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–32
Hatch Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–33
Crosshatch Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–40
Pattern Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–41
Linear Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–49
Show Pattern Attributes ................................................................................................ 4–52
Match Pattern Attributes .............................................................................................. 4–52
Delete Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–53
Dimension-driven Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–53
5. Reference Files
Using Reference Design Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
Attaching reference design files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
Attachments using saved views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
Making portable reference file attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
Helping locate “lost” attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–9
Attaching remote reference files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11
Reference File Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11
Working with attached reference design files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13
Identifying reference design files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–25
vi MicroStation/J User’s Guide

Table of Contents
Modifying attachment information from the system command line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–25

Merging reference design files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–27
Using Reference Raster Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–34
Raster image types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–35
Monochrome (1-bit) imagery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–35
Mapped (4- or 8-bit) color imagery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–35
Full (24-bit) color, mapped or RGB imagery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–36
Raster image file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–36
A sample reference raster file application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–36
Reference raster files and the Reference Files dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–37
Reference raster file attachment settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–37
Attaching reference raster files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–38
Manipulating reference raster files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–42
Moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–42
Resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–43
Rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–43
Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–44
Erasing part of a reference raster file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–45
Plotting reference raster files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–46
Adjusting the File Update Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–46
6. Advanced 2D Drafting Techniques

Permanently Grouping Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
Using complex chains and complex shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
Using groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
Using graphic groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
Putting “Holes” in Solid Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
Fillets tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
Construct Parabolic Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6
Groups tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–8
Drop Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–9
Create Complex Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–11
Create Complex Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–14
Create Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–16
Add to Graphic Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–20
Drop from Graphic Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–21
Group Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–22
Using Multi-lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–23
General Procedure — To define a multi-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–25
Compatibility with previous versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–29
Multi-line Joints tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–30
Construct Closed Cross Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–32
MicroStation/J User’s Guide vii

Table of Contents
Construct Open Cross Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–33

Construct Merged Cross Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–34
Cut Single Component Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–35
Cut All Component Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–36
Construct Closed Tee Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–37
Construct Open Tee Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–38
Construct Merged Tee Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–39
Construct Corner Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–40
Uncut Component Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–41
Multi-line Partial Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–42
Move Multi-line Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–43
Edit Multi-line Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–45
Associating Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–46
Elements that can be associated with other elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–46
Associating shared cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–47
Associating multi-lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–47
Isometric Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–48
Isometric tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–50
Place Isometric Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–51
Place Isometric Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–52
Using Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–54
Point curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–55
B-spline curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–55
Methods by which the curve is calculated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–56
B-spline curve attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–58
Special-purpose 2D B-spline tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59
Composite curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59
Bézier curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–60
Creating any conceivable curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–60
General Procedure — To place a pre-defined curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–61
General Procedure — To define a curve’s formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–63
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–63
Dimensionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–64
Function format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–64
Deriving a curve from an existing curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–65
B-spline Curves tool frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–66
Create Curves tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–68
Place B-spline Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–69
Create Curve by Tangents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–77
Place Composite Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–80
Construct Interpolation by Arcs .................................................................................... 6–83
Place Conic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–85
Place Spiral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–86
Place Helix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–88
viii MicroStation/J User’s Guide

Table of Contents
Offset Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–89

Extract Surface Rule Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–90
Curve Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–93
Curve Calculator dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–95
Modify Curves tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–100
Change to Active Curve Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–102
Reduce Curve Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–103
Extend Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–105
Change Element Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–106
Convert Element to B-spline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–107
Blend Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–108
Drop B-spline Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–110
Flatten Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–111
Evaluate Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–114
Selecting Elements Based on Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120
General Procedure — To use Attributes as Selection Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–121
Using Auxiliary Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–122
ACS tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–125
Define ACS (Aligned with Element) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–126
Define ACS (By Points) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–126
Define ACS (Aligned with View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–127
Rotate Active ACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–128
Move ACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–129
Select ACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–130
Digitizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–130
Setting working units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–131
Digitizing tablet partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–131
Placing monument points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–133
Tools for digitizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–134
Panning while digitizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–134
7. 3D Design and Modeling

Basic 3D Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2
Design cube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2
View volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
Display Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
Active Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
Standard views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
Orthogonal views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
Isometric views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
View coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
MicroStation/J User’s Guide ix

Table of Contents
Perspective projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8

Viewing a 3D Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
3D viewing procedures that are similar to 2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–9
Fitting views in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–9
Rotating views in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–9
Panning in views in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10
3D-specific viewing procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
Using saved views in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
3D View Control tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
Change View Perspective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15
Set Display Depth .......................................................................................................... 7–16
Set Active Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
Show Display Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
Show Active Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–23
Change View Rotation .................................................................................................... 7–23
View Rotation dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
Camera Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–27
Render . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32
Navigate Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–35
3D Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–48
Open 3D elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–48
Non-planar line strings and curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–49
Helixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–49
Primitive surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–49
Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50
Sphere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50
Cone and cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–51
Torus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–51
Wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–51
Extruded surfaces and surfaces of revolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–52
Free-form (NURBS) surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–53
3D Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–54
Drawing in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–54
Placing elements in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–54
Specifying whether an element encloses volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–55
Using AccuDraw in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–55
The AccuDraw window in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–56
Orienting the drawing plane in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–56
Precision input key-ins in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–61
3D data points and 3D tentative points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–61
3D auxiliary coordinate systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–61
ACS Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–62
Using AccuDraw with auxiliary coordinate systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–65
x MicroStation/J User’s Guide

Table of Contents
Other ways of working with auxiliary coordinate systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–66

Manipulating and modifying elements in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–69
Selecting elements in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–70
Identifying existing elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–70
Using the fence in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–71
SmartSolids/SmartSurfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–71
Settings that affect SmartSolids/SmartSurfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–72
SmartSolids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–72
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–72
Surface Rule Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–72
Locate By Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–73
Use Optimized Fence Clipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–75
Exporting visible edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–76
3D Main tool frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–76
3D Primitives tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–77
Place Slab ........................................................................................................................ 7–78
Place Sphere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–81
Place Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–83
Place Cone ....................................................................................................................... 7–87
Place Torus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–88
Place Wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–90
3D Construct tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–92
Extrude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–93
Construct Revolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–97
Extrude Along Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–100
Shell Solid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–103
Thicken to Solid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–106
3D Modify tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–108
Modify Solid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–109
Remove Faces and Heal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–111
Construct Union . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–114
Construct Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–116
Construct Difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–119
Cut Solid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–121
Fillet Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–125
Chamfer Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–127
3D Utility tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–130
Align Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–131
Change SmartSolid Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–135
Extract Face or Edge Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–137
Intersect Solid/Surface with Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–138
Surface Modeling tool frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–140
Create Surfaces tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–141
Construct Surface by Section or Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–143
MicroStation/J User’s Guide xi

Table of Contents
Construct Surface by Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–145

Place Free-form Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–146
Construct Skin Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–151
Sweep Along Two Traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–152
Construct Helical Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–155
Construct Offset Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–158
Modify Surfaces tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–159
Construct Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–161
Project Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–164
Convert 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–167
Construct Stitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–168
Change Normal Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–169
Modify Trim Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–170
Change to Active Surface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–172
Split Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–173
Extend Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–174
Reduce Surface Poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–175
Fillet Surfaces tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–177
Fillet Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–178
Blend Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–179
Blend Surface Between Rail Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–181
3D Queries tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–182
Evaluate Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–183
Using Cells in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–187
Creating 3D cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–187
Patterning in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–188
xii MicroStation/J User’s Guide

Placing Elements in 2D
In this chapter, you will find procedures concerning basic 2D element
placement operations in MicroStation, including:
• Setting the Active Element Attributes (see page 1-1)
• Using Tools in the Linear Elements tool box (see page 1-29)
• Using Tools in the Ellipses tool box (see page 1-47)
• Using Tools in the Polygons tool box (see page 1-54)
• Using Tools in the Points tool box (see page 1-63)
• Using Tools in the Arcs tool box (see page 1-74)
• Using the Select Settings Window (see page 1-82)
Setting the Active Element Attributes

When you place an element, the design plane locations of the data
points used to draw the element are stored in the design file. In
addition, a number of element attributes are stored.
What are element attributes?

Element attributes include the following:
• level
• color
• line weight
• line style
• fill type and color (for closed elements)
MicroStation/J User’s Guide 1–1

Element symbology
Attributes are determined by settings. For example, while the Active

Color is set to red, the color attribute of newly placed elements is red.
Changing an active setting has no effect on previously placed

elements.1 However, you can change any attribute of a previously
placed element to the corresponding active setting with the Change
Element Attributes tool (see page 3-61) .
Element symbology
These attributes compose what is called element symbology:
• color
• line weight
• line style
• fill color (for closed elements)
1 An exception is that the corresponding attribute (for example, color) of each
selected element is changed, as well as the active setting, when you change the
setting (for example, Active Color) using the Primary Tools tool box or the Element
Attributes dialog box. See “Selecting Elements”.
1–2 MicroStation/J User’s Guide

Level
Level
“LV” denotes
the Active
Level
Each element in a design is on one of 63 levels, which are numbered

1 through 63 and can also be given names.
The level on which new elements are placed with most tools is
the Active Level. The Active Level is the same level in all views,
and elements residing upon it are always displayed in all views.
The level number to which the Active Level is set is shown in
the Primary Tools tool box; the level name (if any) to which the
Active Level is set is shown in the status bar.
You can set up a level structure to make it easy to manipulate the

display of various levels and groups of levels and save the level
structure in a separate file to make it easier to use with other designs. .
For information about changing an element’s level and making

a copy of an element on another level, see Element Level
Manipulations on page 3-116.

Level
To apply an existing level structure to the design

1. From the Settings menu’s Level sub-menu, choose Manager.
The Level Manager dialog box opens.
2. From the Options menu, choose Level Names.
The Level Names dialog box opens.
3. From the dialog box’s File menu, choose Open.

The Open Level Structure dialog box opens.
4. In the Files list box, select the level structure file.
5. Click the OK button.
6. In the Level Names dialog box, click the Done button.
7. (Optional) — To prevent the level structure from having to
be reapplied the next time the design file is opened, choose
Save Settings from the File menu.

Level
Alternative method — To apply an existing

level structure to the design
1. From the Settings menu’s Level sub-menu, choose Names.
2. From the dialog box’s File menu, choose Open.
The Open Level Structure dialog box opens.
3. In the Files list box, select the level structure file.
6. (Optional) — To prevent the level structure from having to
be reapplied the next time the design file is opened, choose
To name a level
2. From the Options menu, choose Level Names.
3. Click the Add button.
The Level Name dialog box opens. If a level is selected, the
default level number in the Number field is one greater
than the number of the selected level.
4. In the Level Name dialog box, enter the level number

of the desired level.
Drawing levels are numbered 1 through 63. You cannot change

Level
those numbers, but you can give each level a unique name.
5. In the Name field, key in a name of 16 or fewer characters.
6. (Optional) — In the Comment field, key in a comment
of 32 or fewer characters.

9. (Optional) — To prevent the named level assignment
from being lost when the design file is closed, choose
Alternative method — To name a level

1. From the Settings menu’s Level sub-menu, choose Names.
2. Click the Add button.
The Level Name dialog box opens. If a level is selected, the
default level number in the Number field is one greater
than the number of the selected level.
3. In the Level Name dialog box, enter the level number

of the desired level.
Drawing levels are numbered 1 through 63. You cannot change
those numbers, but you can give each level a unique name.
4. In the Name field, key in a name of 16 or fewer characters.
5. (Optional) — In the Comment field, key in a comment

Level
of 32 or fewer characters.

8. (Optional) — To prevent the named level assignment
from being lost when the design file is closed, choose
To sort the levels shown in the Level Names

dialog box’s list box
1. From the Level Names dialog box’s Sort menu, choose Sort.
The Sort Criteria dialog box opens. The default criteria are:
Top Priority — Level Number.
Second Priority — Level Name.
Third Priority — Comment.
2. From the Sort Criteria dialog box’s Top Priority option menu,
choose the primary criterion for sorting the levels.
The options include Level Number, Level Name,
Comment, and Group Name.
3. (Optional) — From the Sort Criteria dialog box’s Second
Priority option menu, choose the criterion for sorting multiple
levels that meet the Top Priority criterion.
The options available are the three criteria not chosen
in the Top Priority option menu.
4. (Optional) — From the Sort Criteria dialog box’s Third Priority

option menu, choose the criterion for sorting multiple levels that
meet both the Top Priority and Second Priority criteria.
The options available are the two criteria not chosen either in the

Level
Top Priority option menu or in the Second Priority option menu.
To set the Active Level by number or name

1. In the Primary Tools tool box, press on the Level
option menu button.2
Level option
menu and
map
The option menu opens. It is a level map. The Active Level

is indicated with a highlighted circle.
2. While pressing the Data button, drag over the level
map to the desired level.
If the pointer is over a named level, the level name is
displayed beneath the level map.
3. Release the Data button when the pointer is on the desired
level, as indicated by a circle.
Alternative method — To set the Active

Level by number or name
1. In the status bar, click the Active Level field.
The Set Active Level dialog box opens. If any level names are
defined and Display Levels is set to Names in the Operation
category of the Preferences dialog box (Workspace menu >
Preferences), the dialog box contains a list box for selecting the
desired level by name. Otherwise, the dialog box contains a
2 If you change the Active Level using the tool box or the Element Attributes dialog box,
the levels of selected elements (see “Selecting Elements”) are also changed.

Level
level map for selecting the desired level by number.
Set Active
Level (by
name) dialog
box
Set Active
Level (by
number)
dialog box
2. In the list box or level map, select the desired level.


Level by number or name
1. From the Element menu, choose Attributes.
The Element Attributes dialog box opens.
2. Press on the Level option menu button.
The option menu opens. It is a level map. The Active Level
is indicated with a highlighted circle.
3. While pressing the Data button, drag over the level
map to the desired level.
If the pointer is over a named level, the level name is

Level
displayed beneath the level map.

4. Release the Data button when the pointer is on the desired
level, as indicated by a circle.
To set the Active Level by number

2. (If necessary) Select the Numbers tab.

The Numbers tab page opens, displaying a level map. The
number highlighted by a circle is the Active Level. The white
numbers denote levels that contain elements (only true for the
level map in the Level Manager dialog box).
3. Double-click a level number to set it as the Active Level.
The Apply button behaves as if it has been clicked after
a level number is double-clicked.

Level

Level by number
1. From the Settings menu’s Level sub-menu, choose Display.
The View Levels dialog box opens.
View Levels
dialog box
with level
map
2. (If necessary) From the View Levels dialog box’s Display

menu, choose Level Numbers.
The View Levels dialog box displays the level map. The number
highlighted by a circle is the Active Level.
3. Double-click a level number to set it as the Active Level.
The Apply button behaves as if it has been clicked after
a level number is double-clicked.

Level by number
1. From the Settings menu, choose Design File.
The Design File Settings dialog box opens.
2. In the Category list box, select Element Attributes.
3. In the Level field, key in the number of the desired level.

Level

Level by number
2. In the Level field, key in the number of the desired level.
To set the Active Level by name

Level
Manager
dialog box
with the
Names tab
displayed
2. Select the Names tab.

A list of named levels (and unnamed levels, if Show Unnamed
is turned on) is shown in the list box.
3. Double-click a level or select it and click the Active button
to make it the Active Level.

Color

Level by name
1. From the Settings menu’s Level sub-menu, choose Display.
The View Levels dialog box opens.
2. From the dialog box’s Display menu, choose Level Names.
A list of named levels (and unnamed levels, if Show Unnamed
is turned on) is shown in the list box.
View Levels
dialog box
with level
names
3. Double-click a level or select it and click the Active button

to make it the Active Level.
To set the Active Level with a key-in

1. Key in LV=<level_number | level_name>.
Color
MicroStation stores the Active Color and the color attribute
of each element as a value in the 0-255 range. To display an
element in color, MicroStation looks in the active color table for
the color that corresponds to the element color value. You can

Color
modify colors in the active color table.
The active color table is depicted graphically in MicroStation as

a 16 × 16 palette of colored tiles called a color palette.
You can also change the colors in the active design file by attaching a
different color table to it. The attached color table is automatically
activated each time the design file is reopened. Each seed design file
supplied with MicroStation has a color table already attached.
Color tables are stored as independent files. The active color table can
be saved to a file for future attachment to any design file.
For more information about working with color tables, see Color Tables.
To set the Active Color

1. In the Primary Tools tool box, press on the colored tile
at the extreme left, and drag across the color palette
to select the desired color.3
Color Palette
3 If you change the Active Color using the tool box or the Element Attributes dialog box,
the colors of selected elements (see “Selecting Elements”) are also changed.

Line Weight
Alternative method — To set the Active Color

The Element Attributes dialog box opens.4
2. If you know the number of the desired color, key it
into the Color field.
3. Otherwise, press on the colored tile to the right and drag across
the color palette to select the desired color.
Alternative method — To set the Active Color

into the Color field.
Otherwise, press on the colored tile to the right and drag across
the color palette to select the desired color.
For information about setting the Active Fill Color, see Fill on page 1-26.
Line Weight
MicroStation stores the Active Line Weight and the line weight
attribute of each element as a value in the 0-31 range.
To set the Active Line Weight

1. From the Primary Tools tool box’s Line Weight option menu,
choose the desired line weight value.5
4 If you change the Active Color using the tool box or the Element Attributes dialog box,
the colors of selected elements (see “Selecting Elements”) are also changed.
5 If you change the Active Line Weight using the tool box or the Element Attributes settings
box, the line weights of selected elements (see “Selecting Elements”) are also changed.

Line Weight
Line Weight option

menu

Line Weight
2. If you know the number of the desired line weight,
key it into the Weight field.
Otherwise, choose the desired line weight from the option
menu to the right of the Weight field.

Line Weight
3. If you know the number of the desired line weight,
key it into the Weight field.
Otherwise, choose the desired line weight from the option
menu to the right of the Weight field.

Line Style
Line Style
A line style definition can specify the following:
• A stroke pattern composed of dash strokes and gap

strokes of varying lengths.
• Small drawings called point symbols at varying intervals.
Line style definitions are customizable. The default set of line styles
in the Line Styles dialog box is intended as a sample. In most cases,
line styles should be set up by a site or project manager.
Some of
the sample
line styles
supplied in
MicroStation’s
sample
workspaces
(not to scale)
Line style modifiers

Line style modifiers or overrides allow some characteristics
of a line style to be modified as elements are placed without
requiring separate line style definitions.
Modifiers are available for the following stroke pattern

and stroke attributes:
• Origin and end widths. These modifiers are applied to each

stroke and can be used to create wide or tapered elements.
• Stroke pattern shift.

Line Style
In addition, a Scale Factor modifier is available. This modifier is

applied to all length values in the line style definition.
General Procedure — To use a custom line style

1. Set the Active Line Style. See To set the Active Line
Style on page 1-19.
2. Activate any desired line style modifiers. See Activating
line style modifiers on page 1-19.
3. Place elements with the Active Line Style and any active modifiers.
To set the Active Line Style

1. From the Primary Tools tool box’s Line Style option menu,
choose the desired line style. 6
Line Styles option

menu
Alternative method — To set the Active Line Style

1. From the Primary Tools tool box’s Line Style option
6 The Line Style option menu has items that correspond to the most recently active custom
line styles (up to four) and the eight numbered Standard line styles.

Line Style
menu, choose Custom.

The Line Styles dialog box opens.
2. In the list box, double-click the name of the desired line style.
or
In the list box, select the name of the desired line style, and click
the large button at the bottom of the dialog box on which a sample
of the selected line style is displayed. (To make the large button
visible, you must first turn on the Show Details check box.)
Alternative method — To set the Active Line Style

1. In the Key-in window, key in ACTIVE STYLE <style_name>
or LC=<style_name>.
Activating line style modifiers

Line style modifiers are activated in the Line Styles dialog box. The
large button in the dialog box shows the line style selected in the list
box with active modifiers applied. (To make the large button visible,
you must first turn on the Show Details check box.)
The New User interface does not let you activate line style modifiers.
To override the starting or ending width

for each dash stroke in elements placed
with the Active Line Style

Line Style

2. Turn on Show Details.
3. (Optional) — To set the start width, turn on Origin, and key in
the desired width, in master units, in the Origin field.
4. (Optional) — To set the ending width, turn on End, and key in

the desired width, in master units, in the End field.
Line Styles setting

box with Show
Details on
To apply a scale factor to all displayable

characteristics of the Active Line Style
3. Turn on Scale Factor, and key in the desired scale factor
in the Scale Factor field.
To shift or adjust stroke patterns differently than

specified in the Active Line Style definition

Level symbology

3. To shift stroke patterns relative to the beginning of elements or
element segments, choose Distance from the Shift option menu,
and key in the shift distance, in master units, in the Distance field.
or
To adjust stroke patterns such that a fraction of the first strokes
in stroke patterns are displayed at the start and end of elements
or element segments, choose Fraction from the Shift option menu,
and key in the fraction, in decimals, in the Fraction field.
While the Change Element Attributes (see page 3-61) tool is used
to adjust the line style modifiers of an existing element as a set,
the Modify Line Style Attributes (see page 3-65) tool in the Change
Attributes tool box can be used to adjust individual line style modifiers.
Standard line styles
Standard line styles (also known as line codes), numbered 0-7,

are based on output device coordinates, and therefore are not
truly WYSIWYG (“what-you-see-is-what-you-get”), as are custom
line styles. Hence, it is recommended that you use custom
line styles instead of standard line styles.
Level symbology
Each element in a design file has its own symbology. To make it clearer
which elements are on a particular level, you can define an alternative
symbology for all elements on a level. You can then display the
elements with their “normal” symbology or with the level symbology.

Level symbology
To copy a level symbology definition from

another design file
Level
Manager
dialog box
with the
Symbology
tab displayed
2. Select the Symbology tab.

3. From the Options menu, choose Import Symbology.
The Import Level Symbology dialog box opens.
4. Select the design file from which you want to copy the
level symbology definition.
The list box in the Symbology tab page updates to
show the copied definition.

Level symbology
Alternative method — To copy a level symbology

definition from another design file
1. From the Settings menu’s Level sub-menu, choose Symbology.
The Level Symbology dialog box opens.
2. From the dialog box’s File menu, choose Import.

The Import Level Symbology dialog box opens.
3. Select the design file from which you want to copy the
level symbology definition.
The list box in the Level Symbology dialog box updates
to show the copied definition.
To define level symbology “from scratch”

2. For each attribute (color, [numbered] line style, or line weight)
to be set, turn on the attribute under the Settings group.
3. Adjust the desired controls.
The Color, Style, and Weight controls are similar to those in
the Element Attributes dialog box. For information about
using those controls, see To set the Active Color on page 1-15

Level symbology
and To set the Active Line Weight on page 1-16.

4. In the list box, select a level or a range of levels and
click the Apply button.
(To select a range of levels, select a level at one end of the range and
then select the level at the other end while pressing the áShiftñ key.)
Alternative method — To define level

symbology “from scratch”
2. For each attribute (color, [numbered] line style, or line weight)
to be set, turn on the attribute under the Settings group.
the Element Attributes dialog box. For information about
using those controls, see To set the Active Color on page 1-15
and To set the Active Line Weight on page 1-16.
4. In the list box, select a level or a range of levels and
click the Apply button.
To display elements using level symbology

2. For each level attribute (color, line weight, or line style) to be
displayed in place of the elements’ own attributes, turn on
the corresponding check box under Overrides.
3. Click OK.
4. From the Settings menu, choose View Attributes (or press áCtrl-Bñ).
or

Level symbology
From any view window’s control menu, choose View Attributes.

The View Attributes dialog box opens.
5. From the View option menu, choose the desired view.

6. Turn on the Level Symbology attribute.
7. Click Apply or All.
8. (Optional) — If necessary, update the open views.
Alternative method — To display elements

using level symbology
3. Click OK.
4. From the Settings menu, choose View Attributes (or press áCtrl-B)ñ.
or

Other element attributes

5. From the View option menu, choose the desired view.
6. Turn on the Level Symbology attribute.
8. (Optional) — If necessary, update the open views.

In addition to level, color, line weight, and line style,
elements have these attributes:
• Fill (none, opaque, or outline)

• Class (primary or construction)
• The area attribute determines whether a closed element is a solid
or a hole (see Putting Holes in Solid Elements on page 6-5).
Fill
The fill attribute applies only to closed elements such as circles,

ellipses, and polygons. Closed elements completely enclose
the area within their boundaries.
Top: Opaque
fill; Bottom:
Outline fill
By default, a closed element is displayed in a wireframe view by lines

in the Active Color that outline the area occupied by the element.
The area of the element inside the outline is transparent.
A closed element is filled when the area within its outline is displayed

as a solid area of color. The color is determined by the Active Fill

Color. When an element is opaque, it is displayed as a solid shape
of the Active Color. In that case, the lines outlining the element
are not discernible since the “fill” has the same color.
In any view, opaque and filled elements are displayed as outlines

unless the Fill view attribute is on for that view. In other words,
turning off Fill in a view hides the “fill.”
The effects of the fill attribute and the Fill view attribute
are summarized in this table:
Fill Type Fill on Fill off
None No fill displayed No fill
displayed
Opaque Element “filled” with No fill
color of the element displayed
Outline Element filled with No fill
Active Fill Color displayed
A series of lines or a closed line string can also enclose an area.

However, MicroStation treats neither as a shape. Therefore,
neither can be assigned an area or fill attribute.
To set the Active Fill Type and Color

1. Select a tool in the Polygons tool box.
2. From the Fill Type option menu in the Tool Settings window,
choose None, Opaque, or Outline.
into the Fill Color field.
Otherwise, press on the colored tile to the right of the Fill Color
field and drag across the color palette to select the desired color.
To turn Fill on or off in a view

or


2. From the View option menu in the settings box,
choose the desired view.
3. Click the Fill check box.
To change the fill type and color of an element, use the Change Element
to Active Fill Type tool (see page 3-63) in the Change Attributes tool box.
Class
By convention, elements with the class attribute of Construction are
used as drawing aids. For example, you might place a construction
element in a particular location as an element to “snap” other
elements to, but you would not plot the construction element when
the design is complete. The elements that are actually part of the
design usually have the class attribute of Primary.
To set the Active Class

The Element Attributes Settings dialog box opens.
2. From the Class option menu, choose Primary or Construction.
Alternative method — To set the Active Class

3. From the Class option menu, choose Primary or Construction.

Linear Elements tool box
Linear Elements tool box

The tools in the Linear Elements tool box are used to
place linear elements.
To Select in the Linear Elements

tool box
Place a line, line string, shape,
arc, or circle or a combination
thereof as a complex element.
Place SmartLine (see page 6-80)
Place or construct a line.
Place Line (see page 1-36)

Place a multi-line.
Place Multi-line (see page 1-37)

Place a stream line string
(primarily for tracing images
when digitizing).
Place Stream Line String
(see page 1-40)
Place a point curve or a
stream curve.1
Place Point or Stream Curve

(see page 1-42)
Construct a line that bisects
an angle.
Construct Angle Bisector

(see page 1-44)

Place SmartLine
To Select in the Linear Elements

tool box
Construct a line between two
elements at their closest points.
Construct Minimum Distance

Line (see page 1-45)
Construct a line at Active Angle
Construct Line at Active Angle

(see page 1-46)
1 Point curves are the traditional MicroStation curve element type (9). Stream
curves are used primarily for tracing images when digitizing.
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX LINEAR OFF | ON | TOGGLE
Place SmartLine
Used to place a chain of connected line segments and arc segments

as individual elements or as a single line string, shape, circle,
complex chain, or complex shape element.
Rounded vertices can be created by allowing the tool to automatically

place an arc tangent to two adjacent line segments. You can also round
between two arc segments, or between an arc segment and a line
segment. If a rounded vertex cannot be created, a sharp one is created
instead. (This is often a more convenient [though less versatile] way of
placing an arc than directly drawing one as a segment.)

Place SmartLine
Tool Setting Effect

Segment Sets the type of segment.
Type
Lines—Sets line segments
Arcs—Sets arc segments

Vertex Type Sets the type of vertex.
• Sharp
• Rounded
• Chamfered
If after snapping to the first vertex point

and before accepting it, you change Vertex
Type, the new setting applies only to the final
vertex. (For information about snapping, see
Using Tentative Points on page 2-1.)
Rounding (with Vertex Type set to Rounded) If on, sets
Radius the arc radius for a rounded vertex. If after
snapping to the first vertex point and before
accepting it, you change Round Radius, the
new setting applies only to the final radius.
Chamfer (with Vertex Type set to Chamfered) Sets
Offset the two distances required to define a
chamfer. Chamfer Offset requires that the
two chamfer distances be equal (from the
theoretical intersection point).
Join If off, places segments as individual
Elements elements and also
• eliminates the option to close the
chain (Closed Element) upon snapping
to the first vertex point.
• allows individual segments to have
different symbologies.
Toggling this setting affects previously

defined segments in the chain.

Place SmartLine
Tool Setting Effect

Closed If on, accepting a tentative point snapped
Element to the first vertex point closes the element.
Otherwise, accepting such a tentative point
does not close the element.
Area (with Closed Element on) Sets the Active
Area — Solid or Hole
Fill Type (with Closed Element on) Sets the
Active Fill Type
• None (no fill)
• Opaque (filled with Active Color)
• Outlined (filled with Fill Color)
Fill Color (with Closed Element on) Sets the color
with which the element is filled
• If Fill Type is Opaque, the Active Color
• If Fill Type is Outlined, the fill color
can be different from the Active Color
Rotate (in SmartLine Placement Settings) If on,
AccuDraw after you enter line segments, AccuDraw
to segments typically rotates its compass such that the
x-axis aligns with the line that you just
placed. Instead of turning off AccuDraw’s
“context sensitivity” feature which would
stop this aligning behavior in all the tools,
the Rotate AccuDraw to segments setting
affects only the Place SmartLine tool.
Always start (in SmartLine Placement Settings) If on,
in line mode when you select the Place SmartLine
tool, the segment type normally defaults
to “Lines,” despite the last segment type
used. If off, AccuDraw uses the last
segment type that you used.

Place SmartLine
To place a chain of connected line segments

and arc segments
1. Select the Place SmartLine tool.
2. From the Segment Type option menu, choose the segment type.
3. If this is the first segment, enter a data point to
position the first vertex.
4. Enter data points to define the segment (follow the prompts
in the status bar), snapping if necessary to previously
defined segments. (For information about snapping, see
Using Tentative Points on page 2-1.)
Segment Enter data points to Similar to

Type
Lines Define endpoints of None
segments.
Arcs Define center. Place Arc
Define sweep angle.2 (see page
1-75)
2 To change the direction of an arc — from counterclockwise to clockwise, for

example — swing the pointer around in the desired direction.
5. To define another segment of the same type, return to step

4. If you snap to the first segment but are not completing
a shape or complex shape, turn off Closed Element before
accepting the tentative point.
or
To choose a different type of segment, return to step 2.
or
To complete a line, line string, arc, or complex chain, Reset.
or
To complete a shape, circle, or complex shape, snap to the first

Place SmartLine
vertex point, and accept the tentative point.
The following table explains illustrations of the Place SmartLine

tool starting at the top left and moving clockwise.
A Constructing a line string by setting Segment Type to Lines,

Vertex Type to Sharp, and entering data points 1 and 2.
B Setting Vertex Type to Rounded and Rounding Radius to 3.00
causes the active vertex (at the location of data point 2) to be
rounded with an arc. (If the data points entered do not allow
a round of the specified radius, a sharp vertex is created.
Only one vertex at a time is affected by the vertex settings.)
C Setting Vertex Type to Chamfered and Chamfer Offset to 3.00.

Place SmartLine
D After setting Vertex Type back to Rounded and entering

data point 3, Segment Type is set to Arcs, and data point
4 is entered to define the arc center. The direction of
the arc (clockwise or counterclockwise) is determined
by swinging the pointer past the starting point. (The
Vertex Type setting is disregarded.)
E After entering data point 5 to complete the arc segment,
setting Segment Type back to Lines and snapping a tentative
point to the starting point tentatively closes the element.
To continue without closing the element, turn off Close
Element prior to accepting the tentative point. (While the
tentative point is active it is possible to change the vertex
settings of the final vertex without affecting other vertices —
here they are set to Rounded and 1.50. It is also possible
to turn on Fill and change other tool settings related to
closed elements while the tentative point is active.)
Key-in: PLACE SMARTLINE
To choose SmartLine Placement Settings, click the arrow in the

lower right corner of the tool settings window.
Place SmartLine is designed to be used with the versatile drafting aid,

AccuDraw. See AccuDraw and the Place SmartLine Tool on page 2-54.
To negate the last data point — before Resetting (or otherwise

completing the placement procedure) — without affecting previously
defined segments, choose Undo from the Edit menu. (Choosing Undo
after completing the procedure negates the entire chain.)

Place Line
To combine contiguous open elements of any type into a complex

chain (open) or complex shape (closed), use the Create Complex
Chain tool (see page 6-11) or Create Complex Shape tool (see
page 6-14) in the Groups tool box. (With Join Elements turned
on, Place SmartLine automatically places multiple segments
defined with it as a single element.)
Place Line
Used to place or construct a line.
Tool Setting Effect

Length If on, sets the length in working units.
(Active) If on, constrains the line to the Active Angle,
Angle which can be keyed in here as well.
To place a line
1. Select the Place Line tool.
2. Enter a data point to define one endpoint.
3. If necessary, enter a data point to define the other endpoint.

Place Multi-line
Place Line.
Clockwise from top
left: Unconstrained,
with Length
“L” constrained,
with Angle “AA”
constrained, with
both Length and
Angle constrained.
Key-in: PLACE LINE CONSTRAINED | ANGLE
Place Multi-line
Used to place a planar multi-line.
The active multi-line definition is set in the Multi-lines settings box,

which is opened by choosing Multi-lines from the Element menu.
Place By Then the work Illustration

line is
Work Line At offset position
0,0 as defined
in the active
multi-line
definition (in the
illustrations, the
position of the
dashed line).

Place Multi-line
Place By Then the work Illustration

line is
Center Adjusted to be
midway between
the outermost
component lines.
If there is a
component line
at the center,
the work line is
superimposed
on it.
Maximum Adjusted to be
superimposed on
the component
line with the
maximum Offset.1
Minimum Adjusted to be
superimposed on
the component
line with the
minimum Offset.a
1
Illustrations show pointer when drawing from left to right. Thus,
the top component line has a positive Offset, and the bottom two
component lines have negative Offsets.
Tool Setting Effect

Length If on, sets segment length, in working units.
(Active) If on, constrains the multi-line to the Active
Angle Angle, which can be keyed in here as well.

Place Multi-line
Tool Setting Effect

Place By Sets the work line’s position in the multi-line
when placed and how the component lines
are offset (see table above). The work line’s
position can be changed between placements
of individual segments. Placing a multi-line
in this manner, however, prevents you
from using Association Lock to associate
vertices with other elements.1
Association If on, and Snap Lock (see page 2-2) is on, any
Lock vertex in a multi-line can be associated to
another element by snapping to that element.
(For information about snapping, see “Using
Tentative Points” on page 2-1.)
1
When a multi-line in the design is selected, the handles are placed on the work
line. If the Match All Element Settings tool in the Change Attributes tool box
is used to make the active multi-line definition match that of the multi-line
in the design, the work line is assigned the offset 0,0.
To place a multi-line
1. Select the Place Multi-line tool.
2. Enter a data point to define the beginning of the multi-line.
3. Continue entering data points to define other vertices.
4. To complete an open multi-line, Reset.
or
To complete a closed multi-line, click the Close Element
button or key in CLOSE ELEMENT.
In the latter case, the multi-line is closed at the location of the

first vertex, and this vertex has a corner joint.
Place Multi-line. Left: Resetting after entering data point 4 to

complete an open multi-line. Right: Clicking the Close Element
button after entering data point 4 to complete a closed multi-line.
Key-in: PLACE MLINE CONSTRAINED
To change a multi-line’s attributes to the active multi-line definition,

use the Change Multi-line to Active Definition tool (see page
3-67) in the Change Attributes tool box.
The Multi-line Joints tool box (see page 6-30) contains specialized
tools for working with multi-lines.
Used to place a stream line string — primarily for tracing images when
Digitizing (see page 6-130) . Many vertices can be defined without
having to enter a large number of individual data points.
The movement of the pointer is sampled, and data points are

recorded based on the tool settings:

Tool Setting Effect

Delta Sets the minimum distance, in working
units, between sampled points.
Tolerance Sets the maximum distance, in working
units, between recorded data points.
Angle Sets the angle, in degrees, that when
exceeded, causes the last sampled point
to be recorded as a data point.
Area Sets the area that, when exceeded, causes a
sampled point to be recorded as a data point.
To place a stream line string

1. Select the Place Stream Line String tool.
2. Enter a data point to define the origin.
3. Move the pointer. A stream of data points is entered
without pressing the Data button.
4. Reset to end the line string.
Key-in: PLACE LSTRING STREAM
A line string element can have a maximum of 101 vertices. If

more than 101 vertices are defined, a complex chain consisting
of one or more line string elements is created.
The tool settings can also be set in the Design File Settings box
(Settings menu > Design File…), in the Stream category.
To place a stream curve, use the Place Point or Stream

Curve tool (see page 1-42) .
Used to place a point or stream curve.
Tool Setting Effect
Method Sets how the curve is defined.

Point—Traditional MicroStation curve:
“Flat” between the first and second and
next-to-last and last data points entered.
In many cases, B-splines are more accurate
and easier to manipulate.
Stream—Primarily for tracing images when

digitizing. Many vertices can be defined
without having to enter a large number of
individual data points. The movement of
the tablet cursor is sampled and data points
are recorded based on the Active Stream
Delta, Tolerance, Angle, and Area.
Non-planar If on and Method is set to Point, a space curve
can be placed (the active design must be 3D).
Delta If Method is Stream, sets the minimum
distance, in working units, between
sampled points.
Tolerance If Method is Stream, sets the maximum
distance, in working units, between
recorded data points.

Tool Setting Effect

Angle If Method is Stream, sets the angle, in
degrees, that when exceeded, causes the last
sampled point to be recorded as a data point.
Area If Method is Stream, sets the area that,
when exceeded, causes a sampled point to
be recorded as a data point.
To place a point curve

1. Select the Place Point or Stream Curve tool.
2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Point.
3. Enter a data point to define the curve’s beginning.
4. Enter a second data point for the first curve segment.
5. Enter a data point to complete the first curve segment.
6. Enter additional data points to add segments to the curve.
7. Reset to end the curve.
Placing a point curve

To place a stream curve

1. Select the Place Point or Stream Curve tool.
2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Stream.
4. Move the pointer. A stream of data points is entered
without pressing the Data button.
5. Reset to end the curve.
Key-in: PLACE CURVE ICON | POINT | STREAM
A curve element can have 3 to 97 vertices. If more than 97

vertices are defined, a complex chain consisting of one or
more curve elements is created.
The tool settings Delta, Tolerance, Angle, and Area can also be
set in the Design File Settings dialog box (Settings > Design
File…), in the Stream category.
To place a stream line string, use the Place Stream Line

String tool (see page 1-40) .
Used to construct a line that bisects an angle defined

by three data points.
To construct an angle bisector

1. Select the Construct Angle Bisector tool.
2. Enter a data point to define one endpoint of the angle

Construct Minimum Distance Line
that is to be bisected.
3. Enter a second data point to define the vertex of the angle.
4. Enter a third data point to define the second endpoint of the angle.
Construct Angle
Bisector
Key-in: CONSTRUCT BISECTOR ANGLE
Construct Minimum Distance Line
Used to construct a line between two elements at their closest points.
To construct a minimum distance line

1. Select the Construct Minimum Distance Line tool.
2. Enter a data point to identify the first element. See
“Identifying elements” on page 3-16.
3. Enter a data point to identify the second element.
4. Accept the line.

Construct Minimum
Distance Line
Key-in: CONSTRUCT LINE MINIMUM
Used to construct a line that intersects a line segment (line or

segment of a line string or shape) at the Active Angle.
Tool Setting Effect

Method Sets when the intersection is defined.
From Point—The intersection is defined
when the element being intersected is
identified (step 2 (see page 1-47) ).
To Point—The intersection is defined by the

second data point (step 3 (see ) ).
Active Angle Sets the angle, measured counter-clockwise
from the intersected line segment, at
which the line is constructed.
Length If on, the length is constrained to the value
that is keyed in the field.

Ellipses tool box
To construct a line that intersects a line

segment at the Active Angle
1. Select the Construct Line at Active Angle tool.
2. Identify the element to intersect.
If the Method is From Point, this data point defines
the intersection.
3. Enter a data point.
If Length is off, this data point defines the length.
If the Method is To Point, this data point defines the intersection.
Construct Line at Active Angle (“AA” denotes the Active Angle).

Top Left: Method: From Point Length not constrained. Top
Right: Method: To Point Length not constrained. Bottom
Left: Method: From Point Length constrained. Bottom Right:
Method: To Point Length constrained.
Key-in: CONSTRUCT LINE AA 1 | 2 | 3 | 4
Ellipses tool box

The tools in the Ellipses tool box are used to place
ellipses (including circles).

Place Circle
To Select in the Ellipses tool box

Place a circle.
Place Circle (see page 1-48)

Place an ellipse, precisely
positioning the center and one
end of the primary axis.
Place Ellipse (see page 1-51)
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX ELLIPSES OFF | ON | TOGGLE
Place Circle
Used to place a circle.
Tool Setting Effect

Method Sets the method by which the circle is placed.
Center—position by center.
Edge—position by three data points

on the circumference.
Diameter—position by diameter’s endpoints.

Area Active Area — Solid or Hole.
Fill Type Active Fill Type — None (no fill), Opaque
(filled with Active Color), or Outlined
(filled with Fill Color).

Place Circle
Tool Setting Effect

Fill Color Sets the color with which the circle is filled.
• If Fill Type is Opaque, the Active Color.
can be different from the Active Color.
Diameter If on, sets the diameter, in working units
(if Method is set to Center or Edge). To
instead set the radius, choose Radius from
the adjacent option menu.
To place a circle by its center

1. Select the Place Circle tool.
2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Center.
3. Enter a data point to define the center.
4. If Diameter (or Radius) is off, enter a data point to define the radius.
Place Circle, with

Method set to Center.
Left: Diameter on;
Right: Diameter off.

Place Circle
To place a circle by defining three points

on its circumference
2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Edge.
3. Enter a data point on the circumference.
4. Enter a second data point on the circumference.7
5. If Diameter (or Radius) is off, enter a third data point
on the circumference.
Place Circle, with

Method set to Edge.
Left: Diameter on;
Right: Diameter off.
To place a circle by its diameter

2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Diameter.
3. Enter a data point to define one endpoint of a diameter.
4. Enter a second data point to define the other endpoint
of the diameter.
7 If Diameter is on and the pointer is moved to a location that cannot be on the
circle, the dynamic display of the circle disappears.

Place Ellipse
Place Circle, with

Method set to
Diameter
Key-in: PLACE CIRCLE ICON

Key-in:PLACE CIRCLE áCENTER | EDGE | DIAMETERñ
CONSTRAINED
Place Ellipse
Used to place an ellipse.
Tool Setting Effect

Method Sets the method by which the ellipse is placed.
Center—position by the center and one
Edge—position by both ends of the

primary axis.
Primary If on, sets the primary axis radius.1
Secondary If on, sets the secondary axis radius.
Rotation If on, sets the rotation of the primary axis
relative to the view x-axis.

Place Ellipse
Tool Setting Effect

Area Sets Active Area — Solid or Hole.
Fill Color Sets the color with which the ellipse is filled.
1 If both Primary and Secondary are on, the primary and secondary axes
are parallel to the view x- and y-axes, respectively.
To place an ellipse by center and edge

1. Select the Place Ellipse tool.
2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Center.
If Primary, Secondary, and Rotation are on, the ellipse is placed.
4. If necessary, enter a data point.
Constraints Data point defines the following

on
None Ellipse rotation and primary axis radius.
Rotation Primary axis radius.
Primary Secondary axis radius.

Place Ellipse
5. If necessary, enter a third data point.

If Secondary is off, it defines the secondary axis radius.
Place Ellipse, with Method set to Center. Left: All constraints off.
Right: All constraints on. Primary axis, denoted by “P.” Secondary
axis, denoted by “S.” Rotation angle, denoted by “θ.”
To place an ellipse by edge points

1. Select the Place Ellipse tool.
2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Edge.
3. Enter a data point to define one end of the primary axis.
If Primary, Secondary, and Rotation are on, the ellipse is placed.
4. If necessary, enter a second data point to define another
point on the ellipse.
If either of these combinations of constraints are on,
the ellipse is placed:
Primary or Secondary, and Rotation
Primary and Secondary
If the pointer is moved to a point that cannot be on an ellipse that
includes the points defined in steps 3 or 4, the dynamics disappear.
5. If necessary, enter a third data point to define the other

Polygons tool box
Place Ellipse, with Method set to Edge. Left: All constraints

off; Data points 1, 2, and 3 must be entered clockwise. Right:
All constraints on. Primary axis, denoted by “P.” Secondary
axis, denoted by “S.” Rotation angle, denoted by “θ.”
Key-in: PLACE ELLIPSE ICON

Key-in: PLACE ELLIPSE áCENTER | EDGEñ CONSTRAINED
Polygons tool box

The tools in the Polygons tool box are used to place
planar polygonal shapes.
To Select in the Polygons tool box

Place a rectangular shape.
Place Block (see page 1-55)

Place a polygonal shape.
Place Shape (see page 1-57)

Place Block
To Select in the Polygons tool box

Place a shape with each segment
either perpendicular or parallel to
all other segments in the shape.
Place Orthogonal Shape
(see page 1-59)
Place a regular polygon (one with
all sides and angles the same).
Place Regular Polygon (see

page 1-60)
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX POLYGONS OFF | ON | TOGGLE
Rectangular solids can be drawn in 3D with the Place Slab tool

(see page 7-78) , or can be generated from a planar closed element
with the Extrude tool (see page 7-93) .
Place Block
Used to place a block (rectangular shape).
Tool Setting Effect
Method Sets how the block’s orientation is determined.

Orthogonal—Block is orthogonal to the view
in which the first data point is entered.
Rotated—Orientation is defined with

a data point (step 3).

Place Block
Tool Setting Effect

Fill Color Sets the color with which the block is filled.
To place a rectangular shape

1. Select the Place Block tool.
2. Enter a data point to define one corner.
3. If Method is set to Rotated, enter a data point to
define the orientation.
4. Enter a data point to define the corner that is
diagonal from the first.
Place Block. Left:

Method set to
Orthogonal; Right:
Method set to
Rotated.
Key-in: PLACE BLOCK ICON

Key-in: PLACE BLOCK ORTHOGONAL | ROTATED
In 3D, if the second data point is placed at a different depth than the
first point, the block is rotated about the x-axis of the view such that the
diagonal corner is placed at the second data point. In other words, the
first data point defines the depth for one horizontal segment of the block

Place Shape
and the second data point defines the depth for the opposite segment.
MicroStation does not have a “Place Square” tool. However, any

of these methods can be used to place a square:
• Use the Place SmartLine tool (see page 6-80) and AccuDraw. See
AccuDraw and the Place SmartLine Tool on page 2-54.
• Use the Place Blocktool (see page 1-55) and AccuDraw.
• Use the Place Regular Polygon tool (see page 1-60) with
the number of edges set to 4.
Place Shape
Used to place a polygonal shape by entering a series of data

points to define the vertices.
Tool Setting Effect

Length If on, sets segment length, in working units.
(Active) If on, constrains sides to the Active Angle,
Angle which can be keyed in.
Fill Color Sets the color with which the shape is filled.
• If ill Type is Outlined, the fill color can
be different from the Active Color.

Place Shape
To place a polygonal shape

1. Select the Place Shape tool.
2. Enter a data point to define the first vertex.
3. Continue entering data points to define the other vertices.
4. To close the shape, enter a data point at the location
of the first vertex.
or
Click the Close Element button.
or
Key in CLOSE ELEMENT.
Place Shape
Key-in: PLACE SHAPE CONSTRAINED
The Place SmartLine tool (see page 6-80) in the Linear Elements tool
box, particularly when used in conjunction with AccuDraw, affords
more flexibility for placing polygonal shapes than Place Shape. See
AccuDraw and the Place SmartLine Tool on page 2-54.
A shape element can have 3 to 100 vertices. To place a complex

shape with over 100 vertices, use the Place SmartLine tool (see
page 6-80) in the Linear Elements tool box.
In 3D, the Place Shape tool forces the shape vertices to be planar. If
non-planar data points are entered, the vertices of the shape are forced

to a plane defined by the first three non-colinear vertices.
Used to place a non-rectangular shape in which each segment is

either perpendicular or parallel to all other segments.
Tool Setting Effect

(filled with Active Color (see page 1-13) ),
or Outlined (filled with Fill Color).
To place an orthogonal shape

1. Select the Place Orthogonal Shape tool.
2. Enter a data point to define the first vertex.
3. Enter a data point to define the orientation and second vertex.
4. Continue to enter data points to define the other vertices.
5. Close the shape by entering the last data point at the
location of the first vertex.

Place Regular Polygon
Place Orthogonal
Shape
Key-in: PLACE SHAPE ORTHOGONAL
A shape element can have 3-100 vertices. To place a “shape”

with over 100 vertices, use the Place SmartLine tool (see page
6-80) in the Linear Elements tool box.
In 3D, the Place Orthogonal Shape tool forces the shape vertices to be
planar. If non-planar data points are entered, the vertices of the shape
are forced to a plane defined by the first three non-colinear vertices.
Used to place a regular polygon — a shape with 3–100 equal

length sides and equal angles at each vertex. For example, a
square is a four-sided regular polygon.

Tool Setting Effect

Method Sets how a polygon is positioned in the design.
Inscribed—Polygon is inscribed in an
imaginary circle. If the Radius is keyed in,
one vertex is placed at center’s right.
Circumscribed—Polygon is circumscribed
in an imaginary circle. If the Radius
is keyed in, the midpoint of one side is
placed at center’s right.
By Edge—One edge is defined graphically.

Edges Sets the number of edges (3–100).
Radius If a non-zero value is keyed in, determines the
inscribing or circumscribing circle’s radius.
If zero, the radius is defined with a data point.
Fill Color Sets the color with which the polygon is filled.
To place a regular polygon with the

radius keyed in
1. Select the Place Regular Polygon tool.
2. In the tool settings window’s Radius field, key in a non-zero value.
3. Set Method to Inscribed or Circumscribed.
5. (Optional) — Repeat step 4 to place an additional polygon.

Place Regular
Polygon with Radius
keyed in. Method
is Inscribed (left),
Circumscribed
(right).
To place a polygon with the radius

defined graphically
2. In the tool settings window’s Radius field, key in 0.
3. Set Method to Inscribed or Circumscribed.
5. Enter a data point to define the radius of the imaginary circle,
the polygon’s rotation, and one vertex.
6. Return to step 4 to place additional polygons or Reset.
Place Regular
Polygon with the
Radius defined
by a data point.
Method is Inscribed
(left), Circumscribed
(right).

Points tool box
To place a polygon by defining an edge

2. In the tool settings window, set Method to By Edge.
3. Enter a data point to define one vertex.
4. Enter a data point to define the other vertex of that edge.
Place Regular
Polygon, By Edge.
Key-in: PLACE POLYGON ICON

Key-in: PLACE POLYGON INSCRIBED | CIRCUMSCRIBED
| EDGE
Points tool box

The tools in the Points tool box are used to place the Active Point
(see Setting the Active Point on page 1-64).
An active point is used as a reference or monument point in the design

plane. It can consist of a cell from the attached cell library, a text
character, a symbol, or a line with no (zero) length (a “point” element).
The Active Angle for placement is set in the Design File Settings
dialog box (Settings menu > Design File…). The Active Scale for cell
placement is also set in the Design File Settings dialog box. The

Setting the Active Point
Active Font, Text Height, and Text Width for character placement
are set in the Text dialog box (Element menu > Text).
To Select in the Points tool box

Place the Active Point.
Place Active Point (see

page 1-65)
Construct equally spaced Active
Points tween two data points.
Construct Active Points Between

Data Points (see page 1-67)
Place the Active Point on an
element at the point closest
to the data point.
Project Active Point Onto
Element (see page 1-68)
Construct a point at an
intersection
Construct Active Point at

Intersection (see page 1-69)
Construct a specified number of
Active Points along an element
between two data points.
Construct Active Points Along
Element (see page 1-71)
Construct the Active Point on an
element at a keyed in distance.
Construct Active Point at

Distance Along Element
(see page 1-72)
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX POINTS OFF | ON | TOGGLE
Setting the Active Point

In the Tool Settings window of the tools in the Points tool box,

Place Active Point
the Active Point Type is set as follows.

Point Type The Active Point is
Element A zero-length line (point element).
Character The character (or symbol if the Active Font is a
symbol font) specified in the Character field at the:
• Active Font, Height and Width, which are set
in the Text dialog box (opened by choosing
Text from the Element menu).
• The Active Angle.
Cell The Active Point Cell at the Active Angle
and Active Scale.
To designate a zero-length line as the Active Point

1. From the Point Type option menu, choose Element.
To designate a character as the Active Point

1. In the Character field, key in the character.
To designate a cell as the Active Point

1. Key in the cell name in the Cell field (or use the Cell Library dialog
box, which is opened by choosing Cells from the Element menu).
Place Active Point
Used to place the Active Point.

Place Active Point
Tool Setting Effect

Point Type Sets the Active Point type:
Element—A zero-length line.
Character—A character.
Cell—A cell
Character If the Active Point Type is Character,
the character or symbol.
Cell If the Active Point Type is Cell, the
Active Point Cell.
To place the Active Point

1. Select the Place Active Point tool.
2. Enter a data point to position the Active Point.
3. Continue to enter data points to place the same Active Point.
Place Active Point.

AA denotes the Active
Angle
Key-in: PLACE POINT
For information about setting the Active Point, see Setting

Construct Active Points Between Data Points
the Active Point” on page 1-64.
Construct Active Points Between Data Points
Used to construct a number of equally spaced Active Points

between two data points.
Tool Setting Effect

Point Type Sets the Active Point Type:
Cell—A cell.
the character.
Active Point Cell.
Points Sets how many Active Points are constructed.
To construct Active Points between data points

1. Select the Construct Active Points Between Data Points tool.
2. Enter a data point to define the location of the first Active Point.
3. Enter a second data point to define the location of
the last Active Point.
The remaining Active Points are equally spaced between
the two data points.
4. Continue from step 3 to enter additional Active Points from the
last data point entered, or Reset to return to step 2.

Project Active Point Onto Element
Construct Active
Points Between Data
Points.
Key-in: CONSTRUCT POINT BETWEEN
For information about setting the Active Point, see “Setting

Project Active Point Onto Element
Used to construct the Active Point on an element at the

point closest to the data point.
Tool Setting Effect

Cell—A cell.
the character.
Active Point Cell.

Construct Active Point at Intersection
To project the Active Point onto an element

1. Select the Project Active Point Onto Element tool.
2. Identify the element. See “Identifying elements” on page 3-16.
3. Enter a data point to project the Active Point—that is, place it
on the element at the point closest to the data point.
Project Active Point

Onto Element.
Key-in: CONSTRUCT POINT PROJECT

Used to construct the Active Point at the intersection of two elements.

Tool Setting Effect

Cell—A cell.
the character.
Active Point Cell.
To construct an Active Point at an intersection

1. Select the Construct Active Point at Intersection tool.
2. Identify the first element close to the desired point of intersection.
See “Identifying elements” on page 3-16.
3. Identify the second element.
4. Accept the construction.
Construct Active
Point at Intersection.
Key-in: CONSTRUCT POINT INTERSECTION

Construct Active Points Along Element
Construct Active Points Along Element
Used to construct the Active Point a specified number of times along

an element between two data points. The distance along the element
between each instance of the Active Point is the same.
Tool Setting Effect

Cell—A cell.
the character.
Cell If Active Point Type is Cell, the Active
Point Cell.
Points Sets how many Active Points are constructed.
To construct Active Points along an element

1. Select the Construct Active Points Along Element tool.
2. Identify the element to define one end of the segment on which to
construct Active Points. See “Identifying elements” on page 3-16.
3. Enter a data point to define the other end of the segment.

Construct Active Point at Distance Along Element
Construct Active
Points Along
Element.
Key-in: CONSTRUCT POINT ALONG

Construct Active Point at Distance

Along Element
Used to construct the Active Point on an element at a keyed-in

Distance from where the element is identified.
Tool Setting Effect

Cell—A cell.
the character.

Construct Active Point at Distance Along Element
Tool Setting Effect

Active Point Cell.
Distance Sets the distance along the element from
the point identified in step 2 at which the
active point is constructed.
To construct the Active Point at a distance

along an element
1. Select the Construct Active Point at Distance Along Element tool.
2. Identify the element at the point from which to measure the
distance. See “Identifying elements” on page 3-16.
3. Enter a data point to define the direction in which to
construct the Active Point.
Construct Active
Point at Distance
Along Element.
Key-in: CONSTRUCT POINT DISTANCE

Arcs tool box
Arcs tool box

The tools in the Arcs tool box are used to place and modify arcs.
To Select in the Arcs tool box

Place a circular arc.
Place Arc (see page 1-75)

Place an elliptical arc with a
sweep angle of 180 .
Place Half Ellipse (see

page 1-77)
Place an elliptical arc with a
sweep angle of 90 .
Place Quarter Ellipse (see

page 1-78)
Modify a circular arc’s radius,
sweep angle, and center.
Modify Arc Radius (see

page 1-79)
Extend or shorten an arc’s
length (sweep angle).
Modify Arc Angle (see page 1-80)

Lengthen or shorten an axis
of an arc.
Modify Arc Axis (see page 1-81)
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX ARC OFF | ON | TOGGLE
To modify a circular arc’s radius (or both axes of an elliptical

arc), without changing the center or sweep angle, use the

Place Arc
Element Selection tool (see page 3-3) .
Place Arc
Used to place a circular arc.
Tool Setting Effect

Method Two options for Method:
Center—position by an endpoint, the center,
and a point that defines the sweep angle.
Edge—position by three points on the arc edge.

Radius If on, sets the radius.
Start Angle If on, sets the angle between an imaginary
line between the center and the arc’s
beginning and the view’s x-axis.
Sweep Angle If on, sets the arc’s sweep angle.
To place an arc by its center

1. Select the Place Arc tool.
2. Set Method to Center.
3. Enter a data point to define the arc’s beginning, from which
the arc extends counterclockwise.
or
If Radius, Start Angle, and Sweep Angle are all on, enter a data
point to define the arc’s center and place the arc.
4. If necessary, enter a data point.
If Radius and Start Angle are on, this data point defines the
arc’s sweep angle and places the arc.
If Sweep Angle is on, this data point defines the arc’s

Place Arc
center and places the arc.

Otherwise, this data point defines the arc’s center.
5. If necessary, enter a data point to define the arc’s sweep
angle and place the arc.
Place Arc, with

Method set to Center.
Left: All constraints
off. Right: All
constraints on.
Radius, denoted by
“R.” Start Angle,
denoted by “ST.”
Sweep Angle,
denoted by “SW.”
To place an arc defined by three points

1. Select the Place Arc tool.
2. Set Method to Edge.
3. Enter a data point to define the arc’s beginning.
If Radius, Start Angle, and Sweep Angle are all on, the arc is placed.
4. If necessary, enter a second data point to define a point on the arc.
5. If necessary, enter a third data point to define the
endpoint and sweep angle.

Place Half Ellipse
Place Arc, with

Method set to Edge.
Left: All constraints
off. Right: All
constraints on.
Radius, denoted by
“R.” Start Angle,
denoted by “ST.”
Sweep Angle,
denoted by “SW.”
Key-in: PLACE ARC ICON

Key-in: PLACE ARC áCENTER | EDGEñ CONSTRAINED
To dynamically change the direction of a circular arc while placing it by

its center point, use the Place SmartLine tool (see page 6-80) .
Place Half Ellipse
Used to place an elliptical arc with a sweep angle of 180 .
To place a half ellipse

1. Select the Place Half Ellipse tool.
2. Enter a data point to define one end of the primary axis.
3. Enter a second data point at a point on the ellipse.
4. Enter a third data point to define the other end of the primary axis.

Place Quarter Ellipse
Place Half Ellipse
Key-in: PLACE ELLIPSE HALF
Place Quarter Ellipse
Used to place an elliptical arc with a sweep angle of 90 .
To place a quarter ellipse

1. Select the Place Quarter Ellipse tool.
3. Enter a second data point to define the orientation of an axis.
4. Enter a third data point to define the other endpoint.

Modify Arc Radius
Place Quarter
Ellipse.
Key-in: PLACE ELLIPSE QUARTER
Modify Arc Radius
Used to modify the radius, sweep angle, and center of a circular

arc. The endpoints do not move.
To modify an arc’s radius

1. Select the Modify Arc Radius tool.
2. Identify the arc.
3. Enter a data point to redefine the radius, sweep angle, and center.
Modify Arc Radius.

Modify Arc Angle
To modify an arc’s radius without changing

the center or sweep angle
1. Select the Element Selection tool.
2. Select the arc.
3. Drag the midpoint handle to define the new radius.
Key-in: MODIFY ARC RADIUS
To modify an arc’s radius with greater precision, use the Modify

Element tool (see page 3-89) in conjunction with AccuDraw.
See Arc modifications on page 3-93.
Modify Arc Angle
Used to extend or shorten the length (sweep angle) of an arc.
To modify an arc’s sweep angle

1. Select the Modify Arc Angle tool.
2. Identify the arc close to the end to modify.
3. Enter a data point to lengthen or shorten the arc.
Alternative method — To modify an arc’s

sweep angle
2. Select the arc.
3. Drag the endpoint handle(s) to lengthen or shorten the arc.

Modify Arc Axis
Modify Arc Angle.

At left, shortening
the arc. At right,
lengthening the arc.
Key-in: MODIFY ARC ANGLE
To modify an sweep angle with greater precision, use the Modify

Element tool (see page 3-89) in conjunction with AccuDraw.
See Arc modifications on page 3-93.
Modify Arc Axis
Used to lengthen or shorten an axis of an arc.
To modify an arc’s axis

1. Select the Modify Arc Axis tool.
2. Identify the arc near the axis to modify.
3. Enter a data point to redefine the axis.
Modify Arc Axis

Using the Select Settings Window
Key-in: MODIFY ARC AXIS
If the sweep angle is less than 90 , only one axis can be modified.
Using the Select Settings Window

To streamline the drawing of real world objects and promote
consistency with project drawing standards, you can use the Select
Settings window. This window enables you to adjust the active
settings and select a drawing tool with a click or two, thereby
bypassing the dialog boxes and tool boxes.
(Default) Select
Settings window
(Docked) Select
Settings window
(Large) Select
Settings window
(Options > Large
Dialog)
Some setup is required to use the Select Settings window:

Components
settings groups must be defined, based on the project’s drawing

standards, and stored in settings files. This is typically done
by the site or project manager.
To open an existing settings file

1. From the Settings menu, choose Manage.
The Select Settings window opens. The default settings file, as
displayed in the Select Settings window’s title bar, is "styles.stg".
2. From the window’s File menu, choose Open.
The Open Existing Settings File dialog box opens.
3. Select a settings file (a file with the extension .stg) and click OK.
To open a remote settings file

The Select Settings window opens.
2. From the window’s File menu, choose Open URL.
The Select Remote Settings File dialog box opens. The
controls in this dialog box are analogous to those in the
Select Remote Design File dialog box.
3. In the URL field, specify the path to the remote settings file.
4. (Optional) — Adjust any other settings necessary.
5. Click OK.
Components
Within a drawing settings group, settings are further
grouped into components. Like the parent settings group,
the components are typically named for real world objects.
These are the types of components:

Other categories of settings groups
Component Type Used to place

Linear Lines, arcs, ellipses, line strings,
shapes, curves, complex chains,
or complex shapes
Text Text
Cell Cells
Point Points
Area Pattern Pattern cells
Dimension Dimensions
Multi-line Multi-lines
General Procedure — To work with drawing

settings groups
The Select Settings window opens. The drawing settings groups in
the open settings file are listed in the Group list box.
2. In the Group combo box, select a group.
3. In the Component combo box, select a component.
The active settings are set to those of the component.
If the component definition specifies a key-in, the
corresponding tool is selected.
4. Place an element.
5. Place another element using the same settings (return to step 4).
or
Select a different component (return to step 3).
or
Select a different group (return to step 2).

There are other categories of settings groups, which can be
selected from dialog boxes that are opened from the Select
Settings window’s Categories menu.

Scale settings groups

A scale settings group specifies plotting units relative to design
master units. Scale settings groups are optionally used:
• In conjunction with Cell, Active Point, and Area Pattern

drawing settings group components, to scale cells while
placing them. See Using Cells on page 4-1.
• In conjunction with Text and Active Point drawing
settings components, to control the sizing and spacing
of text while placing it.
To select (and activate) a scale settings group

The Select Settings window opens.
2. From the Category menu, choose Scale.
The Select Scale dialog box opens.
3. In the list box, select the desired group.
Activating a scale settings group cannot have an effect on the

active scale factors until you select a Cell drawing component (or
an Active Point or Area Pattern component that specifies a cell).
Similarly, activating a scale settings group cannot have an effect
on the active text settings until you select a Text component (or an
Active Point component that specifies a text character).
Working units settings groups

A working units settings group consists of Working units settings.
Working units settings groups are used in conjunction with Cell,
Active Point, and Area Pattern drawing settings group components
to scale cells while placing them. See Using Cells on page 4-1.
Selecting a working units settings group adjusts the active design file’s
working units settings in the same manner as using the controls in the
Working Units category of the Design File Settings dialog box.


Drafting Aids
In this chapter, you will find out how to use the numerous 2D
drafting aids in MicroStation, including:
• Using Tentative Points (see page 2-1)
• Using AccuDraw (see page 2-13)
• Using the Grid (see page 2-61)
• Precision Input Key-ins (see page 2-65)
• Using the Tools in the Measure tool box (see page 2-69)
Using Tentative Points

A tentative point is a form of graphic input that is used to:
• Preview the location of the next data point. Accepting the
tentative point location enters the data point there.
• Define a point of reference for entry of the next data point.

It is also possible to snap a tentative point to an existing element
(put it directly on the element). Tentative point snapping helps
you accurately construct new elements that are either connected
to existing ones or precisely related to existing ones.
Using snaps, for example, you can:
• Place a line from the exact end point of an existing element

to the midpoint of another.
• Place a line perpendicular or parallel to another line.
• Place a circle tangent to an arc or a B-spline curve.
• Place a cell at the centroid of a shape (see Using Cells on page 4-1).

Drafting Aids
Snapping tentative points to elements

Snapping is affected by the Snap Lock settings. There are
three basic Snap Lock settings: the snap on/off toggle, the
Snap Mode, and the Snap Mode override.
Snap Lock
If the Snap Lock toggle is off, tentative points do not snap to elements.
Snap Mode
When Snap Lock is on, how a tentative point snaps to an element
is set by the Snap Mode (unless an override is active).
The Snap Mode (or Snap Mode override) is indicated in the status bar.
To set the Snap Mode

1. From the Settings menu’s Locks sub-menu (or the pop-up

Drafting Aids
Locks menu in the status bar), choose Full.
The Locks dialog box opens.

2. From the Snap Mode option menu, choose the desired snap mode.
Alternative method — To set the Snap Mode

1. From the Settings menu’s Snaps sub-menu (or the pop-up
Snaps menu in the status bar), choose Button Bar.
The Snap Mode button bar opens.
2. In the button bar, click the desired snap mode.
The active Snap Mode’s button is highlighted with speckled gray.

Drafting Aids

1. Place the pointer in any view.
2. Hold down the áShiftñ key.
3. Click (or press) the Tentative button. (To find the location of the
Tentative button on your system’s graphic input device, see “Using
the Mouse or Digitizing Tablet” in the Setup Guide.)
The pop-up Snap Modes menu opens. A diamond is displayed

to the left of the active Snap Mode.
4. (While still holding down the áShiftñ key), choose the
desired Snap Mode by clicking it (or drag the pointer to
it and release the Tentative button).
5. Release the áShiftñ key.

1. Place the pointer in the Snap Mode field located on the status bar.
2. Click (or press) the Data button.
The pop-up Snap Modes menu opens. A diamond is displayed
to the left of the active Snap Mode.
3. While holding down the áShiftñ key, choose the desired Snap Mode
by clicking it (or drag the pointer to it and release the Data button).
The Snap Modes button bar is dockable and resizable.
Snap Mode override

You can override the Snap Mode for a single snap by choosing a
Snap Mode override. The override mode is effective only for the next

Drafting Aids
operation; it is similar to a “single-shot” tool selection. After you

have snapped a tentative point (or Reset), the override is cancelled
and the active Snap Mode becomes effective again.
To set the Snap Mode override

1. From the Settings menu’s Snaps sub-menu, choose the
desired Snap Mode override.
A check mark is displayed to the left of the Snap Mode override.
Alternative method — To set the Snap

Mode override
1. From the Settings menu’s Snaps sub-menu (or the pop-up
Snaps menu in the status bar) Button Bar.
The Snap Mode button bar opens.
2. In the button bar, select the desired Snap Mode override.
The Snap Mode override’s button is highlighted with dark grey;
the Snap Mode’s button remains highlighted with speckled gray.

Mode override
1. Place the pointer in any view.
2. Hold down the áShiftñ key.
3. Click (or press) the Tentative button.
The pop-up Snap Modes menu opens. If a Snap Mode override
is already in effect, a diamond-shaped mark is displayed to
the left of the override and a square is displayed to the left of
the active Snap Mode. Otherwise, the diamond-shaped mark
is displayed to the left of the active Snap Mode.
5. Choose the desired Snap Mode override by clicking it (or drag
the pointer to it and release the Tentative button).

Drafting Aids

Mode override
1. In the status bar, click the Snap Mode indicator.
The pop-up Snap Modes menu opens.
2. Choose the desired Snap Mode override by clicking it (or drag
the pointer to it and release the Data button).
Effect of Snap Modes
With Snap Lock on, when you enter a tentative point on or

near an element, the following occurs:
Snap Mode:1 Tentative point snaps to:

Nearest
Point on the element nearest

to the pointer.
Keypoint
The nearest of the Element keypoints

(see page 2-10) on the element.
This is the most generally useful
of the snap modes.
Midpoint
Midpoint of the segment of the element

closest to the pointer. (For an elliptical
arc, the tentative point snaps to the
point on the arc at half the sweep
angle, as opposed to the point at
half the arc distance.)
Center
Center of elements (such as circles,

arcs, text, and so on) with centers.
Centroid of other elements, including
shapes, line strings, and B-splines.

Drafting Aids

Origin
Origin of a cell or text, centroid of

a B-spline, the first data point in a
dimension element, or the first vertex of
a line, multi-line, line string, or shape.
Bisector
Midpoint of an entire line string,

multi-line, or complex chain, rather
than to the midpoint of the closest
segment. It also snaps to the midpoint
of a line or arc. (For an elliptical arc, the
tentative point snaps to the point on the
arc at half the arc distance, as opposed
to the point at half the sweep angle.)
Intersection
Intersection of two elements. (Two

tentative points are required, although
more can be used.) The first tentative
point snaps to one element, and that
element is highlighted. The second
tentative point snaps to another
element, and the two segments used
to find the intersection of the two
elements are displayed in dashed
lines. (If the two elements do not
actually intersect, but projections of the
elements would intersect, the segments
include projections of the elements to
the intersection.) You can continue
snapping until the desired intersection
is found; the last two tentative points
define where the intersection snap lies.

Drafting Aids

Tangent
An existing element — the edge of the

element being placed is constrained
to be tangent to an existing element.
The tentative point dynamically slides
along the element to maintain the
tangency as you move the pointer to
finish placing the element.
Tangent From
An existing element — the edge of the

element you are placing is constrained
to be tangent to an existing element.
The tentative point does not move
dynamically as you move the pointer,
but is locked in place.
Perpendicular
An existing element — the line you

are placing is constrained to be
perpendicular to the element — the
tentative point slides dynamically
along the element in order to maintain
the perpendicularity as you move the
pointer to finish placing the element.
Perpendicular
From
An existing element — the line you
are placing is constrained to be
perpendicular to the element at the
tentative point. The tentative point
does not move dynamically as you move
the pointer, but is locked in place.

Drafting Aids

Parallel
An existing element, but does not define

a point through which the line you
are placing will pass. Instead, when
you accept the tentative point, the line
you then place is parallel to the line to
which the tentative point was snapped.
Through Point
Element keypoints and defines a

point through which the element
you are placing (or an extrapolation
of it) must pass.
Point On
To nearest element, as follows: When

entering second or later data point,
constrains the next data point to
lie on it (if it is a closed element)
or anywhere on the line on which it
lies (if it is a linear element). When
entering first data point, constrains
the element being placed to extend to
that element (or the line on which it
lies) from the second data point.
1
Or override.
Locate Tolerance
How close the pointer must be to an element to snap a tentative
point to it depends upon the Locate Tolerance, a user preference
that is adjustable in the Operation category of the Preferences
dialog box (Workspace menu > Preferences).

Drafting Aids
Snapping to cells
A cell is a small drawing — usually of a frequently-used or complex
symbol, notation, or detail — created in MicroStation. (See Using
Cells on page 4-1.) To snap to the origin of a cell, set the Snap
Mode to Origin. When the Snap Mode is not set to origin, tentative
points snap to component elements within the cell. For example,
when the Snap Mode is Keypoint and you press the Tentative button
while the pointer is near a line in a cell, the tentative point will
snap to a keypoint on the line, not the origin of the cell.
Element keypoints
Keypoints are regularly-spaced points in an element to which a
tentative point will snap when the Snap Mode (or override) is
set to Keypoint. The number of keypoints on each segment of a
linear element (line, line string, or shape) is one greater than the
Snap Lock Divisor setting. If Snap Lock Divisor is 2 (as in all
seed files supplied with MicroStation), keypoints are as shown in
the figure. The midpoint of a linear element is a keypoint only
if the Snap Lock Divisor is an even number.
For text, the keypoint is determined by the justification

attribute. That attribute and others specific to text elements
are described in Text Labels.
Element
keypoints (with
Snap Lock
Divisor set to
2 and the text
element left
top justified).
Clockwise from
the upper left:
Arc, arc, line,
line string, text,
ellipse, shape,
and point curve.

Drafting Aids
To enter a tentative point to preview a data point

1. Position the pointer on the location at which you plan
to enter a data point.
2. Press the Tentative button. (To find the location of the Tentative
button on your system’s graphic input device, see “Using the
Mouse or Digitizing Tablet” in the Setup Guide.)
The tentative point coordinates are shown in the status bar.
Large crosshairs are displayed. The intersection of the lines
in the crosshairs marks the location of the tentative point. If
you snap to an element, the element is highlighted.
To accept a tentative point’s location and

enter a data point there
1. Position the pointer in any view but not on an element.
2. Press the Data button.
To enable snapping
2. Turn on Snap Lock.
To change the number of element keypoints

on each element segment
2. Set Snap Lock Divisor to a value one less than the
desired number of keypoints.
For example, to create element keypoints on the endpoints
and the first, second, and third quarter points of element
segments, set Snap Lock Divisor to 4.

Drafting Aids
To snap a tentative point to an element

at a keypoint
1. Enable snapping to keypoints. See To enable snapping on page
2-11 and To set the Snap Mode on page 2-4.
2. Position the pointer on or near the desired keypoint.
3. Press the Tentative button. (To find the location of the Tentative
button on your system’s graphic input device, see “Using the
Mouse or Digitizing Tablet” in the Setup Guide.)
If the tentative point successfully snaps to the element,
the element is highlighted.
To snap a tentative point to an element at a

point other than a keypoint
1. Enable snapping to points on elements other than
keypoints. See To enable snapping on page 2-11 and To
set the Snap Mode on page 2-4.
2. Position the pointer on or near the desired point.
3. Press the Tentative button.
If the tentative point successfully snaps to the element,
the element is highlighted.
To snap a tentative point to an element when more

than one element lies at the desired snap point
1. Enable snapping. See To enable snapping on page 2-11.
2. Position the pointer on or near the desired point.
Of the elements at the desired snap point, a tentative point
will snap to the element that was placed in the design
earliest. That element is highlighted.
4. (Optional) — If the desired element was not snapped to
(highlighted), press the Tentative button again.
Of the remaining elements at the desired snap point (the
ones to which a tentative point has not snapped), a tentative

Drafting Aids
AccuDraw
point snaps to the element that was placed in the design

earliest. That element is highlighted.
5. (Optional) — Repeat step 4 until the desired element is highlighted.
To enter a tentative point for reference

1. Position the pointer on the desired reference point.
Alternative method — To enter a tentative

point for reference
1. Snap a tentative point to an existing element on or near
the desired reference point. See Snapping tentative
points to elements on page 2-2.
AccuDraw
AccuDraw is a drafting aid that evaluates such parameters as your
current pointer location, the previously entered data point, the last
coordinate directive, the current tool’s needs, and any directive
you have entered via either keyboard shortcuts or AccuDraw
options. AccuDraw then generates the appropriate precision
coordinates and applies them to the active tool.
A simple example of using AccuDraw

To help you understand what AccuDraw does, following is a description
of a simple design session using AccuDraw and the Place SmartLine tool
(see page 6-80) . The task presented is the creation of a simple bracket.

Drafting Aids
The design
subject is
a simple
bracket
with the
important
dimensions
and features
noted.
With AccuDraw activated (Start AccuDraw tool in the Primary Tools

tool box), select the Place SmartLine tool in the Linear Elements tool
box. When you enter your first data point for the lower left corner of
the bracket, AccuDraw displays a square or circular shaped “compass.”
The
AccuDraw
compass
appears
whenever
AccuDraw is
active and a
data point is
placed.
Next, you need to draw the left edge of the bracket. As you move the
dynamic line around the view window nothing interesting happens
until you get close one of the axes of the AccuDraw compass, in this
case the Y axis. When AccuDraw senses the axis, the line snaps or
indexes to it. While the axis is highlighted you can key in a number for
the vertical distance, in this case, 2 inches. Don’t worry about telling
AccuDraw the direction, it has already figured that out and placed the
input focus (where the key-in data will appear) in the correct field, in
this case the Y field. Entering a data point results in what you’d expect,
a line segment oriented along the vertical axis exactly two inches long.
The start of
the bracket’s
left edge with
its 2 inch
measurement
courtesy of
AccuDraw.

Drafting Aids
At this point the AccuDraw compass moves to the end point of the
line you just placed. Moving the dynamic line segment around, it
acts as before. This time you need to place the line with a fixed
length of 1.25 inches in the horizontal direction. To accomplish
this you move the dynamic line so that it snaps onto the positive
horizontal axis, key in 1.25, and enter a data point.
The bracket’s
top edge
is taking
shape as the
indexed line
is placed
along the
horizontal
axis.
The next part of the bracket involves going off at a 30 degree angle
for a given distance. Pressing the Space bar changes the AccuDraw
compass to its polar mode (indicated by a circular compass). Entering
30 degrees in the Angle field and 1.75 inches in the Distance field locks
the line in the right direction. A data point confirms the new location.
The notch
appears
next with
the Polar
compass
oriented
along the
new line.
Note how the compass orients along the 30 degree line. This
illustrates AccuDraw’s context sensitivity. AccuDraw provides
a method for associating coordinate information with respect to
existing elements. To place the half inch line at a right angle to
the 30 degree line only requires indexing to the appropriate axis
and a key-in of 0.5. A data point does the rest.

Drafting Aids
The notch
is nearing
completion.
The bracket’s notch is now complete. All that remains is the completion
of the bracket’s right edge. Currently, however, the compass is still
rotated to the 60 degree angle of the notch and not the horizontal
direction you need. To override the context nature of AccuDraw
you press T to orient the compass to the top plane (the default).
Pressing the Space bar brings up the rectangular compass. Indexing,
again, to the X axis and keying in 2 inches followed by a data point
locks the final known dimension of the bracket.
A quick
press of the
áTñ key and
AccuDraw
orients itself
to the screen’s
x and y axes.
To “close out” the bracket’s bottom edge, you use the smart axis
locking feature of AccuDraw. Moving the pointer down the Y axis you
press áReturnñ for the smart lock feature. Recognizing that you are
indexed along Y axis, AccuDraw locks the Y direction but allows you
to move up and down this axis. A tentative point on the beginning
point of the bracket (the Place SmartLine tool allows you to snap
to an element under construction) followed by a data point locates
the lower right corner of the bracket. A final tentative point and
data point on the origin of the bracket completes the job.

Drafting Aids
Learning AccuDraw
A tentative
point on the
origin of
the bracket
results in the
dashed index
line.
Learning AccuDraw
The preceding was a very simple example of AccuDraw in action.
There is much more to this drafting aid. AccuDraw has been
designed with ease of use and a certain intuitive feel to it. As with
any drafting aid, you need to try it out first. As you get the hang
of it, the various options begin to make sense.
In the following sections, the user interface features of

AccuDraw are presented followed by the settings and directives
that control its operations.
Activating AccuDraw
By default, when MicroStation is started, AccuDraw is

not active. Once AccuDraw is activated, all drawing tools
utilize it for dynamic data input.
To activate AccuDraw
1. In the Primary Tools tool box, select the Start AccuDraw tool.
The AccuDraw window opens.

Drafting Aids
AccuDraw’s compass
Normally, the AccuDraw compass does not appear until you enter
the first data point after selecting a tool. AccuDraw’s behavior
changes slightly with tools that utilize dynamics before the first data
point. The Place Text and Place Active Cell tools are examples of
such tools. Instead of “waiting” for the first data point to display
the compass, AccuDraw activates the compass at the last data point
location. In this way, you can place the element with respect to this
location by using any of AccuDraw’s relative directives.
AccuDraw also affects operations like placing text or cells in another

way. When you place a string of text with AccuDraw active, its initial
orientation will be along the current AccuDraw drawing plane. In
other words, when you have a Front-oriented drawing plane (see
AccuDraw’s drawing plane on page 2-21), the text will be oriented
along the front axis regardless of the view orientation.
AccuDraw will not activate when it would conflict with other tools
— for instance, during fence placement and element selection
operations, dimensioning, and so on.
Although most users will activate and use AccuDraw during the entire
design session, there may be times when its actions might interfere
with the current operation. For this reason, AccuDraw can be turned
off. MicroStation ’s tools return to their non-AccuDraw operation.
To deactivate AccuDraw
1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press áQñ.
Close the AccuDraw window.
The most recognizable feature of AccuDraw is its compass. Only
visible when AccuDraw is active and has control of MicroStation’s
coordinate input, the compass acts as both a status indicator
and a focus for input from the user.

Drafting Aids
AccuDraw
compass.
Left:
Rectangular
coordinate
system.
Right: Polar
coordinate
system.
Compass animation when you rotate the drawing plane is

approximately the same speed regardless of the speed of your machine.
The origin point

At the center of the compass is the origin point. The origin is the
focal point of all AccuDraw operations. As various AccuDraw options
are selected their functions operate from the origin point.
This last point is important. All AccuDraw directives (distance

key-ins, keyboard shortcuts, etc.) operate in conjunction with the
compass. In most cases, the compass is located at the last entered data
point. In addition, there are AccuDraw directives that allow you to
move the compass to entirely different locations without actually
generating a new data point, not unlike a tentative point.
The drawing plane indicator
Surrounding the origin point is the drawing plane indicator. Its primary
purpose is to show the current orientation of AccuDraw’s drawing
plane (see page 2-21) and the current coordinate system in effect. When
the plane appears as a dashed rectangle, the rectangular coordinate
system (X,Y) is in effect. When the plane appears as a dashed circle
then the polar coordinate system (Distance, Angle) is active.
When working in a 2D design file the drawing plane portion

of the compass functions simply as an indicator of the current
coordinate system. However, in 3D, the drawing plane becomes
a much more valuable tool. Because the AccuDraw drawing
plane can be oriented along any plane in 3D space, AccuDraw’s

Drafting Aids
drawing plane indicator determines where your data points will

appear with respect to the rest of the drawing.
You can explicitly locate the origin to the current pointer location or
tentative point using a keyboard shortcut (the áOñ key).
The X/Y axes

The final part of the AccuDraw compass are the two axes.
Oriented at right angles to one another, these axes represent
the drawing plane x and y axes.
To differentiate between the two axes each is color coded. By

default, the positive or +X axis is displayed in red while the
positive or +Y axis is green in color. If these colors don’t suit
you or are hard to discern, you can change the colors of these
axes via the AccuDraw Settings dialog box.
To change the color of the AccuDraw X or Y

axis graphic indicator mark
1. With AccuDraw active, open the AccuDraw Settings dialog box
by pressing G followed by S (Get Settings) .
2. In the AccuDraw Settings dialog box’s Display section,
click the X Axis or Y Axis button. (The button color
indicates the current setting.)
The Modify Axis Color dialog box opens. Its controls are
identical to those in the Modify Color dialog box (see To
individually modify a color in the Building Custom Projects
chapter of the Administrator’s Guide).
3. Select the desired color.
As you will learn later, the X/Y axes and the drawing plane indicators
are also used to indicate the drawing plane’s orientation in 3D.
Under 2D the compass only shows the rotation of the drawing plane
around the view axis similar to the Active Angle.

Drafting Aids
AccuDraw’s drawing plane
AccuDraw’s drawing plane

The drawing plane is central to AccuDraw. As you work, AccuDraw
orients this drawing plane based on a number of factors including cues
from the active tool, the last placed coordinate, and key AccuDraw
settings. This is known as context sensitive operation.
For instance, when you use the Place SmartLine tool (see page 6-80) ,
the orientation of the AccuDraw compass changes as you enter data
points. Because Place SmartLine was designed to take advantage of the
context-sensitive nature of AccuDraw, the tool cues AccuDraw to rotate
the axis of the plane to the angle between the last two data points.
Place
SmartLine
controls the
orientation of
the compass.
You can override this feature via the AccuDraw Settings dialog
box (Operation section: Context Sensitivity check box off) in
which case, the compass maintains the traditional view axes
orientation (+X to the right, +Y straight up).
Drawing plane coordinate systems
Drawing plane coordinate systems

AccuDraw’s drawing plane supports two different coordinate
systems. This echoes MicroStation’s normal support for
rectangular and polar coordinate values:

Drafting Aids
The AccuDraw window
• Rectangular, for specifying distances along the drawing

plane axes. It appears as a square indicator.
• Polar, for specifying distances and angles relative to the
origin. It appears as a circular indicator.
To switch between Rectangular and Polar

coordinate systems
1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press áspace barñ.
Alternative method — To switch between

Rectangular and Polar coordinate systems
1. From the Settings menu, choose AccuDraw.
With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press áGñ, áSñ.
The AccuDraw Settings dialog box opens.
2. From the Type option menu, choose Polar or Rectangular.
The AccuDraw window
AccuDraw has its own window called the AccuDraw window. This
small window contains the data entry fields and axis lock buttons
for the currently active coordinate system.

Drafting Aids
AccuDraw’s Settings dialog box
AccuDraw’s window and the input focus

When AccuDraw is active it becomes part of the input focus order
controlled by the áEscñ key. The focus order toggles between
the AccuDraw window and the Tool Settings window unless
the Key-in window is open. In this case, the input focus cycles
from the AccuDraw window through the Tool Settings window
to the Key-in window. Pressing áShift-Escñ reverses the cycle,
moving the focus from the Key-in window through the Tool
Settings window to the AccuDraw window.
This is important to remember as no AccuDraw keyboard shortcuts

work unless focus is in the AccuDraw window. Fortunately, after every
data point or tentative point, the focus is forced to the AccuDraw
window where it remains until you press the áEscñ key.
The AccuDraw window initially comes up floating just like any other
window. However, it can be docked to either the top or bottom
edge of the MicroStation application window.
AccuDraw
window docked
along the
bottom edge of
the application
window.
Docking the AccuDraw window has the advantage of minimizing
its intrusion into the working area of your drawing. As with the
floating window version, the fields found in the docked version
change depending on whether you are in polar or rectangular mode
and whether you are in a 2D or 3D design file.
AccuDraw’s Settings dialog box

Many aspects of AccuDraw’s behavior are specified using the controls
in the AccuDraw Settings dialog box. A few have already been
mentioned (context sensitivity, axis display colors).

Drafting Aids
Working with AccuDraw
To open the AccuDraw Settings dialog box

1. From the Settings menu, choose AccuDraw.
or
With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press áGñ, áSñ.
For information about other AccuDraw settings not covered

elsewhere in this chapter, see “AccuDraw” in the Settings Menu
chapter of the on-line Reference Guide.
Working with AccuDraw

AccuDraw is controlled from a variety of sources. You can influence
it through the use of one- and two-key sequences called keyboard
shortcuts. Drawing tools, themselves, can influence AccuDraw’s
operation. Finally, AccuDraw itself maintains a number of user
selectable options via the AccuDraw Settings dialog box.
AccuDraw supports a large number of options. However, all of these
options can be placed into one of three major AccuDraw functions:
• Previewing and constraining data points

Drafting Aids
General Procedure for Using AccuDraw
• Locating the AccuDraw compass

• Orienting AccuDraw’s drawing plane
The following discussion is organized along these three basic

operations. In most instances, you will use a combination of all three
types of AccuDraw operations to accomplish your design goal.
AccuDraw may be employed in a variety of different situations

—with standard drawing and manipulation tools, or using more
advanced approaches, such as with the Place SmartLine tool (see
page 6-80) and the Modify Element tool (see page 3-89) . In either
case, AccuDraw employs the same general procedure:
General Procedure for Using AccuDraw

1 . (Optional) Locate the drawing plane origin. See The
origin point on page 2-19.
2 . Select the desired tool.
3 . Enter a data point (or tentative point) to activate dynamics.
4 . Relocate the drawing plane origin. See The origin

point on page 2-19.
5 . Rotate the drawing plane axes. See AccuDraw’s drawing

plane orientation on page 2-47.
6 . Set the type of drawing plane coordinate system. See Drawing

plane coordinate systems on page 2-21.
7 . Preview and constrain the next data point. See Previewing

and constraining data points on page 2-26.
8 . Enter the data point.
Most users will utilize a mix of AccuDraw options throughout the

design process. The key to working with AccuDraw is understanding
how it interacts with the active tool and the current data point.
Many drawing tools are optimized for use with AccuDraw. See

Drafting Aids
Previewing and constraining data points
AccuDraw’s Effect on Various Tools on page 2-51.
AccuDraw is particularly useful when employed in 3D.
Previewing and constraining data points

AccuDraw lets you preview and constrain pending data point locations.
In response to your input in the AccuDraw window, dynamic update
in view windows lets you visualize the results.
You have the flexibility, though, to unconstrain a pending data point at

any time. It is only when you actually enter a data point that you are
committed to the values in the AccuDraw window and their results.
AccuDraw and the Popup Calculator

With the popup calculator, you can perform mathematical
operations on the values displayed in some MicroStation text
fields, and the values adjust accordingly.
This feature is documented here as it works with AccuDraw,

its use is extendable to other controls. Active Scale and Active
Angle fields currently support it.
The popup calculator is supported as follows:
Dialog Box Fields
AccuDraw window X
Y
Z
(various) Active Angle
(various) Active Scale
To use the popup calculator

1. With the input focus in a field that supports popup

Drafting Aids
calculation, type any of the following:

+, -, *, /, =
2. Type a value or expression to complete the calculation.
Press áReturnñ, enter a data point, or click outside the
popup calculator to accept the calculated value. Press
áEscñ if you want to reject the value.
Generating
a calculated
value (by
typing “2+1”).
Performing simple operations
The popup calculator allows you to perform calculations on measured

values (snap to an element, then multiply the distance, for example), or
to simply type in the entire equation, e.g. “5.23 + 1.34.”
Not only does the popup calculator eliminate the need to use
a physical calculator, you may notice that with the “+” and “-”
operators, you do not have to reposition AccuDraw’s origin to
move relative to a snapped or keyed-in offset.
The calculator is designed to be very efficient, to work seamlessly

with AccuDraw, and to be entirely “keyboard-driven,” allowing the
user to keep the mouse in the view window rather than requiring
you to click in the dialog box. Also, the calculator works in a
“per-keystroke” manner — the result of the calculation is expressed
both numerically and graphically with every keystroke typed.
The popup calculator is “format aware,” as it accepts expressions

in feet and inches or degrees-minutes-seconds, if appropriate.
Obviously you cannot multiply feet times feet, so the calculator
properly adjusts to interpret this type of string.
When performing operations on a measured value, the popup calculator

always operates on the underlying precise value, rather than the string

Drafting Aids
which is truncated to whatever coordinate readout you have. This

dynamic value displays at the bottom of the popup calculator.
Creating a
relative offset
(by snapping
then typing
“+2” when the X
field has input
focus).
You may notice that sometimes pressing +, -, or / does not bring up the
calculator, but is interpreted by AccuDraw as either an explicit positive
or negative, or as a fraction. The rule with the “+” and “-” operators
is: If the value is locked or a tentative point is active, the calculator
displays. If you type something like “3 3/8,” the “/” is interpreted
as part of a fraction because of the space. If you simply type “3/8,”
AccuDraw uses the calculator but the result will be the same as 3
divided by 8, or the fraction 3/8. To enter “1 foot and 3/8 inches” you
must type a space (“1: 3/8”) so the value is not misinterpreted as
“1 foot 3 inches, divided by 8.” “1+:3/8” would also work.
When entering planar data points (not polar coordinates), there
are some special procedures to prevent unexpected results. Since
AccuDraw interprets values as negative when the cursor is pointed
in the negative direction, the calculator, when appropriate, prepends
the entered expression with a minus sign. This results in the
expression “5+2” always being interpreted properly as the distance
7, even though “5+2” is actually -3. This prevents the user from
having to think about positive and negative.
Advanced uses of the popup calculator

You can use the popup calculator to enter complex expressions,
including multiple operators, parentheses, and C expressions
(“sin(30)”, “tcb->actangle”). Parentheses do not have to be

Drafting Aids
matched to have a valid string.
If you type =, the popup calculator replaces the existing AccuDraw

value rather than operating upon it. In this case the result
dynamically updates in the original field, rather than having a
field of its own on the popup. This is rarely needed for simple
operations, but can be useful for complex expressions.
You can use the

compact popup
to replace
values with
expressions that
do not contain a
simple operator.
You can also enter and save variables. Although you cannot
save them to a file, and there is no graphical user interface, this
functionality can still be exceptionally useful. By default, the only
saved variable is “pi.” The variable can then be entered within any
expression using the calculator. To use the variable directly as
a distance or angle, type “=<variable name>.”
Entering
a complex
expression
including
parentheses and
a user-defined
variable.
To save variables
1. Type “<popcalc variable save <name> <value>.”
The value may be entered as a complex expression, if desired. The
value is optional; if none is supplied, it uses the last value used by
the calculator (thus allowing the use of measured values).

Drafting Aids
To show variables
1. Type “popcalc variable show name.”
The name is optional; if none is supplied, all variables
to a message print to a dialog box.
To delete variables
1. Type “popcalc variable delete name.”
Finally, there is a special variable, “$,” that represents the starting
value, whether measured or typed into AccuDraw’s field. For
instance, if you measure a distance with AccuDraw and then
want one over that distance, you can simply type “=1/$.” Or, for
example, to get 12 squared, type “12*$.”
How AccuDraw reacts to pointer movement
When active, AccuDraw reacts to pointer movement by

trying to anticipate your intent.
As you move the pointer, the fields in the AccuDraw window

automatically update to reflect the drawing plane coordinates
of the current pointer location (expressed as either relative
x, y, and z offsets, or as a distance and an angle) with respect
to the location of the AccuDraw compass.
Furthermore, the AccuDraw window’s input focus automatically

adjusts, based on the general direction of the pointer movement:
As you move the pointer in the same direction as either drawing
plane axis the focus moves to the field that you would use to
precisely locate the data point along that axis.

Drafting Aids
Tolerance shortcut
The More AccuDraw Settings dialog box has a setting for indexing
tolerance (instead of using Locate Tolerance (see page 2-9) from
the Workspace > Preferences dialog box—although by default they
are the same: 10 pixels). You can also set this with a key-in (and
therefore a shortcut or function key): ACCUDRAW SETTINGS
INDEXTOL [NUM], where [num] is the number of pixels ranging
from 1 to 100. This is useful when you want to do detailed work
without it getting pulled to the axes or last distance.
When the pointer is within the Tolerance of an axis of the displayed

AccuDraw compass the pointer snaps to that axis. At this point,
the dynamic element is considered indexed to that axis.
Index highlight
along a drawing
plane axis.
The effect of these behaviors is to make it as easy as possible for you to

apply constraints and specify precision when previewing a data point.
To enter rectangular coordinates using AccuDraw

1. Enter the first data point.
As you move the dynamic line, AccuDraw shifts its key-in
focus to the X or Y field depending on which axis the pointer
is closest to. (If the Polar compass is visible, press áspace
barñ to switch to Rectangular coordinates.)
Keying in
a precise
distance
along the
x-axis.
2. When the focus is on the X field, type the desired X value.

3. With the dynamic dashed line identifying the locked condition

Drafting Aids
from the X axis visible, move the pointer up the Y axis.

The distance required to cause this focus on the Y axis is
the same as the Locate Tolerance (see page 2-9) associated
with identifying an element and is selectable in the
Workspace > Preferences dialog box.
4. Type the Y value desired.
AccuDraw responds by setting the endpoint of the new
element and displays fixed, dashed lines extending from
the X and Y axes of the compass.
5. Enter a data point to accept the location.
Pressing áReturnñ overrides the locked axes and returns
the pointer to the free dynamic state.
When working with Polar coordinates, AccuDraw does not
automatically shift the focus from the Distance and Angle fields like
it does with the X and Y fields in Rectangular coordinates. Instead,
you must navigate between these two fields to enter precise values.
This is easily done using the Tab or down arrow keys.
However, when it comes to entering angular values AccuDraw does try

to help you out by not requiring a negative value when you want to
go off in the “opposite” direction from an axis. Simply by moving the
pointer to the opposite quadrant from the positive angle, AccuDraw
moves the dynamic element in the negative direction.
To enter a polar coordinate using AccuDraw

1. Enter the first data point.
If the Rectangular compass appears, press áspace barñ
to switch to Polar coordinates.
2. Type a distance value in the Distance field. If the input focus is on
the Angle field press the áTabñ or ádown arrowñ key first.
AccuDraw will lock the length of the dynamic element to this

Drafting Aids
value. You can rotate this dynamic element around.

3. Press the áTabñ or down arrow key.
The input focus will shift to the Angle field.
4. Type the desired angle.
or
Press the áAñ key to lock in the angle at the current pointer location.
5. Enter a data point to accept the coordinate entry.
Previous distance recall
Another example of how AccuDraw tries to help you is its previous

distance feature. As you place elements in your design file,
AccuDraw keeps track of the distance between your last two
data points. Known as the Previous Distance, AccuDraw uses
this distance as a hint for your next data point.
Think of previous distance as a radius length from the compass

origin. When you move the pointer within the Tolerance (see
Locate Tolerance on page 2-9) distance to this radius, AccuDraw
displays a small tangent line called the previous distance
indicator, and locks the pointer to this point.
Previous
distance
indicator.
As you keep the pointer within the Tolerance (see Tolerance shortcut
on page 2-31) distance of this previous distance, AccuDraw will keep
it locked. This, of course, only works with Polar coordinates. If you
are using Rectangular coordinates, the previous distance only works
when you are indexed to either drawing plane axis.
A data point will result in an offset distance from your

last data point precisely the same as the distance between
your previous two data points.

Drafting Aids
AccuDraw’s keyboard shortcuts
This “lock” on feature is not hard to override. Just continue dragging

the pointer until it is outside the Tolerance (see Tolerance shortcut
on page 2-31) and the previous distance lock disengages.
Recalling previous values

AccuDraw stores all entered values for its X, Y, Distance, and Angle
fields for recall as needed. When in the X, Y, or Distance fields,
pressing the áPgUpñ key recalls the last distance value entered
in any of these fields. Pressing áPgUpñ again recalls the next to
last entered value and so on. You should note that the X, Y, and
Distance fields share a common value buffer but that Angular data
is stored separately. This means you can enter a value in the X
field, for instance, change the input focus to Y, and by pressing
áPgUpñ, enter the same value as placed in the X field.
Settings manipulation
Several commands that were added previously operated as toggles

to manipulate a setting, such as turning context sensitivity on or
off. These commands now force the setting either on or off. So for
instance, for context sensitivity, key in: ACCUDRAW SETTINGS
CONTEXTSENS ON. If you enter it without trailing “on” or “off,”
it still behaves as a toggle. This is most useful for such things
as macros, although you may want them that way in a function
key/shortcut. This also applies to floating origin, auto point
placement, axis indexing and distance indexing. (Note: the on/off
option does not show up in the Key-in window.)

Although AccuDraw tries to anticipate your next move it cannot
always predict your intentions. AccuDraw therefore includes a wide
variety of single and double character command directives known
as the keyboard shortcuts. By pressing the appropriate key, you
direct AccuDraw to perform a specific operation. AccuDraw is the
default input focus in most cases, you can just type in the shortcut
without having to consider where the input focus is.

Drafting Aids
Popups confirm single letter shortcuts below the focused input

field. This function is not only useful to confirm the key-ins but is
also excellent for training purposes or demos to illustrate which
key is being pressed. It also serves to communicate that the
shortcut is received via AccuDraw’s input fields.
Two letter shortcuts appear attached to the focused input field,

and confirm the action through the temporary appearance of
the shortcut dialog box. The pop-down list adjacent to the
input field illustrates where the shortcut comes from, thereby
making it easy to “follow the action.”
The following is a list of the more common keyboard shortcuts:
Key Effect
á?ñ Opens the AccuDraw Shortcuts window.
áReturnñ Smart Lock

• In Rectangular coordinates, locks
X to 0 if the pointer is on the
drawing plane y-axis or Y to 0 if
the pointer is on the x-axis.
• In Polar coordinates, locks Angle
to 0 , 90 , -90 , or 180 if the
pointer is on a drawing plane
axis or otherwise locks Distance
to its last entered value.
áspace barñ Switches between Rectangular and
Polar coordinates.

Drafting Aids
Key Effect
áOñ Moves the drawing plane origin to the
current pointer position. This can also
be used to explicitly activate AccuDraw
before you enter a data point.
áXñ Toggles the lock status for the X value.
áYñ Toggles the lock status for the Y value.
áDñ Toggles the lock status for the

Distance value.
áAñ Toggles the lock status for the
Angle value.
For the complete list, see Complete List of AccuDraw
Keyboard Shortcuts on page 2-58.
AccuDraw defaults
There is a command to set the shortcuts back to the defaults, and

one to reread the shortcuts file. The latter is useful if you want to
change the file manually without exiting MicroStation. It could also
be useful if you would like to alter the shortcuts programmatically
(for example, with MDL or BASIC) with more control than was
previously possible. Key-ins: ACCUDRAW SHORTCUTS DEFAULT
and ACCUDRAW SHORTCUTS READFILE.
Create, edit and delete shortcuts
• Pressing Delete in any of the text fields in the AccuDraw

window allows you to edit the string. Of course you can still
use it to delete a selection set when appropriate.
• If shortcut.txt file cannot be written or read, you
get an error message.
• You can delete a shortcut by highlighting it in the shortcuts
dialog box and pressing Delete.
• When you create a new shortcut, it follows the highlighted one,
rather than always putting it at the end of the list.
• When you create a new shortcut or edit an existing one, a

Drafting Aids
message box appears informing you if the shortcut is a duplicate

or conflicts with an existing one (for instance, F and FS). You
can still create it if you want to (which is often convenient if
you want to edit the other one later), but if you click No, it
returns you to the Edit/New Shortcut dialog box.
General Procedure — To activate a

keyboard shortcut
1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, simply press the
keyboard key(s) that corresponds to the shortcut you wish to use.
If the first typed letter is, by itself, a valid shortcut,
the shortcut activates.
Otherwise, the AccuDraw Shortcuts window opens. The
window lists the available shortcuts. Typing the second
letter activates the shortcut.
To review a listing of the available

AccuDraw shortcuts
1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press the á?ñ key.
The AccuDraw Shortcuts window opens.
To activate a single-letter shortcut from the

AccuDraw Shortcuts window
1. Press the key that corresponds to the desired shortcut.
or
In the list box, select the desired shortcut and click the Run button.

Drafting Aids
To activate a two-letter shortcut from the

AccuDraw Shortcuts window
1. After pressing the first letter of the sequence, press the
desired key to identify the second letter.
or
In the list box, select the desired shortcut and click the Run button.
Smart Lock
One of the first keyboard shortcuts you’ll use is Smart Lock. Similar in
operation to striking a line along a T-square, Smart Lock is invoked by
pressing the áReturnñ key. Depending on where the pointer is located
at the time you select Smart Lock one of two things will occur:
• If the pointer is oriented closer to the X axis of the compass,

the pointer will lock to the X axis.
• If the pointer is oriented closer to the Y axis of the compass,
the pointer will lock to the Y axis.
You know the pointer is locked on an axis when the dynamic line
highlights. Pressing the áReturn ñ key again deactivates Smart Lock
and releases the dynamic line back to free motion.
To constrain the pending data point to a

drawing plane axis
1. Position the pointer near the desired axis. (When the pointer
is on an axis, a highlighted line is displayed from the drawing
plane origin to the pointer location.
Positioning the
pointer on a drawing
plane axis on x-axis
(above), on y-axis
(below).

Drafting Aids
2. Press the áReturnñ key.

Smart Lock is engaged. Its effect is to constrain the
pending data point to the axis.
Constraining
the pending
data point
along x-axis.

Drafting Aids
Constraining
the pending
data point
along y-axis.
You can now constrain the pending data point to a precise distance
along the axis using the following procedures or by simply
snapping a tentative point to an element or monument point and
accepting the tentative point as the data point location.
To disengage Smart Lock and unconstrain the pending data point,

press áReturnñ again. The áReturnñ key toggles Smart Lock.
Snapping to
constrain the
pending data
point to a
precise distance
along the x-axis.
Smart Lock will not lock when you are entering coordinate
values into the AccuDraw X or Y fields. Instead, AccuDraw
returns the dynamic element to free motion.
X and Y locks
You can force AccuDraw to lock the current distance along an
axis by activating the áXñ or áYñ keyboard shortcut. AccuDraw
responds by locking the dynamic line to the chosen axis at the
current pointer distance from the origin point of the compass.
The focus of complement axis AccuDraw data field becomes

Drafting Aids
the focus for your next keyboard entry.
AccuDraw automatically switches its coordinate system to

rectangular in response to the X or Y lock.
All X and Y values entered are relative to the plane of the
previous element segment.
To override this, AccuDraw provides an option in its settings
called Context Sensitivity. Turning this off forces AccuDraw to
stay oriented to the drawing’s XY axes.
Distance lock
The áDñ shortcut locks the distance from the compass origin
point to the current location of the pointer. The input focus
automatically shifts to the Angle field.
To interactively enter the distance of the

dynamic element
1. In the AccuDraw window’s Distance field (Polar coordinates),
type the distance, in working units (MU:SU:PU).
The pending data point is automatically constrained; this is
indicated by the check box next to the Angle field. Dynamic
update occurs in response to each keystroke.
Alternative method — To interactively enter

the distance of the dynamic element
1. Move the pointer away from the drawing plane origin until the
desired distance is displayed in the AccuDraw window’s Distance
field. As the pointer is moved, the displayed distance is rounded
off to the increment specified by the Distance setting (if the setting
is turned on) in the AccuDraw Settings dialog box (see page 2-23) ).
2. Press the áDñ key.

Drafting Aids
Angle lock
The áAñ shortcut sets the angle portion of the polar drawing plane.
AccuDraw sets the angle to the current position of the pointer.
To interactively lock the angle of a

dynamic element
1. In the AccuDraw window’s Angle field (Polar coordinates),
type the angle, in degrees.
The pending data point is automatically constrained; this is
indicated by the check box next to the Distance field. Dynamic
update occurs in response to each keystroke.
Alternative method — To interactively lock

the angle of a dynamic element
1. Move the pointer around the drawing plane origin until the desired
angle is displayed in the AccuDraw window’s Angle field. As
the pointer is moved, the displayed angle is rounded off to the
increment specified by the Angle setting (if the setting is turned
on) in the AccuDraw Settings dialog box on page 2-23).
2. Press the áAñ key.
The Angle value automatically switches to the “opposite”

angle if the pointer position dictates.
Angle value
automatically
switches to
the “opposite”
value.

Drafting Aids
Unit roundoffs and their effect on AccuDraw
Angle value
automatically
switches to
the “opposite”
value.

Although the X/Y and Angle fields can be set by typing in key
values, AccuDraw also supports a roundoff feature that can force
the new data point to a multiple of a set value. AccuDraw’s Unit
Roundoff can be set in the AccuDraw Settings dialog box.
Distance roundoff
When you enable the Distance field in Unit Roundoff, AccuDraw
acts as if there is an invisible grid in effect. However, the Distance
Roundoff is always calculated from the current compass location.
In addition, you can override this value by typing in a coordinate
in the AccuDraw window at any time.
To round off the distance values displayed in the

AccuDraw window as the pointer moves
1. In the AccuDraw Settings dialog box’s Distance field, key in the
desired increment, in working units (MU:SU:PU).

Drafting Aids
To cancel distance roundoff

1. In the AccuDraw Settings dialog box, turn off the check
box to the right of the Distance field.
Angle roundoff
The Angle Unit Roundoff is useful for locking elements along
specific axes. For instance, setting the Angle Roundoff to 30
degrees assures that all elements placed will occur along one of the
normal isometric drawing axes. As with the Distance field, you
can override this value by directly entering the angle you desire
in the Angle field of the AccuDraw window.
Drawing
in progress
showing
AccuDraw
window with
angle locked
to 30 .
To round off the values displayed in the AccuDraw

window’s Angle field as the pointer moves
1. In the AccuDraw Settings dialog box’s Angle field, key
in the desired increment, in degrees.
Keyed-in values and snapped tentative points override roundoff.
To cancel angle roundoff

1. In the AccuDraw Settings dialog box, turn off the check
box to the right of the Angle field.

Drafting Aids
Moving the AccuDraw compass
Moving the AccuDraw compass

By default, AccuDraw places its compass at the last data point
location. There are, however, times when you need to take over
control of the AccuDraw compass. Tentative point operations can
take better advantage of AccuDraw’s capabilities when you “unlock”
the compass and place it wherever needed. The following covers
how you do this and some interesting ways in which AccuDraw
can be used to accomplish otherwise difficult operations.
The floating origin option
Before you can move the compass you need to release the AccuDraw
compass origin. This is done with the “O” keyboard shortcut.
AccuDraw will then do one of two things:
• If the compass is currently not visible it will appear

at the last data point location.
• If the compass is visible it will relocate to the current
pointer location.
The only exception is if there is a tentative point active. See

AccuDraw and the tentative point on page 2-45.
In either case, this occurs regardless of the tool or operation currently

selected. This last point is important to recognize. AccuDraw is
considered a non-modal feature in that you don’t have to be in a
predetermined part of a procedure in order for it to operate.
The most common use for a relocated origin point for the compass
is to index the element under construction from an existing point.
For instance, if you want to locate the corner of a block a specified
distance from a given location the relocated origin point.
AccuDraw and the tentative point

Creating precision offsets is a fundamental function of the
design process. AccuDraw performs this important function
by utilizing tentative points.

Drafting Aids
AccuDraw and the tentative point
The key to using AccuDraw and the tentative point is the Set Origin
function (the áOñ keyboard shortcut). When there is a tentative
point present, pressing the áOñ key results in the relocation of
the compass to the tentative point location.
AccuDraw enters a dynamic tentative point mode where you can

manipulate the final data point location in a number of ways:
• Enter coordinate data using the AccuDraw window.

• Use a second tentative point and various locks (X/Y or
D/A) to interactively set the offset.
This latter technique is useful when you need to set an
offset from two elements.
To create an offset from two elements

1. With a tool active, enter a tentative point at the key
point of the first element.
2. Press the áOñ key.
The compass will appear at the tentative point location.
3. Tentative point on the keypoint of the second element.
4. Press the áXñ or áYñ key.
AccuDraw responds by locking the dynamic line to the appropriate
axis but at the offset from the first tentative point to the second one.
5. Enter another tentative point to “lock” the other axis of
the tentative compass location.
or
Enter a data point to set the second axis value.
AccuDraw relocates the initial compass to the new indirectly
derived location. From here you can continue the use
of the current drawing tool.
Tentative points and drawing plane orientation
If you snap to a linear element while AccuDraw is active,

switching to Polar coordinates (pressing the áspace barñ) aligns
the drawing plane with the linear element.

Drafting Aids
AccuDraw’s drawing plane orientation
Snapping to a
linear element
and switching
to Polar
coordinates.

AccuDraw orients the drawing plane in accordance with the Coordinate
System Rotation setting in the AccuDraw Settings dialog box:
Coordinate Definition
System
Rotation
Top (default) Orients compass to match top view
(in 2D same as View).
Front Orients compass to match front
view (3D only).
Side Orients compass to match side
view (3D only).
View Orients compass to current view axes.
Auxiliary Orients compass to last defined
auxiliary coordinate system (see
Rotate Auxiliary).
Context A temporary orientation affected by a
number of factors including the current
tool, the previous data points and
the “RQ” keyboard shortcut.

Drafting Aids
Rotating the drawing plane axes in 2D

Along with the standard drawing plane orientations, the rotation of the
drawing plane axes can be altered using keyboard shortcuts. In 2D,
you are limited to rotating AccuDraw’s drawing plane about the view
axis. This matches the same restriction placed on rotating views in 2D.
Dynamically rotating the drawing plane axes

The AccuDraw drawing plane axes can be dynamically
rotated at any time.
When the first letter of the rotate sequence (R) is pressed, the
AccuDraw Shortcuts window automatically opens and displays all the
valid “R” choices. Then typing the remaining portion of the sequence
(Q) effectively chooses the Rotate Quick entry in the shortcuts window.
The shortcuts window is then automatically dismissed.
Rotation-sensitive tools
Depending on the tool in use, dynamically rotating the drawing plane

axes yields slightly different results. For example, consider the scenario
of placing a block (rectangle) with the Place Block tool (see page 1-55) .
Once the drawing plane axes are rotated, the block’s main
axis is constrained to this axis.
Contrast this to the effect when using the Place Line tool (see page
1-36) : The drawing plane axes rotate, and while dynamic readout
is a function of the newly rotated system, the tool itself remains
available to dynamically place the line wherever desired.
The Rotate Quick keyboard shortcut

The Rotate Quick (áRñ, áQñ) shortcut allows you to change the
orientation of the drawing plane only for the current data point,
after which it is returned to the previous orientation.

Drafting Aids
To quickly rotate the drawing plane axes

1. With AccuDraw dynamics active, press áRñ, áQñ.
The drawing plane indicator spins freely about its origin, the
x-axis following the movement of the screen pointer.
2. Enter a data point to accept the specified rotation.
The use of the previously selected tool continues.
For example, suppose you are using the Place Line tool (see page
1-36) to start a construction and wish to align the drawing plane
axes with the new line. After establishing the drawing plane origin
(with the first data point of the line), pressing áRñ, áQñ allows the
drawing plane axes to be interactively rotated.
Dynamically
rotating the
drawing plane
axes.
Placing the line.
Keyboard shortcuts are available to rotate the drawing plane

coordinate system 90 about an individual axis (“RZ”) or to align
it with the design plane axes (“T”) or view axes (“V”).
When working in a 3D environment, AccuDraw’s axes rotation takes

Drafting Aids
Using shortcut snap modes with AccuDraw
on a very important role in the design process. This is discussed

in Using AccuDraw in 3D (see page 7-55) .
Using shortcut snap modes with AccuDraw

AccuDraw provides a few keyboard shortcuts to more
popular tentative point snaps:
• “N” — Nearest
• “C” — Center
• “I” — Intersect
These shortcuts work the same as selecting the snap from the
status bar with the exception of Nearest.
The AccuDraw-enhanced Nearest snap mode

With AccuDraw disabled, when you snap to an element with the
Nearest snap, MicroStation enters the tentative point at the point on
the element closest to the pointer. With AccuDraw active, this changes
a bit. When the pointer is constrained by either X, Y, Distance, or
Angle Lock, and an element is snapped using Nearest snap mode,
AccuDraw will attempt to produce a tentative point at the nearest
point on the element that also satisfies AccuDraw’s lock.
In many cases the effect is similar to that when using the Extend
Element to Intersection tool (see page 3-103) . In the case where there
is no point on the snapped element that satisfies AccuDraw’s lock,
the snapped point will simply appear at the point on the element
closest to the pointer. This point will then be projected onto the
hypothetical line or circle determined by AccuDraw’s lock.
Nearest snap
with Place
SmartLine tool
constrained by
an angle.

Drafting Aids
AccuDraw’s Effect on Various Tools
Setting the keypoint snap divisor

Although not technically a snap mode, there is one additional
shortcut associated with tentative point snaps: the snap divisor
setting. Invoking it with the “K” keyboard shortcut results in the
appearance of the Keypoint Snap Divisor dialog box.
AccuDraw’s Effect on Various Tools

Although much of AccuDraw’s operation is global in nature, it does
have sometime subtle effect on individual tools. As you learn to
use AccuDraw you will find that it can be used as a substitute
for many individual tool settings. The following discussion
provides some insights into this feature.
The Place SmartLine tool is specially designed to exploit AccuDraw’s
capabilities. See AccuDraw and the Place SmartLine Tool on page 2-54.
AccuDraw and the Place Circle tool

A simple tool like Place Circle can benefit from AccuDraw in a
number of ways. First, when you place a circle you can explicitly
set the diameter of the circle by turning on the Diameter tool
setting and entering a value. However, with AccuDraw active
this can be done with fewer keystrokes.
Once you’ve placed the circle’s origin point all you have to do is type
in the radius value. AccuDraw automatically locks the circle to
that value indicated by the locked dynamic circle. It really doesn’t
matter which drawing coordinate system is active.

Drafting Aids
AccuDraw and the Place Arc tool
Using
AccuDraw to
place a circle
by center.
To place a second circle of equal radius is also easy. Using

AccuDraw’s previous distance feature, the circle will temporarily
lock to the previous radius allowing you to enter the second
data point. This does require two data points for all remaining
circles, so if you are placing numerous fixed diameter circles you
may want to use the Diameter tool setting.
AccuDraw and the Place Arc tool

Almost no other tool has as many settings as does the Place Arc (see
page 1-75) tool. AccuDraw can be used to simplify this tool’s operation.
By using the polar coordinate plane you can easily specify radial
lengths and sweep angles just by typing them in via AccuDraw.
Using
AccuDraw to
place an arc
by center.
This is one case where AccuDraw’s context sensitive orientation

is good for incremental angle setting and View or other rotations

Drafting Aids
AccuDraw and the Place Ellipse tool
are good for setting an absolute sweep angle.
AccuDraw and the Place Ellipse tool

When you place an ellipse without AccuDraw you specify a center
point, the primary axis and radius, and a point through which
the ellipse will pass. You can do this by selecting the various
options in the Tool Settings window or use AccuDraw to set
these values in a more user-friendly manner.
When you enter that first center point, AccuDraw’s effect becomes
noticeable. The second data point still defines the major axis, but now
you can specify both the radius and angle using the AccuDraw window
simply by entering the radius and angle or dynamically positioning it.
Using
AccuDraw
to place an
ellipse by
center and
edge.
Now, because the AccuDraw compass orients itself along the axis of the
ellipse under construction, the secondary axis is automatically locked
so you can simply enter the value or position the pointer and data point.
AccuDraw and the Place Block tool

AccuDraw can be used with the Place Block tool to place a block
with specific dimensions and at a specific angle.
With the Rotated method you can specify the angle and X length of
the block using the polar drawing plane. Once the base of the block
has been defined, AccuDraw orients the compass along this base.

Drafting Aids
AccuDraw affects most tools
At this point, you can switch to rectangular mode (space bar) and
lock in the Y distance by simply entering its dimension.
Using
AccuDraw to
place a block.
AccuDraw affects most tools

The tools just described were selected to illustrate how AccuDraw
works with even the simplest tools to provide additional capabilities
or easier access to options over non-AccuDraw operation. AccuDraw
actually affects the operation of most MicroStation tools and even has
the potential to work with third-party application software.
AccuDraw and the Place SmartLine Tool

The Place SmartLine tool (see page 6-80) is used to automatically
place a complex chain or shape containing a dynamically specified
collection of segments and vertices. This tool is designed to be
used in conjunction with AccuDraw. The main benefits of using
AccuDraw with Place SmartLine are as follows:
• The drawing plane origin automatically moves to the
location of a newly defined vertex.
• The drawing plane automatically rotates to align with a newly

defined segment. This allows tangent and perpendicular
segments to be easily defined.

Drafting Aids
• When defining an arc segment, the drawing plane coordinate

system automatically switches to Polar.
To define an arc segment tangent to the

previous segment
1. With AccuDraw active and Place SmartLine selected, set
the tool setting Segment Type to Arcs.
The drawing plane coordinate system automatically
switches to Polar, and the arc’s center point and sweep
angle are dynamically displayed.
Switching
the Place
SmartLine
Segment Type
to Arcs.
2. Move the pointer toward the drawing plane axis that is

perpendicular (that is, at 90 ) to the previous segment.
When the pointer is close to the axis, the arc radius

Drafting Aids
position dynamically aligns with it.
Defining the
center point.
3. Enter a data point to define the center point for the arc.
4. Enter a data point to define the arc’s sweep angle and
complete the segment definition.
Defining the sweep

angle.
The arc’s sweep angle can be defined in either direction —

clockwise or counterclockwise.
To define a semi-circular arc segment

1. With AccuDraw active and Place SmartLine selected, set
the tool setting Segment Type to Arcs.
The drawing plane coordinate system automatically
switches to Polar, and the arc’s center point and sweep
angle are dynamically displayed.
2. Enter a data point to define the first arc endpoint.

Drafting Aids
Defining the first arc

endpoint.
3. Move the pointer to the drawing plane axis that is parallel

(that is, at 0 ) to the first endpoint.
Defining the center

point.
4. Enter a data point to define the center point for the arc.
5. Move the pointer such that it is again parallel to the first endpoint.
When the pointer aligns with the axis, a semi-circular
arc is dynamically displayed.
Aligning the
pointer with
the drawing
plane x-axis.

Drafting Aids
Complete List of AccuDraw Keyboard Shortcuts
6. Enter a data point to complete the segment definition.
You can also easily define semi-circular arc segments by quarters of the
AccuDraw drawing plane. Simply align the pointer to the desired axis.

The following table lists each keyboard shortcut and its effect.
Additional information about the effect of individual keyboard shortcuts
is presented in the general discussions of AccuDraw procedures.
Key Effect
á?ñ Opens the AccuDraw Shortcuts window.
á~ñ Bumps an item in the tool settings dialog box
(shortcut is ~, usually right under the áEscñ
key—there is no need to press the áShiftñ key). It
finds the first enabled item in the tool settings
dialog box that is a toggle button or an option
button, and either toggles it or bumps it to
the next valid value. For instance, if you are
drawing a smartline and the focus is in the
AccuDraw window, you can just press the á~ñ
key and it switches to arcs without moving the
focus from the AccuDraw window.
Key-in: ACCUDRAW BUMP TOOLSETTING.
áReturnñ Smart Lock
• In Rectangular coordinates, locks X to 0 if
the pointer is on the drawing plane y-axis
or Y to 0 if the pointer is on the x-axis.
• In Polar coordinates, locks Angle to 0 ,
90 , -90 , or 180 if the pointer is on
a drawing plane axis or otherwise locks
Distance to its last entered value.
áspace barñ Switches between Rectangular and Polar
coordinates.
áOñ Moves the drawing plane origin to the
current pointer position.

Drafting Aids
Key Effect
áXñ Toggles the lock status for the X value.
áYñ Toggles the lock status for the Y value.
áZñ Toggles the lock status for the Z value (see Using
AccuDraw in 3D (see page 7-55) ).
áDñ Toggles the lock status for the Distance value.
áAñ Toggles the lock status for the Angle value.
áLñ Locks the current index state. If an axis or

distance is not indexed, indexing is disabled. On
the other hand, if an axis or distance is indexed, it
is locked. The effect is temporary, lasting until a
data point is entered or the shortcut is run again.
This is useful if you need to index to one axis
but not the other, or simply to enter a data point
very close to an axis but not on the axis.
áNñ Activates Nearest snap mode.
áCñ Activates Center snap mode.
áIñ Activates Intersect snap mode.
áKñ Opens the Keypoint Snap Divisor dialog

box, which is used to set the Snap Divisor
for keypoint snapping.
áRñ, áQñ Used to quickly and temporarily rotate the
drawing plane. The procedure is described in The
Rotate Quick keyboard shortcut (see page 2-48) .
áRñ, áA ñ Used to permanently rotate the drawing plane.
Because it rotates the current ACS, this rotation
will still be active after the tool in use is exited.
If on, the tool setting Use Current Origin causes
the drawing plane origin to be used as the x-axis
origin, thereby eliminating the need to enter an
extra data point. Of course, in many cases it is
desirable to be able to define the x-axis origin at a
different location than the drawing plane origin.
áRñ, áXñ Rotates the drawing plane 90 about its x-axis (see
Orienting the drawing plane in 3D on page 7-56).
áRñ, áYñ Rotates the drawing plane 90 about its y-axis (see
Orienting the drawing plane in 3D on page 7-56).

Drafting Aids
Key Effect
áRñ, áZñ Rotates the drawing plane 90 about its z-axis.
áEñ Rotates between three main planes: top, front, and
side (3D only). This also works when your original
plane is an ACS or context rotation, so you do not
have to use RX, RY to rotate to a 90 plane.
áFñ Rotates the drawing plane to align with the axes in
a standard Front view (see Orienting the drawing
plane in 3D on page 7-56). Pressing this key a
second time restores context-sensitive rotation.
áSñ Rotates the drawing plane to align with the axes in
a standard Right view (see Orienting the drawing
plane in 3D on page 7-56). Pressing this key a
second time restores context-sensitive rotation.
áTñ Rotates the drawing plane to align with the axes
in a standard Top view. Pressing this key a second
time restores context-sensitive rotation.
áVñ Rotates the drawing plane to align with the
view axes. Pressing this key a second time
restores context-sensitive rotation.
áWñ, áA ñ Saves the drawing plane alignment as an ACS.
áGñ, áAñ Retrieve a saved ACS.
áPñ Opens the Data Point Key-in dialog box for

entering a single data point. See Precision
Input Key-ins on page 2-65.
áMñ Opens the Data Point Key-in dialog box for
entering multiple data points. See Precision
Input Key-ins on page 2-65.
áGñ, áKñ Opens (or moves focus to) the Key-in window
(same as choosing Key-in from the Utilities menu).
áGñ, áSñ Opens (or moves focus to) the AccuDraw
Settings dialog box (same as choosing AccuDraw
from the Settings menu).
áGñ, áMñ Opens the More AccuDraw Settings dialog
box (same as clicking the More button in
the AccuDraw dialog box).

Drafting Aids
Using the Grid
Key Effect
áGñ, áTñ Moves focus to the tool settings window.
áQñ Deactivate AccuDraw.
Keyboard shortcuts are not case sensitive.
Using the Grid

The grid consists of evenly-spaced points in the design plane. It is a
visual measurement and alignment aid at certain magnifications.
The spacing between grid points and spacing between grid

references (highlighted grid points — every 12th point, for
example) are collectively known as grid units. Grid unit settings
are specific to a design file. The appropriateness of grid unit
settings for a design task is related to the size of the design,
working units, and the required precision.
When used in conjunction with Grid Lock, the grid can assist in
accurate placement of elements (see Using Grid Lock on page
2-64). However, the grid can be an impediment to efficiently
using AccuDraw (see page 2-13) .

Drafting Aids
Using the Grid
To set up grid units

2. In the Category list box, select Grid.
Controls for adjusting grid unit settings are displayed.
Design File
Settings
dialog
box (Grid
category).
Grid Master
means the
number of
grid points
per master
unit. Grid
Reference
means the
number of
grid points
between grid
references.
3. In the Grid Master field, enter the distance (in Working

units) between points in the grid.
4. In the Grid Reference field, enter the number of grid
points between grid references.
5. From the Grid Configuration option menu, choose one of these:
Configura- For grid points laid out as follows

tion
Orthogonal Along lines perpendicular to design
plane x-axis and y-axis

Drafting Aids
Using the Grid
Configura- For grid points laid out as follows

tion
Isometric Along lines at 30 from design plane
x-axis and y-axis
Offset Rows offset by half the distance between
horizontal grid points
6. In the Grid Aspect field, key in the ratio between the distance
between grid points along the design x-axis and the distance
between grid points along the y-axis.
In the Isometric configuration, this ratio is fixed.
To turn on or off the display of the grid in a view

or
2. From the View Number option menu, choose the

number of the desired view.
3. Turn Grid off or on.
4. Click Apply.

Drafting Aids
Using Grid Lock
To turn on or off the display of the grid in all views

or
2. Turn Grid off or on.
3. Click All.
Using Grid Lock

When Grid Lock is on, all data points and tentative points are
forced to fall precisely on a point in the grid.
To set Grid Lock

Locks menu in the status bar) choose Full.

Drafting Aids
Precision Input Key-ins
2. Turn Grid Lock on or off.
Alternative method — To set Grid Lock

1. In the Settings menu’s Locks sub-menu (or the pop-up Locks
menu in the status bar), turn on Grid.

Precision input is a method of entering data points with the
keyboard. Using this method, you can specify the exact location
of a data point by specifying any of the following:
• design plane coordinates, the distances along the x-axis and y-axis
from the global origin, which has the coordinates “0,0.”
• distance and angle relative to the view x-axis, from the most
recently entered tentative point or data point.
• distances, along the design plane axes, from the most recently
entered tentative point or data point.
• distances, along the view axes, from the most recently

entered tentative point or data point.
Using AccuDraw to enter data points is generally superior

to using precision input key-ins.
The Data Point Key-in dialog box is used to enter
precision input key-ins.
To open the Data Point Key-in dialog box to

enter a single precision input key-in
1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press áPñ.
After you enter the key-in, the dialog box automatically closes.

Drafting Aids
To open the Data Point Key-in dialog box to

enter multiple precision input key-ins
1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press áMñ.
After you enter a key-in, the dialog box remains open.
Although key-ins can be entered in the Key-in window, it is

easier to use the dialog box. The dialog box has an option menu
for choosing the type of key-in (for example, DX=). When you
enter the key-in, its type becomes the default.
Locks do not affect data points entered with precision input.

The following table summarizes precision input key-ins:
Key-in Alternate Distance Along
Key-in from
POINT XY= Design plane Design plane
ABSOLUTE origin axes
POINT DL= Last tentative Design plane

DELTA or data point axes
POINT DX= Last tentative View axes

VDELTA or data point
POINT DI= Last tentative Relative to

DISTANCE or data point view x-axis
For more information about precision input key-ins, see Precision

input key-ins in 3D (see page 7-61) .
To enter a data point at specific coordinates

in the design plane
1. In the Data Point Key-in dialog box, key in POINT

Drafting Aids
ABSOLUTE x,y or XY=x,y

X and Y are the x- and y-coordinates, respectively.
Absolute.
“GO” denotes
the Global
Origin; xd
and yd denote
the design file
x- and y-axes.
AccuDraw does not provide a means for entering a data

point in this manner.
To enter a data point at a distance from the

last tentative point or data point and angle
relative to the view x-axis
DISTANCE d,θ or DI=d,θ
d is the distance from the most recently entered tentative point or
data point and θ is the angle relative to the view x-axis.
Relative. “P”
denotes the
last data
or tentative
point, xv the
view x-axis,
and θ the
angle.
To enter a data point at distances along the

design plane axes from the last tentative
point or data point

Drafting Aids
Syntax notes
DELTA x,y or DL= x,y

X and Y are the distances along the design plane x-
and y-axes, respectively.
Distance.
“P” denotes
the last data
or tentative
point; xd and
yd the design
file x- and
y-axes.
To enter a data point at distances along the view

axes from the last tentative point or data point
VDELTA x,y or DX=x,y
X and Y are the distances along the view x-axis and
y-axis, respectively.
Distance.
“P” denotes
the last data
or tentative
point; xv and
yv the view x-
and y-axes.
Syntax notes
The syntax of precision input key-ins includes provisions
for the following:
• Specifying the view in which the data point is entered. The view
number optionally follows the last coordinate, distance, or angle.
For example, the key-in XY=,,1 enters a data point at
the global origin of the design plane in View 1. The

Drafting Aids
Measure tool box
equivalent key-in in 3D is XY=,,,1.

• Entering multiple data points. A number following a “|”
character at the end of a precision input key-in indicates how
many data points to enter. (The default is 1.)
For example, the key-in DL=15|3 enters three data points
at incremental distances of 15 master units from the last
tentative point or data point.
AccuDraw does not provide a means for entering multiple
data points in this manner.
• An omitted value in a precision input key-in is assumed to be 0.
For example, the key-in DL=,5:4 is equal to DL=0,5:4.
Measure tool box

The tools in the Measure tool box are used to perform
measuring operations.
To Select in the Measure tool box

Measure the distance(s) along
an element.
or
Measure the cumulative distance
Measure Distance (see
from a data point.
page 2-70)
or
Measure the perpendicular
distance between an element
and a data point.
or
Measure the minimum distance
between two elements.
Measure the radius of a circle,
circular arc, cone, or cylinder,
or the axes of an ellipse or
elliptical arc. Measure Radius (see page 2-73)
Measure the angle between

two lines.
Measure Angle Between Lines

(see page 2-74)

Drafting Aids
Measure Distance
To Select in the Measure tool box

Measure the length of an element.
Measure Length (see page 2-75)

Measure the area and perimeter
of a shape, ellipse, or complex
shape and to analyze mass
properties.
Measure Area (see page 2-76)
Measure the volume enclosed by

an element or a set of elements
and to analyze mass properties.
Measure Volume (see page 2-81)
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX MEASURE OFF | ON | TOGGLE
To ensure accurate measurements, snap to the reference elements

and points when using measuring tools. For information about
snapping, see Using Tentative Points on page 2-1.
Measure Distance
Used to measure distance.

Drafting Aids
Measure Distance
Distance To measure
Between Points Cumulative distance from an origin.
Along Element Along an element1
from an origin.
Perpendicular Perpendicular distance between an
element1 and a data point.
Minimum Minimum distance between two
Between elements.1
1
Line, line string, multi-line, arc, ellipse, shape, curve, B-spline curve,
complex chain, or complex shape.
To measure the cumulative distance

from an origin
1. Select the Measure Distance tool.
2. In the tool settings window, set Distance to Between Points.
3. Enter a data point to identify the origin (the point
from which to measure).
4. Enter a second data point.
The distance between that point and the origin is
displayed in the status bar.
5. Enter another data point(s). The cumulative distance
from the origin is displayed.
or
Reset to return to step 3.
To measure the distance along an element

2. In the tool settings window, set Distance to Along Element.
3. Identify the element at the origin (the point from which to measure).
4. Enter a data point to define a point along the element. The distance
from the origin along the element is displayed in the status bar.
If the element is closed, this data point defines the direction

Drafting Aids
Measure Distance
(clockwise or counterclockwise) in which measurements are made.

5. Enter a data point(s). The distance along the element from
the origin is displayed in the status bar.
or
To measure perpendicular distance from

an element
2. In the tool settings window, set Distance to Perpendicular.
3. Identify the element.
The perpendicular distance between the element and this point
is displayed in the status bar. A temporary “line” is displayed
as a visual aid but is not placed in the design.
5. Enter another data point(s) to define other perpendicular
measurements.
6. If the element is a line string, shape, curve, complex chain,
or complex shape, the distance is measured perpendicular
to the segment identified in step 2.
or
To measure the minimum distance

between elements
2. In the tool settings window, set Distance to Minimum Between.
3. Identify the first element.
5. Accept the elements.
The minimum distance between the elements is displayed in
the status bar. A temporary “line” is displayed as a visual

Drafting Aids
Measure Radius
aid but is not placed in the design.
Key-in:MEASURE DISTANCE ALONG | MINIMUM |

PERPENDICULAR | POINTS
To construct a minimum distance line between two elements,

use the Construct Minimum Distance Line tool (see page 1-45)
in the Linear Elements tool box.
Measure Radius
Used to measure:
• The radius of a circle or circular arc.

• The radius of a cone or cylinder.
• The primary and secondary axes of an ellipse or elliptical arc.
• The radius of a circular segment or axes of an elliptical
segment of a complex chain or complex shape.

Drafting Aids
To measure an element’s radius

1. Select the Measure Radius tool.
2. Identify the element or segment.
3. Accept the element.
The measurement is displayed in the status bar.
Key-in: MEASURE RADIUS
To dimension an element’s radius, use the Dimension Element tool.
Used to measure the angle between two lines or segments of

a line string, shape, or multi-line. If the identified lines do
not intersect, an intersection point is computed to serve as
the vertex of the measured angle.

Drafting Aids
Measure Length
To measure the angle between two lines

1. Select the Measure Angle Between Lines tool.
2. Identify the first line.
3. Identify the second line.
4. Accept the lines.
The angle measurement is displayed in the status bar.
Key-in: MEASURE ANGLE
Measure Length
Used to measure the length of an element(s) and to analyze mass

properties. For a closed element or a surface, the length of the
perimeter or wireframe geometry is measured.
Tool Setting Effect

Tolerance When measuring curves, the maximum
(%) percentage of the distance between the true
curve and the approximation used to measure.
A low Tolerance makes the measurement
more accurate but increases calculation time.
Mass If on, the Mass Properties window (see page
Properties 2-82) displays the mass property analysis.
Display If on, a graphic crosshair that represents
Centroid the center of mass for the measured
element(s) is displayed.

Drafting Aids
Measure Area
To measure the length of an element(s)

1. Select the element(s).
2. Select the Measure Length tool.
The length is displayed in the status bar. If Mass Properties is on,
the mass properties are displayed in the Mass Properties window.
Alternative method — To measure the

length of an element(s)
1. Select the Measure Length tool.
The length is displayed in the status bar. If Mass
Properties is on, the mass properties analysis is displayed
in the Mass Properties window.
Key-in: MEASURE LENGTH
Measure Area
Used to measure area and perimeter.

Drafting Aids
Measure Area
Tool Setting Effect

Method Sets the area that is measured.
Element—Area of one closed element1
(its Area attribute must be Solid).2
Fence—Area enclosed by the fence.
Intersection—Area bounded by the intersection

of two or more closed planar elements.
Union—Area bounded by the union of two

or more closed planar elements.
Difference—Area bounded by the difference

between two or more closed planar elements.
Flood—Area enclosed by elements that

either touch one another or whose endpoints
fall within the Maximum Gap.3
Points—Planar area with its vertices defined

by a series of data points.
Tolerance For curves, sets the maximum percentage
(%) of the distance between the true curve and
the approximation used to measure. A low
Tolerance makes the measurement more
accurate but increases calculation time.
Mass If on, the mass property analysis is displayed
Properties in the Mass Properties window (see page 2-82) .
Centroid the measured element’s center of
mass is displayed.
Locate (When Method is set to Flood) If on, the
Interior area enclosed by the bounding elements is
Shapes calculated, minus the area of any closed
elements inside the bounding area.
Max(imum) (When Method is set to Flood) Sets the
Gap largest distance allowed between consecutive
elements. If zero, the elements must
connect to bound an area.

Drafting Aids
Measure Area
1
Planar area of shape, ellipse, complex shape. For 3D surfaces or solids,
the total surface area in all dimensions.
2
An element’s Area attribute is changed with the Change Element to
Active Area tool in the Change Attributes tool box.
3
Somewhat akin to the “flood fill” tool in many paint programs. In
3D, restricted to coplanar elements.
To measure the area and perimeter of one element

1. Use the Element Selection tool (see page 3-3) to select the element.
2. Select the Measure Area tool.
3. In the tool settings window, set Method to Element.
The element’s area (A=) and perimeter (P=) in master
units are displayed in the status bar.
Alternative method — To measure the area

and perimeter of one element
2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Element.
The element’s area (A=) and perimeter (P=) in master units are
displayed in the status bar. If Mass Properties is on, the mass
properties analysis is displayed in the Mass Properties window.
To measure the area defined by a fence

1. Use the Place Fence (see page 3-24) tool to place a fence.
3. In the tool settings window, set Method to Fence.
4. Accept the fence contents.
The fence’s area (A=) and perimeter (P=) in master units are
displayed in the status bar. If Mass Properties is on, the mass

Drafting Aids
Measure Area
To measure the area of the intersection or

union of closed elements
2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Intersection or Union.
3. Identify one element.
4. Identify another element(s).
As you accept each successive element, the edges that do
not serve as the basis for the area to measure are hidden.
The resulting area is highlighted.
If the elements do not overlap, the following occurs,
depending on the Method:
Method If elements do not overlap, then

Intersection “Elements do not intersect” is displayed.
Union Each element is highlighted.
5. After you accept the last element, Reset to finish (or

select a different tool).
The area (A=) in square master units of the intersection or
union is displayed in the status bar. If the elements overlap, the
perimeter (P=) is also displayed. If Mass Properties is on, the mass
To measure the area of the difference

between elements
2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Difference.
If any elements are selected, they are de-selected.
3. Identify the element from which to subtract.
4. Identify the element(s) to subtract from the element
that was identified in step 3.
5. After you have identified all the elements to subtract from the

Drafting Aids
Measure Area
element identified in step 3, enter a data point to accept.

The edges that do not serve as the basis for the
measured area are hidden.
6. Reset to display the area (A=) and perimeter (P=) in master units
in the status bar. If Mass Properties is on, the mass properties
analysis is displayed in the Mass Properties window.
or
Return to step 4 to identify more elements to subtract.
To measure the area enclosed by elements

that touch or whose endpoints are within
the Maximum Gap
1. (Optional) — Select the elements.

3. In the tool settings window, set Method to Flood.
4. (Optional) — If you want to exclude, from the total measurement,
the area of any closed elements inside the selected area,
turn on Locate Interior Shapes.
5. Enter a data point in the area enclosed by the bounding elements.

6. Accept the elements.
The area (A=) and perimeter (P=) in master units are displayed
To measure an area defined by data points

2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Points.
3. Enter a data point to define each vertex of an imaginary
shape that encloses the area.
The imaginary shape is dynamically displayed.
4. When done, Reset.
The area (A=) and perimeter (P=) in master units are displayed

Drafting Aids
Measure Volume
Key-in: MEASURE AREA DIFFERENCE | ELEMENT | FENCE

| FLOOD | INTERSECTION | POINTS | UNION
Measure Volume
(3D only) Used to measure the volume enclosed by an element or
a set of elements and to analyze mass properties. The element(s)
must completely enclose a volume; if a volume is not enclosed,
a message appears in the status bar.
Tool Setting Effect

Tolerance For curves, sets the maximum percentage of
the distance between the true curve and the
approximation used to sure. A low Tolerance
makes the measurement more accurate
but increases calculation time.
Mass If on, the Mass Properties window (see page
Properties 2-82) displays the mass property analysis
for the measured volume.
Centroid the center of mass for the measured
element(s) is displayed.
Orient If on, the normal directions of all the selected
Normals surfaces are automatically changed to point
outward. (The Change Normal Direction tool
(see page 7-169) is used to manually change
the surface normal direction for a surface.)

Drafting Aids
Mass Properties window
To measure volume
1. (Optional) — Select the bounding element(s).
Since only solid cones and solids of projection or revolution
can completely enclose a volume by themselves, it is usually
necessary to select multiple elements. 1
2. Select the Measure Volume tool.

If an element(s) were selected (step 1), the volume is
displayed in the status bar. If Mass Properties is on, the
mass properties analysis is displayed in the Mass Properties
window. Otherwise, continue with step 3.
The volume is displayed in the status bar. If Mass
Properties is on, the mass properties analysis is displayed
in the Mass Properties window.
Key-in: MEASURE VOLUME

Used to control and display mass properties analysis of the length,
area, or volume measured with the Measure Length (see page 2-75)
tool, Measure Area (see page 2-76) tool, or Measure Volume (see page
2-81) tool. Opens when the Mass Properties tool setting is turned on.
Mass Properties
window,
displaying only
the part that is
always visible
— the basic
properties
1 To convert a surface or cone that is uncapped to a solid, use the Change to Active
Surface Settings tool in the Modify Surfaces tool box.

Drafting Aids
Mass Per <Length/Area/Volume>

Sets the mass per master unit as follows, depending on
which measuring tool is selected:
Tool selected Sets

Measure Mass Per Length — the linear
Length (see density per master unit.
page 2-75)
Measure Area Mass Per Area — the area density
(see page 2-76) per square master unit.
Measure Mass Per Volume — the volumetric
Volume (see (mass) density per cubic master unit.
page 2-81)
This setting affects both the Mass and Moments of Inertia.
File menu > Save…

Open the Save Measurement Values dialog box, which is used to
save the mass properties analysis in a text file.
Display menu > Moments and Products of Inertia

Toggles the display of the part of the Mass Properties window
that shows moments and products of inertia.
Item name Shows for measured element(s)

Moments of Mass moments of inertia — useful
Inertia for kinematic analysis, including
calculating the force required to rotate
a body about an axis.
Products of Mass products of inertia.
Inertia

Drafting Aids
Part of the
Mass Properties
window that
shows Moments
and Products
of Inertia
For closed, planar elements, the area moments of inertia are
obtained by setting Mass Per Area to 1.0. In this case, the area
moments are displayed as master units to the fourth power. The
area moments are required for analyzing the stress across a beam
cross section and other areas of engineering analysis.
The combination of the mass moments and polar moments of inertia

are commonly referred to as the inertia tensor.
The combination of moments and products of inertia about

a given coordinate system can be used to calculate these
values for any coordinate system.
Display menu > Principal Moments

Toggles display of the part of the Mass Properties window that
shows Principal Moments and Principal Directions.
Item name Shows for measured element(s)

Principal The maximum, minimum and an
Moments intermediate moment of inertia.
Principal The three mutually perpendicular
Directions axes extending from the centroid
along which the maximum, minimum
and an intermediate moment of
inertia occur. The products of inertia
about these axes is zero.
Part of the
Mass Properties
window that
shows Principal
Moments and
Directions

Drafting Aids
Basic properties
Display menu > Radii of Gyration

Toggles display of the part of the Mass Properties window that
shows the Radii of Gyration, which are an alternate way to express
the Moments of Inertia as distances in working units.
Part of the
Mass Properties
window that
shows Radii of
Gyration
Basic properties
This part of the Mass Properties window is always displayed. The
exact items displayed on the left side vary depending on the last
element measured and the tool used to measure it.
Length
Length, in working units, of a linear element. For surfaces,
the length of the wireframe geometry.
Perimeter
Perimeter, in working units, of a closed planar element.
Surface Area
Area of closed planar element or surface area of solids
in square working units.
Volume
Volume enclosed by a solid, in cubic working units.

Drafting Aids
Basic properties
Mass
Mass, computed by multiplying the Length, Surface Area, or Volume
by the Mass Per <Length/Area/Volume> (see ) setting.
Centroid
Coordinates, in working units, of the center of mass.2
2 Indicated graphically with a highlighted cross hair if the Display Centroid tool setting is on.

Manipulating and Modifying
Elements
Once elements are placed, you can move, copy, rotate, scale,
delete, and otherwise modify their geometry. In this chapter,
you will find procedures concerning element manipulation
and modification operations, including:
• Selecting Elements (see page 3-1)
• Manipulating and Modifying Selected Elements (see page 3-11)
• Specialized Manipulation and Modification Tools (see page 3-13)
• Using the Fence to Manipulate and Modify Elements (see page 3-16)
• Using the Tools in the Fence tool box (see page 3-23)
• Using the Tools in the Element Selection tool box (see page 3-2)
• Using the Tools in the Manipulate tool box (see page 3-34)
• Using the Tools in the Change Attributes tool box (see page 3-59)
• Using the Tools in the Match tool box (see page 3-68)
• Using the Tools in the Drop tool box (see page 3-77)
• Using the Tools in the Modify tool box (see page 3-87)
• Element Level Manipulations (see page 3-116)
Selecting Elements
When precision is not important, the easiest way to perform element
manipulations and modifications is to use the Element Selection tool
(see page 3-3) in the Element Selection tool box (in the Main tool
frame, Element Selection is the default “representative” of the Element
Selection tool box). Most basic manipulations and modifications can
be done with the Element Selection tool, including:

Manipulating and Modifying Elements
Element Selection tool box
• Moving and copying
• Scaling
• Moving vertices
• Modifying axes
When precision is important, the PowerSelector tool (see page
3-5) is useful for distinguishing the elements on which to
perform manipulations and modifications.
By default, selected elements are highlighted.1 If any elements are

selected, an arrowhead icon is displayed in the status bar. The number
to the right of the icon is the number of selected elements.
Element Selection tool box

The Element Selection tool box contains tools for selecting elements.
To Select in the Element

Selection tool box
Simply select and deselect
elements.
Element Selection (see page 3-3)

Select and deselect elements on
a per element basis, by defining
an area, or by drawing a line
that intersects them. PowerSelector (see page 3-5)
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX SELECTION OFF | ON | TOGGLE
1 When Highlight Selected Elements is turned off (in the Input Category of the Preferences
dialog box), selected elements are bracketed with squares called handles.

Element Selection
Element Selection
Used to select an element(s) for modification or manipulation.
While the Element Selection tool is selected, the pointer becomes an

arrowhead with an aperture encircling the tip. The aperture denotes
the design plane area in which MicroStation searches for elements.
The aperture size or Locate Tolerance is a user preference that is
adjustable in the Preferences dialog box (Operation category).
If the desired element is visible in the aperture but you

cannot select it, check the following:
• To select a shape, the pointer must be close to one of the

enclosing lines. To select a circle or an ellipse, the pointer
must be close to the circumference or center.
• If Level Lock is on, only elements on the Active
Level can be selected.
• If Grid Lock is on, elements can be selected only where they lie on
grid points. Some elements may not lie on any grid points.
To select a single element

2. Click the element you want to select.
The selected element is highlighted.2
To select one or more elements

2. Drag around the area containing the elements you want to select.
2 When Highlight Selected Elements is turned off (in the Input Category of the Preferences
dialog box), selected elements are bracketed with squares called handles.

Element Selection
As you drag, a dynamic rectangle outlines the area.

3. Release the Data button.
All elements that are completely inside the dynamic
rectangle are selected.
To select all elements including those not visible

1. From the Edit menu, choose Select All.
To select an additional element

2. Control-click the element to select.
To select one or more additional elements

2. Hold down the áCtrlñ key and drag around the area containing
the additional elements you want to select.
Be careful not to point at any element that is already
selected as you press the Data button.
To also select elements that overlap the dynamic rectangle, hold
down the áShiftñ key as well as the áCtrlñ key as you drag.
3. Release the Data button.
All elements that are completely inside (or overlapping) the
dynamic rectangle when you release the Data button are
added to the set of selected elements.
To deselect an element
2. Control-click the element to deselect.

PowerSelector
To deselect all elements

2. Click somewhere in the view where there is no element.
Key-in: CHOOSE ELEMENT
It is possible to select elements based on their attributes. See

Selecting Elements Based on Attributes on page 6-120.
When the active design file is large, choose Edit > Select Allwith
care. It may take some time to select many elements, and elements
are selected regardless of whether they are visible.
Control-click means to hold down the áCtrlñ key while

clicking the Data button.
If you select an element, all other elements are deselected.
Selecting Element Selection automatically disables AccuDraw if it was

not already disabled. To activate AccuDraw for use with Element
Selection, select the Start AccuDraw tool in the Primary Tools tool box.
PowerSelector
The PowerSelector tool is used to select and deselect multiple

elements in a variety of ways.
The Attribute List field in the PowerSelector settings window allows

unique methods for selecting elements. The active set is denoted
by a list of values that ends with a semi-colon. You can edit these
values before the semi-colon to build a subset. Only the elements that
match the existing values are kept, the others are removed from
the set. Pressing áReturnñ or áTabñ applies the subset. Switching
attributes allows you to continue the process of elimination.
If values are entered after the semi-colon, PowerSelector performs a

scan on the active file and all locatable reference files. A selection
scan supports add, subtract and inverse selection modes.

PowerSelector
If a semi-colon is not used: PowerSelector assumes a subset if

elements are selected, and a scan if nothing is selected.
PowerSelector applies a simple logic for handling complex elements

like cells, which can contain multiple attributes in a single instance.
The attributes Level, Color, Style, Weight, and Class will

locate simple elements within a complex element and act
upon the entire complex element.
The Types attribute supports exact matches only.
A cell comprised of two red lines and two blue circles would be found
by a scan for red elements but not by a scan for circles.
Tool Setting Effect

Method Sets the selection method:
Individual—selection is performed on a
per element basis, as with the regular
Element Selection tool (see page 3-3) . If
you enter a data point but miss an element,
the Block Method activates.
Block Inside—all elements inside the

defined block are selected.
Block Overlap—all elements inside and

overlapping the defined block are selected.
Shape Inside—all elements inside the

defined shape are selected.
Shape Overlap—all elements inside and

overlapping the defined shape are selected.
Line—elements are selected by drawing

a line that intersects them.

PowerSelector
Tool Setting Effect

Mode Sets the objective of using the tool:
Add—selects elements.
Subtract—deselects elements.
Invert—toggles the selection status of an

element (selects deselected elements and
deselects selected elements).
Clear/Select All—deselects all selected

elements, or selects all elements if no
elements are currently selected.
Attribute Clicking the Show More Information
arrow expands the tool settings window
to reveal the Attribute combo box and
the Attribute List field.
Level—ranges between 1 and 63.
Color—ranges between 0 and 254.
Style—Standard line styles range

between 0 and 7.
Weight—Line weight ranges between 0 and 31.
Type—Element type numbers as defined

in the on-line Reference Guide.
Class—Element class values as defined in

the on-line Reference Guide.
Attribute Depending on which Attribute option is
List chosen, sets the values related to the
elements to be selected. The Attribute List
field supports overrides for all elements
except for multi-lines and dimensions. For
example, if color 4 is overridden by color
5, only color 4 will be recognized.

PowerSelector
To select elements inside or overlapping

a rectangular area
1. Select the PowerSelector tool.
2. In the tool settings window, select the following icons:
Method - Block and Mode - Add (+)
If Block is set to Inside — the block has a solid border and
no dashed line running through it.
If Block is set to Overlap — the block has a dashed border

and a dashed line running through it.
3. (Optional) — To change between Inside and Overlap, select the

icon again using either the keyboard shortcut or the pointer.
4. Enter a data point to define the first corner of the block.

5. Move the pointer until the dynamically displayed block contains
or overlaps the elements you want to select.
6. Enter a second data point to close the block.
To select elements contained in or overlapping

a polygonal area

PowerSelector
Method - Shape and Mode - Add (+)

4. Enter a data point to define the first vertex of the polygonal shape.
5. Continue entering data points until the polygonal shape contains
or overlaps the elements you want to select.
6. Enter a final data point to close the polygonal shape.
To select elements that intersect a line

Method - Line and Mode - Add (+)
3. Enter a data point to begin the line.

4. Enter a data point to end the line.
All elements touched by the line are selected.
To select elements based on their attributes

2. In the tool settings window, select the following icon: Mode - Add (+)
3. In the tool settings window, click the Show More Information icon.
4. From the Attribute combo box, choose an element attribute
or property as the selection criterion.
5. In the Attribute List field, key in the values applicable
to elements you want to select.
All of the selected elements with the specified values are
selected. The Attributes List field updates to display all

PowerSelector
found values and ends with a semi-colon.
To select additional elements or deselect some

selected elements based on their attributes
2. In the tool settings window, select the following icons: Method
- Block and Mode - Add (+) or Subtract (-)
4. Enter a data point to define the first corner of the block.

5. Move the pointer until the dynamically displayed block contains or
overlaps the elements you want to select or deselect.
6. Enter a second data point to close the block.
7. In the tool settings window, click the Show More Information icon.
8. From the Attribute combo box, choose an element attribute
or property as the selection criterion.
The attribute or property values applicable to the selected
elements display in the Attribute List field.
9. In the Attribute List field after the semi-colon, key in the values
applicable to elements you want to select or deselect.
All of the selected elements with the values specified after
the semi-colon are selected or deselected.
Key-in: POWERSELECTOR
For power users, both Method and Mode have been mapped to
the keyboard. Note that left and right-handed configurations
are available simultaneously.

Manipulating and Modifying Selected Elements
Tool setting Keyboard shortcut

Method Individual — áQñ or áUñ
Block — áWñ or áIñ
Shape — áEñ or áOñ
Line — áRñ or áPñ
Mode Add — áAñ or áJñ
Subtract — áSñ or áKñ
Invert — áDñ or áLñ
Clear/Select All — áFñ or á;ñ
(Note that pressing áspace barñ also
deselects all elements.)
For instance, the Method keys áQñ or áUñ select the Individual
Method, áWñ or áIñ the Block Method, áEñ or áOñ the Shape Method,
and áRñ or áPñ the Line Method; case is unimportant.
Selections through PowerSelector can be undone in order of selection

through the use of áCtrl-Zñ or Edit > Undo.
You can set a user preference to display selected elements as

highlighted instead of with handles.
To change between Inside and Overlap mode, select the Block or Shape
To move elements with the Element Selection tool
1. In the Element Selection tool box, select the Element

Selection tool (see page 3-3) .
2. Select the element or elements to be moved.

The selected element is highlighted.
3. Drag a selected element by any point on the element.3
3 If Highlight Selected Elements is turned off (in the Input Category of the Preferences dialog
box), drag a selected element by any point on the element that is not a handle.

To scale or modify a selected element

1. From the Workspace menu, choose Preferences.
The Preferences dialog box opens.
2. In the Input category, turn off Highlight Selected Elements.4
3. In the Element Selection tool box, select the Element
Selection tool (see page 3-3) .
4. Select the element.
The selected element is bracketed with handles.
5. Drag the appropriate handle to make the desired change.
Ele- Handle: Modifi-

ment: cation:
Arc Midpoint Radius3
End- Sweep
points angle
Block Corner Scale

Segment about
midpt. opposite
handle
Scale
width or
height
about
opposite
handle
B-spline Any Scale
curve about
Complex opposite
chain handle
Complex
shape
4 When Highlight Selected Elements is on (default), you cannot scale or modify
the selected element in this manner.

Specialized Manipulation and Modification Tools
Ele- Handle: Modifi-

ment: cation:
Circle Axis Modify
endpoint axis
Ellipse Axis Modify

endpoint axis
Corner Scale
about
center
Line Any Move

Line vertex at
string handle
Multi-
line
Shape4
Text Left or Scale width about opposite handle
right Scale height about opposite handle
Top or
bottom
3
If the arc is elliptical, both axes are scaled.
4 Except for rectangular shapes (blocks).

When you need to manipulate or modify elements with more precision
than is possible with the Element Selection or PowerSelector tools, or if
you need to delete elements, use a specialized element manipulation or
modification tool. These tools can be used in conjunction with either
the Element Selection or the PowerSelector tool or by themselves.

This table summarizes the tool boxes that contain specialized tools
used to place, manipulate, and modify elements.
To Use a tool in the

Copy, move, scale, rotate, or Manipulate tool box (see
mirror elements. page 3-34)
Change (attributes, level, Change Attributes tool box
etc. of) elements. (see page 3-59)
Modify (the shape or size Modify tool box (see page 3-87)
of) elements.
To use specialized tools
1. In the Element Selection tool box, select the El-

ement Selection tool.
2. Select the element(s). See Selecting Elements on page 3-1.

3. Select the specialized tool.
4. Perform the desired manipulation or modification.
Alternative method — To use specialized tools

1. Select the specialized tool.
The prompt “Identify element” displays in the status bar. The
pointer has a circular aperture that works like the aperture
on the Element Selection arrowhead pointer.
2. Enter a data point on or near a desired element to identify
the element. In some cases it may be helpful to first snap
a tentative point to the element. See Snapping tentative
points to elements on page 2-2.
The element is highlighted, and the prompt “Accept/reject
element” is displayed in the status bar.
3. To accept the element and continue, enter a data point
anywhere in any view except on an element.
or

Example
To identify a different element, Reset and return to step 2.

4. Enter additional data points to perform (and in some cases,
repeat) the desired manipulation.
5. (Optional) — Repeat steps 2–4 for each additional element. (The
tool must have been locked upon selection in step 1.)
The first method is referred to as noun-verb because the element(s)

are distinguished before the specialized tool is selected. The second
method is referred to as verb-noun. All specialized tools work with
the verb-noun method. Not all can be operated noun-verb. When you
select a tool that does not work on a noun-verb basis, MicroStation
automatically de-selects any selected elements.
Example
The simplest of the specialized element manipulation tools is
Delete Element in the Main tool frame. You need only distinguish
(select or identify) the element(s) to be deleted.
Suppose you want to delete three elements. Assume the elements are
in plain view (each without any nearby elements). Here a shortcut
applies to the verb-noun procedure: You can combine the steps of
accepting one element for deletion and identifying the next element.
The verb-noun procedure
1. In the Main tool frame, select the Delete Element tool. (For
this example, it is assumed the tool is locked.)
The prompt “Identify element” displays in the status bar.
2. Enter a data point on or near one of the elements to identify it.
The element is highlighted, and the prompt “Accept/reject

Identifying elements
element” displays in the status bar.

3. Enter a data point on or near another one of the elements.
The first element is deleted, and the second element is highlighted.
4. Enter a data point on or near the third element.
The second element is deleted, and the third element is highlighted.
5. Enter a data point anywhere in any view except on an element.
The third element is deleted.
The noun-verb procedure
1. In the Element Selection tool box, select the El-

ement Selection tool.
2. Select the elements.
3. In the Main tool frame, select the Delete Element

tool (or press the áDelñ key).
The elements are deleted.
Identifying elements
If you have trouble identifying an element (if trying to identify it
results in the message “Element not found” being displayed in the
status bar) check the pointer’s position and the locks mentioned
in Selecting Elements on page 3-1. This message also may mean
that you are trying to identify an element of a type that the tool
currently in use is not designed to work with.
Using the Fence to Manipulate and Modify Elements

In addition to using the Element Selection or PowerSelector tool to group
elements for manipulation, you can group elements with the fence. The
fence creates a temporary grouping of elements that is ended when the
design file is closed, if not before. For information about permanent
groupings, see Permanently Grouping Elements on page 6-1.

Specifying which elements are in the fence contents
Most often, the fence is placed around elements to group them for
manipulation, just as the pointer is dragged around elements to
select them with the Element Selection tool. However, the fence
has two additional grouping capabilities. It can be used:
• As a void to exclude elements inside (or overlapping)

the fence boundary.
• To clip elements that cross the fence boundary, like a cookie cutter,
so that only the parts inside the fence boundary (or outside
in the case of a void) are subject to manipulation.
The fence can be rectangular (referred to as a fence block), polygonal

(non-rectangular) (referred to as a fence shape, with 3–97 vertices),
or circular (referred to as a fence circle). A fence shape can be
derived from a previously placed shape element.
The Place Fence tool is used to place the fence. On placement, the fence
— whether it is a fence block, shape, or circle — is displayed on screen
as a closed shape with the color used to highlight identified elements.
While the fence is placed, a fence icon is displayed in the status bar.
To remove the fence if it is already displayed

1. In the Fence tool box, select the Place Fence tool and continue
with your work. (In the Main tool frame, Place Fence is the
default “representative” from the Fence tool box.)
You can remove the fence this way to prevent accidental

fence manipulations.

The Fence (Selection) Mode determines the fence contents —
whether the elements (or parts of elements) inside, outside, or
overlapping the fence are “contained” by the fence.
• Inside — Only those elements completely inside the

fence are in the fence contents.
• Overlap — Only those elements inside or overlapping the

fence are in the fence contents.

• Clip — Only elements completely inside the fence and
parts of elements inside and overlapping the fence are
in the fence contents.5
• Void — Only those elements completely outside the fence
are in the fence contents.
• Void-Overlap — Only those elements outside or overlapping
the fence are in the fence contents.
• Void-Clip — Only elements completely outside the fence
and parts of elements outside and overlapping the fence
are in the fence contents.5
Top Left: Inside; Top Middle: Overlap; Top Right: Clip. Bottom
Left: Void; Bottom Middle: Void-Overlap; Bottom Right: Void-Clip.
Fence selection modes. Above, the fence block and elements. At
right, the fence contents in each Fence Selection Mode.
The Fence Selection Mode is a tool setting (labeled Fence Mode) for
the fence tools in the Fence tool box as well as for manipulation
tools that can operate on the fence contents. In the latter case,
it is set with the option menu next to the Use Fence control.
There is also a control in the Locks dialog box.
5 This definition and the respective image shown apply when Use Optimized Fence Clipping is
turned off in the Operation category of the Preferences dialog box. For more information
about this preference, see Optimized fence clipping (see page 3-20) .

Examples of tool settings window controls for setting the

Fence Selection Mode.
It is not necessary to place the fence in order to set the Fence

Selection Mode. Conversely, once the fence is placed, you can
adjust the Fence Selection Mode to change the fence contents
without moving or replacing the fence.
To manipulate the fence contents
1. Place the fence.
2. Select an element manipulation tool that can be

used with the fence contents.
3. In the tool settings window, turn on Use Fence and set

the Fence Selection Mode.
You are prompted, usually for a data point. For example,
with the Delete Fence Contents tool (see page 3-32) , you are
prompted to “Accept/Reject Fence Contents.”
4. Enter a data point to accept the manipulation or Reset.
5. In some cases, you can repeat the manipulation.
You can Reset to halt a fence manipulation that is in progress.

Manipulations that were completed before Resetting remain in
the design and can be undone up to the limits of the undo buffer.
(Pressing áCtrl-Cñ also halts a fence manipulation.)

Optimized fence clipping
Manipulations on many elements

Some fence manipulations on many elements (large arrays, for
example) either take a long time to complete or cannot be entirely
undone once completed because there is not enough room in
the Undo Buffer to store all of the changes.
To minimize potential problems, do the following before

attempting such a manipulation:
• Back up the design file (see To make a backup copy

of the active design file).
• Increase the size of the Undo Buffer. (To set the Undo Buffer,
choose Preferences from the Workspace menu and select the
Memory Usage Category). It is necessary to exit and restart
MicroStation for a change to the Undo Buffer to take effect.
Optimized fence clipping

The Use Optimized Fence Clipping preference in the Operation
category of the Preferences dialog box is on by default. This
preference enables you to maintain closed shapes, solids, and surfaces
when clipping those elements that cross the fence boundary. If
this preference is turned off, closed shapes, solids, and surfaces
are dropped to linear elements when clipped.
You can also use this preference in conjunction with the Locate By
Picking Faces preference (in the Input category of the Preferences
dialog box) to create associative holes in closed shapes, solids and
surfaces. When Locate By Picking Faces is set to Always, fences that
are located entirely within a closed piece of geometry can perform
clip actions upon their section of the larger area.

Special fence manipulations
To create an associative hole inside an element

using optimized fence clipping
2. In the Input category, set Locate By Picking Faces to Always.
3. Click OK to accept the change and close the dialog box.
4. Select the Place Fence tool.
5. Set the Mode to Clip.
6. Inside a closed shape, solid or surface, place a fence.
7. Accept.
To keep fence clipping from changing the larger geometry in which it is

placed, set Locate By Picking Faces to Never or Render Views Only.
The Manipulate Fence Contents tool (see page 3-29) can be used to
“stretch” (extend or shorten) segments of elements that overlap the
fence. It does this simply by moving element vertices that fall within
the fence. You can also stretch elements that overlap the fence using
the Copy tool (see page 3-35) , Move tool (see page 3-38) , Scale tool
(see page 3-41) and Rotate tool (see page 3-46) .
The fence contents can also be moved or copied to a new design file.
To copy the fence contents to a new design file

1. In the Key-in window, key in FENCE FILE or FF=.
The Save Fence Contents As dialog box opens.
2. Key in the name of the new file and set the directory

in which to create
4. Accept the copy.
Alternative method — To copy the fence

contents to a new design file
1. In the Key-in window, key in FENCE FILE <filename>
or FF=<filename>.
2. Accept the copy.
The file is created in the directory that is pointed to by
the MS_DEF configuration variable.
When using the second method, if a file already exists with the
specified filename, an alert box warns you that it will be overwritten.
To move the fence contents to a new design file

1. In the Key-in window, key in FENCE SEPARATE or SF=.
The Save Fence Contents As dialog box opens.
2. Key in the name of the new file and set the directory
in which to create it.
4. Accept the move.
Alternative method — To move the fence

contents to a new design file
1. In the Key-in window, key in FENCE SEPARATE
<filename> or SF=<filename>.
2. Accept the move.
The file is created in the directory that is pointed to by
the MS_DEF configuration variable.
When using the second method, if a file already exists with the
specified filename, an alert box warns you that it will be overwritten.

Fence tool box
Fence tool box

The Fence tool box contains tools that are used to place, modify,
and move the fence and delete the fence contents.
To Select in the Fence tool box

Place the fence.
Place Fence (see page 3-24)

Modify one vertex of a fence.
Modify Fence (see page 3-28)

Manipulate the fence contents.
or
Extend or shorten elements
that overlap the fence. Manipulate Fence Contents
(see page 3-29)
Delete the fence contents.
Delete Fence Contents (see

page 3-32)
Break up the complex elements
in the fence contents into
their components.
Drop Complex Status of Fence
Contents (see page 3-33)
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX FENCE OFF | ON | TOGGLE
To prevent accidental fence manipulations, remove a no longer

needed fence by selecting the Place Fence tool.

Place Fence
Place Fence
Used to place the fence.
Tool Setting Effect

Fence Type When the Fence Type is:
Block, Shape, or Circle—Sets the
geometric characteristics of the
fence for graphical placement.
(from) Element, From View, or

From Design File—Sets the entity
from which the fence is derived.
Fence Mode Sets the Fence (Selection) Mode
that, in conjunction with the
fence placement, defines the fence
contents for manipulation. See
Specifying which elements are in
the fence contents on page 3-17.
Design (For 2D files only) With Fence
Type set to From Design File, sets
the design file(s) from which the
fence is derived — Active or All
(active design file and attached
reference files). The Choose
option is used to identify a file
— either the active design file or
an attached reference file — by
identifying one of its elements.

Place Fence
To place a rectangular fence

If a fence already exists, it is removed.
2. In the tool settings window, set Fence Type to Block.
4. Enter a data point to define the diagonally opposite corner.
Place Fence, with

Fence Type set to
Block
Alternative method — To place a rectangular fence

2. In the tool settings window, set Fence Type to Block.
3. Drag the pointer from the first corner to the diagonally
opposed corner.

Place Fence
To place a polygonal (non-rectangular) fence

with at most 100 vertices
2. In the tool settings window, set Fence Type to Shape.
3. Enter a data point to define the beginning (and end) point.
4. Continue to enter data points to define the vertices.
5. To close the shape, enter a data point at the location
of the first data point.
or
Click the Close Fence button.
or
Key in CLOSE ELEMENT.
Place Fence, with

Fence Type set to
Shape
Alternative method — To place a polygonal

(non-rectangular) fence with at most 100 vertices
2. In the tool settings window, set Fence Type to From Shape.
3. Identify a shape element that is the same shape as the
fence shape you want to place.
4. Enter a data point to accept the element.
The fence is placed directly on top of the element.

Place Fence
To place a circular fence

2. In the tool settings window, set Fence Type to Circle.
4. Enter a data point to define the radius.
Alternative method — To place a circular fence

2. In the tool settings window, set Fence Type to Circle.
3. Drag the pointer from the center to the perimeter.
To place a fence on an existing shape element

2. In the tool settings window, set Fence Type to Element.
3. Identify a shape element that is the same shape as the
fence shape you want to place.
4. Enter a data point to accept the element.
The fence is placed directly on top of the element.
Key-in: PLACE FENCE BLOCK | SHAPE | CIRCLE |

FROMSHAPE | ELEMENT | VIEW | DESIGN | UNIVERSE
| ACTIVE | ALLFILES
If the Fence (Selection) Mode is set to Clip, the From Shape option
duplicates the selected shape to be placed. This option works only with
simple shapes; it does not work with complex shapes at this time.
Selecting Place Fence automatically disables AccuDraw if it was not

already disabled. To activate AccuDraw for use with Place Fence,
select the Start AccuDraw tool in the Primary tool box.

Modify Fence
If, after placing the fence but before selecting another tool,
you decide the fence placement is unsatisfactory, simply
Reset to begin re-placing it.
Modify Fence
Used to move the fence or modify one of its vertices.
The fence and the Fence (Selection) Mode define the fence
contents for manipulation. See Specifying which elements
are in the fence contents on page 3-17.
To move the fence without replacing it

1. Select the Modify Fence tool.
2. Set the tool setting Modify Mode to Position.
3. Enter a data point to define the origin for the move.
4. Enter a data point to define the new fence position. This
data point precisely positions the origin.
5. Reset to accept the move.
or
Repeat step 4.

Manipulate Fence Contents
To modify a vertex of the fence

1. Select the Modify Fence tool.
2. Set the tool setting Modify Mode to Vertex.
3. Identify the vertex to move.
4. Enter a data point to define the new vertex position.
5. Reset to accept the modification.
or
Repeat step 4.
Modify Fence Vertex
Key-in: MOVE | MODIFY FENCE
Selecting Modify Fence automatically disables AccuDraw if it was not

already disabled. To activate AccuDraw for use with Modify Fence,
select the Start AccuDraw tool in the Primary Tools tool box.
Used to move, copy, rotate, mirror, scale, or stretch the fence

contents, which are defined by the fence and (except for stretching)
the Fence (Selection) Mode. See Specifying which elements
The method of manipulation is determined by the tool setting

Operation. With the exception of Stretch, each Method
works identically to a tool in the Manipulate tool box with
the tool setting Use Fence on.

Operation Identical to using this tool with

Use Fence on
Copy Copy
Move Move
Scale Scale
Rotate Rotate
Mirror Mirror
With Operation set to Stretch, Manipulate Fence Contents ignores the
Fence (Selection) Mode and operates on elements as follows:
• A vertex of a line, line string, multi-line, or shape is moved if it is

inside the fence. A vertex outside the fence is not moved.
• An endpoint of an arc is moved if it is inside the fence. An
arc endpoint outside the fence is not moved.
• An ellipse, circle, or cell is moved if it is completely inside the fence.
Fence Stretch has always been a powerful tool when working on

B-spline surfaces, because it allows you to move many poles (also
known as control points) at once. With Fence Stretch built into
the Rotate and Scale tools, this dramatically increases the power
to bend and distort surfaces while keeping them smooth.
For general information about B-spline surfaces, see “3D

Elements” on page 7-48.
You can use Fence Stretch to manipulate breaks (breaks in multi-lines

are often used to represent windows or doorways when the multi-line
itself is the wall). For instance, you can place your fence to include a
window, and move the window along the wall. You may also change the
size of the window by including only the start or end of the break in
the fence. This means that in most cases, you do not have to drop the
multi-line into its component elements to perform such manipulations.
For general information about multi-lines, see “Using

Multi-lines” on page 6-23.
You cannot move the break off of the multi-line segment that contains
it. If you move the fence so the start or endpoint of a break would
move off of the segment, the break position will simply be projected
to the nearest point on the segment. If you move a break off of

the end of the segment, it will simply be deleted.
If only one endpoint of the arc is in the fence, the arc is effectively
rotated and scaled so that the point is moved to the new position.
This means that arcs do not change their aspect ratio (for example,
circular arcs do not become elliptical) or their sweep angle. Their new
endpoint position remains consistent with how the fence was moved,
instead of Fence Stretch simply scaling arcs in either x or y.
Tool Setting Effect

Stretch Cells If on, cells that overlap the
fence are stretched.1
1 The LOCK CELLSTRETCH [OFF | ON | TOGGLE] key-in also can

be used to turn Stretch Cells off or on.
To stretch segments of elements that

overlap the fence
1. Select the Manipulate Fence Contents tool.
2. Set Operation to Stretch.
The Stretch option ignores the Fence (Selection) Mode. The
mode has no effect while the Stretch option is in use.
3. Enter a data point inside the fence to define the origin.
4. Enter a data point to reposition the fence and the affected vertices.

Delete Fence Contents
Manipulate Fence
Contents tool with
Operation set to
Stretch.
Key-in: FENCE ICON
The relative positions of cuts, breaks and partial deletions in

multi-lines are maintained during stretch and move operations.
To constrain the movement of vertices to multiples of an angle,

use AccuDraw (see page 2-13) in conjunction with the Stretch
option for Manipulate Fence Contents.
Delete Fence Contents
Used to delete the fence contents, which are defined by the fence
and the Fence (Selection) Mode. See Specifying which elements

Drop Complex Status of Fence Contents
To delete the fence contents

1. Select the Delete Fence Contents tool.
2. Accept the deletion.
Key-in: FENCE DELETE
Deleting the fence contents can be undone only up to the

limits of the undo buffer.
Drop Complex Status of Fence Contents
Used to break up the complex elements (cells, complex chains, complex

shapes, text nodes, surfaces, and solids) in the fence contents into their
components. The elements can then be manipulated individually.
Tool Effect
Setting
Fence Sets how the fence contents are determined.
(Selec- See Specifying which elements are in the
tion) fence contents on page 3-17.
Mode
To drop the complex status of the fence contents

1. Select the Drop Complex Status of Fence Contents tool.
2. Accept the drop.
Key-in: FENCE DROP COMPLEX
To selectively break up a specific complex element(s), use the

Drop Complex Status tool (see page 3-79) .
The Drop Complex Status of Fence Contents tool cannot be used to

Manipulate tool box
disassociate a B-spline curve from its control polygon.
Manipulate tool box

The tools in the Manipulate tool box are used to copy, move, resize,
rotate, mirror, and create arrays of elements.
To Select in the Manipulate

tool box
Copy or stretch an element(s).
Copy (see page 3-35)

Move or stretch an element(s).
Move (see page 3-38)

Move or copy an element with
the sides of the copy parallel
to the original.
Move Parallel (see page 3-39)
Resize and stretch an element(s)
by the active scale factors.
Scale (see page 3-41)

Rotate and stretch an element(s).
Rotate (see page 3-46)

Mirror an element(s).
Mirror (see page 3-51)

Copy
To Select in the Manipulate

tool box
Align an element(s) to an edge
of another element.
Align Edges (see page 3-53)

Copy an element(s) many times
to create a rectangular or a
polar (circular) array.
Construct Array (see page 3-55)
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX MANIPULATE OFF | ON | TOGGLE
To manipulate elements in an attached reference file, use reference file

tools — see Working with attached reference design files on page 5-13.
Copy
Used to copy or stretch an element(s).
Tool Setting Effect

Make Copy If off, the window switches to the
Move Element settings window.
Use Fence If on, the fence contents are
copied. The option menu sets the
Fence (Selection) Mode.
Stretch Cells If on, the fence contents are
stretched, when Fence (Selection)
Mode is Stretch.

Copy
To copy an element(s)
1. Select the Copy tool.
3. Enter a data point to position the copy.
Alternative method — To copy an element(s)

1. Select or fence the element(s).
2. Select the Copy tool.
3. Enter a data point to define the origin for the copy.
4. Enter a data point to position the copy.
Copy tool. Left,

identifying an
element to copy.
Right, copying the
fence contents with
Use Fence on.
To stretch elements in a fence

1. Using the Place Fence tool (see page 3-24) , place a fence
around an element or group of elements.
2. From the Manipulate tool box, select the Copy tool.
The Copy Element settings window opens.
3. From the Use Fence option menu, choose Stretch.
The Use Fence check box activates, and the Stretch
Cells check box also activates.

Copy
4. Enter a data point inside the fence to define the origin.

5. Enter a data point to reposition the fence and the affected vertices.
Stretching elements
in a fence using the
Copy Element tool,
Left: Example A,
Right: Example B.
Enter a data point
to define the origin
of the fence (1).
Enter a data point
to reposition the and
the affected vertices
(2).
Key-in: COPY ICON

Key-in: FENCE COPY ELEMENT
To constrain the movement of copies to multiples of an

angle, use AccuDraw in conjunction with the Copy tool
(see AccuDraw on page 2-13).
To copy the fence contents to a new design file, see the procedure
in Special fence manipulations (see page 3-21) .
You cannot stretch all vertices outside of the fence. Because Stretch is
treated as a Fence Mode, you cannot combine Void and Stretch.
The Fence Stretch option works the same from both the Copy

Move
Element and Move Element settings window.
Move
Used to move or stretch an element(s).
Tool Setting Effect

Make Copy If on, the window switches to the
Copy Element settings window.
moved. The option menu sets the
stretched, when Fence (Selection)
Mode is Stretch.
To move an element
1. Select the Move tool (be sure Use Fence is off).
3. Enter a data point to reposition the element.
To move one or more selected elements

2. Select the Move tool.
Be sure Use Fence is off.
3. Drag a selected element by any point on the element
except the handles.
All selected elements move.

Move Parallel
To move the fence contents

1. Place a fence around the element(s).
2. Select the Move tool.
Be sure Use Fence is on.
3. Enter a data point to define the origin for the move.
4. Enter a data point to reposition the fence contents.
Move tool. Left,

identifying an
element to move.
Right, moving the
fence contents with
Use Fence on.
Key-in: MOVE ICON

Key-in: FENCE MOVE ELEMENT
To constrain movement to multiples of an angle, use AccuDraw in

conjunction with the Move tool (see AccuDraw on page 2-13).
To move the fence contents to a new design file, see the procedure
in Special fence manipulations (see page 3-21) .
Move Parallel
Used to move or copy an element (line, line string, multi-line, curve, arc,
ellipse, shape, complex chain, or complex shape) parallel to the original.

Move Parallel
Tool Setting Effect

Distance If on, sets the distance to move.
Make Copy If on, the element is copied and the
original is not manipulated.
To move or copy an element parallel to the original

1. Select the Move Parallel tool.
Distance Defines
Off Distance and direction.
On Direction only.
Move Parallel
tool. Above:
Defining
distance with
a data point
(Distance
off). Below:
Distance
is keyed in
(Distance
on). In
illustrations,
Make Copy
is on.
Key-in: MOVE PARALLEL ICON

Key-in: COPY | MOVE PARALLEL DISTANCE | KEYIN
You can instead use the Move tool (see page 3-38) in conjunction

Scale
with AccuDraw to constrain element movement.
Scale
Used to resize and stretch an element(s).
Tool Setting Effect

Method Sets the method.
Active Scale—Scale by the active
scale factors (X Scale, Y Scale, and
Z Scale). If a scale factor is 0-1
(for example, 0.25), size in that
direction is decreased; if a scale
factor is greater than 1, size in
that direction is increased.
3 points—Scale graphically,
through the entry of three data
points. The scale factors are
computed by dividing the distance
between the first and third points
by the distance between the first
and second points.
X Scale Scale factor along view x-axis
(horizontal), when Method is
Active Scale.
Y Scale Scale factor along view y-axis
(vertical), when Method is
Active Scale.
Z Scale (3D only) Scale factor along view
z-axis (depth), when Method
is Active Scale.

Scale
Tool Setting Effect

Proportional If on, the element(s) proportions
are maintained, when Method
is 3 points.
Make Copy If on, the element(s) are copied
and the copy(s) are scaled; the
original(s) are not manipulated.
Scale Multi- If on, multi-line offsets are
line Offsets scaled (for example, to scale wall
thickness when resizing a room).
scaled. The option menu sets the
scaled and stretched, when Fence
(Selection) Mode is Stretch.
To scale an element(s) by the active scale factors

2. Select the Scale tool.
3. In the tool settings window, set Method to Active Scale.
4. Enter a data point to define the point about which
the element(s) are scaled.
Alternative method — To scale an element(s)

by the active scale factors
2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Active Scale.

Scale
Scale, with Method

set to Active Scale.
Illustrations show X
Scale = 2.0, Y Scale =
0.5, and Make Copy
on.
To scale an element(s) graphically

3. In the tool settings window, set Method to 3 points.
4. Enter a data point to define the point to scale about.
5. Enter a data point to define a known location or keypoint.
6. Enter a data point to define scaling factors.
Alternative method — To scale an element(s)

graphically
2. In the tool settings window, set Method to 3 points.
4. Enter a data point to define the point to scale about.

Scale
Scale, with Method

set to 3 points.
To scale and stretch elements in a fence

The Scale settings window opens.
4. On the Method option menu, choose Active Scale and
type values in the X, Y (Z) fields.

Scale

The elements(s) are stretched by the Active Scale.
Scaling and
stretching
elements in
a fence using
the Scale tool.
Enter a data
point (1) to
define the
point about
which the
element(s) are
scaled.
To graphically scale and stretch elements

in a fence
The Scale settings window opens.
4. On the Method option menu, choose 3 points.

Rotate

The element(s) are graphically scaled and stretched.
Enter a data point (1) to define the point about which the element(s)
are scaled. Enter a data point (2) to define a reference point for the
scaling. Enter a data point (3) to define the amount of scaling.
Key-in: SCALE ICON

Key-in: FENCE SCALE POINTS COPY | ORIGINAL
Rotate
Used to rotate and stretch an element(s).

Rotate
Tool Setting Effect

Method Sets the method used to rotate
and stretch an element.
Active Angle—the element(s)
are rotated by the Active Angle,
which can be keyed in.
2 Points—the angle of rotation

is defined by entering two
data points.
3 points—the angle of rotation is

defined by three data points.
and the copy(s) are rotated; the
rotated. The option menu sets
the Fence (Selection) Mode.
rotated and stretched, when Fence
(Selection) Mode is Stretch.
To rotate an element(s)
2. Select the Rotate tool.
3. Enter a data point to define the pivot point.
If Method is set to Active Angle, the elements(s) are rotated
by the Active Angle; repeat to rotate the element(s) again.
Otherwise, continue with step 4.
4. If Method is set to 2 Points, enter a data point to define
the angle of rotation graphically.
or
If Method is set to 3 points, enter a data point to
define the start of rotation.
If Method is set to 2 Points, the element(s) are rotated; repeat to

Rotate
rotate the element(s) again. Otherwise, continue with step 5.

5. Enter a data point to define the angle of rotation graphically.
Alternative method — To rotate an element(s)

3. Follow steps 3–5 above.
Rotate tool. Top:

with Method set to 2
Points. Middle: with
Method set to Active
Angle and Active
Angle set to 30 .
Bottom: with Method
set to 3 points.

Rotate
To rotate and stretch elements in a fence

The Rotate settings window opens.
4. On the Method option menu, choose Active Angle and
type a value in the angle field.

The elements(s) are rotated and stretched by the Active Angle.
Rotating and stretching elements in a fence using the Rotate

tool. Enter a data point (1) to define the pivot point about
which the element(s) are rotated and stretched.
To graphically rotate and stretch elements

in a fence

Rotate

The Rotate settings window opens.
4. On the Method option menu, choose 2 Points.
(If you choose 3 Points, go to step 7).
6. Enter a data point to graphically define the angle of rotation.
Skip to step 10.
7. If Method is set to 3 Points, enter a data point to
define the pivot point.
8. Enter a data point to define the start of rotation.
9. Enter a data point to graphically define the angle of rotation.
10. The element(s) are graphically rotated and stretched; repeat
to rotate and stretch the element(s) again.
Graphically rotating
and stretching
elements in a fence (2
Points). Enter a data
point (1) to define the
pivot point. Enter
a data point (2) to
graphically define
the rotation angle.

Mirror
Graphically rotating
and stretching
elements in a fence (3
Points). Enter a data
point (1) to define the
pivot point. Enter
a data point (2) to
define the start of
rotation. Enter a
data point (3) to
graphically define
the rotation angle.
Key-in: ROTATE ICON

Key-in: FENCE ROTATE | SPIN COPY | ORIGINAL
| POINTS COPY | ORIGINAL
If Use Fence is on and the rotation is repeated, any element(s) inside

the moved fence are copied along with the original fence contents. It
is usually easier to use the Construct Array tool (see page 3-55) with
Array Type set to Polar to make multiple rotated copies.
Mirror
Used to mirror an element(s).

Mirror
Tool Setting Effect

Mirror About Sets direction in which element(s)
are mirrored:
Horizontal—about horizontal axis.
Vertical—about vertical axis.
Line—about line defined by

two data points.
and the copy(s) mirrored; the
Mirror Text If on, text is mirrored.
Mirror If on, multi-line profile offsets
Multi-line are mirrored.
Offsets
mirrored. The option menu sets
To mirror an element(s)
2. Select the Mirror tool.
If Mirror About is set to Horizontal or Vertical, the element(s) are
mirrored. You can repeat step 3 to mirror the element(s) again.
If Mirror About is set to Line, this data point defines
one point on the mirroring line.
4. If Mirror About is set to Line, enter another data point to
define another point on the mirroring line.
The element(s) are mirrored. You can go back to step 3
to mirror the element(s) again.

Align Edges
Alternative method — To mirror an element(s)

1. Select the Mirror tool.
3. Follow steps 3 and 4 above.
Mirror tool.
Clockwise from top
left: Mirror About
Horizontal, Vertical,
and Line. Mirror
Text is on.
Key-in: MIRROR ICON

Key-in: FENCE MIRROR COPY | ORIGINAL HORIZONTAL
| LINE | VERTICAL
Align Edges
Used to align an element(s) to an edge of another element.

Align Edges
Tool Setting Effect

Align Sets the manner by which to align:
Top
Bottom
Left
Right
Horiz(ontal) Center
Vert(ical) Center
Both Centers
aligned. The option menu sets
To align elements to another element

1. Select or fence the elements to align.
2. Select the Align Edges tool.
3. Identify the base element to which to align the selected elements.
The selected elements are aligned to the edge of the base element.
4. Accept the alignment to the base element.
Alternative method — To align elements

to another element
1. Select the Align Edges tool.
2. Identify the base element to which to align other elements.
The base element highlights, and a range block is

Construct Array
displayed normal to the view.

3. Identify an element to align.
The identified element is aligned to the edge of the base element,
which remains highlighted with the range block.
4. Continue identifying elements until all of the desired
elements are aligned to the base element.
5. Accept the last element’s alignment to the base element.
The base element remains highlighted with the range block.
6. Reset.
Key-in: ALIGNEDGE
Construct Array
Used to copy an element(s) many times to create an array.
Tool Setting Effect
Array Type Set the type of array that is

constructed; different tool settings
are available depending on
how this is set.
Rectangular—Construct a
Rectangular array
Polar—Construct a Polar
(circular) array
Use Fence If on, the fence contents are copied
into an array. The option menu
sets the Fence (Selection) Mode.
Active Angle (Rectangular array type) Aligns
the imaginary orthogonal grid on
which the copies are placed.

Construct Array
Tool Setting Effect

Rows (Rectangular array type) The
number of rows.
Columns (Rectangular array type) The
number of columns.
Row Spacing (Rectangular array type) The
space between rows.1
Column (Rectangular array type) The
Spacing space between columns.1
Items (Polar array type) Sets the
number of items or copies of
the fence contents in the array,
including the original.
Delta Angle (Polar array type) Sets the
angle between items.
• If positive, copies are placed
counterclockwise.
• If negative, copies are
placed clockwise.
Rotate Items (Polar array type) If on, the
element(s) are rotated about the
center of the array.
1
Row and column spacing are measured from the lower left corner of a
linear element or the center of a circle or ellipse.
To create a rectangular array

The element(s) become the lower left items of the array.
2. Select the Construct Array tool.
3. In the tool settings window, set Array Type to Rectangular.
4. (Optional) — As needed, adjust other settings.
5. Accept the array.

Construct Array
Alternative method — To create a

rectangular array
2. In the tool settings window, set Array Type to Rectangular.
The element becomes the lower left element of the array.
Constructing a
rectangular array.
“D1” denotes the Row
Spacing, “D2” the
Column Spacing,
and “AA” the Active
Angle. Left and
center: Identifying
an element. Right:
Copying the fence
contents with Use
Fence on.
To create a polar array

3. In the tool settings window, set Array Type to Polar.
4. Enter a data point to define the array’s center.

Construct Array
Alternative method — To create a polar array

2. In the tool settings window, set Array Type to Polar.
3. Identify the element to copy.
4. Enter a data point to define the array’s center.
The point at which the element is identified (step 3) is positioned
in each copy on an imaginary circle.
Constructing
a polar
array. Top:
Identifying
an element.
Number of
Items is 8 and
Delta Angle is
45 . Bottom:
Copying fence
contents (Use
Fence on).
Number of
Items is 6 and
Delta Angle
is 60 .
Key-in: ARRAY ICON

Key-in: FENCE ARRAY RECTANGULAR | POLAR
Array construction, especially with the fence contents, can be

Change Attributes tool box
undone only up to the limits of the undo buffer.

These tools in the Change Attributes tool box are used to change
an element(s) to the active element attribute settings.
To Select in the Change

Attributes tool box
Change an element(s) level, color,
line style, line weight, or class.
Change Element Attributes

(see page 3-61)
Change a closed element(s) to the
active area (Solid or Hole).
Change Element to Active

Area (see page 3-62)
Change a closed element(s) to
the Active Fill Type.
Change Element to Active Fill

Type (see page 3-63)
Interactively modify the line
style attributes of an element
with a custom line style.
Modify Line Style Attributes
(see page 3-65)
Change a multi-line to the active
multi-line definition.
Change Multi-line to Active

Definition (see page 3-67)

To Select in the Change

Attributes tool box
Set the active element attributes
so they match those of an
existing element.
Match Element Attributes
(see page 3-68)
Change all active element
attribute settings, including
those specific to particular
element types, so they match Match All Element Settings
the attributes of an element (Smart Match) (see page 3-69)
in the design.
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX CHANGE OFF | ON | TOGGLE
These tools are used to change other element-specific attributes:
To change attributes Use

for
B-spline curves
Change to Active Curve Settings (see page

6-102) in the Modify Curves tool box.
B-spline surfaces
Change to Active Surface Settings

(see page 7-172) in the Modify
Surfaces tool box.
Dimension elements
Update Dimension in the Dimension

tool box.
Text elements
Change Text Attributes in the

Text tool box.

Used to change selected attributes of an element(s). Tool settings

are used to specify the new attribute settings. The controls are
similar to those in the Element Attributes dialog box (Element menu
> Attributes) and, as do the controls in the Element Attributes
dialog box, change the active element attributes.
Tool Setting Effect
Level Active Level (see page 1-3)

Color Active Color (see page 1-13)
Style Active Line Style (see page 1-17) (and any
active line style modifiers)
Weight Active Line Weight (see page 1-15)
Class Active Class (see page 1-28) — Primary
or Construction
Use Fence If on, the selected attributes of the fence
contents are changed.
To change an element’s attributes (those

that are set to On)
2. Select the Change Element Attributes tool.
3. Accept the change.

Change Element to Active Area
Alternative method — To change an element’s

attributes (those that are set to On)
1. Select the Change Element Attributes tool.
Key-in: CHANGE ICON

Key-in: FENCE CHANGE áCLASS | COLOR | LEVEL
| STYLE | WEIGHTñ
To change the Active Color (see page 1-13) , Active Line Style
(see page 1-17) , or Active Line Weight (see page 1-15) and the
corresponding attribute of the selected element(s) in one step,
use the controls in the Primary Tools tool box.
To set the active element attributes so they match those of an element

in the design, use the Match Element Attributes tool (see page 3-68) .
Change Element to Active Area

Used to change the area attribute of a closed element(s) (shapes,
ellipses, complex shapes, or B-spline curves) to the Active Area.

Change Element to Active Fill Type
Tool Setting Effect

Area Sets the Active Area.
• If Solid, element’s Area
attribute is changed
to Solid.
• If Hole, element’s Area
attribute is changed to Hole.
To change an element to the active area

1. Select the closed element(s).
2. Select the Change Element to Active Area tool.
Alternative method — To change an element

to the active area
1. Select the Change Element to Active Area tool.
2. Identify the closed element.
Key-in: CHANGE AREA
To associate a solid element with a set of holes, use the Group

Holes tool (see page 6-22) in the Groups tool box.
It is not possible to pattern an element with the area attribute of Hole.

Used to change a closed element (shape, ellipse, complex shape,
or B-spline curve) to the Active Fill Type.

Tool Setting Effect

Fill Type Active Fill (see page 1-26) Type
— None (no fill), Opaque (filled
with Active Color (see page
1-13) ), or Outlined.
Fill Color Sets color with which the
element(s) are filled.
• If Fill Type is Opaque, the
element(s) are filled with
the Active Color, which
is also the color of the
element’s outline.
• If Fill Type is Outlined,
the element(s) can be filled
with a color that is different
from the Active Color.
To change an element to the Active Fill Type

1. Select the closed element(s).
2. Select the Change Element to Active Fill Type tool.
Alternative method — To change an element

to the Active Fill Type
1. Select the Change Element to Active Fill Type tool.
2. Identify the closed element.
Key-in: CHANGE FILL
To display fill in a view, turn on Fill (see page 1-26) for the
view in the View Attributes dialog box (opened by choosing
View Attributes from the Settings menu).
These key-ins let you change a single color attribute:

To change Key in
An element’s outline to CHANGE COLOR OUTLINE
the Active Color (see
page 1-13) .
A filled element’s fill to CHANGE COLOR FILL
the Active Fill Color.
Used to interactively modify the line style attributes of an

element with a custom line style. The tool setting Method
determines the type of modification.
Method Used to modify

Width The starting, or Origin, width and the End
width of an element.
Start Width The starting, or Origin, width of an element.
End Width The End width of an element.
Scale The Scale Factor applied to strokes.
Dash Scale The Scale Factor applied to variable length
dash strokes.
Gap Scale Scale Factor applied to variable length gap strokes.
Shift The Shift distance by which the stroke pattern
is shifted relative to the beginning of an
element or its segments.

CHANGE LINESTYLE SCALE
To modify an element’s line style attributes

1. Select the Modify Line Style Attributes tool.
The movement of the pointer shows the direction and extent of the
change that will occur upon entry of the next data point.
Key-in: MODIFY LINESTYLE ICON

Key-in:MODIFY LINESTYLE áDASHSCALE | ENDWIDTH |
GAPSCALE | SCALE | SHIFT | STARTWIDTH | WIDTHñ
CHANGE LINESTYLE SCALE

The CHANGE LINESTYLE SCALE key-in is used to scale an
element’s (custom) line style by a specific factor — for example,
CHANGE LINESTYLE SCALE 2.0. The specified scale factor has the
same effect as the Scale Factor setting in the Line Styles dialog box.
If you do not specify a factor, a factor of 1.0 is assumed.
To scale an element’s (custom) line style

by a specific factor
2. Key in CHANGE LINESTYLE SCALE [scale_factor].
Alternative method — To scale an element’s

(custom) line style by a specific factor

Change Multi-line to Active Definition
To scale the (custom) line style of elements

contained in the fence by a specific factor
1. Place the fence and set the Fence (Selection) mode appropriately.
3. Accept the fence contents.
Change Multi-line to Active Definition
Used to change a multi-line’s attributes to the active multi-line

definition, which can be set as follows:
• In the Multi-lines dialog box (opened by choosing Multi-lines

from the Element menu).
• Select a Multi-line settings group component in the Select Settings
window (opened by choosing Manage from the Settings menu).
To change a multi-line to the active

multi-line definition
1. Select the multi-line(s).
2. Select the Change Multi-line to Active Definition tool.
Alternative method — To change a multi-line

to the active multi-line definition
1. Select the Change Multi-line to Active Definition tool.
2. Identify the multi-line.
Key-in: CHANGE MLINE

The active multi-line definition can be set to match a multi-line element

with the Match All Element Settings (SmartMatch) tool (see page 3-69) .
Used to change the active element attribute settings so they match

the attributes of an element in the design.
Tool Setting Effect

Level Active Level (see page 1-3)
Color Active Color (see page 1-13)
Style Active Line Style (see page 1-17)
Weight Active Line Weight (see page 1-15)
To match an element’s attributes (those

that are on)
2. Select the Match Element Attributes tool.

SmartMatch
Alternative method — To match an element’s

attributes (those that are on)
1. Select the Match Element Attributes tool.
3. Accept the new active element attributes.
Key-in: MATCH ICON

Key-in: MATCH COLOR | LEVEL | STYLE | WEIGHT
To match all element attribute settings, including those that are

specific to an element type such as dimension or text, use the Match
All Element Settings (SmartMatch) tool (see page 3-69) .
To change the color, line style, line weight, or level of an

element(s) to the active element attributes, use the Change
SmartMatch
Used to change all active element attribute settings, including those

specific to particular element types, so they match the attributes
of an element in the design. When a cell is matched, the active
scale factors and Active Cell are also matched.
To match an element’s attributes

2. Select the SmartMatch tool.

Match tool box
Alternative method — To match an

element’s attributes
1. Select the SmartMatch tool.
3. Accept the new active settings.
Key-in: MATCH ELEMENT
To change the color, line style, line weight, or level of an

element(s) to the active element attributes, use the Change
Match tool box

The tools in the Match tool box are used to set element attribute
settings to those of an element in the design (or a reference file), making
it easy to place elements with the same attributes as existing elements.
To Select in the Match tool box

Change all active element
attribute settings, including
those specific to particular
element types, so they match Match All Element Settings
the attributes of an element (SmartMatch) (see page 3-69) 1
in the design.
Set the active element attributes
so they match those of an
existing element.
(see page 3-68) 1
Set the active text settings
the same as the corresponding
attributes of text in the design.
Match Text Attributes (see
page 3-72) 2

Match tool box
To Select in the Match tool box

Set the active multi-line
definition to the definition of
a multi-line element.
Match Multi-line Definition
(see page 3-73)
Set the active dimension settings
to the dimension attributes of
a dimension element.
Match Dimension Settings
(see page 3-74)
Set the active pattern settings
to match the attributes of a
pattern element.
Match Pattern Attributes
(see page 4-52) 3
Match the active B-spline curve
settings to the attributes of
a B-spline curve.
Match Curve Settings (see
page 3-75)
Match the active B-spline surface
settings to the attributes of
a B-spline surface.
Match Surface Settings (see
page 3-76)
1 Also in the Change Attributes tool box.
2
Also in the Text tool box.
3 Also in the Patterns tool box.
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX MATCH OFF | ON | TOGGLE

Match Text Attributes
Match Text Attributes
Used to set the active text settings (Size, Justification, Font,

Line Spacing, Line Length, Underline, Vertical Text, Slant,
and Intercharacter Spacing) the same as the corresponding
attributes of text in the design.
To set the active text settings to those

of existing text
1. Select one text element.
2. Select the Match Text Attributes tool.
or
In the Text dialog box, click the Match button.
Alternative method — To set the active text

settings to those of existing text
1. Select the Match Text Attributes tool.
or
In the Text dialog box, click the Match button.
2. Identify the text element.
Key-in: ACTIVE TEXT
The active text settings are set in the Text dialog box

(Element menu >Text).
Used to set the active multi-line definition (all settings that can be set
in the Multi-linesdialog box) to the definition of a multi-line element.
To match the active multi-line definition

1. Select the multi-line element.
2. Select the Match Multi-line Definition tool.
Alternative method — To match the active

1. Select the Match Multi-line Definition tool.
2. Identify the multi-line element.
3. Accept the new active multi-line definition.
Key-in: MATCH MLINE
To change a multi-line to the active multi-line definition, use

the Change Multi-line to Active Definition tool (see page 3-67)

in the Change Attributes tool box.
Used to set the active dimension settings to the dimension

attributes of a dimension element.
To match dimension settings

1. Select the dimension element.
2. Select the Match Dimension Settings tool.
Alternative method — To match dimension

settings
1. Select the Match Dimension Settings tool.
2. Identify the dimension element.
3. Accept the new active dimension settings.
Key-in: MATCH DIMENSION
To change a dimension to the active dimension attributes, use the

Match Curve Settings
Update Dimension tool in the Dimension tool box.
Match Curve Settings
Used to change the active B-spline curve settings to the B-spline

attributes of a B-spline curve in the design.
Tool Setting Effect

Polygon If on, whether the curve’s control
polygon is displayed is matched.
Invisible—the control polygon
is not displayed.
Visible—the control polygon

is displayed.
Curve If on, whether the curve is
displayed is matched:
Invisible—the curve is not
displayed.
Visible—the curve is displayed.

Closure If on, whether the B-spline is
Open or Closed is matched.
Order If on, the order of the identified
curve is matched.
To match the active curve settings

1. Select the B-spline curve.
2. Select the Match Curve Settings tool.

Match Surface Settings

curve settings
1. Select the Match Curve Settings tool.
2. Identify the B-spline curve.
3. Accept the new active B-spline curve settings.
Key-in: MATCH CURVE
To change a B-spline curve to the active B-spline attributes,

use the Change to Active Curve Settings tool (see page 6-102)
in the Modify Curves tool box.
Match Surface Settings
Used to change the active B-spline surface settings to the

attributes of a B-spline surface in the design.
Tool Setting Effect

Polygon If on, whether the surface’s control
polygon is displayed is matched.
Invisible—the control polygon
is not displayed.
Visible—the control polygon

is displayed.
Curve If on, whether the surface is
displayed is matched:
Invisible—the surface is not
displayed.
Visible—the surface is displayed.

Drop tool box
Tool Setting Effect

Closure If on in the U or V direction,
whether the surface is Open or
Closed in that direction is matched.
Order If on in the U or V direction, the
order of the identified surface in
that direction is matched.
Rules If on in the U or V direction,
the number of rule lines in that
direction is matched.
To match the active surface settings

1. Select the B-spline surface.
2. Select the Match Surface Settings tool.

surface settings
1. Select the Match Surface Settings tool.
2. Identify the B-spline surface.
3. Accept the new active B-spline surface settings.
Key-in: MATCH SURFACE
To change a B-spline surface to the active B-spline surface

attributes, use the Change to Active Surface Settings tool (see
page 7-172) in the Modify Surfaces tool box.
Drop tool box

The tools in the Drop tool box are used to break up complex
elements into simpler components, and to remove association
points between elements.

Drop tool box
To Select in the Drop

tool box
Break up a complex element(s) or
an element(s) of a special type into
simpler components.
Drop Element (see
page 6-9) 1
Break up a complex element into
its components.
Drop Complex
Status (see page
3-79)
Convert a line string or shape to a
series of individual line elements.
Drop Line
String/Shape
Status (see page
3-80)
Convert the text characters in a text
element to the individual elements that
are used to draw the characters.
Drop Text (see
page 3-81)
Discontinue an association between a
shared cell, dimension witness line, or
multi-line and another element.
Drop Association
(see page 3-82)
Remove (drop) an element(s) from
a graphic group.
or
Break up a graphic group into Drop from Graphic
individual elements. Group (see page
6-21) 1
Convert an element with a custom
line style to an identically appearing
group of primitive elements with
standard line styles. Drop Line Style (see
page 3-83)

Drop Complex Status
To Select in the Drop

tool box
Convert any associative pattern (or
hatch) into an identically appearing
group of primitive elements.
Drop Associative
Pattern (see page
3-84)
Convert a multi-line to a set of line
strings, lines, and/or arcs.
Drop Multi-line (see

page 3-85)
Break up a dimension element(s)
into their components.
Drop Dimension
Element (see page
3-86)
1 also in the Groups tool box.
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX DROP OFF | ON | TOGGLE
The Drop Element tool (see page 6-9) is a general dropping

tool. It incorporates the capabilities of several of the more
specialized tools in the tool box.
Drop Complex Status
Used to break up a complex element (cell, complex chain, complex

shape, text node, surface, or solid) into its components. The
components can then be manipulated individually.

Drop Line String/Shape Status
To break up a complex element into

its components
1. Select the complex element(s).
2. Select the Drop Complex Status tool.
The tool has no effect on selected elements that are not complex
elements. If none of the selected elements is a complex element,
the message “Nothing to drop” is displayed in the status bar.
Alternative method — To break up a complex

element into its components
1. Select the Drop Complex Status tool.
2. Identify the complex element.
3. Accept the drop.
Key-in: DROP COMPLEX
The Drop Complex Status tool cannot be used to disassociate

a B-spline curve from its control polygon.
To quickly break up many complex elements, place the fence and use
the Drop Complex Status of Fence Contents tool (see page 3-33) .
Drop Line String/Shape Status
Used to convert a line string or shape to a series of

individual line elements.

Drop Text
To convert a line string or shape to

individual line elements
1. Select the line string(s) or shape(s).
2. Select the Drop Line String/Shape Status tool.
The tool has no effect on selected elements that are not line strings
or shapes. If none of the selected elements is a line string or shape,
Alternative method — To convert a line string

or shape to individual line elements
1. Select the Drop Line String/Shape Status tool.
2. Identify the line string or shape.
3. Accept the drop.
Key-in: DROP STRING
Drop Text
Used to convert the text characters in a text element to the

individual elements that are used to draw the characters —
lines, line strings, arcs, ellipses, and shapes.
To convert text to individual elements

1. Select the text element(s).
2. Select the Drop Text tool.
The tool has no effect on selected elements that are not text
elements. If none of the selected elements is a text element, the
message “Nothing to drop” is displayed in the status bar.

Drop Association
Alternative method — To convert text to

individual elements
1. Select the Drop Text tool.
2. Identify the text element.
3. Accept the drop.
Key-in: DROP TEXT
To break up a multi-line text element (text node), first use the Drop
Complex Status tool (see page 3-79) to break it up into individual text
elements and then use the Drop Text tool on each of the text elements.
Drop Association
Used to discontinue an association point between a shared cell origin,

dimension extension line vertex, or multi-line vertex and another
element. The association point is converted to a non-associative
origin or vertex with its own x-, y-, and (in 3D) z- coordinates. It is
then independent of the other element. For more information about
association points, see Associating Elements on page 6-46.
To discontinue an association
1. Select the Drop Association tool.
2. Identify the association point.
3. Accept the drop.

Drop Line Style
To discontinue all association points on

an element(s)
2. Select the Drop Association tool.
3. Accept the drop.
To discontinue all associations in the

fence contents
1. Key in FENCE DROP ASSOCIATION.
2. Accept the drop.
Key-in: DROP ASSOCIATION
Drop Line Style
Used to convert any element with a custom line style to an identically

appearing group of primitive elements with standard line styles. Dash
strokes are converted to line or line string elements. Point symbols are
converted to primitive elements but not dropped to individual vectors.
To drop an element with a custom line style

2. Select the Drop Line Style tool.
3. Accept the drop.

Drop Associative Pattern
Alternative method — To drop an element

with a custom line style
1. Select the Drop Line Style tool.
3. Accept the drop.
Key-in: DROP LINESTYLE
Drop Associative Pattern
Used to convert any associative patterning or hatching into

primitive elements that are no longer associated with the
original patterned element. For information about patterning,
see “Hatching and Patterning” on page 4-26.
To drop an associative pattern or hatching

1. Select the patterned element.
2. Select the Drop Associative Pattern tool.
3. Accept the drop.

Drop Multi-line
Alternative method — To drop an associative

pattern or hatching
1. Select the Drop Associative Pattern tool.
2. Identify the patterned element.
3. Accept the drop.
Key-in: DROP PATTERN
Drop Multi-line
Used to convert a multi-line element to a set of line

strings, lines, and/or arcs.
To convert a multi-line to its components

2. Select the Drop Multi-line tool.
The tool has no effect on selected elements that are not multi-lines.
If none of the selected elements is a multi-line, the message
“Nothing to drop” is displayed in the status bar.
Alternative method — To convert a multi-line

to its components
1. Select the Drop Multi-line tool.
3. Accept the drop.

Drop Dimension Element
To drop multi-line elements in the fence contents

1. Key in FENCE DROP MLINE.
2. Accept the drop.
Key-in: DROP MLINE
To temporarily convert a multi-line element(s) into a form that

can be displayed by pre-4.0 versions of MicroStation and by
IGDS, use the FREEZE or FENCE FREEZE key-in. “Frozen”
multi-line elements can be converted back to multi-line elements
using the THAW or FENCE THAW key-in.
Drop Dimension Element
Used to break up a dimension element(s) into lines, line

strings, ellipses, arcs, and text.
To break up a dimension element

1. Select the dimension element(s).
2. Select the Drop Dimension Element tool.
The tool has no effect on selected elements that are not dimension
elements. If none of the selected elements is a dimension element,
Alternative method — To break up a

dimension element
1. Select the Drop Dimension Element tool.
2. Identify the dimension element.
3. Accept the drop.

Modify tool box
To break up dimension elements in the

fence contents
1. Key in FENCE DROP DIMENSION.
2. Accept the drop.
Key-in: DROP DIMENSION
To temporarily convert a dimension element(s) into a form that

can be displayed by pre-4.0 versions of MicroStation and by
IGDS, use the FREEZE or FENCE FREEZE key-in. “Frozen”
dimension elements can be converted back to dimension elements
using the THAW or FENCE THAW key-in.
Modify tool box

The tools in the Modify tool box are used to modify element geometry.
To Select in the Modify tool box

Move a vertex of a
linear element.
or
Modify rounded Modify Element (see page 3-89)
segments of complex
chains and complex
shapes.
or
Change rounded
segments of complex
chains and complex
shapes to vertices
and vice-versa.
or
Scale a circular arc
while maintaining
its sweep angle.
or

Modify tool box

Move dimension text.
or
Change dimension
extension line length.
or
Scale a block about
the opposite vertex.
or
Change a circle’s
radius or the length of
one axis of an ellipse.
Delete part of an
element.
Delete Part of Element (see

page 3-100)
Extend or shorten
a line.
Extend Line (see page 3-101)

Extend or shorten
two open elements to
their intersection.
Extend Two Elements to Intersection
(see page 3-102)
Extend or shorten
an open element to
its intersection with
another element. Extend Element to Intersection
(see page 3-103)
Trim a series of
elements at their
intersection with
one or more other Trim Element (see page 3-104)
elements.

Modify Element

Simultaneously trim
or extend multiple
elements at their
intersection with IntelliTrim (see page 3-105)
one or more other
elements.
Insert a vertex in a
linear element.
Insert Vertex (see page 3-110)

Delete a vertex from
a linear element.
Delete Vertex (see page 3-112)

Construct a circular
fillet between two
elements.
Construct Circular Fillet (see
page 3-113) 1
Construct a chamfer
between two lines or
adjacent segments of
Construct Chamfer (see page 3-115) 2
a line string or shape.
1
Also located in the Fillets tool box
2 Also located in the Fillets tool box
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX MODIFY OFF | ON | TOGGLE
To create and “clean up” multi-line intersections, use the tools in

the Multi-line Joints tool box (see page 6-30) .
Modify Element

Modify Element
Used to do the following:
• Move a vertex or segment of a line, line string, multi-line, curve,

B-spline control polygon, shape, complex chain, or complex shape.
• Scale a block about the opposite vertex.
• Modify rounded segments of complex chains and complex
shapes created with the Place SmartLine tool (see page
6-80) while preserving their tangency.
• Change rounded segments of complex chains and complex
shapes to sharp and vice-versa.
• Scale a circular arc while maintaining its sweep angle.
• Change a circle’s radius or the length of one axis of an ellipse.
• Move dimension text or modify the extension line length
of a dimension element.
When used with AccuDraw (see page 2-13) , the Modify

Element tool becomes even more powerful. The procedures
that follow detail the interaction of AccuDraw and the Modify
Element tool on various element types.
Elements with multiple segments are line strings, shapes, and complex
chains and complex shapes placed with the Place SmartLine tool (see
page 6-80) . When used with AccuDraw, the Modify Element tool not
only affords you the capability to modify vertices and segments, but
also to change a vertex’s type (Sharp, Rounded, or Chamfered).
Tool Setting Effect

Vertex Type Sets the vertex type.
• Sharp
• Rounded
• Chamfered
Round (with Vertex Type set to Rounded) If on,
Radius sets the arc radius for a rounded vertex.
Chamfer (with Vertex Type set to Chamfered)
Offset Sets the two distances required to define
a chamfer. Chamfer Offset requires that
the two chamfer distances be equal (from
a theoretical intersection of a midpoint).

Modify Element
Tool Setting Effect

Orthogonal If an orthogonal vertex is identified,
preserves the orthogonality.
Enable If off, turns off the “smart” behavior,
SmartLine which may be desirable, especially when
modifica- the element has a very high number of
tions vertices (thousands) causing the tool to
slow down considerably. (Note: turning
off this setting causes the other options
to be disabled, as they only apply to
SmartLine style modifications.)
Enable If off, only allows element modification
segment by individual vertices.
selection
Minimize If off, no longer tries to reduce the
number number of component elements in
of linear a complex chain or shape (lines
elements that can become “compacted” into
linestrings, etc.).
Convert If on, when selecting a rounded
selected or chamfered vertex, converts the
round or component to a segment (arc or linear
chamfer to segment) so that it can be modified as
segment such. This only applies to the selected
round or chamfer, not to the whole
chain or shape. After completing
the modification, the component
will thereafter not be treated as a
round or chamfer again.
Vertex Choose:
Settings:
From Element—to use the element’s
From
own settings.
Element/Last
Used
Last Used—to no longer use the
element’s settings.

Modify Element
To modify an element
1. Select the Modify Element tool.
2. Identify the element close to the vertex, segment, or axis to modify.
3. Enter a data point to make the modification.
Modify Element.
Clockwise from top
left: moving the
endpoint of a line,
moving a vertex
of a line string,
modifying dimension
extension line length,
moving a vertex of
a B-spline control
polygon, scaling a
block, and changing
the radius of a circle.
To modify the endpoint of a line

1. With AccuDraw active, select the Modify Element tool.
2. Enter a data point to identify the end of the line.
The drawing plane origin moves to the opposite end of the line, and
the coordinate system aligns its x-axis with the line. Additionally,
the length of the line is displayed in the AccuDraw window.
3. (Optional) — Rotate the drawing plane axes.
4. (Optional) — Preview the modifications by keying in desired

changes in the AccuDraw window.
5. Enter a data point to complete the modification.

Modify Element
To modify a circle
2. Identify the circle.
The drawing plane origin moves to the center of the circle.
In addition, the coordinate system switches to Polar,
and aligns with the view axes.
4. (Optional) — Preview the modifications by keying in a radius value

in the AccuDraw window. (When modifying a circle, any value
keyed in the AccuDraw window defines a new radius.)
To modify an ellipse
2. Identify the ellipse by entering a data point near the axis to modify.
The drawing plane origin moves to the center of the
ellipse, and the coordinate system aligns its x-axis with
the primary axis of the ellipse.

To modify the sweep angle of an arc

3. From the Method option menu in the tool settings
window, choose Angle.
The drawing plane origin moves to the center of the arc, and the

Modify Element
coordinate system aligns its x-axis with the start of the arc’s sweep.

Modifying the sweep

angle of an arc
You can adjust the arc sweep by either complement of

the angle (180 either way).
To modify the radius of an arc without

changing its center point
3. From the Method option menu in the tool settings window,
choose Radius About Center.
The drawing plane origin moves to the center of the arc, and
the coordinate system aligns with the view axes.
5. (Optional) — Preview the modifications by keying in a radius value

in the AccuDraw window. (When modifying an arc, any value
keyed in the AccuDraw window defines a new radius.)

Modify Element
Modifying the radius

of an arc without
changing its center
point.
To modify the radius of an arc without

changing its endpoints
3. From the Method option menu in the tool settings window,
choose Radius Preserve Ends.
The drawing plane origin moves to the center of the arc, and
the coordinate system aligns with the view axes.
5. (Optional) — Preview the modifications by keying in a

radius value in the AccuDraw window.
Modifying the
radius of an arc
without changing its
endpoints.

Modify Element
To modify a vertex of a multi-segment element

2. Identify the element by entering a data point near
the vertex to modify.
The drawing plane origin moves to the vertex, and the
coordinate system aligns with the view axes.

Above: Modifying
a chamfered vertex.
Below: Modifying the
vertex of a Linear
segment and an Arc
segment.
To modify a Linear segment of a multi-segment

element

Modify Element
the segment’s midpoint.

The drawing plane origin moves to the identification point, and
the coordinate system aligns its x-axis with the segment.

To modify an Arc segment of a multi-segment

element
The drawing plane origin moves to the identification point.
Modifying an Arc
segment

Modify Element
To move a Linear segment parallel to itself

The drawing plane origin moves to the identification point, and
the coordinate system aligns its x-axis with the segment.
3. Position the pointer on the drawing plane’s y-axis.
4. Press the áReturnñ key.
The movement of the segment is constrained parallel
to its current location.
To modify the vertex of orthogonal segments

The drawing plane origin moves to the vertex, and the
coordinate system aligns with the segments.

To change a vertex’s type

The drawing plane origin moves to the vertex. If the
vertex is contained within a right angle, the coordinate
system aligns with the right angle.
3. From the Vertex Type option menu in the tool settings window,

Modify Element
choose the desired type — Sharp, Rounded, or Chamfered.

4. If changing Vertex Type to Rounded, key in the desired
rounding radius, in working units (MU:SU:PU) in the tool
settings window’s Rounding Radius field.
5. If changing Vertex Type to Chamfered, key in the desired
chamfer offset, in working units (MU:SU:PU) in the tool
settings window’s Chamfer Offset field.
6. To maintain the vertex in its original location — that is, to just
change its type — enter a data point at the drawing plane origin.
or
To otherwise modify the vertex, follow steps 3-5 in the procedure
To modify a vertex of a multi-segment element on page 3-96.
Key-in: MODIFY ELEMENT
You can modify a line, line string, multi-line, arc, circle, ellipse,
curve, shape, text, or complex element by dragging its handles
when selected (see To scale or modify a selected element on
page 3-12 for more information).
To choose SmartLine Modification Settings, click the arrow in the

bottom right corner of the tool settings window.
Tool settings cannot be enabled unless AccuDraw is enabled.
Arc axes cannot be modified with the Modify Element tool. Instead,

Delete Part of Element
use the Modify Arc Axis tool (see page 1-81) .
Delete Part of Element
Used to delete part of an element.
• A closed element is turned into an open element — an ellipse or

circle becomes an arc; a shape becomes a line string; a closed
B-spline curve becomes an open B-spline curve.
• If an interior portion of an open element — line, line string,
multi-line, curve, or arc — is partially deleted, the element is
divided into two elements of the same type.
To delete part of an element

1. Select the Delete Part of Element tool.
2. Identify the element at one end of the part to delete.
3. For an open element, enter a data point to define the
other end of the part to delete.
or
For a closed element, enter a data point to define the direction
in which to delete. Then enter another data point to define
the other end of the part to delete.
Delete Part of
Element

Extend Line
Key-in: DELETE PARTIAL
To delete part of a multi-line, use the Multi-line Partial Delete tool (see
page 6-42) in the Multi-line Joints tool box. To make an opening
in a multi-line without dividing the multi-line into two elements,
use the Cut All Component Lines tool (see page 6-36) .
Extend Line
Used to extend or shorten a line or an end segment of a

line string or multi-line.
Tool Setting Effect
Distance If on, sets the distance.

• A negative distance
shortens the line.
• A positive distance extends
the line.
To extend or shorten a line by entering a data point

1. Select the Extend Line tool.
2. Identify the line near the endpoint to modify.
3. If Distance is on, accept the modification.
or
If Distance is off, enter a data point to define the new endpoint.

Extend Line tool.

Top: Defining
the new endpoint
graphically when
Distance is off.
Bottom: Defining the
new endpoint when
Distance is on. If the
Distance, denoted
by “D,” is negative,
the line is shortened.
If the Distance is
positive, the line is
lengthened.
Key-in: EXTEND LINE DISTANCE | KEYIN
To extend an arc, use the Element Selection tool (see page 3-3)
or the Modify Element tool (see page 3-89) .
Used to extend or shorten two lines, line strings, or arcs

to their intersection.
To extend two elements to their intersection

1. Select the Extend Two Elements to Intersection tool.
4. Accept the modification.

Extend Element to Intersection
Extend Two Elements

to Intersection tool.
Left: Lengthening
two lines. Right:
Lengthening an arc
and shortening a
line.
Key-in: EXTEND ELEMENT 2
When an element is shortened, the part of the element that is

identified is kept. No modification is made if the identified elements
cannot be extended so that they intersect.
To extend two multi-lines to their common intersection, use a tool

in the Multi-line Joints tool box (see page 6-30) .
Extend Element to Intersection
Used to extend or shorten a line, line string, or arc to its

intersection with another element.
To extend an element to its intersection

with another element
1. Select the Extend Element to Intersection tool.
2. Identify the element to extend or shorten.
3. Identify the element to which the first element will
be extended or shortened.

Trim Element
Extend Element to
Intersection
Key-in: EXTEND ELEMENT INTERSECTION
Trim Element
Used to trim or cut an element or series of elements at their

intersection with one or more cutting elements. The cutting element
and the element that is trimmed can be lines, line strings, arcs, curves,
B-spline curves, shapes, ellipses, complex chains, or complex shapes.
To trim an element(s)
1. Use the Element Selection tool to select a cutting element(s).
2. Select the Trim Element tool.
3. Identify an element to trim.
The element is highlighted and how it will be trimmed
is dynamically displayed.
4. Accept the trimmed element.
5. Go back to step 4 to identify another element to trim.
or
Reset to finish.

IntelliTrim
Alternative method — To trim an element(s)

1. Select the Trim Element tool.
2. Identify the cutting element.
Trim Element tool.

The cutting elements
are indicated by
handles.
Key-in: TRIM
To “clean up” intersections between multi-lines, use the tools in

IntelliTrim
Used to simultaneously trim, extend or cut multiple elements.

IntelliTrim
The cutting elements or elements to which you can extend other

elements are lines, line strings, ellipses, arcs, curves, shapes, complex
strings, complex shapes, text nodes, and cell headers.
Elements that can be cut or trimmed are lines, line strings, curves, arcs,
ellipses, shapes, B-spline curves, complex strings, and complex shapes.
The only elements that can be extended are lines, line strings, complex
chains that end with a line or line string, and b-spline curves.
Tool Setting Effect

Quick Mode Operation:
Trim—If on, elements are trimmed.
Extend—If on, elements are extended.
Cut—If on, elements are cut. (You will

not actually see where the element
was cut until you select it.)
Advanced Operation:
Mode
Toggling between Trim and Extend in
Advanced Mode causes all intersections
and extension points to be recalculated
and displayed.
Trim—If on, elements are trimmed.
Extend—If on, elements are extended.
Cut—Dimmed if Advanced is selected.

Select If selected, each element that is
Elements to identified is designated as an element
Trim to trim (or extend).

IntelliTrim
Tool Setting Effect

Select If selected, each element that
Cutting is identified is designated as a
Elements cutting element.
Selection Set Designates selected elements,
by default, as:
• Elements to Trim
• Cutting Elements
To trim (or extend) multiple elements

1. Select the elements to trim or the cutting elements.
2. Select the IntelliTrim tool.
If the tool setting Selection Set is set to Elements to Trim,

the selected elements are highlighted.
If Selection Set is set to Cutting Elements, the selected
elements are highlighted and dashed.
3. If the selected elements are the elements to trim,
identify each cutting element.
or
If the selected elements are the cutting elements,
identify each element to trim.
All potential cutting points are shown as small dots.
4. When done identifying elements, Reset.
The proposed results of the operation are displayed. The
trimmable elements remain highlighted to indicate the
tentative nature of the display.
5. If the results are satisfactory, Reset to accept them.

IntelliTrim

6. For each element whose trim or extension result is not as you
desire, enter a data point on the element on or near the part of
the element you wish to keep. When entering these guide points,
you need not be concerned about “inside” and “outside” (because
the cutting elements do not have to be connected or closed).
For each element to trim, the series of entered guide points
is evaluated and the part of the element that is closest to
the closest guide point is kept. Every time the element
crosses a cutting element, it is cut.
7. When done modifying the results, Reset.
Alternative method — To trim (or extend)

multiple elements
1. Select the IntelliTrim tool.
2. Identify each element to trim.
4. Identify each cutting element.
The proposed results of the operation are displayed. The
trimmable elements remain highlighted to indicate the
tentative nature of the display.
6. If the results are satisfactory, Reset to accept them.
7. For each element whose trim or extension result is not as you
desire, enter a data point on the element on or near the part of
the element you wish to keep. When entering these guide points
you need not be concerned about “inside” and “outside” (because
the cutting elements do not have to be connected or closed).
For each element to trim, the series of entered guide points
is evaluated and the part of the element that is closest to
the closest guide point is kept. Every time the element
crosses a cutting element, it is cut.
8. When done modifying the results, Reset.

IntelliTrim
Trimming multiple elements. Top

Left: Identify the elements to be
trimmed (points 1-4), with a Reset
to finish. Top Right: Identify
the cutting elements (points 5-6),
with a Reset to finish. Proposed
cutting points appear as small
dots. Bottom Left: Reset to display
the proposed result. Bottom Right:
Reverse the result of any incorrect
cuts by entering a data point near
the part of the element that you
wish to keep (point 7). Reset to
finish.
Extending multiple elements. Top

Left: Identify the elements to be
extended (points 1-5), with a Reset
to finish. Top Right: Identify
the cutting elements (points 6-8),
with a Reset to finish. Proposed
cutting points appear as small
dots. Bottom: Reset to display the
proposed result. A further Reset
completes the operation.
Key-in: TRIM MULTI

Insert Vertex
At any point while designating elements, you can switch between

identifying elements to trim and identifying cutting elements by
selecting the appropriate radio button in the tool settings window.
If the focus is on one of the radio buttons, you can select the
other simply by pressing áspace barñ or Reset.
To change an element from an element to trim to a cutting element, or

vice-versa, simply reidentify it with the corresponding radio button
selected. It is possible — and in some cases efficient — to select both the
elements to trim and the cutting elements prior to selecting IntelliTrim
and then reidentify those elements whose designation is wrong.
If an element cannot be either extended or trimmed, it is

deleted under the following condition: there is a cutting element
directly between the closest guide point and the element;
otherwise the element is not modified.
Insert Vertex
• Insert a vertex in a line, line string, multi-line, shape,

or B-spline control polygon.
• Attach a line segment to the endpoint of a line or line string.
• Extend a point curve.
• Add an extension line to a dimension element.

Insert Vertex
To insert a vertex in a line, line string, multi-line,

shape, or B-spline control polygon
1. Select the Insert Vertex tool.
2. Identify the segment on which to add the vertex.
3. Enter a data point to position the new vertex.
Using Insert Vertex

to insert a vertex in a
line string.
To attach a line segment to an endpoint

of a line or line string
2. Enter a data point to define the segment endpoint.
To extend a point curve

2. Identify the point curve near the endpoint from which to extend.
3. Enter a data point to position the new endpoint (and
reposition the identified vertex).
To add an extension line to a dimension element

2. Identify the dimension line near the desired extension line location.
3. Enter a data point to position the end of the extension line.

Delete Vertex
Using Insert Vertex

to add an extension
line to a dimension
element.
Key-in: INSERT VERTEX
The Insert Vertex tool can be used to change a point element into
a line or a line element into a line string.
A shape or line string can have at most 101 vertices.
Delete Vertex
• Delete a vertex from a line string, multi-line, shape,

or B-spline control polygon.
• Remove an extension line from a dimension element.
To delete a vertex or an extension line

1. Select the Delete Vertex tool.
2. Identify the vertex or extension line.

Construct Circular Fillet
Delete Vertex
Key-in: DELETE VERTEX
Deleting a vertex from a line turns it into a point. It is impossible to

delete a vertex from a line string element that has just two vertices.
Used to construct a circular fillet (arc) between two elements

(lines, line strings, circular arcs, circles, or shapes), two segments
of a line string, or two sides of a shape.

Tool Setting Effect

Radius Sets the fillet’s radius.
Truncate Sets which side(s) are truncated.
None—Neither side is truncated.
Both—Both sides are truncated

at their point of tangency
with the fillet.1
First—The first side identified

(step 2) is truncated at its point
of tangency with the fillet.
1 If a fillet is constructed between two closed elements or an open and a

closed element, the closed element(s) are not modified.
To construct a circular fillet

1. Select the Construct Circular Fillet tool.
2. Identify the first element or segment.
If Truncate is set to First, this side is truncated.
3. Identify the second element or segment.
4. Accept the fillet and truncation(s), if any.
Construct Circular
Fillet. From left:
Truncate set to None,
Both, and First.

Construct Chamfer
Key-in: FILLET MODIFY | NOMODIFY | SINGLE
In 3D, both elements must be on the same plane to be filleted.
To construct a 3D fillet between two surfaces, use the Blend Surface

Between Rail Curves tool (see page 7-181) in the Fillet Surfaces tool box.
Construct Chamfer
Used to construct a chamfer between either of the following:
• Two lines. The original lines are trimmed and a third

line element forms the chamfer.
• Adjacent segments of a line string or shape. An additional vertex is
inserted and the common vertex is adjusted to form the chamfer.
Tool Setting Effect

Distance 1 First element or segment
identified (step 2).
Distance 2 Second element or segment
identified (step 3).

Element Level Manipulations
To construct a chamfer
1. Select the Construct Chamfer tool.
2. Identify the first line or segment.
3. Identify the second line or segment.
If the first data point identifies a line element, the second data
point must also identify a line element. If the first data point
identifies a segment of a line string or shape, the second data point
must identify an adjacent segment of the same element.
4. Accept the chamfer.
Chamfer. D1 denotes
Distance 1. D2
denotes Distance 2.
Key-in: CHAMFER
In 3D, both elements must be on the same plane to be chamfered.

The following procedures are used to copy and move
elements between levels.
To make a copy of an element on a different level
1. In the Manipulate tool box, select the Copy tool. (In the
Main tool frame, Copy is the default “representative”
of the Manipulate tool box.)

2. Make sure the Use Fence tool setting is off.

4. Change the Active Level (see page 1-3) .
The new Active Level is shown in the Primary Tools
tool box and status bar.
5. Accept the copy.
The copy is in the same position as the original.
To “move” an element to a different level
1. In the Change Attributes tool box, select the Change

Element Attributes tool. (In the Main tool frame, Change
Element Attributes is the default “representative” of
the Change Attributes tool box.)
2. In the tool settings window, turn on Level.

3. In the Level field, key in the number of the level to which
the element is to be “moved.”
The level keyed in becomes the Active Level.
You have not really moved the element; it remains in
the same position in the design. You have changed the
element’s level attribute.


Using Cells
A cell is a small drawing — usually of a frequently-used or
complex symbol, notation, or detail — created in MicroStation.
Cells are stored in a special kind of file called a cell library,
which can contain many cells.
Sample architectural cells
Sample cells for civil engineering
Some sample cells for mapping
Some sample cells for mechanical engineering
Cells are used for these reasons:
• To save time drawing patterns and repeated details

Using Cells
Working with Cell Libraries
• To make it easy to update details throughout a design file
• To provide uniformity
You can create your own cell libraries. Just as new design files are based
on seed design files, each new cell library is based on a seed cell library.
To place parts of a design in a cell library, you first associate the cell
library with the design file by attaching the cell library to the design file.
Each cell has a cell origin, defined when the cell is created, that can
be thought of as the cell’s “handle.” When you enter a data point
to place the cell, the origin is placed at that point.
In this chapter, you will find procedures concerning

using cells, including:
• Working with Cell Libraries (see page 4-2)
• Creating and Editing Cells (see page 4-6)
• Placing Cells (see page 4-9)
• Using the Tools in the Cells tool box (see page 4-13)
• Hatching and Patterning (see page 4-26)
• Using the Tools in the Patterns tool box (see page 4-32)
• Dimension-driven Cells (see page 4-53)

The following describes procedures for creating and attaching
a cell library and for browsing cells.

Using Cells
To create and attach a cell library

1. From the Element menu, choose Cells.
The Cell Library dialog box opens.
2. From the File menu in the Cell Library dialog box, choose New.
The Create Cell Library dialog box opens.
3. (Optional) — To select a different seed file for the cell

library, click the Select button and select a seed file in
the Select Seed File dialog box.
4. (Optional) — To select a different destination disk drive, choose

the desired drive from the Drives option menu.
5. (Optional) — To select a different destination directory,

use the Directories list box.
6. In the Files field, key in a name for the new cell library.
By convention, cell library files end in the extension “.cel.”

Using Cells
To attach an existing cell library

2. From the File menu in the Cell Library dialog box, choose Attach.
The Attach Cell Library dialog box opens.
3. Select the name of the cell library in the Files list box.
4. Click OK.
Alternative method — To attach an

existing cell library
1. From the Utilities menu, choose Cell Selector.
If there is no cell library already attached, the Select Cell
Library to Load dialog box opens.
2. Select the name of the cell library in the Files list box.
3. Click OK.
The Cell Selector dialog box opens, displaying a tile for each
of the available cells in the attached cell library.

Using Cells
To attach a remote cell library

1. From the Cell Selector dialog box’s File menu, choose
Load Remote Cell Library.
The Specify URL for Cell Library dialog box opens. (See Select
Remote Design File dialog box in the Reference Guide for
descriptions of the controls in this dialog box.)
2. In the URL field, specify the path to the remote cell library.
4. Click OK.
To browse cells
The Cell Library dialog box opens. If a cell library is
attached, its name is in the title bar.
If no cell library is attached and there are no cells in the design file,
there is nothing to browse. For information about attaching a cell
library, see To attach a previously existing cell library on page 4-4.
2. In the list box, select the name of a cell.
An image of the cell is displayed to the right of the list box.
3. Browse through the cells by selecting other cells with the mouse

Using Cells
Creating and Editing Cells
or by pressing the arrow keys on the keyboard.

As each cell is selected, its image is displayed to the
right of the list box.
Creating and Editing Cells

This section covers how to create and edit cells.
Instead of creating cells “from scratch,” consider using, at least initially,

the cell libraries supplied in MicroStation’s sample workspaces.
This could save you substantial time and effort. Also, many cell
libraries can be purchased from third-party vendors. These cell
libraries can be customized to meet your exact needs.
If you need a cell but cannot add one to a cell library (because,
for example, a system administrator is in charge of the cell
libraries in your company), consider using a group to place the
same elements repeatedly in a design. A group is an unnamed
cell that is not defined in a cell library. For more information
about groups, see Using groups on page 6-3.
Cell type
When you create a cell, you define the cell origin (the location
around which the cell is placed) and the cell type. There are four
types of cells: graphic, point, menu, and tutorial.
The symbology (color, line style, and line weight) of a graphic cell
is determined when it is created, whereas a point cell assumes
the active symbology when placed. A graphic cell rotates when
a view is rotated, while a point cell is view-independent. A
point cell can be especially useful for text.
A point cell has one “snappable” point — its origin — and is

always placed on the Active Level, regardless of the level(s) on
which its components were created. A graphic cell, however, is
level-independent; that is, it can be placed on levels relative to the
Active Level or on the same levels as when created, depending
on whether Relative is on. The differences between graphic and
point cells are summarized in this table:

Using Cells
Cell type
Graphic Cell Point Cell

Level level independent placed on active level
Rotation with view view independent
Snap to keypoints to cell origin
Symbology active settings when active settings when
created placed
The term “point cell” as discussed here refers to the Cell Type,
which is assigned when the cell is created. This should not be
confused with the “Active Point Cell,” which refers to a cell in
a cell library that is designated for placement using the tools
in the Points tool box . It is possible for a cell of either type
—graphic or point — to be the Active Point Cell.
For information about menu cells, see Digitizing Tablet Menus.
To create a cell
1. If no cell library is attached, attach one before continuing. See To
attach a previously existing cell library on page 4-4.
2. Draw the contents of the cell on the desired levels.
3. With the Element Selection tool, select all the elements
to be included in the cell.
or
Place a fence that contains all elements to be included
in the cell. See Specifying which elements are in the
fence contents on page 3-17.
4. In the Cells tool box, select the Define Cell Ori-

gin (see page 4-20) tool.
The prompt in the status bar is “Define origin.” The cell
origin is the point that is used to position the cell in a design.
When a cell is placed in a design, the cell origin will lie on
the data point entered to position it.

Using Cells
Cell type
5. Enter a data point to define the cell origin.

7. In the lower right corner of the settings box, click the Create button.
The Create Cell dialog box opens.
8. In the Name field, key in a name of six characters or fewer.

9. (Optional) — In the Description field, key in a description
of 27 characters or fewer.
10. From the option menu, choose the Cell types (see page 4-6) .
11. Click the Create button.
Alternatively, you can define the cell origin (steps 4–5) before selecting
or fencing the elements (step 3) to be included in the cell.
One or more cells can be made part of another cell, or nested. Just
select the cells to be nested when you create the new cell.
To edit the name or description of a cell

2. In the list box, select the name of the desired cell.
3. In the lower right corner of the Cell Library dialog
box, click the Edit button.

Using Cells
Placing Cells
The Edit Cell Information dialog box opens.
4. Edit the name, description, or both.

5. Click the Modify button.
To delete a cell from the attached cell library

2. In the list box, select the name of the desired cell.
3. In the lower right corner of the Cell Library dialog
box, click the Delete button.
Since the deletion cannot be undone, an alert box opens, asking
you to confirm that you want to delete the selected cell.1
4. Click OK.
Placing Cells
Before you can place a cell, you must activate it for the
desired method of placement:
For general Placement with the Place Active Cell tool

(see page 4-14) in the Cells tool box (see page 4-13)
. This cell is called the Active Cell.
1 If the selected cell is a shared cell in the active design file, its definition can be deleted from
the active design file only if there are no instances of the shared cell in the active design file.

Using Cells
Placing Cells
For general Placement with the Place Active Cell Matrix

tool (see page 4-16) in the Cells tool box (see page
4-13) . This cell is called the Active Cell.
As a line Terminator with the Place Active Line

Terminator tool (see page 4-21) in the Cells tool box.
This cell is called the Active Line Terminator.
As a Point cell, for placement with the tools in

the Points tool box (see page 1-63) . This cell is
called the Active Point Cell.
For Patterning with the Pattern Area tool (see

page 4-41) in the Patterns tool box. This cell is
called the Active Pattern Cell.
To designate a cell as an active cell

2. In the list box, select the name of the cell.
3. Click the Placement button in the Active Cells section.
4. Click the button — Placement, Terminator, Point, or
Pattern — in the Active Cells section.
Alternative method — To designate a cell

as an active cell
1. From the Utilities menu, choose Cell Selector.
The Cell Selector dialog box opens. Each cell in the attached

Using Cells
Controlling the level on which cells are placed
cell library is displayed on its own button.
2. Click the button on which the cell you want to make

active is displayed.
Not only is the cell activated, but the pre-designated cell
placement tool for that cell is automatically selected as well.
You can customize the Cell Selector dialog box for other uses.
Controlling the level on which cells are placed

The Relative tool setting for the Place Active Cell tool (see page
4-14) and Select and Place Cell tool (see page 4-18) controls the
level(s) on which a graphic cell is placed.
• If Relative is off, a graphic cell is placed on the same level(s)

as it was created (absolute placement).
• If Relative is on, a graphic cell is placed on a level or levels relative
to the Active Level. For example, consider a graphic cell that was
created with elements on levels 5, 7, and 8. If Relative is on and
the Active Level is 1, the cell is placed on levels 1, 3, and 4. If the
Active Level is 45, the cell is placed on levels 45, 47, and 48.
For information about what it means for a cell to be a “graphic

cell,” see Cell types on page 4-6.
Shared cells
If Use Shared Cells is on in the Cell Library dialog box,
cells are placed as shared cells.

Using Cells
Shared cells
What is a shared cell?

The first time you place a cell with Use Shared Cells on, the shared
cell definition (elements comprising the cell) is stored in the design
file in much the same way as it is stored in the cell library. To
place subsequent instances of the shared cell, the cell library
does not need to be attached. In other words, a shared cell can
have many instances in a design but only one definition. When a
shared cell instance is replaced using the Replace Cells tool (see
page 4-22) , all instances of the cell are replaced!
For an unshared cell, on the other hand, the library definition

is stored in the design file each time the cell is placed. Using
shared cells can therefore be a way to reduce design file size. The
reduction is greatest in files with cells that have a large number
of component elements and/or instances.
It is not necessary to know where the shared cell definition

is in the design; identifying any instance of the shared cell
identifies the actual definition.
Reasons to use shared cells

The use of shared cells is recommended for these reasons:
• Shared cells are faster to place and manipulate than unshared

cells. The first time a cell is placed in the design, the cell library
in which it is stored must be attached. If the cell is placed
as a shared cell, it is not necessary to have the cell library
attached to place additional instances of that cell.
• All instances of a shared cell in the design are replaced when
any instance of that shared cell is replaced.
• Shared cells can be associated with points on other elements,
if Association Lock (Settings >Locks > Association) is on.
For example, if a shared door cell is placed in a wall and
associated with that wall, the door will automatically
move if the wall is moved.
• Shared cells usually reduce design file size, thereby
improving performance.

Using Cells
Cells tool box
Cells tool box

The tools in the Cells tool box are used to place and manipulate cells.
To Select in the Cells tool box

Place the active cell.
Place Active Cell (see page 4-14)

Place a matrix (rows and
columns) of the active cell.
Place Active Cell Matrix

(see page 4-16)
Identify a cell and place an
additional instance(s).
Select and Place Cell (see

page 4-18)
Define the cell origin (the point
about which the cell is placed)
when creating the cell.
Define Cell Origin (see
page 4-20)
Display the name and level of a
cell that is in the design.
Identify Cell (see page 4-20)

Add a terminator to a line
segment.
Place Active Line Terminator

(see page 4-21)
Replace a cell(s) (or all instances
of a shared cell) in the design
with another of the same name
from an attached library. Replace Cells (see page 4-22)
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX CELLS OFF | ON | TOGGLE

Using Cells
Place Active Cell
To select and place cells by clicking thumbnail representations, use the

Cell Selector dialog box (Utilities menu > Cell Selector).
You can define Cell settings group components that, when selected,
automatically adjust the active scale factors for cell placement.
To convert an instance of a shared cell to an unshared cell, use the

Drop Element tool (see page 6-9) in the Groups tool box.
Place Active Cell
Used to place the Active Cell.
The Active Level (see page 1-3) is set in the Primary Tools tool box.
Tool Setting Effect

Active Cell Can be keyed-in here or set in the
Cell Library dialog box (Element
menu > Cells).
Active Angle Sets the angle by which the cell is
rotated, if Interactive is off.
X Scale Horizontal scale factor (along x-axis)1
Y Scale Vertical scale factor (along y-axis)1

Z Scale Depth scale factor (along z-axis)1

Using Cells
Place Active Cell
Tool Setting Effect

Relative If the active cell is a graphic cell2
and Relative is:
On—lowest level in cell is placed on the
Active Level, and higher levels in cell
are placed relative to the Active Level.3
Off—cell is placed on same level(s) as in

cell library (the level(s) that components
were on when the cell was created).
Interactive If on, the scale and rotation angle are
defined graphically by data points.
1 Direction in the cell definition. If a scale factor is between 0–1 (for example, 0.25),
the size is decreased. If a scale factor is 1, the size is unchanged from the cell
definition. If a scale factor is greater than 1, the size is increased.
2
Point cells are always placed on the Active Level.
3 For example, consider a graphic cell that was created with elements on levels 5, 7,
and 8. If Relative is on and the Active Level is 1, the cell is placed on levels 1, 3,
and 4. If the Active Level is 45, the cell is placed on levels 45, 47, and 48.
To place the Active Cell

1. Select the Place Active Cell tool.
2. Enter a data point to position the cell origin.
If Interactive is off, the cell is placed.
3. If Interactive is on, enter two more data points to define
the scale and the rotation angle.
4. Reset to finish.
or
Return to step 2 to place another instance of the cell.

Using Cells
AA 1
1 3
Key-in: PLACE CELL ICON

Key-in: PLACE CELL INTERACTIVE ABSOLUTE | RELATIVE
The ACTIVE CELL (AC=) and ACTIVE RCELL (AR=) key-ins can
be used to set a cell (a shared cell or a cell in the attached cell
library) as the active cell and place it in the design file.
Key-in Like Place Active Cell with

AC= <CELL_NAME>1 Relative Off
AR= <CELL_NAME>1 Relative On
1
cell_name is the name of a shared cell in the file or a cell in the
attached cell library or cell library list.
For example, to set CELL1 as the active cell and place it with its
lowest level on the Active Level, key in AR=CELL1.
Used to place a matrix of the Active Cell. The cells are placed
at the Active Angle and Active Scale on the same level(s)
as in the cell definition, unless it is a point cell. Point cell

Using Cells
components are placed on Active Level.
The Active Angle and Active Scale can be set in the Design File
Settings dialog box (Settings menu > Design File…). The Active
Level (see page 1-3) is set in the Primary Tools tool box.
Tool Setting Effect

Active Cell Sets the Active Cell, which
can be keyed-in here or set by
clicking the Placement button
in the Cell Library dialog box
(Element menu > Cells).
Rows Sets the number of rows.
Columns Sets the number of columns.
Row Spacing Sets the space, in working
units, between rows.
Column Sets the space, in working units,
Spacing between columns.
To place a matrix of the Active Cell

1. Select the Place Active Cell Matrix tool.
2. Enter a data point to position the cell matrix. The origin of the cell
in the lower left corner of the matrix is placed at this point.

Using Cells
Select and Place Cell
Place Active Cell

Matrix. D1 indicates
the row spacing. D2
indicates the column
spacing.
Key-in: MATRIX CELL rows, columns, row_spacing, column_spacing

Key-in: CM rows, columns, row_spacing, column_spacing
Used to identify a cell in the design file and place an

additional instance(s) of that cell.
The Active Level is set in the Primary Tools tool box.
Tool Setting Effect
Active Angle Sets the angle by which the

cell is rotated.
X Scale Sets horizontal scale factor
(along x-axis).1

Using Cells
Tool Setting Effect

Y Scale Sets vertical scale factor
(along y-axis).1
Z Scale In 3D, sets scale factor along
z-axis.1
Relative If Active Cell is a graphic cell
and Relative is:2
On—the lowest level in the cell is
placed on the Active Level, and
higher levels in the cell are placed
relative to the Active Level.3
Off—the cell is placed on the same

level(s) as in the cell library (the
level(s) that the components were
on when the cell was created).
1 Direction in the cell definition. If a scale factor is between 0–1 (for

example, 0.25), size is decreased; if it is 1, size is unchanged from the cell
definition; if it is greater than 1, size is increased.
2
Point cells are always placed on the Active Level.
3 For example, consider a graphic cell that was created with elements on levels 5, 7,
and 8. If Relative is on and the Active Level is 1, the cell is placed on levels 1, 3,
and 4. If the Active Level is 45, the cell is placed on levels 45, 47, and 48.
To select and place a cell

1. Select the Select and Place Cell tool.
2. Identify the cell.
If the cell is shared and Use Shared Cells is on, it
becomes the Active Cell.
If the cell is unshared, the cell library in which that cell is
stored must be attached or in the cell library list.
3. Enter a data point to place an instance of the cell.
4. Reset to finish.
or

Using Cells
Define Cell Origin
Return to step 3 to place another instance of the cell.
Key-in: SELECT CELL ICON

Key-in: SELECT CELL ABSOLUTE | RELATIVE
Define Cell Origin
Used to define the cell origin (the point about which the cell is placed).
See To create a cell on page 4-7 for information about creating cells.
To define a cell origin

1. Select the Define Cell Origin tool.
2. Enter a data point to define the cell origin.
An “O” displays at this point.
3. Reset to accept the cell origin.
or
Return to step 2.
Key-in: DEFINE CELL ORIGIN
It is often helpful to snap a tentative point to preview the

data point to be entered in step 2.
Identify Cell
Used to display the name and level of a cell in the design.

Using Cells
To display a cell’s name and level

1. Select the Identify Cell tool.
The cell’s name and level(s) are displayed in the status bar.
3. Accept the cell.
Key-in: IDENTIFY CELL
Used to place the Active Line Terminator cell on a line, line

string, or arc, primarily to place arrowheads.
Tool Setting Effect Alternate key-in

Terminator Sets Active Line ACTIVE
Terminator, which TERMINATOR
can also be set in the <TERMINATOR>
Cell Library dialog box or
(Element menu > Cells). LT= <TERMINATOR>
Scale Sets Active Line ACTIVE TSCALE
Terminator scale. <SCALE>
or
TS= <SCALE>
To place the Active Line Terminator

1. Select the Place Active Line Terminator tool.
2. Identify the element near the endpoint where the
terminator is to be placed.
3. Accept the line terminator.

Using Cells
Replace Cells
Place Active Line

Terminator
Key-in: PLACE TERMINATOR
To place text (a note) in the design with an arrow, it is easiest to use the
Place Note tool in the Text tool box (Tools menu > Main > Text).
Replace Cells
Used to replace single or multiple cells in a design file, or to update

cells in a design with cells of the same name from the active cell library.
Tool Setting Effect

Method Sets the method for replacing or updating cells.
Update—replaces the identified cell with the cell
of the same name from the active cell library.
Replace—replaces single or multiple cells

by identifying the cell and then identifying
its replacement cell.
Mode (with Method set to Replace) Sets the method
by which cells are replaced.
Single—lets you replace individual cells.
Global—replaces all cells of the same name

with the replacement cell.

Using Cells
Replace Cells
Tool Setting Effect

Use Active (with Method set to Replace) If on, selected
Cell cells are replaced with the Active Cell
entered in the text field.
Replace (with Method set to Replace) If on, all user data
Attributes (such as tags and database attributes) associated
with a cell are replaced by the new cell’s user data.
Use Fence Sets the method by which fence contents
are manipulated.
Inside—if Mode is set to Single, all cells inside
the fence are replaced. If Mode is set to Global,
all cells inside the fence, as well as cells outside
the fence having the same name as those
inside the fence, are replaced.
Overlap—if Mode is set to Single, all cells inside

and overlapping the fence are replaced. If Mode
is set to Global, all cells inside and overlapping
the fence, as well as cells outside the fence
having the same name as those inside and
overlapping the fence, are replaced.
Void—if Mode is set to Single, all cells outside

the fence are replaced. If Mode is set to Global,
all cells outside the fence, as well as cells
inside the fence having the same name as those
outside the fence, are replaced.
Void-Overlap—if Mode is set to Single, all cells

outside and overlapping the fence are replaced.
If Mode is set to Global, all cells outside and
overlapping the fence, as well as cells inside the
fence having the same name as those outside and
overlapping the fence, are replaced.
To update cells from the active cell library

1. Select the Replace Cells tool.
2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Update.

Using Cells
Replace Cells
3. Identify the cell to update.

4. Accept the cell.
If the identified cell is shared, all instances of the cell in
the design are replaced with the cell of the same name
from the active cell library.
If the identified cell is unshared, only the identified cell is replaced
with the cell of the same name from the active cell library.
To replace cells individually or globally

2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Replace.
3. Identify the cell to replace.

4. Identify the replacement cell.
5. Accept.
If Mode is set to Single, the identified cell is replaced.
If Mode is set to Global, an alert box opens to confirm
the replacement of all of the cells having the same
name as the identified cell.

Using Cells
Replace Cells
To replace individual or multiple cells

inside the fence
1. Place the fence around the cells to replace.
4. In the tool settings window, turn on Use Fence and
choose the Inside option.
6. Accept.
If Mode is set to Single, all of the cells inside the fence are replaced.
If Mode is set to Global, all of the cells inside the fence and
those cells outside the fence having the same name are replaced
in groups; after you click Yes in the alert box to confirm the
replacement of one group of cells, subsequent alert boxes
appear until all of the cells in the fence and those cells of the
same name outside of the fence are replaced.
To individually replace cells containing user data

3. In the tool settings window, set Mode to Single.
4. In the tool settings window, turn on Replace Attributes.
5. Identify the cell to replace.
7. Accept.
The old cell, including its user data, is replaced with
the new cell and its user data.
Key-in: REPLACE CELLS EXTENDED
To replace cells from the system command line, enter at the system
prompt:msbatch repcell.ma <design_file> <cell_library> <y | n>
<cell_to_replace> <replacement_cell> where design_file is the design

Using Cells
Hatching and Patterning
file on which to operate, cell_library is the cell library that contains

the replacement cell, y keeps attributes, n does not keep attributes,
cell_to_replace is the name of the cell in design_file to replace, and
replacement_cell is the name of the replacement cell in cell_library.
The Replace Cells tool cannot be used to replace groups (unnamed

cells, also known as “orphan cells”).
Hatching and Patterning

Patterning is the repeated placement of a hatch line or cell through
a closed area at a specified interval (spacing), scale, and angle.
You can place patterns on any designated level.
Controlling the display of patterns

Elements — either lines or cells — in a pattern are
designated as pattern elements.
To turn the display of patterns on or off

in one or more views
1. From the Settings menu, choose View Attributes.

Using Cells
Placing patterns in the design
2. From the View Number option menu, choose the

number of the desired view.
3. Turn Patterns on or off.
4. Click the Apply button.
5. Repeat steps 2–4 for additional views.
To turn the display of patterns on or off in all views

1. From the Settings menu, choose View Attributes.
2. Turn Patterns on or off.
3. Click the All button.
Placing patterns in the design

The tools in the Patterns tool box (see page 4-32) are used to
pattern the area inside a closed element with the Area attribute of
Solid, the fence, the intersection, union, or difference of multiple
elements, or the area enclosed by a set of elements.
The Hatch Area tool (see page 4-33) and Crosshatch Area tool (see
page 4-40) are used to place lines (hatch lines).

Using Cells
Associative patterns
Hatching
(left) and
Crosshatching
(right)
The Pattern Area tool (see page 4-41) is used to place the cell
designated as the Active Pattern Cell. For example, a wall face can
be patterned with a brick cell for a more realistic appearance.
Examples
of placing
the Active
Pattern Cell
Area patterning is a time-intensive operation. The time depends

on the complexity of the Active Pattern Cell and the size of the
patterned area. The time also depends on the number, intricacy,
and levels of hole elements within the area. More intricate
elements may require several minutes to pattern.
Associative patterns
The Hatch Area tool (see page 4-33) , Crosshatch Area tool (see
page 4-40) , and Pattern Area tool (see page 4-41) have a tool
setting called Associative Pattern that, if on when a pattern is
placed, causes the pattern to be associated with the patterned
element. This means that whenever the element is modified or
manipulated, the pattern is automatically updated.
If an element that has an associated pattern is rotated or scaled,

the associated pattern is also rotated or scaled.

Using Cells
Snappable patterns
Snappable patterns
The Hatch Area tool (see page 4-33) , Crosshatch Area tool (see page
4-40) , and Pattern Area tool (see page 4-41) have a tool setting
called Snappable Pattern, that if on when a pattern is placed,
causes the pattern elements to be eligible for snapping.
While in some cases being able to snap to pattern elements is desirable,

in others it is not, since having large numbers of pattern elements in
an area may make it difficult to select or identify a particular element.
Excluding areas inside a patterned area

from patterning
The areas enclosed by elements with the Area attribute of Hole
that are inside and on the same level as the Solid element usually
are not patterned. The specifics are as follows:
Associative Pattern Hole Elements Inside Element

Off Are not patterned.
On If they were grouped with the element
using the Group Holes tool (see page
6-22) they are not patterned and the
pattern is associated with the hole
elements as well as the solid.
Otherwise, the area enclosed by any
other element inside the element,
regardless of its Area attribute,
is patterned, and no associations
are made to it.
The area below and immediately surrounding the text in a
hole text element is not patterned.
Cells used for patterning

Pattern cells may contain any combination of elements, even
text. Cells used for area patterning are typically designed
specifically for that purpose.

Using Cells
Cells used for patterning
Pattern cells supplied with MicroStation

The cell libraries “archpa.cel” and “geompa.cel,” in Bentley’s
“Workspace\system\cell” directory, contain pattern cells that are
useful for various area patterning applications.
“archpa.cel” cell
library
“geompa.cel”
cell library

Using Cells
Tolerance
Guidelines for creating pattern cells
Additional pattern cells are created just as all other cells are.
Here are some guidelines to follow and restrictions to be aware
of when creating area pattern cells:
• Area pattern cells should contain at least one full cycle of the
pattern in both the horizontal and vertical directions.
• The cell range is used to determine the pattern matrix size.
If you want unused space at the pattern boundary, place
point elements (zero length lines) to expand the pattern
range. Point elements are not patterned.
• If the cell is created as a point cell, the pattern components
are placed on the Active Level in the active color and line
weight. If the cell is created as a graphic cell, the pattern
elements are placed with the same symbology and on the
same level as the element being patterned.
• The Pattern Area tool (see page 4-41) handles horizontal or
vertical lines that span the entire pattern cell in a special
manner. Instead of placing many contiguous line segments to
create the pattern, these lines are extended through the entire
pattern area. This results in a substantial increase in patterning
speed and also requires much less room in the design file.
• MicroStation does not support nested area pattern cells
or pattern cells larger than 8 KB.
Tolerance
When patterning along or inside a curved element, the curve is
approximated with a series of line segments that are used as “guides.”
The tool setting Tolerance is the maximum distance in working units

between a curved element and the approximating line segments used
to pattern. If the Tolerance is small, the line segments conform closely
to the curve and the approximation is more accurate, but processing
time increases. If the Tolerance is large, line segments do not conform
as closely to the curve and the approximation is less accurate, but

Using Cells
Patterns tool box
processing time decreases. The setting can be saved.
Left:
Tolerance as
denoted by
“T”. Center:
Approximating
line segments
if tolerance is T
large. Right:
Approximating
line segments
if tolerance
is small.
Patterns tool box

The tools in the Patterns tool box are used to pattern areas
and along linear elements.
To Select in the Patterns tool box

Hatch an area.
Hatch Area (see page 4-33)

Crosshatch an area.
Crosshatch Area (see page 4-40)

Pattern an area by tiling the
Active Pattern Cell.
Pattern Area (see page 4-41)

Pattern along a linear element.
Linear Pattern (see page 4-49)

Using Cells
Hatch Area
To Select in the Patterns tool box

Display the angle and scale
attributes of a pattern element.
Show Pattern Attributes

(see page 4-52)
Set the active pattern settings
to match the attributes of an
existing pattern element.
(see page 4-52)
Delete patterning.
Delete Pattern (see page 4-53)
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX PATTERNS OFF | ON | TOGGLE
Hatch Area
Used to hatch an area.

Using Cells
Hatch Area
Tool Setting Effect

Method Determines the area that is hatched.
Element—The interior of a shape , ellipse,
or closed B-spline curve1
; or between components of a multi-line.
Fence—The area inside the fence.
Intersection—Of two or more closed elements.1
Union—Of two or more closed elements.1
Difference—Between two or more

closed elements.1
Flood—The (minimum) area enclosed by a

set of elements (something like the flood fill
tool common in painting programs).
Points—An area defined by a series of data

points, each of which defines a vertex.
(Active Sets the interval between hatching lines.
Pattern)
Spacing
(Active Sets the angle, relative to the view, at
Pattern) which hatching lines are drawn.
Angle
Tolerance Maximum distance between curved
(see page element and approximating line segments
4-31) used to pattern.
Associative If on, hatching is associated with a patterned
Pattern element and is automatically moved or resized
when the element is manipulated or modified.
In other words, if the element is modified
later, the hatch lines are re-drawn.
If Method is Intersection, Union, Difference,
or Flood, a complex shape that bounds the
patterned area is created, and the hatch lines
are associated to the complex shape.2

Using Cells
Hatch Area
Tool Setting Effect

Snappable If on, hatching lines can be snapped to.
Pattern If off, hatching lines do not interfere with
snapping to other elements.
Locate (When Method is set to Flood) If on, all
Interior closed elements (regardless of their Area
Shapes attributes) inside the selected area are
avoided when the area is hatched.
Locate Text (When Method is set to Flood) If on,
any text or dimension text inside or
overlapping the selected area is avoided
when the area is hatched.
Max(imum) (When Method is set to Flood) The maximum
Gap distance, in working units, between the
endpoints of enclosing elements.
1 To be patterned, a closed element’s Area attribute must be Solid. An

element’s Area attribute is changed with the Change Element to Active
Area tool in the Change Attributes tool box.
2
To convert associative hatching into line elements that are no longer associated
with the element, use the Drop Associative Pattern tool in the Drop tool box.
To hatch the area inside a closed element

2. Select the Hatch Area tool.
3. Set Method to Element.
4. Enter a data point to define a point through which
a hatch line must pass.
Elements that are inside the selected element and have the

Using Cells
Hatch Area
Area attribute Hole are hatched as follows:
If Associative Then Hole elements inside

Pattern is selected element
Off Are not hatched.
On If they were grouped with the Solid
element using the Group Holes tool (see
page 6-22) , they are not hatched and
the hatching is associated with the Hole
elements as well as the Solid.
Otherwise, the area enclosed by any other
element inside the element, regardless
of its Area attribute, is hatched, and no
associations are made to it.
Alternative method — To hatch the area

inside a closed element
Hatching the area 1

inside a closed
element. “θ” denotes 2
the Active Pattern
Angle. “S” denotes S
the Active Pattern
θ
Spacing.

Using Cells
Hatch Area
To hatch the area between multi-line components

3. Identify one component that is to be a boundary of the hatched area.
4. Identify the other component that is to be a boundary
of the hatched area.
If Associative Pattern is off, this data point defines a point
through which one of the hatch lines must pass.
5. Reset.
Hatching the area

between multi-line 1
components
2
To hatch the fenced area

2. Set Method to Fence.

Using Cells
Hatch Area
To hatch the intersection or union of

closed elements
As you accept each successive element, the edges that
do not enclose the area to be hatched are hidden. The
resulting area is highlighted.

Intersection “Elements do not intersect” is displayed
in the status bar.
Union All elements are hatched.

The area is hatched. The effect of the final acceptance point
depends on the Associative Pattern tool setting.
If Associative Then this data point

Pattern is
Off Defines a point through which a
hatch line must pass.
On Accepts the hatch lines, which are
associated to a complex shape created from
the element’s intersection or union. A hatch
line must pass through one of the vertices.

Using Cells
Hatch Area
To hatch the difference between elements

2. Set Method to Difference.

Pattern is
hatch line must pass.
On Accepts the hatch lines, which are
associated to a complex shape created from
the element’s intersection or union. A hatch
line must pass through one of the vertices.
The area to be hatched is displayed dynamically.
5. Reset to finish.
To hatch an area enclosed by bounding elements

2. Set Method to Flood.
3. (Optional) — If you want the hatching to avoid closed elements,
text or dimension text inside the selected area, turn on
Locate Interior Shapes and Locate Text.
4. Enter a data point in the area enclosed by the bounding

elements. (To minimize the time required, zoom in to the area
of interest or select the bounding elements.)
The area to be patterned is displayed dynamically.
If there are selected elements, only selected elements are
considered as possible bounding elements. If no elements
are selected, all elements in the view in which the data

Using Cells
Crosshatch Area
point is entered are considered.

5. Accept the hatching.
The area is hatched. If Locate Interior Shapes and Locate Text is
on, any inside closed element (regardless of its Area attribute),
text or dimension text is avoided. If Associative Pattern is on,
the hatch lines are associated to a complex shape created from
the bounding elements and the inside elements.
To hatch an area defined by data points

2. Set Method to Points.
4. Reset to finish.
Key-in: HATCH ICON | DIFFERENCE | ELEMENT | FENCE

Crosshatch Area
Used to crosshatch an area.
The tool settings and procedures are the same as those for the
Hatch Area tool (see page 4-33) , except that there are additional
fields to specify the Spacing and Angle of the crosshatch lines,
in addition to those for the hatch lines.

Using Cells
Pattern Area
Crosshatch 1
Area. “θ1” and
“θ2” denote
2
the Active
Pattern Angles. S1
“S1” and “S2” S2
θ
denote the θ1
2
Active Pattern
Spacing.
Key-in: CROSSHATCH ICON

Key-in: CROSSHATCH DIFFERENCE | ELEMENT | FENCE
Pattern Area
Used to pattern an area by tiling the Active Pattern Cell.

Using Cells
Pattern Area
Tool Setting Effect

Method Determines the area that is patterned.
Element—The interior of a shape , ellipse,
or closed B-spline curve1
; or between components of a multi-line.
Fence—The area inside the fence.
Intersection—Of two or more closed elements.1
Union—Of two or more closed elements.1
Difference—Between two or more

closed elements.1
Flood—The (minimum) area enclosed by a

set of elements (something like the flood fill
tool common in painting programs).
Points—An area defined by a series of data

points, each of which defines a vertex.
(Active) The cell that is tiled to create the pattern. Can
Pattern Cell also be set with Pattern button in the Cell
Library setting box (Element menu > Cells).
(Active Sets the factor by which the Active
Pattern) Pattern Cell is scaled.2
Scale
Row Spacing The interval between rows.3
Column The interval between columns.
Spacing
(Active The angle, relative to the view, at which
Pattern) instances of the active Pattern Cell are placed.
Angle
Tolerance Maximum distance between a curved
(see page element and the approximating line
4-31) segments used for patterning.

Using Cells
Pattern Area
Tool Setting Effect

Associative If on, patterning is associated with a patterned
Pattern element and is automatically updated when
the element is manipulated or modified. If
the Method is Intersection, Union, Difference,
or Flood, a complex shape that bounds the
patterned area is created, and the patterning
is associated to the complex shape.4
Snappable If on, patterning cells can be snapped to. If
Pattern off, patterning cells do not interfere with
snapping to other elements.
Locate (When Method is set to Flood) If on, all
Interior closed elements (regardless of their Area
Shapes attributes) inside the selected area are
avoided when the area is patterned.
Locate Text (When Method is set to Flood) If on,
any text or dimension text inside or
overlapping the selected area is avoided
when the area is patterned.
Max(imum) (When Method is set to Flood) The maximum
Gap distance, in working units, between the
endpoints of enclosing elements.
1 To be patterned, an element’s Area attribute must be Solid. An element’s

Area attribute is changed with the Change Element to Active Area tool
in the Change Attributes tool box.
2
If between 0–1 (for example, 0.25), size is decreased. If 1, size is unchanged
from cell definition. If greater than 1, size is increased.
3
If the Row Spacing or Column Spacing is zero, the instances of the Active
Pattern Cell are placed contiguous to one another.
4
To convert associative patterning into primitive elements that are
no longer associated with the element, use the Drop Associative
Pattern tool in the Drop tool box.

Using Cells
Pattern Area
To pattern the area inside a closed element

2. Select the Pattern Area tool.
4. Enter a data point to place the origin of one of the
pattern cell instances.
Elements that are inside the selected element and have the
Area attribute Hole are patterned as follows:
If Associative Then Hole elements inside

Pattern is selected element
Off Are not patterned.
On If they were grouped with the Solid
element using the Group Holes tool (see
page 6-22) they are not patterned and
the pattern is associated with the Hole
elements as well as the Solid.
Otherwise, the area enclosed by any other
element inside the element, regardless
of its Area attribute, is patterned, and
no associations are made to it.
Alternative method — To pattern the area

inside a closed element

Using Cells
Pattern Area
At left, pattern cell

HBONE is used to
pattern a complex
shape. At right,
the outside block
is patterned with
ENBOND. Since
the inner block has
the area attribute of
Hole, the area inside
it is not patterned.
To pattern the area between multi-line

components
3. Identify one component that is to be a boundary of
the patterned area.
4. Identify the other component that is to be a boundary
of the patterned area.
If Associative Pattern is off, this data point also places the
origin of one of the pattern cell instances.
If Associative Pattern is on, the pattern is associated with the
multi-line and the origin of one of the pattern cell instances is
positioned on one of the multi-line’s vertices.
5. Reset.
To pattern the fenced area

2. Set Method to Fence.

Using Cells
Pattern Area
Patterning the
fenced area. Left:
The pattern cell
SPGRID. Right: The
pattern cell WOOD
placed with the
Active Pattern Angle
(denoted by “A”) set
to 30 .
To pattern the intersection or union of

closed elements
As you accept each successive element, the edges that
do not enclose the area to be patterned are hidden. The
resulting area is highlighted.

Intersection “Elements do not intersect” displays
in the status bar.
Union All elements are patterned.

The area is patterned. The effect of the final acceptance point

Using Cells
Pattern Area
depends on the Associative Pattern tool setting.

Pattern is
pattern line must pass.
On Accepts the pattern lines, which are
associated to a complex shape created
from the element’s intersection or
union. A pattern line must pass through
one of the vertices.
To pattern the difference between elements

4. Reset to finish.

Pattern is
pattern line must pass.
On Accepts the pattern lines, which are
associated to a complex shape created
from the element’s intersection or
union. A pattern line must pass through
one of the vertices.

Using Cells
Pattern Area
To pattern an area enclosed by bounding elements

3. (Optional) — If you want the patterning to avoid closed
elements, text or dimension text inside the selected area, turn
on Locate Interior Shapes and Locate Text.
4. Enter a data point in the area enclosed by the bounding

elements. (To minimize patterning time, zoom in to the area
of interest or select the bounding elements.)
If there are selected elements, only selected elements are
considered as possible bounding elements. If no elements
are selected, all elements in the view in which the data
point is entered are considered.
5. Accept the patterning.
The area is patterned. If Locate Interior Shapes and Locate
Text is on, any inside closed element (regardless of its Area
attribute), text or dimension text is avoided. If Associative Pattern
is on, the patterning is associated to a complex shape created
from the bounding elements and the inside elements.
To pattern an area defined by data points

2. Set Method to Points.
4. Reset to finish.
Key-in: PATTERN AREA DIFFERENCE | ELEMENT | FENCE

Using Cells
Linear Pattern
Linear Pattern
Used to draw a pattern along a linear element.
The pattern cell (top) and the element (bottom) used for the
illustrations in the table below.

Using Cells
Linear Pattern
Tool Setting Effect

Cycle Sets the manner in which the active
Pattern Cell is placed.
Single—Placed with one instance on
each segment1
. If a segment’s length is less than 80% of the
cycle length, the segment is patterned with
the first horizontal line in the pattern cell.
Multiple —Place along an element at a

scale that is adjusted, if necessary, from the
Active Pattern Scale so that every instance is
complete along each segment. a If a segment’s
length is less than 80% of the cycle length,
the segment is patterned with the first
horizontal line in the pattern cell.
Truncated—Place along the element at

the Active Pattern Scale. If necessary,
the last instance is truncated.

Using Cells
Linear Pattern
Tool Setting Effect

Cycle Complete —Placed along the element at a
scale that is adjusted, if necessary, from
the Active Pattern Scale so that only
complete instances are placed.
Pattern Cell The cell that is tiled to create the pattern. Can
also be set with the Pattern button in the Cell
Library dialog box (Element menu > Cells).
Scale The active Pattern Cell is scaled by this factor.2
Tolerance Maximum distance between a curved element
(see page and the approximating line segments.
4-31)
1 A line, arc, curve, or ellipse; or each segment of a line string, shape,

complex chain, or complex shape.
2 If between 0–1 (for example, 0.25), the size is decreased. If 1, the size is
unchanged from the cell definition. If greater than 1, the size is increased.
To pattern a linear element

1. Select the Linear Pattern tool.
3. Enter a data point to indicate the pattern direction.
Key-in:PATTERN LINE SINGLE | MULTIPLE |

ELEMENT | SCALE
Linear patterning is supported to maintain compatibility with existing

applications and for customers who have existing designs with linear
patterns. In most cases, however, defining a Custom Line Style (see
page 1-17) and using linear element placement tools is far more

Using Cells
efficient, and is recommended for new design work.
Used to display the Pattern Angle and Pattern Scale

attributes of a pattern element.
To display the angle and scale of a pattern element

1. Select the Show Pattern Attributes tool.
2. Identify the pattern element.
The element highlights, and its type and level display
in the status bar.
The pattern angle and scale are displayed in the status bar.
Key-in: SHOW PATTERN
Used to set the active pattern settings (Angle, Scale, and Spacing) to
match the attributes of a pattern element in the design.

Using Cells
Delete Pattern
To match the active pattern settings to those

of an existing pattern element
1. Select the Match Pattern Attributes tool.
2. Identify the pattern element.
3. Accept the pattern element.
The new active pattern settings are displayed in the status bar.
Key-in: ACTIVE PATTERN MATCH
Delete Pattern
Used to delete patterning.
To delete patterning
1. Select the Delete Pattern tool.
2. Identify the patterning to delete or, in the case of associative
patterning, the patterned element.
Key-in: DELETE PATTERN
Dimension-driven Cells
Cells have many uses: They can save time drawing repeated
details, make it easy to update details throughout a design, provide
uniformity in a project, and so on. Although they can be modified,
most cells are placed as static parts of a design.
A dimension-driven cell has special “intelligence.” It is not static, but
dynamically changes based on relationships that were defined when
it was created. For information about creating dimension-driven

Using Cells
cells, see Dimension-driven Cells. A cell in the design that is based

on a dimension-driven cell is called a derived cell.
To place a derived cell

1. Make the dimension-driven cell the active cell.
2. Key in MDL LOAD DDCELL.
3. Key in PLACE CELL DIMENSION.
The Dimension-Driven Design dialog box opens. A list box
with each dimension or constant’s initial value (the value
stored in the library cell) is displayed.
4. (Optional) — For each dimension or constant you want

to change, select it in the list box, press áTabñ, and key
in the new value in the Edit field.
If the cell is visible in a view, the changes display dynamically.
5. (Optional) — To place the cell with active constraints so it can be

modified after placement, turn on Save Constraints.
6. Enter a data point to position the cell’s origin.

The cell is derived and placed. If the cell cannot be derived
from the supplied dimension and constant values, the cell is
not placed, and you are prompted to enter new values.
Dimensions can be tagged by a constant or, if not, appear in

the list labelled as “DIMENSION.”

Using Cells
To modify a derived cell

1. Key in MDL LOAD DDCELL.
2. Key in MODIFY DIMENSIONS.
The Dimension-Driven Design dialog box opens. A list box with
each dimension or constant’s value is displayed.
4. For each dimension or constant you want to change, select it in the
list box, press áTabñ, and key in the new value in the Edit field.
5. Enter a data point to modify the cell.
If the cell cannot be derived from the supplied dimension
and constant values, the cell is not modified and you are
prompted to enter new values.

Using Cells

Reference Files
Reference files are design or raster files that can be attached and
displayed, plotted, and (in the case of reference design files) used for
construction purposes, but they cannot be modified in any way. In this
chapter, you will find procedures relating to reference files, including:
• Using Reference Design Files (see page 5-1)
• Using Reference Raster Files (see page 5-34)
• Adjusting the File Update Sequence (see page 5-46)
User preferences that affect reference file operations are

set by choosing Preferences from the Workspace menu and
selecting the Reference File category.
Using Reference Design Files

A reference design file is a design file that is attached or associated with
the active design file. Elements in a reference file display as though
they were in the active design. They can be used as construction aids as
well. (Although you cannot manipulate the elements in a reference file,
you can snap to them and even copy them into the active design file.)
It is sometimes convenient to refer to one part of a design while
drawing in another area by attaching the active design file to itself.
Attaching reference design files

The most common way to attach a reference design file is to attach
it coincidentally, which means that the coordinates of the reference
file’s design plane are aligned with those of the active design
file, without any rotation, scaling, or offset.

Reference Files
To attach a reference design file coincidentally

1. From the File menu, choose Reference.
The Reference Files dialog box opens.
Reference
Files dialog
box —
controls for
working with
reference
design files
2. From the dialog box’s Display menu, choose Design.

3. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Attach.
The Preview Reference dialog box opens.

Reference Files
4. (Optional) — Select the reference file to attach and click Preview.
5. Select the reference file to attach and click OK.

The Attach Reference File dialog box opens.
6. (Optional) — (not recommended unless the reference file path is

expected never to change) To retain the reference file’s full path
specification in the attachment information, turn on Save Full
Path (see Making portable reference file attachments on page 5-7).
7. (Optional) — (unless the selected reference file is already

attached) In the dialog box’s Logical Name field, key in a
brief name (up to 20 characters) for the file.
8. (Optional) — In the dialog box’s Description field, key in a

description (up to 40 characters) of the file.
9. From the Attachment Mode option menu, choose Coincident.

By default, Attachment Mode is set to Coincident.
10. (Optional) — Set Scale Line Styles.
If Scale Line Styles is on, custom line style components (for
example, dashes) can be scaled after attachment. If off, custom

Reference Files
line style components cannot be scaled.
11. Click OK.
Alternative method — To attach a reference

design file coincidentally
2. In the list box, right-click and choose Attach Ref from
the menu that appears.
3. Perform steps 4 through 11 in the alternate procedure above.
Since the same design file can be attached many times, give
the attachments logical names and descriptions that help you
remember which attachment is which.
The default setting of Save Full Path is controlled by the preference

Store Full Path When Attached, which is set in the Reference File
category of the Preferences dialog box (Workspace menu > Preferences).
Attachments using saved views

Attaching reference files can be a useful way to set up a
plot. In composing the plot, you can attach only the portion
of a design in a saved view.
To attach a reference design file using a saved view

1. Follow steps 1–8 in the procedure To attach a reference

Reference Files
design file coincidentally on page 5-2.

2. In the Saved Views list box, select a saved view.
Selecting a
saved view
In the Attachment Mode option menu, Saved View is

automatically chosen.
3. (Optional) — In the Scale (Master:Ref) fields, define
the ratio of design file Master Units to reference file
master units. For example:
To set Left Right

One design file master unit 1 1
per reference file master unit
(the default).
Five design file master units per 5 1
reference file master unit.
4. (Optional) — Set Scale Line Styles.

If Scale Line Styles is on, custom line style components (for
example, dashes) are scaled by the Scale (Master:Ref) factors. If
off, custom line style components are not scaled.
5. Click OK.
The area of the reference file’s saved view dynamically displays

Reference Files
as a rectangle centered about the pointer.

6. Enter a data point to locate the center of the reference
file attachment (to position the center of the reference
file’s saved view).
Since the same design file can be attached many times, you should
give the attachments unique logical names and descriptions to
help you remember which attachment is which.
To attach the active design file to itself

as a reference file
3. From the Reference Files dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Attach.
4. In the Files list box, select the active design file and click OK.
The Attach Reference File dialog box opens. Saved views
display in the Saved Views list box.
5. Attach the design file to itself coincidentally. Follow
steps 7–11 in the procedure To attach a reference design
file coincidentally on page 5-2.
or
Attach a saved view. Follow steps 7–8 in the procedure To
attach a reference design file coincidentally on page 5-2,
then steps 2–6 in the procedure To attach a reference design
file using a saved view on page 5-4.
Alternative method — To attach the active

design file to itself as a reference file

Reference Files

3. Perform steps 4–5 in the alternate procedure above.
The preference Update Self Attachments determines whether reference

files that are attached to themselves (self-attached) are automatically
updated to reflect modifications to the active design file. Update Self
Attachments is on by default. This makes it easier to use self-attached
reference files, for example, to generate drawings of 3D models.
Making portable reference file attachments

When a reference file is attached, the full path to the directory in which
the reference file resides is not retained by default in the attachment
information that is stored in the active design file. This approach allows
you to make portable reference file attachments — attach reference
files so they will be located by MicroStation in the following situations:
• The reference files are accessed across a network.

• The active design file and reference files are moved
to a different directory.
• The active design file and reference files are transferred
to a system with a different directory structure, or
even to a different platform.
To use the most flexible technique for making portable reference file
attachments, you must first define a custom configuration variable
whose definition specifies the directory in which reference files reside.
For information about defining custom configuration variables, see
Working With Configuration Variables in the Administrator’s Guide.

Reference Files
To attach a reference file residing in a directory

specified by a custom configuration variable
3. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Attach.
The Preview Reference dialog box opens. Even if the
reference file you want to attach is displayed in the Files
list box, do not skip steps 4-5.
4. From the dialog box’s Directory menu, choose Select
Configuration Variable.
The Select Configuration Variable dialog box opens.
5. In the list box, select by name the configuration variable

whose definition specifies the directory in which the
reference file resides, and click OK.
In the Preview Reference dialog box, the files in the
specified directory are listed.
6. In the list box, select the reference file to attach and click OK.
The Attach Reference File dialog box opens.
7. Attach the design file to itself coincidentally. Follow
steps 7–11 in the procedure To attach a reference design
file coincidentally on page 5-2.
or
Attach a saved view. Follow steps 7–8 in the procedure To
attach a reference design file coincidentally on page 5-2,
then steps 2–6 in the procedure To attach a reference design

Reference Files
file using a saved view on page 5-4.

The configuration variable name is stored, along with the
filename, (optional) logical name and (optional) description,
in the attachment information. The variable name displays
in the File Name column in the Reference Files dialog box
to indicate the portable attachment.
Alternative method — To attach a reference

file residing in a directory specified by a
custom configuration variable
3. Perform steps 4–7 in the alternate procedure above.
MicroStation will locate a reference file attached in this manner
whenever the design file is opened — on any system — as
long as the custom configuration variable is defined and the
reference file is stored in the specified directory. The specified
directory can vary from system to system.
Portability, albeit without the same flexibility, can be achieved by

defining the MS_RFDIR configuration variable rather than a custom
configuration variable. MS_RFDIR specifies the directories in which
MicroStation attempts to locate attached reference files after first
using the attachment information (including custom configuration
variables) and, failing that, searching the same directory as the active
design file. For information about defining configuration variables, see
Working With Configuration Variables in the Administrator’s Guide.
Helping locate “lost” attachments

If MicroStation cannot locate a reference file upon opening a design
file, “file not found” is shown in the Full Path field when the file
is selected in the Reference Files dialog box.

Reference Files
To update an attachment when MicroStation

cannot locate the file
3. In the list box, double-click the reference file.
The Attachment Settings dialog box opens.
4. In the File Name field, key in the new file specification.

or
Click the Browse button and select the reference file in the
Reattach Reference File dialog box. Then click OK to return
to the Attachment Settings dialog box.
5. (Optional) — (not recommended unless the reference file
path is expected not to ever again change) To retain the
reference file’s full path specification in the attachment
information, turn on Save Full Path (see Making portable
reference file attachments on page 5-7).
6. Click OK.

Reference Files
Alternative method — To update an attachment

when MicroStation cannot locate the file
3. In the list box, select the reference file.
4. From the setting box’s Settings menu, choose Attachment.
5. Follow steps 4-6 in the alternate procedure above.
Attaching remote reference files

The Remote Attach function allows you to select a URL as a design
file location instead of a specific local design file.
To attach a remote reference file

2. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Attach URL.
The Select Remote Design File to Attach dialog box opens. See
Select Remote Design File dialog box in the Reference Guide
for descriptions of the controls in this dialog box.
3. In the URL field, specify the path to the remote reference file.
5. Click OK.
Reference File Agent
Reference File Agent enables you to automatically maintain local

copies of remote reference files. Upon loading the Reference File
Agent, each attached reference file is checked against a data file
to see if a URL has been associated. If so, an HTTP request is
automatically sent to check the last-modified date of the remote file

Reference Files
against the local copy. If a newer copy exists at the remote URL,
the status of the file changes to “Out of Date.”
Status Description
N/A Reference file has no associated URL.
Current Remote file is the same age or older.
Unknown Remote file could not be found, or the last modified
date was not available. Generally indicates that
the URL is invalid, or that there was a network
error when the remote site was contacted.
Out of Date Local copy of the reference file is older
then the remote copy.
Reference files with more than one logical name have only one entry in
the Reference File Agent. Downloading the associated remote URL
results in the update of all logical entries associated with the local file.
To access the Reference File Agent

1. From the Reference Files dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Ref Agent.
or
From the E-Links tool box (Tools > Engineering Links),
select Load RefAgent.
The Reference File Agent dialog box opens.

Reference Files
Working with attached reference design files

Except for the attachment tool, reference design file tools operate
on the reference file(s) that are selected in the Reference Files
dialog box. If no reference file is selected there, you are prompted
to identify a reference file. See Identifying reference design
files on page 5-25 for more information.
The áCtrlñ and áShiftñ keys are used to select multiple reference files.
To copy elements from a reference file

to the active design
1. In the Reference (Design) Files dialog box’s list box, select the
reference file in which the elements are located.
2. Turn on Display, Snap, and Locate.
3. Select or fence the elements to be copied.
4. In the Manipulate tool box, select the Copy tool (see page 3-35) .
5. Enter a data point to define the origin of the elements to be copied.

The elements are dynamically displayed as the pointer
is moved about the screen.
6. Enter a data point to define the origin of the copies of
the elements in the active design.
To copy elements from a reference file to the active design

without moving them, enter the data points in steps 5 and
6, above, without moving the pointer.
To turn the display of a reference file off or on

1. In the Reference (Design) Files dialog box’s list box, click the
Display column of the entry for the reference file.

Reference Files
Alternative method — To turn the display

of a reference file off or on
1. In the Reference (Design) Files dialog box’s list box,
select the reference file.
2. Turn the Display check box off or on.
To turn the display of levels in a reference file

off or on (in a particular view or views)
2. From the dialog box’s Settings menu, choose Levels.
The Ref(erence) Levels dialog box opens.
Ref(erence)
Levels dialog
box
3. From the View Number option menu, choose the desired view.
4. Click the number of any level or levels to toggle its
display in the chosen view.
5. Click Apply to apply the level map to the chosen view.
or
Click All to apply the level map to all views.

of levels in a reference file off or on (in a

Reference Files
particular view or views)

2. From the dialog box’s list box, select the reference file.
3. Select the Numbers tab.
Level Manager
dialog box with
the Numbers tab
displayed
To control level symbology for a reference

design file

Reference Files

2. From the dialog box’s Settings menu, choose Level Symbology.
The Ref(erence) Level Symbology dialog box opens.
Ref(erence)
Level
Symbology
dialog box
The number and filename of the reference file display in

the title bar of the dialog box.
the Element Attributes dialog box (see Setting the Active
Element Attributes on page 1-1).
4. In the list box on the left side of the dialog box, select a level
or a range of levels and click the Apply button.
or
Double-click a level.
5. Click OK.

Reference Files
Alternative method — To control level symbology

for a reference design file
2. In the dialog box’s list box, select the reference file.
The number and filename of the reference file are displayed
in the title bar of the dialog box.
Level
Manager
dialog box
with the
Symbology
tab displayed

the Element Attributes dialog box (see Setting the Active
Element Attributes on page 1-1).
5. In the tab page’s list box, select a level or a range of levels and
click the Apply button at the bottom-right of the tab page.
or
Double-click a level.

Reference Files
To turn the display of level symbology in a

reference design file on or off (in all views)
2. From the dialog box’s Settings menu, choose Level Symbology.
The Ref(erence) Level Symbology dialog box opens.
4. Click OK.

of level symbology in a reference design
file on or off (in all views)
2. In the dialog box’s list box, select the reference file.
5. Click Apply.
To turn snapping to elements in a reference

design file on or off
Snap column of the entry for the reference file.
Alternative method — To turn snapping to

elements in a reference design file on or off

Reference Files

2. Turn the Snap check box on or off.
To control whether elements in a reference file

can be identified (for construction or )
Locate column of the entry for the reference file.
Alternative method — To control whether

elements in a reference file can be identified
(for construction or )
2. Turn the Locate check box on or off.
To change a reference file’s logical name

or description
double-click the reference file.
The Attachment Settings dialog box opens.
2. In the Logical Name field, key in the new logical name.

3. In the Description field, key in the new description.
4. Click OK.

Reference Files
Alternative method — To change a reference

file’s logical name or description
2. From the dialog box’s Settings menu, choose Attachment.
To move a reference file

1. In the list box in the Reference (Design) Files dialog
box, select the reference file.
2. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Move.
3. Enter a data point to define the origin of the move.
4. Enter a data point to define the destination.
To scale a reference file

2. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Scale.
3. In the Scale Reference File tool settings, enter the scale ratio.
4. Enter a data point to define the point about which to
scale the reference file.
To rotate a reference file

2. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Rotate.
3. In the Rotate Reference File tool settings, enter the angle setting(s).

Reference Files
To mirror a reference file about a horizontal axis

2. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Mirror Horizontal.
3. Enter a data point to define the horizontal axis.
To mirror a reference file about a vertical axis

2. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Mirror Vertical.
3. Enter a data point to define the vertical axis.
To define a reference file clipping boundary

(outside boundary of the displayed area)
1. To define the reference file clipping boundary’s position,
place a fence with the Place Fence tool.
3. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Clip Boundary.
The clipping boundary is a shape with up to 101 vertices.
The boundaries of a saved view can be used as the clipping boundary

when a reference file is attached (see To attach a reference
design file using a saved view on page 5-4).
These view attributes that affect how clipped reference

files are displayed are set in the View Attributes dialog box
(Settings menu > View Attributes).

Reference Files
View Attribute Effect

Ref(erence File) If on, reference file clipping boundaries are
Boundaries displayed in the view as a dashed line.
Fast Ref(erence File) If on, all attached reference files are
Clipping clipped to rectangular boundaries, which
are orthogonal to the view and enclose the
boundary points. If off, the reference file
is displayed and plotted as specified by a
non-rectangular clipping boundary.
To place a reference file clipping mask that

covers part of the reference file that is inside
the clipping boundary
1. To define the reference file clipping mask’s position, place
a fence with the Place Fence tool.
3. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Clip Mask.
The fenced area of the reference file no longer displays.
More than one clipping mask can be specified for a reference

file. Reference file elements display only if they are inside the
clipping boundary and outside all clipping masks.
To selectively delete a reference file’s

clipping mask(s)
2. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Clip Mask Delete.
A clipping mask is highlighted for deletion.
or

Reference Files
Reset to keep the highlighted clipping mask.

The next clipping mask, if any, is highlighted for deletion.
4. Repeat step 3 for each subsequent clipping mask.
To define a reference file front clipping

plane (3D only)
2. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Clip Front.
3. Enter a data point to define the front clipping plane depth.
The reference file updates with the new clipping plane.
To define a reference file back clipping

plane (3D only)
2. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Clip Back.
3. Enter a data point to define the back clipping plane depth.
The reference file updates with the new clipping plane.
To update reference design file elements in a view

1. Key in REFERENCE UPDATE.
2. Identify the reference file by identifying one of its elements.
or
Identify the reference file by keying in its logical name or
filename in the Key-in window.
To reload a reference file


Reference Files

2. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Reload.
The reference file is read from the disk and redrawn.
Reloading a reference file lets you see changes that have been
made to the reference file by a co-worker on the network since
the reference file was last attached or reloaded.
To detach a reference file

2. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Detach.
An alert box asks you to confirm that the selected
reference file is to be detached.
3. Click OK.
Alternative method — To detach a reference file

1. In the Level Manager dialog box’s list box, select the reference file.
2. In the list box, right-click and choose Detach Ref from
The file is detached and its name is removed from the list box.
To detach all reference files

select any reference file.
2. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Detach All.
An alert box asks you to confirm that all reference
files are to be detached.
3. Click OK.
Alternative method — To detach all reference files

1. In the Level Manager dialog box’s list box, select all

Reference Files
Modifying attachment information from the system command line
of the reference files.

2. In the list box, right-click and choose Detach Ref from
All of the files are detached and their names are
removed from the list box.
Identifying reference design files

Identifying a reference file on which to operate is an alternative
to selecting the reference file in the Reference Files dialog box’s
list box; the identification technique is typically used with tools
in the Reference Files tool box (see page 5-28) .
To identify a reference design file

1. In a view window, identify an element in the reference file.
or
In the Key-in window, key in the reference file’s
filename or logical name.
The only way to identify multiple reference design files is to

select them in the Reference Files dialog box.
Modifying attachment information from the

system command line
You can modify a design file’s attachment information (relating
to attached reference design files only) without entering the
MicroStation environment. The following types of attachment
information can be modified in this manner:
• filename
• logical name
• description

Reference Files
Modifying attachment information from the system command line
To modify attachment information from

the system command line
1. Start MicroStation with the following command line:
ustation -waREF <dgn_file>
A text window opens, in which “MAIN MENU” options display.
2. (Optional) — To list all reference file attachment info, ordered
by slot number, press á1ñ to select MAIN MENU option
“List all reference file attachments.”
3. Press á2ñ to select MAIN MENU option “Modify

reference file attachment.”
A prompt, “Enter slot number to modify >,” displays.
4. Enter the slot number for the reference file whose attachment
information you are modifying.
“MODIFY MENU” options are displayed.
5. To modify the filename associated with the attachment, press á2 ñ.
or
To modify the attachment’s logical name, press á3ñ.
or
To modify the attachment’s description, press á4ñ.
A prompt, “Change to … >,” displays showing the chosen
information. The cursor blinks at the end of the prompt line.
6. In the prompt line, edit the filename, logical name, or
description as desired, and press áReturn ñ.
7. To modify additional information for the same reference
file, return to step 5.
or
Press á5ñ to return to MAIN MENU.
8. To modify additional information for a different reference
file, return to step 2.
or
To exit, press á3ñ.

Reference Files
Merging reference design files
Merging reference design files

It is possible to merge a design file and all attached reference design
files into a single output file. Merging ensures that all data attached
to a single design file (all views, angles of views, rendering settings,
and other settings) are stored in a single location. The result of a
merging operation is effectively a snapshot of the design file.
This capability is especially useful for plotting active files,

where many users are frequently changing a file’s composition,
views, settings, and attachments.
To merge the active design file and all attached

reference design files
1. Key in MDL LOAD REFMERGE.
The last view in which a data point was entered is processed. Only
the displayed levels of the processed view are copied to the output
file. This output file has the same name as the active design file,
but with the extension “.rcd” (which stands for “record drawing”).
To merge reference design files from the

system command line
1. Exit MicroStation.
2. Set the system environment variable MS_INITAPPS to “refmerge.”
3. Start MicroStation with the following command
line:ustation:v<view_number> <file_specification>
For example, ustation:v2 *.dgn processes all the design files in
the current directory and uses view 2 as the source view.
Be sure to unset the system environment variable MS_INITAPPS

when the operation is complete.
There is no inverse of a reference design file merging operation.

Reference Files
Reference Files tool box
The tools in the Reference Files tool box (Tools menu >
Reference Files) are used to:
• Attach reference design files to the active design file.

• Control the positioning, scaling, and orientation of
attached reference design files.
• Detach reference design files from the active design file.
These tools can also be selected in these ways:
• From the Tools menu in the Reference Files dialog box (File
menu > Reference). The controls in the Reference Files dialog
box are used to adjust reference files settings as well.
• From the Tools menu in the Drawing Composition dialog box (File
menu > Drawing Composition). The Drawing Composition dialog
box is designed for the creation of drawing sheets for 3D models.
To Select in the Reference

Files tool box
Attach a reference file to the
active design file.
Attach Reference File (see

page 5-30)
Change a reference file clipping
boundary.
Define Reference File Clipping

Boundary (see page 5-31)

Reference Files

Files tool box
Mask (cover) part of a reference
file that is inside the clipping
boundary.
Define Reference File Clipping
Mask (see page 5-31)
Selectively delete a reference
file’s clipping mask(s).
Delete Reference File Clipping

Mask(s) (see page 5-31)
Set the back clipping plane for
a 3D reference file.
Define Reference File Back

Clipping Plane (see page 5-31)
Set the front clipping plane for
a 3D reference file.
Define Reference File Front

Clipping Plane (see page 5-32)
Reread and redraw a reference file
to see recent changes made to it.
Reload Reference File (see

page 5-32)
Move a reference file.
Move Reference File (see

page 5-32)
Scale a reference file.
Scale Reference File (see

page 5-32)
Rotate a reference file.
Rotate Reference File (see

page 5-33)

Reference Files
Attach Reference File

Files tool box
Mirror a reference file about
a horizontal axis.
Mirror Reference File About

Horizontal (see page 5-33)
Mirror a reference file about
a vertical axis.
Mirror Reference File About

Vertical (see page 5-34)
Detach a reference file from
the active design file.
Detach Reference File (see

page 5-34)
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX REFERENCE OFF | ON | TOGGLE
Tools that operate only on reference raster files are not in the
Reference Files tool box. They can be accessed only through
the Tools menu in the Reference Files dialog box (see Using
Reference Raster Files on page 5-34).
Attach Reference File

Used to attach a reference design file to the active design file.
See Attaching reference design files on page 5-1.

Reference Files
Define Reference File Clipping Boundary
Define Reference File Clipping Boundary

Used to define a reference file clipping boundary. See the
procedure To define a reference file clipping boundary (outside
boundary of the displayed area) (see page 7-109) .
Define Reference File Clipping Mask

Used to place a reference file clipping mask. See the procedure To
place a reference file clipping mask that covers part of the reference
file that is inside the clipping boundary (see page 5-22) .
Delete Reference File Clipping Mask(s)

Used to selectively delete a reference file’s clipping mask(s). See the proce-
dure To selectively delete a reference file’s clipping mask(s) (see page 5-22) .
Define Reference File Back Clipping Plane

Used to set the back clipping plane for a 3D reference file. See the procedure
To define a reference file back clipping plane (3D only) (see page 5-23) .

Reference Files
Define Reference File Front Clipping Plane
Define Reference File Front Clipping Plane

Used to set the front clipping plane for a 3D reference file. See the procedure
To define a reference file front clipping plane (3D only) (see page 5-23) .
Reload Reference File

Used to reread and redraw a reference file. See the proce-
dure To reload a reference file (see page 5-23) .
Move Reference File

Used to move a reference file. See the procedure To
move a reference file (see page 5-20) .
Scale Reference File

Used to scale a reference file. See the procedure To
scale a reference file (see page 5-20) .

Reference Files
Rotate Reference File
Tool Setting Effect

Scale Sets the ratio of design file Master
(Master:Ref) Units to reference file master
units. For example, to set five
design file master units for each
reference file master unit, key
in 5 in the left-hand field and 1
in the right-hand field.
Rotate Reference File

Used to rotate a reference file. See the procedure To ro-
tate a reference file (see page 5-20) .
Tool Setting Effect
Angle(s) Sets the rotation angle(s).

• In 2D, about the z-axis only.
• In 3D, about the x-, y-,
and z axes.
Mirror Reference File About Horizontal

Used to mirror a reference file about a horizontal axis. See the procedure
To mirror a reference file about a horizontal axis (see page 5-21) .

Reference Files
Mirror Reference File About Vertical
Mirror Reference File About Vertical

Used to mirror a reference file about a vertical axis. See the procedure
To mirror a reference file about a vertical axis (see page 5-21) .
Detach Reference File

Used to detach a reference file from the active design file. See the
procedure To detach a reference file (see page 5-24) .
Using Reference Raster Files

Raster image files can be attached as reference raster files similarly
to design files. Monochrome, continuous tone (gray-scale), or color
images in a variety of supported image files can be attached.
A raster image file is composed of thousands of individual dots or
pixels that describe an image in much the same way a picture in
a newspaper is printed using varying dot densities.
In the CAD work environment, raster image files originate

from the document scanning process. This process involves the
electronic scanning of source documents such as blueprints or
photographs into a raster image format using a purpose-built
scanning device and specialized software.
Once scanned in, the raster image file can be used in MicroStation
as a background for a new design or to supplement a proposed
design with complementary images.

Reference Files
Raster image types
Raster image types

There are three categories of raster image files in use at present. The
distinction is based on the color depth, which refers to the number
of bits used to specify pixel color. Each type of raster image file —
black-and-white (1-bit), palletized color (4- or 8-bit), and full or true
color (24-bit) — has its advantages and disadvantages.
Monochrome (1-bit) imagery

The simplest of the raster file formats, monochrome, sometimes
referred to as black-and-white, images consist of either black or
white pixels. Most closely associated with traditional manual
drawings, black and white images require the least amount of
resources to display and manipulate.
When working with good quality engineering drawings, the

scanned results are commonly stored in a monochrome format.
During the scanning process, the linework on the drawing is
converted to black dots while the background media is seen as
white. In MicroStation this results in high contrast imagery that
works well with existing design elements.
On the minus side, any subtle drawing features, such as fine

shading, or sketching features, such as stippling, may be lost in the
conversion. In addition, stains and other drawing imperfections may
show up as very noticeable artifacts on the image itself.
Mapped (4- or 8-bit) color imagery
Next up on the image complexity scale is the palletized color raster

image. Instead of only one bit of information being recorded for
each pixel in the image, 8-bit palletized color provides up to 256
different colors. The term “palletized” comes from the use of a
color table to identify what color a specific pixel value from 0-255
will appear as on the video screen. This is similar in operation
to MicroStation’s own color table system.
Mapped color images are very useful in capturing continuous tone

or gray scale images such as black-and-white photographs. In
this case, the 256 values all represent a uniform scale of grays

Reference Files
Raster image file formats
from black to white. A common use of this type of image in CAD

is the aerial survey photograph, which is typically continuous
tone, black-and-white. Aerial survey images are often used as a
background to a design project for “heads up” design.
Full (24-bit) color, mapped or RGB imagery

The third raster image type is called full color or RGB. Using eight bits
of information per primary color — Red, Green, and Blue — this image
type provides the closest match to the original scanned document.
Normally used with color photographs or color satellite imagery, 24-bit
color images also take up more system resources resulting in slower
update times and limits to the overall size of the image. In most
instances, this type of image is reserved for special projects that cannot
be properly displayed using one of the other raster file types.
Raster image file formats

In addition to its color depth, a raster image file is also characterized
by its file format. MicroStation lets you attach reference raster
files in any of over a dozen formats. This large collection of formats
includes international standards, such as those developed and
published by organizations such as CCITT, and application-specific
de facto industry standard formats, such as TIFF.
For the list of supported raster image file formats, see Supported
Image Formats in the Administrator’s Guide.
A sample reference raster file application

As briefly described, one of the uses for reference raster files is as
a background to an engineering project. Another use is historical
drawing capture. Using a document scanner, old archival paper
drawings are scanned into a black-and-white raster file, which is in
turn cleaned up and transferred to the design system. Once there, the
raster file is attached to an existing design file as a background.
In the event changes need to be incorporated into the old drawing,

Reference Files
Reference raster files and the Reference Files dialog box
that portion of the raster file where the changes occur can be
erased (see Erasing part of a reference raster file on page 5-45)
and the change drawn using standard MicroStation tools and
techniques. A drawing that combines raster and design file
elements is often referred to as a hybrid drawing.
Reference raster files and the Reference Files dialog box

The Reference Files dialog box has a unique set of controls
for working with reference raster files.
To access the dialog box controls for working

with raster files
1. From the Reference Files dialog box’s Display menu, choose Raster.
Reference
Files dialog
box —
controls for
working with
reference
raster files
The title bar updates to indicate that the controls shown are
for working with reference raster files.
Reference raster file attachment settings

All reference raster file attachment settings are available during
the attachment process and can be changed once a file is attached.
By adjusting these settings for a specific attachment, you can:
• Include the raster image in any plotfile generated as part

of the plotting output process.
• Invert the colors of the raster image similar to making
a negative of a photograph.

Reference Files
Attaching reference raster files
• Select a color in the raster image to be transparent, allowing

design elements or other images to show through the image.
This option is the only way to create image mosaics.
• Perform a halftoning operation on the raster image known as
dithering to simulate the colors in the image when the video display
is not capable of showing all available colors (mapped or RGB
raster image only). This option is particularly useful when working
with a full color image on a system displaying only 256 colors.
• Apply a tint to the colors in the raster image as a means
of visually separating the image from neighboring design
elements and other reference files.
If enabled, dithering constitutes an additional processing step in the

display of a reference raster file. This may be a consideration when
working with large raster files (10 MB and greater).

As many as 64 raster files can be displayed at the same time
in MicroStation. Each file is loaded into a layer, and the
layers are stacked on top of each other.
The attachment of a reference raster file is similar to the attachment

of a reference design file. The attachment can be made interactively
by defining two points that identify where the image rectangle is
located in the design plane, or at a predefined location (Intergraph
raster formats only). The latter is possible because the Intergraph
formats include positional data in the file to map the raster
image to a specific location on the design plane.
A reference raster file’s full path specification is stored as part of

the attachment information. This differs from reference design file
attachments in which storing the full path specification is an option.
When working in a mixed operating system environment, use a

configuration variable to specify the file path to referenced raster
files. This avoids the problem with dissimilar operating system path
specifications. Alternatively, you can place the raster reference files
either in the same directory as the active design file or one of the
directories pointed to by the MS_RFDIR configuration variable. For
information about defining configuration variables, see Working With

Reference Files
Configuration Variables in the Administrator’s Guide.
To attach a reference raster file interactively

1. From the Reference (Raster) Files dialog box’s Tools menu,
choose Attach > Interactive.
The Attach Raster Reference File dialog box opens.
2. Using the controls in the Attachment File group box, select

a raster file to attach. These controls are analogous to those
in the Open Design File dialog box.
When you select a file, additional information about the image
is shown in the Preview Attachment section of the dialog
box. Information shown includes the image size in horizontal
and vertical pixels and the type of raster data.
3. (Optional) — To preview the selected raster file, click
the Preview button.
4. (Optional) — In the Attachment Settings section’s Layer field, key

in a layer number to be associated with this reference raster file.
By default, Layer is set to one greater than the highest Layer

Reference Files
value already in use by previously attached reference raster files.
5. (Optional) — (required when the selected reference file

is already attached) In the Logical Name field, key in a
logical name (up to 20 characters).
Logical names facilitate identification of reference files.
6. (Optional) — In the Description field, key in a description

(up to 40 characters).
7. (Optional) — Use the remaining controls in the Attachment

Settings section to adjust the settings for this attachment:
Color — use to set the tint color for the entire raster image.
Transparent Color — use to set a transparent color
for the raster image.
Transparent — turn on to make one color of the raster
image transparent. This color is also used as a fill color
when clipping raster images. See Erasing part of a
reference raster file on page 5-45.
Invert — turn on to display a negative raster image.
Dither — turn on to modify the appearance of the raster image to
more closely match its true colors. In order to dither the image, an
extra pass is required when reading the raster image from disk.
Plot — turn on to enable the raster image to be plotted.
View — turn on the numbered buttons for each view window
in which to display the raster image.
8. Click OK.
The Attach Raster Reference File dialog box closes, and you are
prompted to enter coordinates to position the raster image.
9. Enter a data point to position the lower left corner.
A dynamic rectangle representing the raster image’s
aspect ratio is displayed.
10. Enter a data point to position the upper right corner.
To attach a reference raster file at a location

specified in the raster file (Intergraph

Reference Files
image formats only)

1. From the Tools menu in the Reference (Raster) Files
dialog box, choose Attach > Fixed.
The Attach Raster Reference File dialog box opens.
2. Follow steps 2–8 in the procedure To attach a reference
raster file interactively on page 5-39.
No further prompting occurs. The raster file is attached at the last
location where it was previously attached to a design file.
To modify a reference raster file’s

attachment settings
1. In the Reference (Raster) Files dialog box’s list box, double-click
the raster file whose attachment settings you want to modify.
The Attachment Settings dialog box opens. The title
bar identifies the raster file.
2. Use the controls in the dialog box to modify the standard

attachment settings. These controls are similar to those in
the Attach Raster Reference File dialog box (see To attach a
reference raster file interactively on page 5-39).
3. (Optional) — (not available with monochrome file attachments)
To improve the displayed appearance of the raster image, key
in the desired value in the Display Gamma field.
Gamma correction scales the intensities of the image

Reference Files
Manipulating reference raster files
to the specified scale factor.
4. (Optional) — (not available with monochrome file attachments)

To improve the plotted appearance of the raster image, key
in the desired value in the Plot Gamma field.
5. Click OK.
Alternative method — To modify a reference

raster file’s attachment settings
1. In the Reference (Raster) Files dialog box’s list box, select the
raster file whose attachment settings you want to modify.
2. From the dialog box’s Settings menu, choose Attachment.

This section covers the ways in which reference raster files can be
manipulated. Unlike design data which can be easily modified with
hundreds of tools, raster data manipulation is limited to the tools
accessible from the Reference (Raster) Files dialog box’s Tools menu.
All reference raster file modifications except for moving and scaling
require changes to the raster image, but the changes may be saved
to an alternate file to avoid changing the original data.
Moving
After you attach a reference raster file, you can change its
location on the design plane.
To move a reference raster file

1. In the Reference (Raster) Files dialog box’s list box,

Reference Files
select the reference file to move.

2. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Move.
3. Enter a data point to define the origin of the move.
4. Enter a data point to define the destination.
Moving a reference raster file affects the attachment only and does
not modify the image file, except for files in Intergraph formats,
where the file location is also saved in the file.
Resizing
Just as the location of a reference raster file on the design plane
can be modified, so can its overall size.
To resize a reference raster file

select the reference file to resize.
2. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Modify.
The status bar prompt reads “Identify corner to modify.”
3. Enter a data point near the corner of the raster image
you wish to resize.
A dynamic rectangle representing the aspect ratio of
the raster images is displayed with the corner closest
to the data point in motion.
4. Move the pointer to increase or decrease the dynamic rectangle
to the desired size, and then enter a data point.
The image reappears at its new size.
Resizing a reference raster file affects the attachment only and

does not modify the image file, except for files in the Intergraph
file formats, where the new size is also saved in the file.
Rotating
Reference raster files can be rotated in 90 , 180 , or 270 increments.

Reference Files
To rotate a reference raster file

1. In the Reference (Raster) Files dialog box’s list box, select
the reference raster file to rotate.
2. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Rotate > 90,
Rotate > 180, or Rotate > 270.
The Save Changed Image As dialog box opens.
4. In the Name field, enter a name for the modified image file.
5. Click OK.
If you did not change the filename or the file already exists, an
alert box asks if you want to overwrite the original file.
Rotating a reference raster file causes the raster file itself to be modified.
Mirroring
Reference raster files can be mirrored about a horizontal or vertical line.
To mirror a reference raster file about a

horizontal or vertical axis
select the reference file to mirror.
2. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Mirror
Horizontal or Mirror Vertical.
3. Enter a data point to define the axis.
4. In the Name field, enter a name for the mirrored image file.
5. Click OK.
Mirroring a reference raster file causes the raster file

itself to be modified.

Reference Files
Erasing part of a reference raster file

In a reference raster file, you can clip (crop) an area outside a boundary
or erase (mask) an area that is inside a boundary, which can be any area
identified by the fence, up to a maximum of 101 vertices. Images are
erased by filling the area with the Transparent Color. These functions
are useful to create mosaics of several overlapping or adjacent images.
To define a boundary outside of which a

reference raster file is erased
1. To define the reference file clipping boundary’s position,
place a fence with the Place Fence tool.
3. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Clip Boundary.
4. In the Name field, enter a name for the cropped image file.
5. Click OK.
To erase part of a reference raster file that

is inside the clipping boundary
1. To define the part of the raster image to erase, place a fence
with the Place Fence tool (see page 3-24) .
3. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Clip Mask.
4. In the Name field, enter a name for the masked image file.
5. Click OK.

Reference Files
Plotting reference raster files
Cropping or masking a reference raster file causes the

raster file itself to be modified.
Plotting reference raster files

You can plot reference raster files as follows:
• On pen plotters, raster images are reproduced through pen strokes.

You can specify the resolution using the RASTER_RESOLUTION
record in the plotter driver file.
• On raster-oriented plotting devices, such as PostScript, you
can plot monochrome or color (halftoned) images.
For more information about plotting and printing, see the

Printing and Plotting Guide.
Adjusting the File Update Sequence

When updating a view, MicroStation follows, by default,
the following update sequence:
1 . All attached reference raster files are displayed first, followed by
2 . the active design file, and then
3 . the reference design files, roughly in their attachment order.
You can customize the update sequence used with the active design file
using the Update Sequence dialog box. The customization capability is
used to prioritize the display of overlapping elements and raster images.
The update sequence also affects the plotting process. For more
information, see the Printing and Plotting Guide.
To modify the file update sequence

1. From the Reference Files dialog box’s Settings menu,
choose Update Sequence.
The Update Sequence dialog box opens. The list box

Reference Files
shows the current update sequence.
2. In the list box, select one or more reference files or

the active design file.
Use the áShiftñ or áCtrlñ key to select a range or individual files.
3. Click the First, Last, Up or Down button to move the selected files
in the chosen direction on the list. Attached reference raster
files can be moved only to the first or last position.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the sequence is modified as desired.
5. Click OK.
Attached raster reference files can only be moved as a group and

then only to the first or last position in the sequence.
Changes to the update sequence are saved to the active design file
on disk by choosing Save Settings from the File menu.
To restore the default update sequence

1. From the Reference Files dialog box’s Settings menu,
choose Update Sequence.
The Update Sequence dialog box opens.
2. Click the Default button.
3. Click OK.
Once this procedure is performed and design file settings are
saved, any previous update sequence changes are lost. The
alternative is to override the active design file’s custom update

Reference Files
sequence with the default update sequence.
To override the custom update sequence

with the default
2. In the Category list box, select Reference File.
3. Turn on Ignore Update Sequence.
4. Click OK.
If Ignore Update Sequence option is on, the Update Sequence item in

the Reference Files dialog box’s Settings menu is disabled (dimmed).

Advanced 2D Drafting
Techniques
In this chapter, you will find procedures concerning some of the
more advanced 2D operations in MicroStation, including:
• Permanently Grouping Elements (see page 6-1)
• Putting “Holes” in Solid Elements (see page 6-5)
• Using the Tools in the Fillets tool box (see page 6-5)
• Using the Tools in the Groups tool box (see page 6-8)
• Using Multi-lines (see page 6-23)
• Using the Tools in the Multi-line Joints tool box (see page 6-30)
• Associating Elements (see page 6-46)
• Isometric Drawing (see page 6-48)
• Using the Tools in the Isometric tool box (see page 6-50)
• Using Curves (see page 6-54)
• Using the Tools in the Create Curves tool box (see page 6-68)
• Selecting Elements Based on Attributes (see page 6-120)
• Using Auxiliary Coordinate Systems (see page 6-122)
• Using the Tools in the ACS tool box (see page 6-125)
• Digitizing (see page 6-130)
Permanently Grouping Elements

Some groupings in MicroStation, such as the set of selected
elements and the fence contents, are temporary. Other groupings

Advanced 2D Drafting Techniques
Using complex chains and complex shapes
are permanent. These groupings include:

• levels (see Element Level Manipulations on page 3-116).
• complex chains and complex shapes (see Using complex

chains and complex shapes on page 6-2).
• groups (see Using groups on page 6-3).
• graphic groups (see Using graphic groups on page 6-3).
Using complex chains and complex shapes

A complex chain (sometimes called a “complex string”) is a series
of connected open elements (lines, line strings, arcs, curves)
grouped for manipulation as a single entity.
A complex shape, like a complex chain, is a series of connected

open elements grouped for manipulation as a single object. The
difference is that the first and last element in a complex shape
are connected, thereby closing a shape.
Left: Complex shapes created from arc and line string with Create
Complex Shape tool. Center and right: Union and intersection of
circle and block created with Create Region tool.
The easiest way to create complex chains and shapes is to use the Place
SmartLine tool (see page 6-80) . The tools in the Groups tool box (see
page 6-8) can be used to create complex chains and shapes as well.
Complex chains and complex shapes are complex elements. A

complex element is a grouping of two or more elements that is
manipulated as a single entity. Cells are also complex elements.
(If you develop application software for MicroStation, you should
know that a “complex header” element is stored in the design file
for each grouping.) Use the Drop Element tool (see page 6-9) in
the Groups tool box (see page 6-8) to drop the status of a complex
element; that is, convert the complex element to its component

Using groups
elements so they can be manipulated individually.
Using groups
A group is a complex element whose component elements
need not be connected.
To create a group
1. Select the elements that will compose the group.
2. From the Edit menu, choose Group.
The handles change from indicating each selected element
to indicating the group.
To break up a group
1. Select the group.
2. From the Edit menu, choose Ungroup.
The handles change from indicating the group to indicating
each selected element.
You manipulate and modify groups just as you do simple elements. For
information about manipulation and modification of simple elements,
see Manipulating and Modifying Elements on page 4-1.
A group is actually an unnamed cell. Unlike named cells,

groups are not defined in cell libraries. For this reason groups
are sometimes called “orphan cells.”
Using graphic groups

Graphic groups are the most flexible grouping technique in
MicroStation. Without “breaking up” the grouping you can add,
remove, or manipulate individual member elements. Whether your
actions change the whole graphic group or only part of it depends
upon whether you turn Graphic Group Lock on or off.
The Groups tool box (see page 6-8) has tools for creating a graphic

Using graphic groups
group and adding and removing elements to or from a graphic group.
To manipulate or modify a graphic group

1. Turn on Graphic Group (Lock) in the Settings menu’s
Locks sub-menu.
2. Select the appropriate tool to perform the desired
manipulation or modification. See Specialized Manipulation
and Modification Tools on page 3-13.
3. Identify the graphic group.
4. Continue as called for in the instructions for using the tool.
To manipulate or modify one or more member

elements of a graphic group
1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the element(s).
2. Perform the desired manipulation or modification. See
Manipulating and Modifying Selected Elements on page 3-11.
or
Select the appropriate tool to perform the desired manipulation
or modification in the Manipulate tool box (see page 3-34)
or Modify tool box (see page 3-87) .
3. If using a specialized tool, continue as called for in the
instructions for using the tool.
Alternative method — To manipulate or modify

one or more member elements of a graphic group
1. Turn off Graphic Group (Lock) in the Settings menu’s
Locks sub-menu.
2. Select the appropriate tool to perform the desired manipulation
or modification in the Manipulate tool box (see page 3-34)
or Modify tool box (see page 3-87) .
3. Identify an element in the graphic group.
4. Continue as called for in the instructions for using the tool.

Putting “Holes” in Solid Elements
Putting “Holes” in Solid Elements

When you draw a shape that represents a hole in a solid element,
the interior of that shape cannot be hatched or patterned, and
the background will show “through” the hole.
The block is a
solid; the circle
and hexagon are
holes, and so are
not hatched.
Whether a closed element is a solid or hole is determined

by its Area attribute:
The Change Element to Active Area tool (see page

3-62) in the Change Attributes tool box is used to
change the Area of a closed element(s).
The Group Holes tool (see page 6-22) in the Groups tool box
is a special tool for putting holes in solid elements. The tool
is named as it is because it creates a group consisting of the
holes and the solid (see Using Groups on page 6-3).
Fillets tool box

The tools in the Fillets tool box are used to fillet planar elements.

Construct Parabolic Fillet
To Select in the Fillets tool box

Construct a circular fillet

(see page 3-113) 1
Construct a parabolic fillet

(see page 6-6)
Construct a chamfer between
two lines or adjacent segments
of a line string or shape.
Construct Chamfer (see
page 3-115) 2
1 Also in the Modify tool box.
2
Also in the Modify tool box.
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX FILLET OFF | ON | TOGGLE
To perform filleting or chamfering “on the fly,” use the Place

SmartLine tool (see page 6-80) .
Used to construct a parabolic fillet (curve element) between two lines.
Tool Setting Effect
Distance The distance between the

points of tangency.

Tool Setting Effect

Type Sets how the parabola is aligned:
Horizontal—aligned with the
horizontal view axis. Used in
highway design to join intersecting
grade lines. All IGDS parabolas
are horizontal.
Symmetric—aligned with the

identified sides.
Truncate Controls which side(s) are
truncated.
None—neither side is truncated.
Both—both sides are truncated

at their point of tangency
with the fillet.1
1
If a fillet is constructed between two closed elements or an open and a
closed element, the closed element(s) are not modified.
To construct a parabolic fillet

1. Select the Construct Parabolic Fillet tool.
2. Identify the first line.
3. Identify the second line.
4. Accept the fillet and truncations, if any.
Construct Parabolic
Fillet. Left:
Horizontal. Right:
Symmetric. Distance
is denoted by “D.”
Truncate is set to
Both.

Groups tool box
Key-in: PLACE PARABOLA HORIZONTAL | MODIFY |

NOMODIFY MODIFY | NOMODIFY
In 3D, both elements must be on the same plane to be filleted.
To place a B-spline curve in the form of a parabola, use the Place

Conic tool (see page 6-85) in the Curves tool box.
Groups tool box

The tools in the Groups tool box are used to create and manipulate
complex chains, complex shapes, and graphic groups.
To Select in the Groups tool box

Break up a complex element(s)
or an element(s) of a special type
into simpler components.
Drop Element (see page 6-9)
Create a complex chain (open
complex element).
Create Complex Chain (see

page 6-11)
Create a complex shape (closed
complex element) from individual
open elements.
Create Complex Shape (see
page 6-14)
Create a complex shape from the
union, intersection, or difference
between closed elements or
by “flood fill.” Create Region (see page 6-16)
Create a graphic group.1

or
Add elements to an existing
graphic group. Add to Graphic Group (see
or page 6-20)
Combine two or more graphic
groups into one graphic group.

Drop Element
To Select in the Groups tool box

Remove (drop) an element(s)
from a graphic group.
or
Break up a graphic group into Drop from Graphic Group
individual elements. (see page 6-21)
Select a solid element and the

hole or holes to be associated
with the solid.
Group Holes (see page 6-22)
1 To create a group (orphan cell), select the elements and choose Group from
the Edit menu. A group is not the same as a graphic group.
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX GROUPS OFF | ON | TOGGLE
Drop Element
Used to break up an element(s) into simpler components. Tool settings
are used to specify the element types on which the tool operates.
Tool Setting Effect

Complex If on, complex elements (cell, complex
chain, complex shape, text node,
surface, or solid) are dropped into
their components.
Dimensions If on, dimension element(s) are
dropped into lines, line strings,
ellipses, arcs, and text.
Line If on, line strings and shapes are
Strings/Shapes converted to series of individual
line elements.

Drop Element
Tool Setting Effect

Multi-lines If on, multi-line elements are converted
to sets of line strings, lines, and/or arcs.
Shared Cells If on, shared cells are dropped. If To
Geometry is chosen from the option
menu, they are dropped into their
components; if To Normal Cell is chosen,
they are converted to unshared cells.
Solids If on, a SmartSurfaces or SmartSolids is
dropped to either Wireframe or Surfaces.
Text If on, text characters in text elements
are converted to the individual
elements that are used to draw the
characters — lines, line strings, arcs,
ellipses, and shapes.
To break up an element into its components

2. Select the Drop Element tool.
3. Turn on the appropriate tool settings to specify the element
type(s) on which to operate.
4. Accept the settings and initiate the drop.

Only the selected elements of the specified type(s) are dropped.
The tool has no effect on selected elements of other types. If
none of the selected elements is of the specified type(s), the
message “Nothing to drop” displays in the status bar.

Create Complex Chain
Alternative method — To break up an element

into its components
1. Select the Drop Element tool.
2. Turn on the appropriate tool settings to specify the element
type(s) on which to operate.
4. Accept the drop.
Key-in: DROP ELEMENT
Drop Element cannot be used to drop elements more than one level at a
time. For example, if you turn on Complex and Line Strings/Shapes
and operate on a complex shape that contains two line strings, the
complex shape is dropped but the component line strings are not.
That is, the operation results in two line strings.

Used to create a complex chain — an open complex element that
is formed from a series of open elements (lines, line strings,
arcs, curves, and open B-spline curves) that can be manipulated
as if it were a single primitive element. The resulting complex
chain takes on the active element attributes regardless of the
attributes of the component elements.

Tool Setting Effect

Method How elements are added to the complex chain:
Manual—Each element is manually identified.
Automatic—After the first element is

identified, if one endpoint of an additional
open element(s) is within the Max. Gap,
one of the elements can be added.
Max(imum) The greatest allowable distance between
Gap elements when the Method is Automatic.
If zero, only elements that connect (have
a common endpoint) are added.
To create a complex chain manually

1. Select the Create Complex Chain tool.
2. Set Method to Manual.
3. Identify the first element to include in the chain.
4. Continue to identify elements to add to the chain.
If they are not already connected, the elements are
connected as they are identified.1
5. Reset to complete the complex chain.
To create a complex chain automatically

1. Select the Create Complex Chain tool.
2. Set Method to Automatic.
4. Accept additional elements as they highlight.
If the elements do not have a common endpoint,
1 These connections appear as “lines” that connect the endpoints of the elements. These
connections are part of the complex chain but are not elements. They disappear
when complex status is dropped. It is recommended that elements be connected
manually before being included in a complex chain.

they are connected.1

If a fork is found, that is, if more than one element is within
the Max. Gap, the message “FORK -- Accept or Reset to See
Alternate” displays in the status bar.
5. Enter a data point to accept the highlighted element.
or
Reset to highlight an alternate element. Continue to Reset
until the desired element highlights.
6. Creation ends automatically if there are no elements within
the Max. Gap. Reset to stop the process before it reaches
this point and complete the complex chain.
Create Complex
Chain with Method
set to Automatic.
After entering data
point 2, the top
element in the fork
was highlighted
(top). To highlight
the alternate path,
a Reset was entered
(bottom).
Key-in: CREATE CHAIN MANUAL | AUTOMATIC
To convert a complex chain back to its individual components,

use the Drop Element tool (see page 6-9) .
It is best to create complex chains from elements that

share common endpoints.
To draw a complex chain of connected arcs and line segments

with one tool, use the Place SmartLine tool (see page 6-80)

Create Complex Shape

Used to create a complex shape (a closed complex element that can be
manipulated as if it were one primitive element) from a series of open
planar elements (lines, line strings, arcs, curves, and open B-spline
curves). The resulting complex shape takes on the active element
attributes regardless of the attributes of the component elements.
Tool Setting Effect

Method Sets how elements are added to complex shape.
Manual—Each element is manually identified.
Automatic—After the first element is

identified, if one endpoint of an additional
open element(s) is within the Max. Gap,
one of the elements can be added.
Max(imum) The largest distance allowed between
Gap consecutive elements, if Method is Automatic.
If zero, only elements that connect (have a
common endpoint) can be added.
Fill Color Complex shape is filled with this color,
if the Fill Type is Outlined; otherwise
disabled (dimmed).

To create a complex shape manually

1. Select the Create Complex Shape tool.
2. Set Method to Manual.
4. Continue to identify elements to add to the shape.
The elements are connected as they are identified, unless
they already are connected.2
5. If the first and last elements connect, accept the shape.
If the first and last elements do not connect, Reset to close the
shape and create a line element between their endpoints.
To create a complex shape automatically

1. Select the Create Complex Shape tool.
2. Set Method to Automatic.
4. Accept additional elements as they highlight.
If the elements do not have a common endpoint,
they are connected.2
If a fork is found; that is, if more than one element is within
the Max. Gap, the message “FORK -- Accept or Reset to See
Alternate” displays in the status bar.
5. Enter a data point to accept the highlighted element.
or
Reset to highlight an alternate element. Continue to Reset
until the desired element highlights.
Key-in: CREATE SHAPE MANUAL | AUTOMATIC
If an element is accepted that is connected to the first element

identified, the complex shape is closed. If no element is found within
2 These connections appear as “lines” that connect the endpoints of the elements.
These connections are part of the complex chain but are not elements. They
disappear when complex status is dropped. It is recommended that elements be
connected before being included in a complex chain.

Create Region
the Max. Gap, a line element is created between the open endpoints
of the first and last elements and the complex shape is closed.
To convert a complex shape back to its individual components,

use the Drop Element tool (see page 6-9) .
To draw a complex shape of connected arcs and line segments

with one tool, use the Place SmartLine tool (see page 6-80)
Create Region
Used to create a complex shape (a closed complex element

that can be manipulated as if it were one primitive element)
from either of the following:
• The union, intersection, or difference between two or

more closed elements.
• A region bounded by elements that have endpoints that are
closer together than the Max(imum) Gap.

Create Region
Tool Setting Effect

Method Sets how elements are added to the complex
shape and the element types from which
it can be created, as follows.
Intersection—Edges bound the intersection of
two or more closed, planar elements.1
Union—Edges bound the union of two or

more closed, planar elements.1
Difference—Edges bound the difference of

two or more closed, planar elements.1
Flood—Edges bound the area enclosed

by elements that either touch one
another or whose endpoints fall within
the Maximum Gap.2
Fill Type Sets the Active Fill Type.
None—If on, the complex shape is not filled.
Opaque—If on, the complex shape is

filled with the Active Color.
Outlined—If on, the complex shape is

filled with the Fill Color.
Fill Color Complex shape is filled with this color, if
the Fill Type is Outlined. When Fill Type
is Opaque, Fill Color displays the Active
Color, which can also be set from this
location. When Fill Type is None, the Fill
Color option is disabled (dimmed).
Keep If on, the original elements remain
Original in the design.

Create Region
Tool Setting Effect

Locate (When Method is set to Flood) If on, closed
Interior elements inside the selected area are included
Shapes as part of the new complex shape.
Max(imum) (When Method is set to Flood) Sets the
Gap largest distance allowed between consecutive
elements. If zero, only elements that
connect can be added.
1
Shapes, ellipses, circles, or complex shapes.
2 Somewhat akin to the “flood fill” tool in many paint programs.
To construct a complex shape from the

intersection or union of elements
1. Select the Create Region tool.
As you accept each successive element, the edges that do
not serve as the basis for the new shape are hidden. The
resulting shape displays with highlighting.

Intersection “Elements do not intersect” displays.
Union A shape is placed over each element.


Create Region
Left: Intersection.
Right: Union. Keep
Original is off.
To construct a complex shape from the

difference between elements
3. Identify the element to subtract from.
that was identified in step 3.3
5. Accept the last element.
Method set to
Difference
3 If these elements are inside the element that was identified in step 3, then their Area
attribute is converted to Hole. The effect is the same as using the Group Holes tool.

Add to Graphic Group
To construct a complex shape by “flood fill”

1. (Optional) — Select the bounding elements.

4. (Optional) — If you want the complex shape to include any closed
elements that are inside the area enclosed by the bounding
elements, turn on Locate Interior Shapes.
5. Enter a data point in the area enclosed by the bounding elements.

6. Accept the complex shape.
Method set to Flood.

Keep Original is off.
Key-in: CREATE REGION DIFFERENCE | FLOOD |

INTERSECTION | UNION
Add to Graphic Group
• Create a graphic group.

• Add elements to an existing graphic group.
• Combine two or more existing graphic groups into a

Drop from Graphic Group
single graphic group.
To create a graphic group or add elements

to a graphic group
1. Select the Add to Graphic Group tool.
If the element is not in a graphic group, a new graphic
group is created.
If the element is in a graphic group, all elements subsequently
identified are added to that graphic group.
3. Identify another element(s) to add to the graphic group.
4. Accept the graphic group.
Key-in: GROUP ADD
Drop from Graphic Group
• Remove (drop) an element(s) from a graphic group.

• Drop the grouped status of the entire graphic group; that is,
break up the graphic group into its components.
To remove an element(s) from a graphic group

1. In the Settings menu’s Locks sub-menu, turn off Graphic Group.
2. Select the Drop from Graphic Group tool.
3. Identify the element(s) to be removed from the graphic group.
4. Accept the drop.

Group Holes
To break up an entire graphic group

1. In the Settings menu’s Locks sub-menu, turn on Graphic Group.
2. Select the Drop from Graphic Group tool.
3. Identify a member of the graphic group.
4. Accept the drop.
Key-in: GROUP DROP
Group Holes
Used to identify a solid element and the hole elements to
be associated with the solid.
The solid and its associated hole(s) can be shapes, ellipses, and/or
complex shapes that are in the same plane. Holes are not patterned
and appear “transparent” in rendered views.
To group a solid and a hole(s)

1. Select the Group Holes tool.
2. Identify the solid element.
3. Identify the hole element(s) to associate with the solid.
4. Accept the last element.
5. Reset.
The solid and holes are consolidated into a group (orphan cell). The
area attribute (solid or hole) of each element is set appropriately.

Using Multi-lines
The holes immediately follow the solid in the group definition.
Group Holes.
The block is
identified as
the solid and
the circle and
hexagon are
holes (Top
view).
Key-in: GROUP HOLES
One way to create a 3D solid of projection or revolution with

a hole(s) in it is to use the Group Holes tool to associate the
planar boundary element with its associated holes before
generating the solid with the Extrude tool (see page 7-93) or the
Construct Revolution tool (see page 7-97) .
Rendered view
of a solid of
projection
generated from
the group
created in the
illustration.
Using Multi-lines
A multi-line element consists of up to 16 independently-defined

Using Multi-lines
lines and optional end caps and joints.
Multi-lines
• The active multi-line definition specifies the form of multi-lines

placed with the Place Multi-line tool. The component lines can
be varying distances apart. Each component line can have
its own level, color, line style, and line weight.
• You can define and save multi-lines as styles in settings files.
• You can easily “clean up” intersections in multi-lines and
modify individual multi-line components using the tools in
• You can associate multi-lines to other elements (see
Associating multi-lines on page 6-47).

Using Multi-lines
General Procedure — To define a multi-line

1. From the Element menu, choose Multi-lines.
The Multi-lines dialog box opens.
The controls show the settings that constitute the active multi-line
definition. The defined multi-line (if there is one) is shown
graphically in the dialog box’s lower left corner.
The Component option menu controls which controls
display in the dialog box.
2. Add any desired component lines to the multi-line definition. See
To add a line to a multi-line definition on page 6-26.
3. Adjust each new component line’s offset. See To adjust a
component line’s offset on page 6-26.
4. Give the component lines any desired attributes (class, level, color,
line weight, and line style) to override the active element attributes
when the multi-line is placed. See To give a component line
attributes that override the active element attributes on page 6-26.
5. Add any desired color fill to the areas between component lines.
See To add color fill to a multi-line definition on page 6-26.
6. Delete any unwanted lines from the multi-line definition. See To
delete a component line from a multi-line definition on page 6-27.
7. Define a start cap for the multi-line. See To define a start
cap for a multi-line on page 6-27.
8. Define an end cap for the multi-line. See To define an end
cap for a multi-line on page 6-27.
9. Adjust the settings for joints (a line optionally displayed at vertices

Using Multi-lines
in the multi-line). See To define multi-line joints on page 6-28.

10. Save the new multi-line definition as a settings group component.
See Settings Files in the Administrator’s Guide.
To add a line to a multi-line definition

1. From the Component option menu, in the Multi-lines
dialog box, choose Lines.
2. From the dialog box’s Edit menu, choose Insert.
A new line displays in the lines list box. It has no offset
value and no attribute override settings.
To adjust a component line’s offset

1. From the Component option menu in the Multi-lines
2. Select the desired line in the list box.
3. Key in a positive or negative offset value (in working
units) in the Offset field.
To give a component line attributes that override

the active element attributes
3. To give the selected line attributes of class, level, color, line weight,
and line style (to override the active element attributes), turn on
the desired controls to the right and adjust the settings.
The controls work the same way as the controls in the
Element Attributes dialog box.
To add color fill to a multi-line definition

1. In the Multi-lines dialog box, turn on Fill Color.
2. From the adjacent color palette, choose the desired fill color.

Using Multi-lines
To delete a component line from a

3. From the dialog box’s Edit menu, choose Delete.
To define a start cap for a multi-line

dialog box, choose Start Cap.
The controls for defining a start cap display. A graphic
representation of the start cap definition displays in the
lower left corner of the dialog box.
2. Turn on one, two, or all of the start cap types:
Line — a straight line across the end of the multi-line.
Outer Arc — a single arc bridging the two outermost lines.
Inner Arcs — arcs between each component line and the
component line nearest it on each side.
3. To give the start cap attributes of class, level, color, line weight,
To define an end cap for a multi-line

dialog box, choose End Cap.
The controls for defining an end cap are displayed. A graphic
representation of the end cap definition is displayed in
the lower left corner of the dialog box.
2. Turn on one, two, or all of the end cap types:
Line — a straight line across the end of the multi-line.

Using Multi-lines
Outer Arc — a single arc bridging the two outermost lines.

Inner Arcs — arcs between each component line and the
component line nearest it on each side.
3. To give the end cap attributes of class, level, color, line weight,
To define multi-line joints

dialog box, choose Joints.
The controls for defining multi-line joints display. A graphic
representation of the joint displays in the lower left corner
of the dialog box (if Display Joints is on).
2. To have joints display, turn on Display Joints.
3. To give the joints attributes of class, level, color, line weight, and
line style (to override the active element attributes), turn on the
desired controls to the right and adjust the settings.
To retrieve a multi-line definition stored as

a style and make it active
The Select Settings window opens. The drawing settings groups in

Compatibility with previous versions
the open settings file are listed in the Group list box.
2. From the dialog box’s Style menu, choose Multi-Line.
The Select Multi-line Style dialog box opens.
3. In the list box, select the desired style.

4. Click Load.
The active multi-line definition is set as specified in
the style definition.
Compatibility with previous versions

You can “drop” a multi-line; that is break it up into component lines,
line strings, and so on. This can be done to convert it to elements that
can be displayed and modified with MicroStation 3.x or earlier or to
be able to manipulate the multi-line’s components individually.
You can also “freeze” a multi-line (temporarily convert it into a form

that can be displayed by MicroStation 3.x or earlier).
To drop all multi-lines in the fence contents, key in

FENCE DROP MLINE.
To freeze all multi-lines in the fence contents, along with other elements
not recognized by MicroStation 3.x or earlier, key in FENCE FREEZE.

Multi-line Joints tool box
To “drop” a multi-line
1. In the Drop tool box, select the Drop Multi-line

tool (see page 3-85) .

3. Accept the drop.
Alternative method — To “drop” a multi-line

1. Select the multi-line.
2. In the Drop tool box, select the Drop Multi-line tool.
To “freeze” a multi-line
1. Key in FREEZE.
3. Accept the freeze.

The tools in the Multi-line Joints tool box are used to construct joints
at multi-line intersections, construct cuts (breaks) in multi-lines, and
modify multi-line components. Multi-lines are placed with the Place
Multi-line tool (see page 1-37) in the Linear Elements tool box.

To Select in the Multi-line

Joints tool box
Construct a closed cross joint.
Construct Closed Cross Joint

(see page 6-32)
Construct an open cross joint.
Construct Open Cross Joint

(see page 6-33)
Construct a merged cross joint.
Construct Merged Cross Joint

(see page 6-34)
Cut (break) a component line
in a multi-line segment.
Cut Single Component Line

(see page 6-35)
Cut (break) all component lines
in a multi-line segment.
Cut All Component Lines

(see page 6-36)
Construct a closed tee joint.
Construct Closed Tee Joint

(see page 6-37)
Construct an open tee joint.
Construct Open Tee Joint

(see page 6-38)
Construct a merged tee joint.
Construct Merged Tee Joint

(see page 6-39)

To Select in the Multi-line

Joints tool box
Construct a corner joint.
Construct Corner Joint (see

page 6-40)
Remove a break in a multi-line.
Uncut Component Lines

(see page 6-41)
Partially delete a multi-line
without losing previously
created breaks.
Multi-line Partial Delete
(see page 6-42)
Move a multi-line’s work line or
one of its component lines.
Move Multi-line Profile (see
page 6-43)
Change the end cap of a
multi-line.
Edit Multi-line Cap (see

page 6-45)
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX JOINTS OFF | ON | TOGGLE
Used to construct a closed cross joint between two multi-lines.

To construct a closed cross joint

1. Select the Construct Closed Cross Joint tool.
2. Identify the multi-line to break.
3. Identify the other multi-line.
4. Accept the joint.
Construct Closed
Cross Joint
Key-in: JOIN CROSS CLOSED
Used to construct an open cross joint between two multi-lines. All

component lines of the first identified multi-line are broken. Only
the outside component lines of the second are broken.

To construct an open cross joint

1. Select the Construct Open Cross Joint tool.
2. Identify the first multi-line.
3. Identify the second multi-line.
Construct Open
Cross Joint
Key-in: JOIN CROSS OPEN
Used to construct a merged cross joint between two multi-lines.

To construct a merged cross joint

1. Select the Construct Merged Cross Joint tool.
2. Identify one multi-line.
Construct Merged
Cross Joint
Key-in: JOIN CROSS MERGE
Used to cut (break) a component line in a multi-line segment.
To cut a single component line

1. Select the Cut Single Component Line tool.
2. Identify the component line at the point where cutting will begin.
3. Enter a data point to define the end of the cut.

Cut Single
Component Line
Key-in: CUT SINGLE
To re-connect component lines that have been cut, use the Uncut
Component Lines tool (see page 6-41) .
Used to cut (break) all component lines in a multi-line segment. The

cuts are made on an axis perpendicular to the identified component line.
To cut all component lines

1. Select the Cut All Component Lines tool.
2. Identify any component line at the point where cutting will begin.
3. Enter a data point to define the end of the cut.

Cut All Component

Lines
Key-in: CUT ALL
To re-connect component lines that have been cut, use the Uncut
When a multi-line is cut, it remains a single element. To delete part of

a multi-line, use the Multi-line Partial Delete tool (see page 6-42) .
Used to extend or shorten a multi-line to its intersection with

another multi-line and construct a closed tee joint.
To construct a closed tee joint

1. Select the Construct Closed Tee Joint tool.
2. Identify the multi-line to extend or shorten.
3. Identify the multi-line to which the first multi-line will

Construct Closed Tee

Joint
Key-in: JOIN TEE CLOSED
When a multi-line is shortened, the part of the multi-line

identified is kept.

another multi-line and construct an open tee joint.
To construct an open tee joint

1. Select the Construct Open Tee Joint tool.

Construct Open Tee

Joint
Key-in: JOIN TEE OPEN

another multi-line and construct a merged tee joint.
To construct a merged tee joint

1. Select the Construct Merged Tee Joint tool.

Construct Corner Joint
Construct Merged
Tee Joint
Key-in: JOIN TEE MERGE

identified is kept.
Construct Corner Joint
Used to extend or shorten two multi-lines to their intersection

and construct a corner joint.
To construct a corner joint

1. Select the Construct Corner Joint tool.
2. Identify one multi-line.

Construct Corner
Joint
Key-in: JOIN CORNER

identified is kept.
Used to remove a break in a multi-line, when the multi-line

was broken with one of the cut or join tools.
To uncut a single component line

1. Select the Uncut Component Lines tool.
2. Identify one end of the break.

Uncutting one
component line
To uncut all component lines

2. Select the Uncut Component Lines tool.
Key-in: UNCUT
Used to partially delete a multi-line without losing any

previously created breaks.

Move Multi-line Profile
Tool Setting Effect

Cap Mode Determines whether end caps are created
and how they are defined:
None—No caps are created. The end cap
angle will be 90 . Effect is same as Cut All
Current—Uses the start cap and end cap

definitions of the identified multi-line.
Active—Uses the active multi-line definition.
Joint—Uses the identified multi-line’s joint

definition instead of end cap definition.
Ensures end cap will always be 90 .
To delete part of a multi-line

1. Select the Multi-line Partial Delete tool.
2. Identify the multi-line at one end of the part to delete.
3. For an open multi-line, enter a data point to define the
other end of the part to delete.
or
For a closed multi-line, enter a data point to define the
direction in which to delete. Then enter another data point
to define the other end of the part to delete.
Key-in: MLINE PARTIAL DELETE

• Move an individual component line of a multi-line.

• Reposition the work line of a multi-line without moving
its component lines.
Tool Setting Effect

Move Determines the tool’s operation:
Workline—Move the identified multi-line’s
work line without moving its component lines.
Component—Move a single component line

of the identified multi-line.
To move a multi-line’s work line

1. Select the Move Multi-line Profile tool.
2. In the tool settings window, set Move to Workline.
A dashed dynamic line displays. This represents the work line.
4. Enter a data point to reposition the work line.
With typical usage, the appearance of the component lines
is unchanged. However, if you move the dynamic work line
far enough to cause segments to reverse direction it becomes
impossible to preserve the appearance of the multi-line.
When this occurs, the entire multi-line dynamically displays
showing its new configuration. Entering a data point when
this occurs modifies the entire multi-line.
To move one of a multi-line’s component lines

1. Select the Move Multi-line Profile tool.
2. In the tool settings window, set Move to Component.
3. Identify the component line.
The identified component line dynamically highlights. Should
you move the highlighted component line in a manner that
affects other components of the multi-line (end caps, for
instance), these components also highlight and dynamically

Edit Multi-line Cap
change with the identified component line.

4. Enter a data point to reposition the component line.
Key-in: MLINE EDIT PROFILE
Edit Multi-line Cap
Used to change the end cap of a multi-line.
Tool Setting Effect

Cap Mode Sets type of end cap:
None—Removes any end caps. The end cap
angle will be 90 . Effect is same as Cut All
Current—Does not change the end cap.

Enabled only when Adjust Angle is turned on.
Active—Uses the active multi-line

definition for the end cap.
Joint—Uses the multi-line’s joint definition

instead of its cap definitions. Ensures
end cap will always be 90 .
Adjust Angle If on, allows the angle of the end cap
to be adjusted.

Associating Elements
To change a multi-line’s end cap

1. Select the Edit Multi-line Cap tool.
2. Identify the multi-line nearest the end cap to be modified.
3. If Adjust Angle is off, accept the modified cap.
or
If Adjust Angle is on, enter a data point to adjust the
angle of the end cap.
Key-in: MLINE EDIT CAP
Using AccuDraw with the Adjust Angle option makes it easier to

make the end cap perpendicular to the rest of the multi-line.
Associating Elements
Under most circumstances, elements are static: when an element is
placed in a design, its position is defined simply by the design plane
coordinates on which it lies. It retains that position in the design
plane until you move it with an element manipulation tool.
One exception to this rule is association, in which an element’s

position in the design plane is defined in relation to another
element. When that other element is moved, the associated
element moves with it. For example, dimension elements can be
associated with the elements whose dimensions they display. The
dimensions they display are updated when the dimensions of the
elements with which they are associated change.
Elements that can be associated with other elements

The types of elements that can be associated with other elements
are dimensions, multi-lines, and shared cells. The association is
made when the dimension, multi-line, or shared cell is placed. The
procedures for associating shared cells and multi-lines are covered here.

Associating shared cells
Associating shared cells

When a shared cell is associated with another element, the cell’s
origin is associated with a point on the other element.
To associate a shared cell with another element

2. Turn on Use Shared Cells.
3. In the list box, select the desired cell.
4. In the Active Cells section, click the Placement button.
5. In the Settings menu’s Locks sub-menu, turn on Association (Lock).
6. In the Cells tool box, select the Place Active Cell tool.
(In the Main tool frame, Place Active Cell is the default
“representative” of the Cells tool box.)
The prompt in the status bar is “Place Active Cell.”

7. Snap a tentative point to the element to which the
cell is to be associated.
8. Enter a data point to accept placement and association
of the Active Cell.
Associating multi-lines
When a multi-line is associated with another element, one
or more vertices of the multi-line are associated with points
on another element (or elements).
To associate a multi-line with another element

1. In the Settings menu’s Locks sub-menu, or in the tool settings for

Isometric Drawing
the Place Multi-line tool, turn on Association (Lock).

2. In the Linear Elements tool box, select the Place Multi-line tool.
Vertices of the multi-line that are not associated with other

elements can be placed in the normal way (as if placing a
line string). When you are ready to place a vertex associated
with another element, continue with step 3.
3. Snap a tentative point to the element to which the
multi-line’s vertex is to be associated.
4. Enter a data point to accept placement of the vertex of the
multi-line and its association with the other element.
5. Continue placing vertices of the multi-line or Reset to
complete the multi-line.
The vertices of a multi-line can further be associated with
vertices of other multi-lines.
Isometric Drawing
Isometric drawing is a technique used to represent 3D relationships
in a 2D design. There are special tools to quickly and accurately
place isometric representations of blocks and circles, and you can
configure the screen pointer to make the job even easier. However,
such drawings are not 3D models; they are strictly illustrative.

Isometric Drawing
To set the Isometric (drawing) Plane

1. From the Settings menu’s Locks sub-menu, choose Full.
2. From the Isometric Plane option menu, choose Top,

Left, Right, or All.
You can also set the Isometric Plane in the tool settings window for
the Place Isometric Block and Place Isometric Circle tools.
To force each data point to lie on the

Isometric Plane
1. In the Settings menu’s Locks sub-menu, turn on Isometric (Lock).
When a linear element is placed, it “snaps” to the Isometric Plane.

Isometric tool box
Line string placed

with Isometric Lock
on and Isometric
Plane set to Top.
Note how the lines
are constrained.
To configure the pointer for isometric drawing

2. In the Preferences dialog box’s Category list box, select Operation.
3. From the Pointer Type option menu, choose Isometric.
The pointer’s cross hairs indicate graphically the Isometric
Plane in which elements are placed.
4. (Optional) — From the Pointer Size option menu, choose Full View.
The pointer’s cross hairs extend to the edges of the screen,
facilitating alignment of new elements with elements
in the same isometric plane.
5. Click OK.
Isometric tool box

The tools in the Isometric tool box are used to represent
3D relationships in a 2D design.

Place Isometric Block
To Select in the Isometric

tool box
Place a shape that represents
a rectangle projected from the
isometric drawing plane.
Place Isometric Block (see
page 6-51)
Place an ellipse that represents
a circle projected from the
isometric drawing plane.
Place Isometric Circle (see
page 6-52)
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX ISOMETRIC OFF | ON | TOGGLE
To create 3D models, draw in 3D. See 3D Design and

Modeling on page 7-71.

Used to place a planar shape representing a rectangle projected
from the isometric drawing plane.
Tool Setting Effect

(Isometric) Defines angles of isometric axes:
Plane
Top—30 and 150
Left—90 and 150
Right—30 and 90

Place Isometric Circle
Tool Setting Effect

To place an “isometric” block

1. Select the Place Isometric Block tool.
3. Enter a data point to define the corner that is
diagonal from the first.

with Isometric Plane
set to Top (a), Left
(b), and Right (c).
Key-in: PLACE BLOCK ISOMETRIC

Used to place a planar ellipse representing a circle projected
from the isometric drawing plane.

Tool Setting Effect

Plane Defines angles of isometric axes:
Top—30 and 150
Left—90 and 150
Right—30 and 90
Fill Color Sets the color with which the “isometric
circle” is filled.
To place an “isometric” circle

1. Select the Place Isometric Circle tool.
3. Enter a second data point on the circumference.

Using Curves
Place Isometric
Circle with the
Isometric Plane set to
Top (a), Left (b), and
Right (c).
Key-in: PLACE CIRCLE ISOMETRIC
Using Curves
With manual drafting tools, you can draw a point curve (a curve
through a series of points) with a French curve. MicroStation has, in
effect, a variety of mathematical French curves for placing curves
on the basis of data points in the design plane, including point
curves and NURBS (non-uniform rational B-splines).
Composite curves (see page 6-59) actually can consist of a combination
of line segments, arcs, and Bézier curves.
You can draw curves without any understanding of the

mathematics behind them, or you can create curves based
on sophisticated mathematical formulas (see Creating any
conceivable curve on page 6-60).
The easiest way to become familiar with curve placement tools

is to enter a series of data points or a line string, then construct
different curves based on those elements. With B-splines, you
can adjust the settings as you watch the curve update, then
accept the curve when it has the correct shape.

Point curves
Point curves
Point curves are based on a relatively simple mathematical formula —
there are no settings that control the curve’s shape. As you place a point
curve, it is dynamically displayed as you enter data points. Of course,
you can place active points or other elements to snap to as you place
the point curve, and you can enter the data points using AccuDraw.
Point curves are placed with the Place Point or Stream Curve tool
(see page 1-42) in the Linear Elements tool box.
Point curves
B-spline curves
A B-spline curve is more complex mathematically than a point

curve. A B-spline curve’s shape is determined by the number
and location of its poles, which are represented as vertices of
the curve’s control polygon and its order.
B-spline curve and
its control polygon.

B-spline curves
B-spline curves are drawn with the Place B-spline Curve toolin
the Create Curves tool box as well as several Special-purpose
2D B-spline tools. (see page 6-59)
You can place a B-spline curve by entering data points or construct

it by identifying a line string or shape — this is determined by
choosing Placement or Construction, respectively, from the Define
By option menu in the tool settings window.
Methods by which the curve is calculated
Unlike point curves, there are a number of Methods, which

can be chosen from the Method option menu, for calculating
the final curve that results.
Method Data points or vertices of element define

Define Poles Vertices of control polygon.
Through Points Points on the curve.
Least Squares A set of points that the curve approximates
or is “fit” to.
Catmull-Rom A set of points that is closely approximated.
These illustrations show the different types of B-spline curves
constructed from the same line string.
B-spline curves constructed based on a line string. Method set to, from
left: Define Poles, Through Points, Least Squares, Catmull-Rom.
Least Squares
The third Method, Least Squares, is similar to Through Points, except
that you can adjust the number of poles in the control polygon.

B-spline curves
If the number of poles is lower than the number of data points or

vertices, the curve is fit using the least squares method.
Generally, the more poles in the control polygon, the better the curve
will fit a regular shape. In the following illustration, the line string on
which the B-splines were based is shown as a solid line. The control
polygons are displayed, as they are in MicroStation, as dashed lines.
B-spline curves
by Least
Squares based
on the same line
string: three,
four, and five
poles.
Catmull-Rom
The Catmull-Rom curve is popular with aircraft and ship hull
designers — it passes directly through the data points or vertices on
which it is based, as do point curves and B-splines Through Points. In
general, the approximation is more accurate than with other methods.
However, Catmull-Rom curves avoid these problems:
• Point curves are flat between the first and second data points as
well as between the next-to-last and last data points.
• With very irregular shapes, B-spline curves Through

Points can develop unwanted loops.
Line string in
shape of square
as the basis
for B-spline:
Through Points
(left) and
Catmull-Rom
(right).

B-spline curves
B-spline curve attributes
B-spline curve settings are set in the B-splines dialog box, which is
opened by choosing B-splines from the Element menu. The Modify
Curves tool box’s Change to Active Curve Settings tool (see page 6-102)
is used to change the attributes of existing B-spline curves.
Display of the curve or control polygon

You can turn on or off the display of either the control polygon or curve.
Order
In practical terms, a B-spline curve’s order defines the curve’s
distance from the control polygon’s poles. The greater the order,
the further the curve can lie from the poles of its control polygon.
A high-order curve is “freer” than a low-order curve.
The limit to a curve’s order is the number of poles: You cannot place a
B-spline curve with a greater order than the number of poles.
B-spline curves
(Method set to
Define Poles
and Define
By set to
Construction).
The Order
increases from
left to right.
In these cases,
the line strings
are congruent
with the control
polygons.

Composite curves
Closure
A closed B-spline starts and ends at the same point,
and encloses an area.
A closed B-spline can also be periodic, which means that all derivatives
of the curve (including tangency) are continuous through the point. In
other words, a periodic B-spline passes “smoothly” through the point
at which its ends are joined, without a kink in the curve.
In a design, a B-spline whose ends do not meet can be called “open.”

Mathematically, however, an open B-spline starts at its first pole and
ends at its last pole, and the ends need not meet. Setting the tool
setting Closure to Open results in mathematically open B-spline curves.
You can use the Change to Active Curve Settings tool (see page
6-102) to change a periodic B-spline’s definition in the design
file to be a mathematically open B-spline without changing its
shape. This is helpful when the design file is to be transferred to
a package that does not support periodic B-splines.
Special-purpose 2D B-spline tools
These tools in the Create Curves tool box are used to place the
following special types of 2D B-spline curves.
The Place Conic tool (see page 6-85) is used

to place a conic section — a hyperbola,
parabola, or partial ellipse.
The Place Spiral tool (see page 6-86) is used
to place a transitional spiral — this is most
commonly used for highway design.
The Construct Interpolation by Arcs tool (see page
6-83) is used to place a complex chain of arcs that
passes through a given set of points.
Composite curves
The Place Composite Curve tool (see page 6-80) in the Create Curves

Creating any conceivable curve
tool box lets you place a complex element that can contain line
segments, arcs, and a special type of B-spline curve, a Bézier curve.
Bézier curves
A Bézier curve is a B-spline curve with the same number of poles as its
Order. Thus, a fourth-order B-spline with four poles is a fourth-order
Bézier curve. These are very popular as they allow control of a curve’s
starting and ending position as well as the tangents at those positions.
Composite
curve
comprising
a line, an arc,
a Bézier curve,
another line,
and an arc
The handles that appear when placing a Bézier curve with the
Place Composite Curve tool (see page 6-80) control the tangents
at the ends of the curve segment. The line defined by the first and
second poles is the initial tangent direction, and the line defined
by the third and fourth poles is the final tangent direction. The
length of the handles controls the size of the tangent at each end.
(A tangent is a vector so it has direction and magnitude.)
The Curve Calculator tool (see page 6-93) lets you create any

conceivable planar curve, based on a mathematical formula.
• A pre-defined curve can be selected from a library

and placed in the design.
• New curves can be defined and added to the supplied libraries.
This is similar to programming a programmable calculator.
Equations that are dimmed in the list box are locked. Modifying
them can corrupt the curve’s formula and should only be done if you
understand how the curve is defined and wish to modify its underlying
definition. See Defining a Curve’s Formula on page 6-63.
To unlock an equation, key in FORMULA UNLOCK [number].
General Procedure — To place a pre-defined curve

1. In the Create Curves tool box, select the Curve Calculator tool.
The Curve Calculator dialog box opens.
2. From the File menu in the Curve Calculator dialog

box, choose Open.
The Resource File to Open dialog box opens.
3. Select a curve library file and click the OK button.
4. From the File menu in the Curve Calculator dialog

box, choose Open Curve.

The Open Curve dialog box opens.
5. Select a curve in the list box and click OK.

The defining equations are listed in the Curve
Calculator dialog box.
6. Edit values in the equation that defines the curve. See To edit
values in the equation that defines a curve on page 6-62.
7. From the Tools menu in the Curve Calculator dialog box,
choose Place Parametric Curve.
8. Enter a data point to define the curve’s origin.
The curve is defined relative to the coordinate system of the
view in which this data point is entered.
To edit values in the equation that defines a curve

1. In the Curve Calculator dialog box, select a row in the list box.
or
Key in the variable’s name in its text item.
The variable and value appear in the text items below the list box.
2. Key in a new value.

General Procedure — To define a curve’s formula

1. In the Create Curves tool box, select the Calculate Curve tool.
The Curve Calculator dialog box opens.
2. In the Curve field, key in the curve’s name.
3. Define the equations.
4. Lock the equations that, if modified, would corrupt the definition.
See To lock an equation on page 6-63 for details.
5. Place a curve to test the equation.
6. Save the equation.
Some mathematical knowledge is needed to define a new curve.

A curve is defined by the parametric equations for the x, y, and
z coordinates of the curve. These formulas give the value of
the articular coordinate as a parameter “t” that is between zero
and one (0.0 ≤ t ≤ 1.0). This is the standard parametric form of
a curve described in mathematical text books.
Variable names are limited to 8 characters and the right side

of the equation is limited to 40 characters. There is also a
limit of 25 formulas to define a curve.
To lock an equation
1. In the Curve Calculator dialog box, select the equation in
the list box and key-in FORMULA LOCK.
Key in FORMULA LOCK [number].
number is the equation’s number (the count starts at zero).
The locked equation is grayed-out in the list box and
cannot be modified.
Examples
A sinusoid with an amplitude of 5 and wave length of 10 can
be defined with the following equations:

Formula Syntax
x(t) = 10u(t) x = 10*u
y(t) = 5sin(u(t)) y(t) =
5*sin(u)
u(t) = 2πt u(t) =
2*pi*t
The third equation is necessary since “t” must be between zero and
one and we want an entire period of the sine wave, from 0–2π.
Auxiliary functions such as this can be defined. By using two

auxiliary variable-value equations for the amplitude and wave
length a more flexible definition results.
x = wl*u
y = amp*sin(u)
u = 2*pi*t
amp = 5
wl = 10
This definition could be used to place sine waves of any amplitude

and wave length by modifying the last two equations. It is clear,
however, that the first three equations should not be modified,
since doing that would corrupt the sine wave’s definition. To
prevent this you can lock the first three formulas. These equations
would then be dimmed in the list box and the end-user would
not be able to harm them. The status of an equation, locked or
unlocked, is saved with the equation in the library file; it is set
using the Formula Lock/Unlock tool described below.
Dimensionality
Curves can be defined in 2 or 3 dimensions; if no z formula is present
the z value defaults to 0, thereby creating a planar curve.
Function format
The formulas defining the x, y, and z coordinates of the curve can
use trigonometric, hyperbolic, logarithmic, exponential, or power
functions. The format for such functions is as follows:

Function Returns
sin (value) sine of value1
cos (value \) cosine of valuea
tan (value) tangent of valuea
asin (value) arc sine of valuea
acos (value) arc cosine of valuea
atan (value) arc tangent of valuea
atan2 (y, x) arctan(y)/xa
sinh (value) hyperbolic sine of value
cosh (value) hyperbolic cosine of value
tanh (value) hyperbolic tangent of value
asinh (value) inverse hyperbolic sine of value
exp (value) evalue
ldexp (x,p) 2xp
log (value) natural logarithm of value
log10 (value) base 10 logarithm of value
ldexp (x, y) xy
sqrt (value) square root of value
1 Depends on global angle units setting
Calculate Curve also understands standard C operators.
Deriving a curve from an existing curve

A curve can be defined from a set of formulas alone or can be derived
from formulas and an existing curve (the root curve). If a curve is
derived, then these values can be referenced in the equations.
These values are derived from the Frenet frame of the root curve
and are updated depending on the value of “t,” the curve parameter.
All these values begin with an underscore.

B-spline Curves tool frame
Value Description
_rx x coordinate of root curve’s position
_ry y coordinate of root curve’s position
_rz z coordinate of root curve’s position
_tx x coordinate of root curve’s tangent
_ty y coordinate of root curve’s tangent
_tz z coordinate of root curve’s tangent
_mx x coordinate of root curve’s normal
_my y coordinate of root curve’s normal
_mz z coordinate of root curve’s normal
_bx x coordinate of root curve’s binormal
_by y coordinate of root curve’s binormal
_bz z coordinate of root curve’s binormal
_kappa curvature of root curve
_tau torsion of root curve
The following constants can be referenced in equations:
Value Description
pi π
e e
Tools for creating and modifying B-spline curves are accessed

from the B-spline Curves tool frame.

To Use tools in the

Place a B-spline curve or Curve
by a tangent,
or
Place a composite curve,
or Create Curves tool box (see
Construct interpolation by arcs, page 6-68)
or
Place a conic, spiral, or helix,
or
Offset an element,
or
Extract surface rule lines,
or
Calculate a curve.
To Use tools in the

Change to active curve settings,
or
Reduce curve data,
or
Extend a curve, Modify Curves tool box (see
or page 6-100)
Change the direction of an
element,
or
Convert an element to a B-spline,
or
Blend a curve,
or
Drop a B-spline curve,
or
Flatten a curve,
or
Evaluate a curve.
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX BSPLINE OFF | ON | TOGGLE

Create Curves tool box
Create Curves tool box

The Create Curves tool box has tools that are used to draw curves
and extract surface rule lines from a B-spline surface.
To Select in the Create Curves

tool box
Place a planar B-spline curve.
Place B-spline Curve (see

page 6-69)
Create a B-spline curve that
passes through a set of points
while maintaining user-defined
tangent directions at those points.
Create Curve by Tangents
(see page 6-77)
Place a composite curve, which
can have line strings, arcs, or
Bézier curves as components.
Place Composite Curve (see
page 6-80)
Place or construct a complex
chain of arcs that passes through
a given set of points.
Construct Interpolation by
Arcs (see page 6-83)
Place a parabola, hyperbola,
or partial ellipse.
Place Conic (see page 6-85)

Place a clothoid, Archimedes,
or logarithmic spiral.
Place Spiral (see page 6-86)

Place a helix in a 3D design.
Place Helix (see page 6-88)

Place B-spline Curve
To Select in the Create Curves

tool box
Construct a B-spline curve that
is the same distance from the
identified element at all points.
Offset Element (see page 6-89)
Extract a B-spline curve(s) from
a B-spline surface.
Extract Surface Rule Lines

(see page 6-90)
Place a curve by defining its
mathematical formula.
Curve Calculator (see page 6-93)
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX CURVECREATE OFF | ON | TOGGLE
To construct a curve along the intersection of two 3D elements, use the

Construct Trim tool (see page 7-161) in the Modify Surfaces tool box.
B-spline-specific settings are set in the B-splines dialog box, which

is opened by choosing B-splines from the Element menu.

Used to place a planar B-spline curve. For general information about
curve placement, see Using Curves on page 6-54.

Method Description Illustration

Define The poles (vertices) of
Control the control polygon are
P[oin]ts defined by data points
or the vertices of the
selected line string or
shape. The number of
poles must be greater
than or equal to the
order. If Closure is
Open, the curve is
placed between the
first and last points
or vertices.


Through The curve passes
Points through the points
defined by the data
points or the vertices
of the identified line
string or shape and is
interpolated at each
point. The curve
is cubic (Order=4)
with continuous
second derivatives
— this minimizes the
curvature.
• If Closure is set
to Open, Number
of Poles = Data
Points + 2
• If Closure is set to
Closed, Number
of Poles = Data
Points
L[east]- The curve is
Square[s] approximated based
By on the points defined by
Tol[erance] the data points or the
vertices of the identified
line string or shape. The
maximum deviation of
the input points from
the curve is adjustable
using the Tolerance
setting. After the
approximation curve is
created, the maximum
deviation and the mean
deviation display in
the status field.


L[east]- The sum of the squares
Square[s] of the distances from
By the data points or
Num[ber] the vertices of the
selected line string or
shape to corresponding
points on the curve is
minimized. The control
polygon has the active
number of Poles.
If the number of data
points or vertices is the
same as the number of
Poles, the curve passes
through all the data
points or vertices,
• If Closure is set
to Open, the
curve begins and
ends at the first
last data points,
respectively.
• If Closure is set to
Closed, the curve
approximates all
data points or
vertices and need
not pass through
any of them,
unless there are
the same number
as the number
of Poles.
If the maximum error

exceeds the Tolerance1
, the maximum error
displays in status bar.
1
The Tolerance is set in the B-splines dialog box (Element > B-splines).


Cat- Fourth-order (cubic)
mull-Rom NURBS curve that is
interpolated. Extra
poles are added to
closely resemble the
shape defined by the
data points entered,
using this formula:
• Number of Poles =
3 × (Data Points
- 1) + 1
Tool Setting Effect

Method Sets the manner in which the curve is
generated (see large table above).
Input By Sets the manner in which the input
points are located.
Enter Data Points—The curve is placed by
entering data points. The curve dynamically
updates while new points are entered or
when the indicator is moved.
Pick Line String—The curve is constructed

based on the vertices of an identified
line string or complex chain (results in
open B-spline) or shape or complex shape
(results in closed B-spline).
Closure Sets whether the curve is Open or Closed. Not
available if Method is Catmull-Rom.
Order Sets the order of the equation that defines the
curve (2-15), when Method is set to Define
Control Pts. or L-Square By Num.
Poles Sets the number of poles (3–101), when
Method is set to L-Square By Num.

Tool Setting Effect

Tolerance Sets the fitting or approximation tolerance,
when Method is set to L-Square By Tol. The
minimum distance from any one of the input
data points to the curve is less than this
value. The minimum distance is computed
by projecting a point to the curve.
End Tangent Sets the manner in which the curve’s tangency
to adjacent elements is controlled, when
Method is set to Through Points or L-Square
By Tol and Closure is set to Open:
Automatic—default tangent directions
are automatically computed.
Both—starting and ending tangent directions

are defined graphically.
Start Tangent—starting tangent direction

is defined graphically.
End Tangent—ending tangent direction

is defined graphically.
Through End Sets the manner in which the curve’s
Points beginning and ending points are located,
when Method is set to L-Square By Tol.
If On, the curve passes through the first
and the last input points. Otherwise, the
curve’s endpoints are computed based
on the Tolerance setting.

To place a B-spline curve by entering data points

1. Select the Place B-spline Curve tool.
2. In the tool settings window, set Input By to Enter Data Points.
3. Enter a data point to define the curve’s beginning.
4. Enter a series of data points.
Method Each data point defines

Define Control One of the control polygon’s poles.
Pts.
Through A point through which the curve must pass.
Points or
Catmull-Rom
L-Square By One of a set of points that the curve must
Tol or L-Square approximate.
By Num
5. If Closure is set to Open, enter a data point to define the curve’s end.
6. Reset.
The curve is generated unless Method is set to Through
Points or L-Square By Tol and Closure is set to Open. In
this case, continue with step 7.
7. If End Tangent is set to Start Tangent, End Tangent, or Both, enter
a data point to define the starting or ending tangent direction.
8. If End Tangent is set to Both, enter a data point to define
the ending tangent direction
To construct a B-spline curve by identifying

an element
1. Select the Place B-spline Curve tool.
2. In the tool settings window, set Input By to Pick Line String.
3. Identify a line string or complex chain to construct an open curve.
or

Identify a shape or complex shape to construct a closed curve.
Method Each vertex defines

Define Control One of the control polygon’s poles.
Pts.
Through A point through which the curve must pass.
Points or
Catmull-Rom
L-Square By One of a set of points that the curve must
Tol or L-Square approximate.
By Num
4. Accept.
The curve is generated unless Method is set to Through
Points or L-Square By Tol and Closure is set to Open. In
this case, continue with step 5.
5. If End Tangent is set to Start Tangent, End Tangent, or Both, enter
a data point to define the starting or ending tangent direction.
6. If End Tangent is set to Both, enter a data point to define
the ending tangent direction.

Top Left: Define

Control Pts.; Top
Right: Through
Points; Bottom
Left: Catmull-Rom,
Bottom Right:
L-Square by Num.
B-spline curves
constructed by
identifying a line
string or shape. The
same curves could be
placed by entering
data points at the
same position as the
vertices. In these
examples, the Order
is 3, and for Least
Squares only, the
number of Poles is
also 3.
Key-in: CONSTRUCT | PLACE BSPLINE CURVE CATMULLROM

| LEASTSQUARES | POINTS | POLES
Used to create a B-spline curve that passes through a set of points

while maintaining user-defined tangent directions at those points. You
can define points and tangent directions interactively using data points
or by identifying elements. In the latter case, the curve passes through
the endpoints of the identified elements and uses directions of the
elements as tangent inputs. The curve may be either quadratic or cubic.

Tool Setting Effect

Input By Sets the manner in which the input
points are located.
Enter Tangents—graphically define a
series of vectors.
Pick Elements—identify existing elements.

Curve Type Sets the curve fitting algorithm:
Cubic—cubic (order 4)
Quadratic—quadratic (order 3)
To create a B-spline curve that passes

through a set of data points with interactively
specified tangent directions
1. Select the Create Curve by Tangents tool.
2. In the tool settings window, set Input By to Enter Tangents.
3. Enter a data point to define the curve’s starting point.
4. Enter a data point to define the tangent direction at
the defined starting point.
5. Enter a data point to define the next point through
which the curve will pass.
6. Enter a data point to define the tangent direction at the
point defined in the previous step.
7. For each additional point through which the curve will pass,
repeat steps 5 (see page 6-78) -6 (see page 6-78) .
8. Reset to generate the curve.

As data points
are entered,
defining each
curve point (1) and
tangent direction
(2), graphics
dynamically display
the point(s) and the
tangent direction(s).
After placing the
required data points,
entering a reset
generates the curve.
To create a B-spline curve that passes through the

vertices of existing elements and whose tangent
directions correspond to the elements’ directions
1. Select the Create Curve by Tangents tool.
2. In the tool settings window, set Input By to Pick Elements.
3. Identify an element.
5. Accept.
The curve is generated. It passes through the endpoints
of the identified elements, and its tangent directions

Place Composite Curve
correspond to the elements’ directions.
Identify the
elements (1,
2, 3) from
which the
curve is to be
generated.
Accept (4) to
generate a
curve passing
through the
end points of
the selected
elements,
with its
tangent
directions
corresponding
to the
elements’
directions.
Used to place a composite curve, which can have line strings, arcs,
or Bézier curves (fourth order B-spline curves with four poles) as
components. If all components are line segments and there are fewer
than 101 vertices, a line string or shape is placed in the design;
otherwise a complex chain or complex shape is placed.

Tool Setting Effect

Smooth If on, intersections of arcs and Bézier
Corners curves are smooth.
Planar If on and the active design file is 3D, the
composite curve is forced to lie on one plane.
Mode Sets the type of component that is placed
(see step 4 below)).
Arc Radius (Arc by Edge or Arc by Center only) If
on, sets the arc radius.
Arc Angle (Arc by Edge or Arc by Center only) If
on, sets the arc sweep angle.
To place a composite curve

1. Select the Place Composite Curve tool.
2. From the tool settings window’s Mode option menu,
choose the component.
3. If this is the first component in the composite curve, enter
a data point to define the origin.
4. Enter data points to place the component (follow the
prompts in the status bar).
Mode Enter data points to Similar to

Arcs By Edge Define point on arc. Place Arc (see
Define arc endpoint. page 1-75)
Arcs By Center Define center (defines radius, Place Arc (see
unless Radius is on). page 1-75)
Define sweep angle (unless Arc
Angle is on).

Mode Enter data points to Similar to

Bézier Curves Define first anchor point. None
Define first direction point (define
tangency).
Define second anchor point (endpoint).
Define second direction point.
Line Segments Define endpoints of segments. Place
SmartLine (see
page 6-80)
5. To place more of the same component, return to step 4.

or
To choose a different component, return to step 2.
or
To complete an open composite curve, Reset.
or
To complete a closed composite curve, click the Close Element
button, or key in CLOSE ELEMENT.

Construct Interpolation by Arcs
Place Composite Curve. Clockwise from top left: A: Smooth Corners

is on. At first, Mode is Arcs By Center. After data point 3, Mode
is set to Line Segments, back to Arcs By Center after data point
4, and so on. The figure is closed by entering a data point at the
same location as the origin or by clicking Close Element.
B: Mode is Arcs by Center. For first two arcs, Smooth Corners is

off. After data point 5, Smooth Corners is on.
C: Mode is initially Line segments. After data point 3, the Mode is

changed to Arcs By Edge and the Line Style is also changed.
After data point 4, the Line Weight is changed.
D: The Fibonacci curve is placed with Mode set to Arcs by Center,

Smooth Curves on, and Arc Angle set to 90 .
The Arc Radius is 1 for first two arcs and is changed to 2 and 3
after data points 5 and 7, respectively. E: Mode is Bézier curve.
The odd-numbered data points define anchor points; the even
numbered ones define direction (tangency) points. A Reset was
entered after data point 8 to complete the curve.
Key-in: PLACE COMPOSITE
To combine contiguous open elements of any type into a complex

chain (open) or complex shape (closed), use the Create Complex
Chain tool (see page 6-11) or Create Complex Shape tool (see
page 6-14) in the Groups tool box.
Used to place or construct a complex chain of arcs that passes through

a given set of points. The arcs are joined smoothly — that is, they
have tangent continuities. The given points can either be specified
as a line string or shape element or entered interactively.

Tool Setting Effect

Input By Sets how the complex chain is defined.
Enter Data Points—The complex chain is
placed by entering data points.
Pick Line String—The complex chain is

constructed based on the vertices of an
identified line string or shape.
To place an arc interpolation by entering

data points
1. Select the Construct Interpolation by Arcs tool.
2. In the tool settings window, set Input By to Enter Data Points.
3. Enter a data point to define the beginning of the interpolation.
4. Continue to enter data points to define other interpolation points.
5. Reset to complete the definition.
To construct an arc interpolation by

identifying an element
1. Select the Construct Interpolation by Arcs tool.
2. In the tool settings window, set Input By to Place Line String.
3. Identify a line string or shape from which to construct
the interpolation.
4. Accept the construction.

Place Conic
Key-in: CONSTRUCT ARCS INTERPOLATION
Place Conic
Used to place a conic section — a hyperbola, parabola, or partial ellipse

— as a third-order uniform B-spline curve with three poles.
Tool Setting Effect

(Section) Sets whether the conic section is a
Type Hyperbola, Parabola,1
or Partial Ellipse.2
Define By Sets the point defined in step 4 in the
procedure below.
Shoulder Points—the shoulder point
is defined.
Tangents—the intersection of the tangent

lines is defined.
Rho The range depends on the Section Type:
• If Hyperbola, 0.5 < ρ < 1.0
• If Parabola, ρ = 0.5.
• If Partial Ellipse, 0.0 < ρ < 0.5.
1 To construct a parabolic fillet to two elements, use the Construct

Parabolic Fillet tool.
2 To place a partial ellipse as an arc element, use the Place Half Ellipse
tool or Place Quarter Ellipse tool in the Arcs tool box.

Place Spiral
To place a conic section

1. Select the Place Conic tool.
3. Enter a data point to define the other endpoint.
4. Enter a final data point.
If Define By is set to Points, it defines the shoulder point.
If Define By is set to Tangent, it defines the intersection
of the tangent lines.
Place Conic.
Left: By
Points; Right:
By Tangent.
Double-dotted
curves are
partial
ellipses (0.0 <
ρ < 0.5), solid
curves are
parabolas (ρ
= 0.5), and
single-dotted
curves are
hyperbolas
(0.5 < ρ <1.0).
Key-in: PLACE CONIC
Place Spiral

Place Spiral
Used to place a transitional spiral as a B-spline curve.
Tool Setting Effect

Type Sets the spiral’s mathematical definition.
Clothoid—Used to create a smooth transition
between arcs that have different radii so
that there is no abrupt change of curvature.
Used in highway design.
Archimedes—The radius changes linearly

based on the angle.
Logarithmic—The radius changes

exponentially based on the angle.
Initial If Type is set to Clothoid, sets the degree
Degree of curvature at the origin.
Final Degree If Type is set to Clothoid, sets the degree of
curvature at the spiral’s endpoint.
Length If Type is set to Clothoid, sets the
spiral’s length.
Initial If type is Archimedes or Logarithmic, sets
Radius the radius at the origin.
Final Radius If type is Archimedes or Logarithmic, sets
the radius at the spiral’s endpoint.
Angle If Type is Archimedes or Logarithmic,
sets the sweep angle.
Tolerance If Type is Clothoid or Logarithmic,
sets the tolerance.

Place Helix
To place a spiral
1. Select the Place Spiral tool.
2. Enter a data point to define the spiral’s origin.
3. Enter a data point to define the tangent direction at the origin.
4. Enter a data point to define the spiral’s direction.
Key-in: PLACE SPIRAL
Place Helix
(3D only) Used to place a helix (3D B-spline curve).
Tool Setting Effect

Thread Can be right or left.
Axis Sets the direction of the helix’s axis.
Orthogonal If on, the helix is orthogonal.
Top Radius If on, sets the second radius (step 5 below).
Base Radius If on, sets the first radius (step 3 below).
Height If on, sets the height (step 4 below).
Pitch If on, sets the pitch.
To place a helix
1. Select the Place Helix tool.
2. Enter a data point to define the Base end of the axis.
If all constraints are on and Axis is set to anything other

Offset Element
than Points, the helix is displayed dynamically and you can

enter a data point to accept the helix.
3. Enter a data point to define the beginning of the helix
and the first (Base) radius.
4. Enter a data point to define the other end of the axis.
5. Enter a data point to define the second (Top) radius.
6. Accept the helix.
Key-in: PLACE HELIX
Offset Element
Used to construct an offset curve from an element (line, line

string, multi-line, curve, arc, ellipse, shape, complex chain, or
complex shape) — a B-spline curve that is the same distance
from the identified element at all points.
Tool Setting Effect

Cusp Sets how “corners” are treated.
Corner—“Corners” are sharp in the
offset curve.
Round—“Corners” are rounded in the offset

curve. Tolerance must be set to a non-zero
value if Cusp is set to Round.
Distance If on, sets the distance to offset.
Tolerance If on, overrides the system Tolerance,
which is set in the B-splines dialog box
(Element > B-splines).

To construct an offset curve

1. Select the Offset Element tool.
Distance This data point defines

Off Distance and direction.
On Direction only.
Construct Offset Curve. Left: Cusp set to Corner and Distance

off. Center: Cusp set to Round and Distance off. Right: Cusp
set to Round and Distance On Make Copy is on..
Key-in: CONSTRUCT CURVE OFFSET
(3D only) Used to extract a B-spline curve(s) from a B-spline surface.
This example shows the results of the Extract Surface Rule Lines tool,
with Extract set to Multiple Curves, applied to an arbitrary surface.

Original
surface
Surface with
10 extracted
surface rule
lines in both
directions.
Tool Setting Effect

Extract Sets the objective of the tool.
Single Curve—Extract a curve that has a
constant parametric u-value (iso-u curve) or
constant parametric v-value (iso-v curve).
The u-value or v-value is the specified Iso
Value. The udirection is the direction in which
the data points that defined each row were
entered; the v-direction is the direction in
which the columns were defined.
Multiple Curves—Extract a set of curves

that are spaced evenly on the surface
in both directions.
Iso Value If on, sets the iso value of the extracted
curve. This option is enabled only if
Extract is set to Single Curve.

Tool Setting Effect

Numbers U/V Sets the number of curves to extract from
both parametric u- and v- directions.
These fields are enabled only if Extract
is set to Multiple Curves.
Ignore Trim If off, the curves are trimmed by the B-spline
trim curves, if any. This option is enabled
only if Extract is set to Multiple Curves.
To construct a curve based on a rule line

from a surface
1. Select the Extract Surface Rule Lines tool.
2. Identify the surface.
As you move the pointer, an iso-u curve displays dynamically.
3. Enter a data point to define the curve’s position and
create the iso-u curve.
or
Reset to display an iso-v curve.
As you move the pointer, an iso-v curve displays dynamically.
4. Enter a data point to define the curve’s position and create
the iso-v curve (or Reset to create no curve).
Identify the surface

(1). Enter a second
data point (2) to
position the iso curve.

Curve Calculator
To extract multiple curves from a surface

1. Select the Extract Surface Rule Lines tool.
3. Accept the surface.
The curves are generated.
Key-in: EXTRACT SURFACE RULE LINES
Curve Calculator
Opens the Curve Calculator dialog box (see page 6-95) , which is
used to place any conceivable planar curve as a NURBS, based on
a mathematical formula, in either of the following ways:
• From a library of pre-defined curves.

• By defining a custom formula.
Trigonometric, hyperbolic, exponential, logarithmic, and power

functions can be used to create sinusoids, spirals, catenaries,
involutes, evolutes, and so on. For the creation procedures, see
Creating any conceivable curve on page 6-60.

Curve Calculator
To place a parametric line string

choose Place Parametric Line String.
2. Enter a data point to define the line string’s origin.
To construct a curve defined by formulas

and another curve
choose Construct Parametric Curve.
2. Identify the curve in the design.
3. Accept the new curve.
To construct a line string defined by formulas

and another curve

Curve Calculator dialog box
choose Construct Parametric Line String.

2. Identify the existing curve.
3. Accept the line string.
Key-in: MDL LOAD CURVCALC

Used to place any conceivable planar curve as a NURBS, based
on a mathematical formula. Opens when the Curve Calculator
tool is selected in the Create Curves tool box.
Set Value
Sets values in the equations that define the curve. The
variable-value pairs can be edited as follows:
• Select a row in the list box. The variable and value appear
in the text items below the list box.
• Enter a variable’s name in its text item and press áReturnñ.
• The key-in can be used to update a variable-value pair.
The dynamics reflect any changes in the variable-value pairs

defining the curve if a placement tool is selected.

Key-in: SET VALUE VARIABLE [value]
Formulas in black are variable-value pairs that can be edited.

Formulas that are dimmed are locked and cannot be selected.
These are the parametric equations of the curve and should
not be changed unless you want to define a new curve (see
Defining a Curve’s Formula on page 6-63).
For example, the supplied curve definition “Elliptical arc” (in

“curve.rsc”) lets you enter values for the two radii that define the
ellipse as well as the start and sweep angles.
Tolerance
Sets the tolerance.

Key-in: ACTIVE TOLERANCE value
Active Units
The units used by the equations to create the curve — master

units, sub-units (the default), or positional units.

Key-in: ACTIVE UNITS áMU | SU | PU ñ
Active Angle
Angle units used — degrees or radians. The default is stored

in the curve’s definition in the library.

Key-in: ACTIVE ANGLES DEGREES | RADIANS

File > New File

Lets you remove a curve library and start a new curve library.

Key-in: MENU NEWFILE
File > Open File…

Opens the Resource file to Open dialog box, which is used to
open a library of pre-defined curves.

Key-in: MENU OPENFILE FILENAME
By default, looks for “.rsc” files in the directory pointed to by

the MS_DATA configuration variable.
OK
Click to open the selected curve library file. The Open

Curve Resource dialog box opens.
File > Select Curve…

Opens the Open Curve Resource dialog box, which is used to select
a curve from the open library of pre-defined curves.

Key-in: MENU OPENCURVE CURVE NUMBER
File > Save

Saves the curve library file.

Key-in: MENU SAVE

File > Save As…

Opens a dialog box which is used to create a new curve library file.

Key-in: MENU SAVETO
Edit > Clear

Removes the listed curve from curve library. All equations are removed
and the defaults are set for tolerance, units, angle, and mode.

Key-in: MENU CLEAR
Edit > Duplicate
Removes the listed curve from curve library without removing its
defining functions. This makes it easy to define a new curve from
an old curve without having to re-type all the equations.

Key-in: MENU DUPLICATE
Edit > Mode

Sets the type of curve to create.
Curve type Specified Created using

Defined Completely by Place
equations Parametric
Curve
Derived By equations and a Construct
root curve Parametric
Curve
A curve’s type is stored in the library file so that the appropriate

create commands can be enabled when the curve is loaded.

Key-in: ACTIVE MODE DEFINED | DERIVED
Tools > Place Parametric Curve

Used to place a curve that is defined by listed formulas
relative to a view’s coordinate system.
The active units, active angle, and Tolerance are set in the
Curve Calculator dialog box.

Key-in: PLACE PARAMETRIC CURVE RELATIVE
To place a curve that is defined by listed formulas relative

to the design file coordinate system, key-in PLACE
PARAMETRIC CURVE ABSOLUTE.
Tools > Place Parametric Line String
Used to place a line string that is defined by listed formulas relative

to a view’s coordinate system. The vertices are evaluated at even
intervals throughout the domain of the equations. By default, 11
vertices are calculated at the values t = 0.0, 0.1, 0.2,…,1.0.

Key-in:
PLACE PARAMETRIC LINESTRING RELATIVE
NUMBER_OF_VERTICES
The number_of_vertices can be up to the maximum of 101

points allowed in a line string.
To place a line string that is defined by listed formulas relative to

the design file coordinate system, key-in PLACE PARAMETRIC
LINESTRING ABSOLUTE number_of_points.

Modify Curves tool box
Tools > Construct Parametric Curve

Used to place a curve defined by the listed formulas and a curve in
the design. Offsets and evolutes are examples of such curves.
The active units, active angle units, and Tolerance are set
in the Curve Calculator dialog box.

Key-in: CONSTRUCT PARAMETRIC CURVE
Tools > Construct Parametric Line String
Used to create a curve defined by the listed formulas and a

curve in the design. The vertices are evaluated at even intervals
throughout the domain of the equations. By default, 11 vertices
are calculated at the values t = 0.0, 0.1, 0.2,…,1.0.

Key-in: CONSTRUCT PARAMETRIC LINESTRING
[number_of_vertices]
Number_of_vertices can be 1-101.

The Modify Curves tool box has tools that are used to modify curves.

To Select in the Modify Curves

tool box
Change a B-spline curve’s
attributes to the active B-spline
curve settings.
Change to Active Curve Settings
(see page 6-102)
“Clean up” curves with large
numbers of control points.
Reduce Curve Data (see

page 6-103)
Extend a B-spline curve.
Extend Curve (see page 6-105)

Reverse the direction of an open
B-spline curve or change the start
of a closed B-spline curve.
Change Element Direction
(see page 6-106)
Convert an element to a B-spline
curve with the same shape.
Convert Element to B-spline

(see page 6-107)
Construct a blend curve between
two elements.
Blend Curves (see page 6-108)

Convert a B-spline curve to
lines, a line string, a stream
curve, arcs or points.
Drop B-spline Curve (see
page 6-110)

To Select in the Modify Curves

tool box
Flatten or project MicroStation
curve type elements.
Flatten Curve (see page 6-111)

Graphically and numerically
evaluate the attributes of a
B-spline curve at given locations
on the curve. Evaluate Curve (see page 6-114)
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX CURVEMODIFY OFF | ON | TOGGLE

Used to change a B-spline curve’s attributes to the active settings
for the attribute(s) for which the tool setting is on.
Tool Setting Effect
Polygon If on, sets whether the curve’s control

polygon is displayed:
Invisible—the control polygon is not displayed.
Visible—the control polygon is displayed.

Curve If on, sets whether the curve is displayed:
Invisible—the curve is not displayed.
Visible—the curve is displayed.

Closure If on, sets whether the B-spline is
Open or Closed.

Reduce Curve Data
Tool Setting Effect

Order If on, sets the curve’s order.
Preserve If on, the curve’s shape remains the same,
Shape even though the Order is changed. Only
available if Order is on.
To change a B-spline curve’s attributes

(those that are on)
2. Select the Change to Active Curve Settings tool.
Alternative method — To change a B-spline

curve’s attributes (those that are on)
1. Select the Change to Active Curve Settings tool.
Key-in: CHANGE CURVE
To set the active B-spline curve settings so they match those of

a B-spline curve in the design, use the Match Curve Settings
tool (see page 3-75) in the Match tool box.
Reduce Curve Data
Used to “clean up” a B-spline curve that has a large number

of control points (poles), like those sometimes created with the

Reduce Curve Data
Offset Element tool (see page 6-89) or imported from other systems.
The replacement curve does not deviate from the original curve
by the given Tolerance. While the number of control points is
reduced, the order of the curve is not changed.
Tool Setting Effect

Make Copy If on, the original curve is not deleted upon
creation of the replacement curve.
Maintain If on, the end tangent directions of
End the replacement curve are the same as
Tangents those of the original.
Tolerance Sets the maximum distance allowed between
the replacement curve and the original
curve. To make the replacement curve
appear identical to the original, even though
its complexity is reduced, experiment with
different Tolerance values.
To reduce the number of poles in a B-spline curve

1. Select the Reduce Curve Data tool.
3. Accept the reduction in the number of poles.
The number of poles reduced is displayed in the status bar.
If the number displayed is 0, the curve could not be modified
while maintaining the specified Tolerance.
Key-in: CONSTRUCT CURVE REDUCE
To check the number of control points in a B-spline curve, use

the Analyze Element tool in the Primary Tools tool box or choose

Extend Curve
Information from the Element menu.
Extend Curve
Used to extend an element (line, line string, arc, ellipse, complex

chain or B-spline curve) by a certain scale.
Tool Setting Effect

Continuity Defines the smoothness of the extension.
Position—The extension is a straight line.
Tangent—The extension is tangent

continuous.
Curvature—The extension is curvature

continuous.
Extension Scale relative to the length between the two
Scale poles of the curve at the end of the extension.1
Must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
1 More precisely: Length between first two poles of extension curve = Length
between two poles of original curve ¥ Extension Scale ³ (1 - Extension Scale)

To extend an element by a certain scale

1. Select the Extend Curve tool.
3. Accept the extension.
Key-in: EXTEND CURVE
Used to reverse an element’s (line, line string, arc, ellipse,

complex chain, complex shape, curve, or B-spline curve)
direction or change its start point.
• An open element’s direction when placed is from its start point

(the first point defined) to its end point.
• A closed element’s direction when placed is counterclockwise.
An element’s direction is significant when:
• It is labeled with the Label Line tool.

• A view is rotated to align with it.
To reverse an element’s direction

1. Select the Change Element Direction tool.
The element is highlighted and an arrow showing its

direction is displayed.
3. Reset.
The element’s direction is reversed.
To move an element’s start point

1. Select the Change Element Direction tool.
The element is highlighted and an arrow showing its
direction is displayed.
3. Identify the element’s new start point.
The direction arrow moves to the new start point.
4. Reset.
Key-in: CHANGE DIRECTION
Used to convert an element (line, line string, arc, ellipse, complex

chain, complex shape, surface of projection or revolution, or cone)
to a B-spline curve with the same shape.
Tool Setting Effect

Make Copy • If on, a B-spline curve with the
same shape as the identified
element is created.
• If off, the identified element is
converted to a B-spline curve

Blend Curves
Tool Setting Effect

Convert If on, a closed element is converted
Element to to a B-spline surface rather than a
Surface closed B-spline curve.
Tolerance If on, sets how accurately the element is
converted or copied, if Convert Element
to Surface is on.
To convert an element to a B-spline

1. Select the Convert Element to B-spline tool.
3. Accept the new B-spline curve.
Key-in: CONVERT BSPLINE
Blend Curves
Used to construct a B-spline curve between two elements (lines,

line strings, arcs, ellipses, complex chains, complex shapes, or
B-spline curves) that consists of the trimmed original elements
and a transition curve connecting them.

Blend Curves
Tool Setting Effect

Continuity Sets number of control points between the
blend points (identified in steps 2 and 4 below).
Position—0 control points. A straight “line”
is constructed between the blend points.
Tangent—2 control points. In most

cases, this is adequate.
Curvature—4 control points.
3rd Degree-13 Degree—6, 8,…, 26 control

points, respectively.
Factor 1 Magnitude of blend curve’s initial tangent.
Factor 2 Magnitude of blend curve’s final tangent.
To construct a blend between two elements

1. Select the Blend Curves tool.
2. Identify the first element at the blend’s start point.
3. Identify the end of the first element to trim.
4. Identify the second element at the blend’s end point.
5. Identify the end of the second element to trim.
The blend curve displays dynamically.
6. (Optional) — Adjust the relative magnitudes of Factor 1 and
Factor 2 to achieve the desired blend.
7. Accept the blend.

Drop B-spline Curve
Blend Curves.
Blending the line
and arc shown at
top left. Top right:
Continuity is set to
Position. Bottom: In
both illustrations,
Continuity is set to
Tangent.
Key-in: BLEND CURVE
Drop B-spline Curve
Used to convert a B-spline curve to lines, a line string, a

stream curve, arcs or points.
Tool Setting Effect
Chord Used with Chord Height method.

Height
Chord Used with Fixed Chord Length method
Length

Flatten Curve
To drop a B-spline curve

1. Select the Drop B-spline Curve tool.
3. Accept the drop.
Key-in: DROP CURVE
Flatten Curve
Used to flatten or project a MicroStation curve-type element, such as a

line string, complex chain, complex shape, or B-spline curves, into a
specified plane. This tool is designed to process digitized data or
imported curves that are not currently planar but meant to be.

Flatten Curve
Tool Setting Effect

Flatten Sets the normal direction for the flatten plane.
Plane
Automatic—computed by an averaging
process based on the identified element.
Closest Standard Plane—First, a normal

direction is computed by the averaging
process is done in the Automatic case. This
resulting plane is compared to the standard
XY, YZ, XZ planes to see which is closer. The
closest is used as the flatten plane.
Drawing XY Plane—parallel to the

design cube’s xy plane.
Drawing XZ Plane—parallel to the

design cube’s xz plane.
Drawing YZ Plane—parallel to the

design cube’s yz plane.
View—parallel to the view.
User Defined—defined by three data points.

Keep Profile If on, the original curve is not deleted.
To flatten or project an element

1. Select the Flatten Curve tool.
2. Identify the element to flatten or project.
3. If Flatten Plane is set to Automatic or Closest Standard
Plane, accept the element.
or
If Flatten Plane is set to Drawing XY Plane, Drawing XZ
Plane, or Drawing YZ Plane, enter a data point (base point)
to define the location of the flatten plane.
or

Flatten Curve
If Flatten Plane is set to View, enter a data point to define

the depth of the flatten plane.
or
If Flatten Plane is set to User Defined, enter a series of three data
points (length, width, and height) to define the flatten plane.
With Keep Profile

turned on, and
Flatten Plane set to
Drawing XZ plane,
identify the curve (1).
Identify the location

of the Drawing XZ
plane (2), to generate
the flattened curve.

Evaluate Curve
Three-dimensional
curve, shown with
“flattened” curves
aligned with the XY,
XZ and YZ drawing
planes.
Key-in: FLATTEN CURVE
Evaluate Curve

Evaluate Curve
(3D only) Used to graphically and numerically evaluate attributes

of a B-spline surface, other than order, poles, and knots, at given
locations on the surface. There are four ways to define locations
on a surface, and two output options.
The attributes that can be computed are points, tangents, and

normal directions. Computed attributes can be used as reference
points or reference lines for other purposes.
Below is an example of Evaluate Curve results specifying node points.

Note that the number of node points is equal to the number of knots.

Evaluate Curve
By changing the number of points, the data may be viewed

in a variety of pictorial formats.

Evaluate Curve
This B-spline
curve is
identical to the
one displayed
in the table
of tool setting
descriptions.
Note that
increasing the
number of
points in the
Curvature Plot
and changing
the Curvature
Plot Scale, this
image clearly
shows the first
derivative.
Tool Setting Effect

Attribute(s) Sets the method used to output the
Output By computed attributes.
Display Only—Attributes are displayed only.
Save In File—The attributes are saved in the

active design file with the same graphic group
number for easy manipulation.

Evaluate Curve
Tool Setting Effect

Location(s) Sets the manner in which the locations on
Input By the surface are defined.
Enter Data Point—Interactively define a
single location on the surface.
Parameter—Using the Parameter Value U and

V settings. The values, which must be in the
range 0–1, specify the location from the domain to
map to the displayed object. Within MicroStation,
the domain is from 0.0 to 1.0.
Dist[ance] Along Curve—Using the Dist From

Start(%) U and V settings. The values are each a
percentage of the total length of the u or v curve on
the surface. For example, to extract the tangent
direction of a surface at its middle point, set Dist.
From Start(%) U and V each to 50.
Point Array—Using the Number of Points

setting. The value is the number of evenly
spaced locations on the curve. For example, to
evaluate at 20 evenly spaced locations on the
curve, set Number of Points to 20.
Tangent Plot Sets the scale factor applied to the magnitude
Scale display. If set to 1.0, the extracted tangent is
the true derivative vector — that is, the tangent
direction with the magnitude.
Curvature Sets the scale factor applied to the line segments
Plot Scale that represent curvature vectors in Curvature
Plot output. If set to 1.0, the true curvature
vector is displayed. The curvature value is the
length of this vector. The radius of curvature
is equal to one divided by the curvature. For a
straight line, the radius of curvature is infinity
since its curvature is zero.
Perpendic- Sets the radius of the perpendicular circles in
ular Circle Perpendicular Circles output.
Radius

Evaluate Curve
Tool Setting Effect

Parameter Sets the parameter value applicable to the
Value Parameter option for defining locations on the
curve; see Location(s) Input By above.
Dist[ance] Sets the distance value applicable to the Dist.
From Along Curve option for defining locations on the
Start(%) curve; see Location(s) Input By above.
Number of Sets the numeric value applicable to the Point
Points Array option for defining locations on the curve;
see Location(s) Input By above.
[Compute]
Points
If on, the points on the curve at which evaluation

is performed are displayed in the output.
[Compute]
Tangents
If on, the curve’s tangents are computed.

[Compute]
Curvature
Plot
If on, the curve’s curvature plot is computed.

Selecting Elements Based on Attributes
Tool Setting Effect

[Compute]
Inflection
Points
If on, the curve’s inflection points are

computed. Inflection points are where the
curve changes concavity.
[Compute]
Perpendicu-
lar Circles
If on, the curve’s perpendicular circles are computed.
To evaluate a B-spline curve

1. Select the Evaluate Curve tool.
2. Identify the curve.
If Location(s) Input By is set to Enter Data Point, this data point
also determines the location on the curve at which to evaluate.
3. Accept the curve.
The curve is evaluated, and the desired attributes are
computed and output.
Key-in: EVALUATE CURVE
This tool can also be used to evaluate lines, arcs, and ellipses.

In addition to graphically selecting elements with the Element Selection
tool (see Selecting Elements on page 3-1), you can easily select them
based on their attributes using the Select By Attributes dialog box. The
dialog box has controls for specifying attribute-based search criteria.
In essence, the dialog box is an extension of the Element Selection tool.
For example, you can request MicroStation to select all text elements
or all elements with line weight 3. You can even specify search
criteria based on different kinds of attributes — for example,

green, dotted arc elements on levels 22 and 23.
Any kind of attribute can be specified as search criteria:
• level
• type (line, arc, B-spline, text, etc.)
• color
• line style
• line weight
• class
• tag values
• properties, including the area attribute (Solid or Hole),
whether an element can be snapped to, whether it is locked,
and whether it has been modified.
General Procedure — To use Attributes

as Selection Criteria
1. From the Edit menu, choose Select By Attributes.
The Select By Attributes dialog box opens. The second option
menu in the Mode section should be set to Selection.

Using Auxiliary Coordinate Systems
2. Use the controls in the dialog box to specify selection criteria. (To
specify criteria based on element properties, click the Properties
button and use the controls in the Select by Properties dialog box.
To specify criteria based on tag values, click the Tags button
and use the controls in the Select By Tags dialog box.)
3. In the Mode section, make sure On is chosen from
the third option menu.
4. Click Execute.
The elements meeting the specified selection criteria are
selected and bracketed with handles.
The above procedure can be adapted for locating (highlighting)

elements or filtering their display based on their attributes. The
effect of the Execute button in the Select By Attributes dialog box is
controlled with the second option menu in the Mode section, which is
set to Selection by default. The other options are Location and Display.

You can define new x- and y- axes in your design plane and save
them as an auxiliary coordinate system. You can save several
auxiliary coordinate systems and quickly choose any of them and
the design file or view coordinate systems.
The drawing plane coordinate system used with AccuDraw
(see page 2-13) serves much the same function as an auxiliary
coordinate system but is even more useful.
Auxiliary coordinate systems are particularly helpful in 3D design,

where they facilitate placing elements on planes at different depths
and orientations. See 3D auxiliary coordinate systems on page 7-61.
Once an auxiliary coordinate system is active you can use it

with precision input key-ins (such as AX= and AD=) to perform
precision input with respect to the auxiliary coordinate systems. See
Precision input key-ins with an ACS on page 7-68.

To define and save an auxiliary coordinate

system in a 2D design by data points
1. (Optional) — From the Settings menu, choose View
Attributes (or press áCtrl-Bñ)
or
2. (Optional) — In the View Attributes dialog box, turn

on ACS Triad and click All.
When an auxiliary coordinate system is defined, two arrows
indicating the positive x- and y- axes and their origin
display. (This symbol is called a “triad” because it consists

of three arrows in 3D designs.)
3. From the Utilities menu, choose Auxiliary Coordinates.

The Auxiliary Coordinate Systems dialog box opens.
4. From the dialog box’s Tools menu’s Define By Points

sub-menu, choose Rectangular.
The prompt in the status bar is “Enter first point @ x axis origin.”
5. Enter a data point to define the origin of the auxiliary
coordinate system.
The coordinates of the point identified will be 0,0 in the
auxiliary coordinate system. The prompt in the status
bar is “Enter second point on x-axis.”
6. Enter a data point to define a point on the positive x-axis.
The ACS triad displays.
7. In the Auxiliary Coordinate Systems dialog box’s Name
field, key in a name of up to seven characters to identify
the auxiliary coordinate system.
8. (Optional) — In the Description field, key in a description of up to
28 characters to help identify the auxiliary coordinate system.
9. Click Save.
The new auxiliary coordinate system displays in the list box.

ACS tool box
ACS tool box

The tools in the ACS tool box are used to define and manipulate
an auxiliary coordinate system (ACS) — a coordinate system you
define that differs from the design plane (world) and view coordinate
systems. For general information about using an ACS, see 3D
auxiliary coordinate systems on page 7-61.
One ACS can be active at any time in a 2D or 3D design. While ACSs

can be used in 2D, they are most useful in 3D design.
To Select in the ACS tool box

Define an ACS aligned with
a planar element.
Define ACS (Aligned with

Element) (see page 6-126)
Define an ACS by entering
data points.
Define ACS (By Points)

(see page 6-126)
Define an ACS aligned with
a view.
Define ACS (Aligned with

View) (see page 6-127)
Rotate the active ACS.
Rotate Active ACS (see

page 6-128)
Move the origin of the Active ACS.
Move ACS (see page 6-129)

Identify an ACS for attachment
as the Active ACS.
Select ACS (see page 6-130)

Define ACS (Aligned with Element)
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX ACS OFF | ON | TOGGLE

Used to define an ACS aligned with a planar element. Upon
definition, the ACS becomes the Active ACS.
Tool Setting Effect

Type Sets the ACS Type — Rectangular,
Cylindrical, or Spherical.
ACS Plane If on, each data point is forced to lie on
Lock the Active ACS’s xy-plane.
ACS Plane If on, each tentative point is forced to lie
Snap on the Active ACS’s xy-plane.
To define an ACS aligned with an element

1. Select the Define ACS (Aligned with Element) tool.
2. Enter a data point to identify the element with which to
align the ACS and define the ACS origin.
3. Accept the ACS.
The ACS’s xy-plane is parallel to the plane of the identified element.
Key-in: DEFINE ACS ELEMENT
Define ACS (By Points)

Used to define an ACS with data points. Upon definition,

Define ACS (Aligned with View)
the ACS becomes the Active ACS.
Tool Setting Effect

To define an ACS with data points

1. Select the Define ACS (By Points) tool.
2. Enter a data point to define the ACS origin.
3. Enter a data point to define the direction of the ACS’s positive
x-axis, which extends from the origin through this point.
4. (3D only) Enter a data point to define the direction
of the positive y-axis.
The direction of the positive z-axis follows by applying
the “right hand rule.”
Key-in: DEFINE ACS POINTS

Used to define an ACS aligned with a view. Upon definition,
the ACS becomes the Active ACS.

Rotate Active ACS
Tool Setting Effect

To define an ACS that is aligned with a view

1. Select the Define ACS (Aligned with View) tool.
2. Enter a data point to select the view with which the ACS
is to be aligned and define the ACS origin.
The ACS’s x- and y- axes are the same as the view’s horizontal
(x-) and vertical (y-) axes, respectively.
Key-in: DEFINE ACS VIEW
Rotate Active ACS

Used to rotate the Active ACS. The origin is not moved.
To rotate the active ACS

1. Select the Rotate Active ACS tool.
The Rotate Active ACS dialog box opens.
2. In the Rotate fields, enter the rotation angles, in degrees,

Move ACS
from left to right, for the x-, y-, and z-axes.4

3. Click either of the following buttons:
To rotate Active ACS from Click

Unrotated (top) orientation Absolute
ACS’s current orientation Relative
4. When you are finished, click Done to close the Rotate

Active ACS dialog box.
Key-in: ROTATE ACS ABSOLUTE | RELATIVE
Move ACS
Used to move the origin of the Active ACS.
To move the active ACS

1. Select the Move ACS tool.
2. Enter a data point to define the new origin.
The ACS Type and orientation do not change.
Key-in: MOVE ACS
4 Z-axis in 3D-only.

Select ACS
Select ACS
Used to identify an ACS for attachment as the Active ACS.
To select and attach an ACS

1. Select the Select ACS tool.
A coordinate triad displays for the Active ACS, if there is one, and
each saved ACS in each view that contains the ACS origin.
2. Identify the ACS to attach.
Key-in: ATTACH ACS
Digitizing
MicroStation requires that you use a digitizing tablet or table5
to perform digitizing. Digitizing is the process of electronically
reproducing the features of an existing hard copy drawing or map into
a MicroStation design. A large tablet or table is recommended.
Accurate digitizing requires careful planning and setup of the
relationship between the hard copy, mounted on the tablet or table,
and the design plane, represented on the screen.
For more details about setting up to use a digitizing tablet,

see Digitizing Tablets in the Setup Guide.
Setting up to digitize
1. Create a design file.
2. Set up appropriate working units. See Setting working
5 The version of for your system may not support the use of a digitizing tablet. For information
about supported input devices, see Input devices in the Setup Guide.

Setting working units
units on page 6-131.

3. Set up appropriate views. It is recommended that you set up
one of the views to encompass the entire drawing.
4. (Optional) — Partition the digitizing tablet surface. See
Digitizing tablet partitioning on page 7-140.
5. Mount the hard copy to be digitized on the surface of the

tablet. (Tape works well for mounting.) Locate the features
you will be mapping to the design file over the digitizing
partition, not over the screen partition.
6. Place monument points that associate known points (of your
choosing) on the hard copy with points in the design plane.
See Placing monument points on page 6-133.
7. From the File menu, choose Save Settings (or press áCtrl-Fñ) to
save the working units, view configuration, and the relationships
specified by monument points, digitizer partitioning and setup.
8. Use any MicroStation drawing tool to trace the hard copy
image. See Tools for digitizing on page 6-134.
Setting working units

Set working units that are appropriate for the image being
digitized while ensuring that the design plane working area is
greater than the actual size of the image.
For example, suppose you are digitizing a map of Alabama for use in
the United States. English units (miles, feet, etc.) are commonly used
in the United States, so you might set master units to miles (MI),
sub-units to feet (FT), with 1,200 positional units per foot. This yields
a working resolution of 1 /100 of an inch and a working area of 677
miles square. Alabama is 330 miles long and 200 miles wide, so the
working area is greater than the image to be digitized. If increased
resolution is desirable, there is working area to spare.
Digitizing tablet partitioning

Partitioning divides the surface of the digitizing tablet into two areas
or partitions. One area, the screen partition, continues to provide

Digitizing tablet partitioning
standard tablet-to-screen mapping. Within the screen partition,

moving the tablet cursor results in a corresponding movement of
the screen pointer, regardless of what is displayed on the screen.
The other area is the digitizing partition. Within the digitizing
partition, movement of the tablet cursor results in a corresponding
movement of the screen pointer only within the part of the design
plane to which you are mapping features of the hard copy.
After you partition the tablet surface, you will notice a change in
the behavior of the screen pointer, depending on whether it is in the
screen or digitizing partition. When in the screen partition, the
pointer moves on the screen in direct proportion to the movement
of the tablet cursor. If you have two screens, the screen partition
corresponds to the rectangular area encompassing both screens.
When the tablet cursor is in the digitizing partition, the tablet

cursor position determines the position of the pointer in the design
plane. MicroStation places the pointer in the first open view where
the design plane position is visible. The open views are checked in
sequence starting with the lowest numbered view. If the design plane
position is not visible in any views, the pointer is not displayed.
Nevertheless, even when you cannot see the pointer, you can continue
to enter data points and place elements into the design.
The screen partition takes priority over the digitizing partition. If

data points are entered in the screen partition, their position in the
design plane reflects their position on the screen. Therefore, make
sure not to stray into the screen partition while digitizing.
If the tablet surface is not partitioned, MicroStation defaults the

screen partition to an 18 × 12 area (or smaller on a smaller tablet)
in the lower left corner of the tablet surface.
To change the default digitizing and screen

partitions on the tablet surface
1. From the Workspace menu, choose Digitizing.
The Digitizing dialog box opens.
2. From the dialog box’s Tablet menu, choose Partition.
3. Identify the lower left corner of the screen partition by placing

Placing monument points
the tablet cursor over it and pressing the Data button.

4. Identify the upper right corner of the screen partition by placing
the tablet cursor over it and pressing the Data button.
Placing monument points

Monument points are used to define the mapping of coordinates
on the digitizing tablet to coordinates in the design plane.
Thus, monument points are defined on both the digitizing
tablet surface and in the design plane.
At least two monument points must be defined; more are recommended

for increased accuracy. When only two monument points are defined,
MicroStation assumes the hard copy is perfectly aligned on the
tablet surface. If more than two monument points are defined,
MicroStation can compensate for misalignment.
A monument point can be any point at which the coordinates

on the hard copy being digitized are known. It is best to define
several widely spaced monument points.
It is easier to place monument points in the design plane before

setting up for digitizing, and then snap tentative points to them
during setup and digitizing. To make monument points visible,
place them with a line weight of at least 3.
To place monument points that associate points

on the hard copy with points in the design plane
1. (Optional) — Place point elements (zero length lines) for reference
with line weights of at least 3 using the Place Active Point tool.
2. From the Workspace menu, choose Digitizing.

The Digitizing dialog box opens.
3. From the dialog box’s Tablet menu, choose Setup.
4. Choose a monument point on the hard copy, position the tablet
cursor over it, and enter a data point. Ignore the location of
the screen pointer, which only lets you know that the tablet

Tools for digitizing
cursor is over an active area of the tablet.

5. Move the tablet cursor into the screen partition and enter a data
point in the design that corresponds to the monument point you
chose in the previous step. Precision input, or snapping to a point
element, if one was placed for reference, is recommended.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for additional monument points.
7. After placing all monument points, Reset.
8. Confirm accurate placement of the monument points by moving
the cursor around the hard copy. If the monument points
are correctly defined, the pointer displays in the design at
points corresponding to the monument points.
Tools for digitizing

The Place Stream Line String tool (see page 1-40) and the Place Point
or Stream Curve tool (see page 1-42) in the Linear Elements tool
box are particularly useful. With these tools, it is not necessary
to press the Data button to enter individual data points since
MicroStation samples the movement of the tablet cursor and
automatically records data points based on Stream.
Panning while digitizing

As hard copy is digitized, the design in the view normally remains static
and the screen pointer moves as the tablet cursor is moved. You may
find it more convenient to let the screen pointer remain stationary in
the center of a view and have the view pan as the tablet cursor is moved.
To automatically pan this way while digitizing, key in SET AUTOPAN

ON. The view in which the screen pointer is located when this key-in is
entered becomes the anchor view, the view that is panned as digitizing
progresses. The center of the view becomes the anchor point, the
location in which the screen pointer is locked or anchored.
When automatic panning is on and the tablet cursor is in the screen

partition of the digitizing tablet, the design will pan unless the
pointer is in the center of the view. The effect is exactly as if you
began panning at the center of the view, and is much less useful

than the panning that occurs in the digitizing partition.
Therefore, you may want to turn automatic panning off (SET

AUTOPAN OFF) when the tablet cursor is in the screen partition. To
facilitate toggling of automatic panning, create and attach a cursor
button menu with a button assigned to the key-in SET AUTOPAN
TOGGLE. See Customizing cursor button menus in the Setup Guide.


3D Design and Modeling
MicroStation’s 3D tools let you work on a single 3D model, rather
than separate 2D drawings, of a design.
• When the 3D model is complete, drawings such as plans,

elevations, sections, and details are generated from the single
model. Any required modifications are made to the model just
once, and then the drawings are regenerated.
• As an added benefit, you can use MicroStation’s tools for rendering

and visualizing 3D models to produce realistic color images of
your design. This is often more cost-effective than traditional
mock-ups and artist’s drawings, especially when there are frequent
revisions or tight deadlines. Animated sequences provide a way to
present a design that was not available before CAD.
In this chapter you will find procedures concerning 3D

design and modeling, including:
• Basic 3D Concepts (see page 7-2)
• Viewing a 3D Design (see page 7-8)
• Using the View Controls in the 3D View Control tool

box (see page 7-11)
• 3D Elements (see page 7-48)
• Drawing in 3D (see page 7-54)
• Using the Tools in the 3D Primitives tool box (see page 7-77)
• Using the Tools in the 3D Construct tool box (see page 7-92)
• Using the Tools in the 3D Modify tool box (see page 7-108)
• Using the Tools in the 3D Utility tool box (see page 7-130)
• Using the Tools in the Create Surfaces tool box (see page 7-141)

Basic 3D Concepts
• Using the Tools in the Modify Surfaces tool box (see page 7-159)
• Using the Tools in the Fillet Surfaces tool box (see page 7-177)
• Using the Tools in the 3D Queries tool box (see page 7-182)
• Using Cells in 3D (see page 7-187)
Basic 3D Concepts
This section introduces the basic concepts related to
working with 3D designs.
Before working in 3D, you should understand the following:
• Placing Elements in 2D (see page 1-1)
• Drafting Aids (see page 2-1)
• Manipulating and Modifying Elements (see page 3-1)
• Advanced 2D Drafting Techniques (see page 6-1)
Design cube
The design cube represents a 3D design file’s total volume.
Points in 3D design files are defined with x-, y-, and z-values,
or coordinates. 3D design files consist of a design cube in which
you work. Points can be placed anywhere within the design
cube, and are not restricted to a single plane.

View volume
The design
cube and 2D
design plane
Design cube coordinates are expressed in the form (x,y,z).
A 3D design file contains 4,294,967,296 positional units (UORs) in the

x, y, and z-directions, analogous to the 2D design plane.
The global origin in the 3D seed files provided with MicroStation

is located at the exact center of the design cube and assigned the
coordinates (0,0,0). Any point in front of the global origin has a positive
z-value and any point behind it has a negative z-value.
View volume
The view volume (sometimes called the display volume) is the
volume displayed in a 3D view. In most cases, only a part of the
design cube (see page 7-2) is displayed in a view.

Active Depth
View
volume. “A”
denotes the
window area
(hatched).
“D” denotes
the Display
Depth,
bounded by
the front “F”
and back
“B” clipping
planes. The
large cube
shows the
design cube,
part of which
is displayed
in each view.
Any elements, or parts of elements, not contained in the view
volume are not displayed in the view. The view volume is bounded
by the window area, and its Display Depth.
Display Depth
The distance from the front to the back of a 3D view is its Display
Depth, which is bounded by clipping planes.
• The front clipping plane is the one nearest the viewer.

• The back clipping plane is farthest from the viewer.
Elements in front of the front clipping plane or behind the back

clipping plane are not displayed in the view, even if they are within
its viewing area, regardless of how far the view is zoomed out.
Active Depth
The Active Depth is the plane, parallel to the screen in a view, on which
data points are entered by default. The Active Depth is perpendicular

Standard views
to, and is measured along, the view’s z-axis. This is why it is sometimes
referred to as the “active z-depth.” The grid lies on this plane as well.
Active Depth,
denoted by
“AZ.” “x,”
“y,” and “z”
denote the
View axes.
“F” and “B”
denote the
front and
back clipping
planes,
respectively.
For example, suppose you are designing the interior of a multi-story
building. You can complete the details in one floor at a time in the
top view by changing the Display Depth and Active Depth for the
view after drawing the elements on each successive floor.
The Active Depth is set with the Set Active Depth view control (see
page 7-19) . You can also set the Active Depth by completing a view
manipulation — for example, Rotate View, Fit View, Change View
Perspective, Pan View — for which you snapped for the first data point.
A view’s Active Depth is always within its Display Depth (see page 7-4) .
Although Active Depth is a very powerful concept, MicroStation

also lets you position points away from the Active Depth. For more
information, see Drawing in 3D on page 7-54.
Standard views
If you rotate a view a standard orientation, the orientation displays
with the view number in the view’s title bar.
2D
In 2D, the design plane is parallel to the screen, so you view

Standard views
the design from above. The default (unrotated view) in 2D is

a Top view with its orientation such that:
• The x-axis is positive from left to right (horizontally).

• The y-axis is vertical, and positive from bottom to top (vertically).
In a 2D design, you rotate a view about an imaginary z-axis,

which is perpendicular to the screen. No matter how you rotate
a view in 2D, you still view it from above.
Orthogonal views
In 3D, since you can rotate views about three axes, rather than just
one, there are six orthogonal orientations, each of which corresponds
to a standard view: Top, Bottom, Left, Right, Front, or Back.
The faces of the

cube correspond
to the 3D
orthogonal
views. The cube
is displayed
here in an
Isometric view.
Top view
A Top view displays the design from the top:
• the xy plane is parallel to your screen (as in a 2D design).
• x is positive from left to right (horizontally).

Standard views
• y is positive from bottom to top (vertically).
• z is positive toward you, perpendicular to the screen.
Front view
A Front view displays the design from the front:
• the xz plane is parallel to your screen.
• x is positive from left to right (horizontally).
• z is positive from bottom to top (vertically).
• y is positive away from you, perpendicular to the screen.
Right view
In a Right view, you view the design cube from the right:
• the yz plane is parallel to your screen.
• y is positive from left to right (horizontally).
• z is positive from bottom to top (vertically).
• x is positive toward you, perpendicular to the screen.
Isometric views
There are two other standard views — Isometric and Right Isometric.
These views are rotated so the three faces of a cube orthogonal to the
design cube axes are equally inclined from the screen surface.
Standard view Faces in front

Isometric Top, left, and front
Right Isometric Top, right, and front
An Isometric view of a cube is shown in the illustration under
the heading Orthogonal views (see page 7-6) .

View coordinates
View coordinates
When a view is rotated, the design file’s axes are rotated with it.
A view’s axes, on the other hand, is relative to the view (or, if you
like, the screen) and the following always applies:
• The x-axis is horizontal and positive from left to right.

• The y-axis is vertical and positive from bottom to top.
• The z-axis is perpendicular to the view (screen), and
positive toward you.
The axes systems for the design cube and the view align
exactly in a Top view only.
Perspective projection
Elements in 3D models must be displayed on the screen,
which is, of course, planar.
• In a view with parallel projection, each element is projected

to the screen along a line parallel to the view’s z-axis.
Although parallel projected views make drawing easier, they
lack realism because elements have the same relative size
regardless of their depth in the view.
• In a view with perspective projection, elements at greater depths
appear relatively smaller, enhancing realism. A view with
perspective projection is sometimes called a camera view.
Viewing a 3D Design
A 3D view displays part of the design cube (see page 7-2) from
any point, looking in any direction.
• As in 2D, elements to the left, right, above, or below can be
excluded from a view by zooming in or windowing so that
the elements are outside the view’s area.
• 3D views also have depth. You can exclude the display of

elements located in front of, or behind, a required object by
changing the view’s Display Depth (see page 7-4) .

3D viewing procedures that are similar to 2D

Many 3D viewing procedures are similar to their 2D counterparts.
The way to change a view’s area without changing the Display

Depth is the same as for 2D. The Window Area, Window Center,
Zoom In, and Zoom Out view controls are used.
Fitting views in 3D
The Fit View view control has some 3D-specific aspects and settings.
Expand If on, the view’s Display Depth

Clipping is adjusted, along with the view
Planes origin and magnification, so that all
elements on levels that are on for
the view are displayed.
Center Active If on, centers the Active Depth in
Depth the fitted view. (It is recommended
that you turn on Center Active Depth
when fitting a view you intend to
dynamically rotate or a view whose
perspective you intend to change.)
Center If on, centers the Camera in the
Camera fitted view.
Rotating views in 3D
The Rotate View view control is used in 3D to rotate a view to one of the
standard views (see page 7-5) as well as to custom orientations. One
unique way to use Rotate View in 3D to specify a custom rotation is
to dynamically rotate a cube that represents the view volume.

To dynamically rotate a view in 3D

1. Select the Rotate View view control.
2. Set Method to Dynamic.
A cube representing the view volume dynamically displays.
3. Enter a data point to define the view orientation.
To rotate a view in 3D by three points

2. Set Method to 3 Points.
3. Enter a data point to select the view to rotate and to
define the origin of the view x-axis.
The origin, as well as a dynamic line indicating the
positive direction of the view x-axis, displays in all
views where it is possible.
4. Enter a data point to define the positive direction of the view x-axis.
A rectangle that indicates the new view boundary displays
only in the view that is being rotated.
5. Enter a data point in any view to define the positive direction
of the view y-axis and rotate the view.
To rotate a view(s) in 3D to a standard orientation

2. Set Method to the desired standard orientation — Top, Front
Right, Isometric, Bottom, Back, Left, or Right Isometric.
3. Select the view(s).
Panning in views in 3D
While panning using the Pan View view control, a dynamic cube is
displayed between the origin and the pointer (rather than an arrow as in
2D), indicating the distance and direction that the view will be moved.

3D-specific viewing procedures
3D-specific viewing procedures

In addition to the familiar 2D viewing procedures, in 3D you can:
• Limit the depth of the view volume (see page 7-3) using the
Set Display Depth view control (see page 7-16) .
• Change the magnification of the view volume (see page 7-3)
using the Zoom view control (see page 7-14) .
• Change the perspective angle of a view using the Change
View Perspective view control (see page 7-15) or the Camera
Settings view control (see page 7-27) .
Display of the view volume in the other views is apparent only

when they display the same volume of the design cube as the
selected view. Use the ALIGN key-in to ensure that views are
displaying similar volumes of the design cube.
Using saved views in 3D

Creating saved views in 3D is identical to 2D. Like 2D saved views,
those in 3D design “remember” which levels are on and off, and
the area of the design that is displayed. Additionally, the Display
Depth is saved with a 3D saved view. When creating saved views
in 3D, thought should be given to the Display Depth.
3D View Control tool box

The 3D View Control tool box has view controls that are used
to perform 3D-specific view manipulations.

To Select in the 3D View

Control tool box
Change the magnification of
the view volume.
Zoom (see page 7-14)

Change the perspective angle
of a view.
Change View Perspective

(see page 7-15)
Set a view’s Display Depth
graphically.
Set Display Depth (see

page 7-16)
Set a view’s Display Depth by Key in SET DDEPTH
keying in the absolute depth ABSOLUTE or DP= (see To
from the Global Origin. key in a view’s Display Depth
on page 7-18)
Set a view’s Display Depth by Key in SET DDEPTH
keying in the distance to move the RELATIVE or DD= (see To
front and back clipping planes. key in the distance to move the
Display Depth on page 7-19)
Set a view’s Active Depth by
entering a data point.
Set Active Depth (see page 7-19)

Set the Active Depth for a Key in ACTIVE ZDEPTH
view(s) by keying in the absolute ABSOLUTE or AZ= (see To key
distance from the origin. in the Active Depth on page 7-21)
Key in the distance to move Key in ACTIVE ZDEPTH
the Active Depth. RELATIVE or DZ= (see To key
in the distance to move the Active
Depth on page 7-22)
Show the Display Depth setting
for a view(s).
Show Display Depth (see

page 7-22)

To Select in the 3D View

Control tool box
Show the Active Depth setting
for a view(s).
Show Active Depth (see

page 7-23)
Control view rotation using
a dialog box.
Change View Rotation (see

page 7-23)
Rotate a view(s) to a specific Key in ROTATE VIEW
orientation. ABSOLUTE (see To rotate
a view(s) to a specific orientation
with a key-in on page 7-24)
Rotate a view(s) relative to their Key in ROTATE VIEW
current orientations. RELATIVE (see To rotate a
view(s) counter-clockwise about
its center on page 7-24)
Rotate a view(s) to align them Key in ROTATE VIEW
with an element. ELEMENT (see To rotate a
view(s) to align it with a planar
element on page 7-24)
Adjust the view camera.
Camera Settings (see page 7-27)

Render a view(s), the fence
contents, or an element(s).
Render (see page 7-32) 1
1
Also in the Visualization Tools tool box.
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DVIEWING OFF | ON | TOGGLE

Zoom
Zoom
(3D only) Used to change the magnification of the view volume. In

a view with perspective projection, the eye point position is changed
relative to a point in the view volume — usually a point on an element.
To zoom in or out of a 3D view

1. Select the Zoom view control.
2. Enter a data point to define an origin to zoom about.
This point becomes the center point in the view volume
and is on the Active Depth.
In most cases you want to snap to an element to define the origin.
A cube dynamically displays, representing the view
volume to be displayed.
3. Enter a data point to define the extent of the volume to be displayed.
The original cube remains displayed, and another cube,
which indicates the volume in which the volume defined
in steps 2–3 displays.
To zoom in, this cube should be small; to zoom out, it should be big.
4. Enter a data point to define the second cube.
If it is large relative to the first, the view volume moves closer.
If it is small relative to the first, the view volume
moves farther away.
Key-in: ZOOM 3D
Rather than changing the perspective angle as does a camera’s zoom

lens, this view control lets you actually move closer to or further
away from an element. (A zoom lens is useful with a real camera
because it is often inconvenient to actually move closer to or further

from the subject; in a computer model this is no problem.)
(3D only) Used to change the perspective angle of a view.
To change the perspective angle of a view

1. Select the Change View Perspective view control.
2. In the desired view window, enter a data point to
define the “from” point.
As you drag the pointer toward or away from the center of the
view, the view cube dynamically displays.
3. In the same view window, enter a data point to define a “to” point.
If the “to” point is closer to the center of the view than the
“from” point, the perspective angle will be reduced (less
perspective), or vice versa. Elements on the active depth
plane remain the same size while those in front or behind

Set Display Depth
the active depth plane appear to change size.
Change View
Perspective
Key-in: CHANGE VIEW PERSPECTIVE
To remove all perspective, enter the first point near the edge of
the view and the second near the center.
Set Display Depth
(3D only) Used to graphically set a view’s Display Depth (see page
7-4) — the front and back clipping planes (boundaries) of the volume
displayed in a view. The position of each clipping plane is measured
along the view’s z-axis. Only elements or parts of elements between
the front and back clipping planes are displayed.

Set Display Depth
To set the Display Depth graphically

1. Be sure at least two views are open.
It is helpful to have a view open that is orthogonal to the view in
which the Display Depth is being set, as well as an isometric view.
2. Select the Set Display Depth view control.
3. Select the view in which to set the Display Depth.
If an isometric view is open, dynamics (as shown in the
illustration) indicate the selected view’s Display Depth. As
you move the pointer in a different view, a shape indicates
where the first depth boundary will be placed.
4. Define the front clipping plane.
To set front Enter a data point in

clipping
plane to
Active Depth The view for which Display Depth
is being set.
Depth other A view other than the one for
than Active which Display Depth is being set,
Depth at the desired depth.
2
2
The view’s Active Depth, which is set with the Set Active Depth view
control , must be within its Display Depth.
5. In a view other than the one for which Display Depth is being set,
enter a data point to define the back clipping plane.
If you specify the same plane for the front and back clipping

Set Display Depth
planes, a message displays and the Display Depth does not change.
Setting the Display

Depth in the Top view
(selected with data
point 1) by entering
data points in the
front view (2 and 3) to
define the front and
back clipping planes,
respectively.
Dynamics in Isometric
view indicate the
following for view in
which Display depth
is set: “F”: Front
clipping plane (2).
“B”: Back clipping
plane (3). “A”: Active
Depth.
To key in a view’s Display Depth

1. Key in SET DDEPTH ABSOLUTE front, back.
or
Key in DP= front,back.
FRONT and BACK are the distances, in working units,
along the view z-axis from the Global Origin to the desired
front and back clipping planes.
If the Active Depth is not within the range specified by
the Display Depth, the Active Depth is automatically
changed to the front clipping plane.

Set Active Depth
To key in the distance to move the Display Depth

1. Key in SET DDEPTH RELATIVE front,back.
or
DD= front,back.
FRONT and BACK are the distances, in working units, to move
the front and back clipping planes, respectively.
If the Active Depth is not within the range specified by
the Display Depth, the Active Depth is automatically
changed to the front clipping plane.
Key-in: DEPTH DISPLAY
If dynamics do not display in the Isometric or another view (do not

fit), use the Zoom Out or Fit View view controls in the view control
bar until the view can display the dynamics.
Set Active Depth
(3D only) Used to graphically set a view’s Active Depth (see

page 7-4) — the plane, parallel to the screen in a view, on
which data points are entered by default. The Active Depth’s
value is measured along the view’s z-axis.
The Active Depth must be within the view’s Display Depth, which is
set with the Set Display Depth view control (see page 7-16) .

Set Active Depth
To set the Active Depth graphically

1. Make sure at least two views are open.
It is helpful to have a view open that is orthogonal to the view in
which the Active Depth is being set, as well as an isometric view.
2. Select the Set Active Depth view control.
3. Select the view in which to set the Active Depth.
If an isometric view is open, dynamics (as shown in the illustration)
indicate the selected view’s Display Depth. As you move the pointer
in a different view, a shape indicates the depth of the pointer.
4. Enter a data point in a different view at the desired Active
Depth for the view selected in step 3.
It is often useful to snap to an existing element in the design when
you want to place other elements at the same depth.
If useful dynamics do not display in the Isometric view, use the

Zoom Out or Fit View view controls in the view control bar until
the isometric view can display the volume contained by the view
for which the Active Depth is being set.

Set Active Depth
Setting the
Active Depth
in the Top view
(selected with
data point 1) by
entering a data
point (2) at the
desired depth in
the Front view.
Dynamics in
Isometric view
show for the
Top view: “F:”
Front clipping
plane. “B:”
Back clipping
plane. “A:”
Active Depth.
To key in the Active Depth

1. Key in ACTIVE ZDEPTH ABSOLUTE <depth>.
or
Key in AZ= <depth>.
DEPTH is the distance in working units along the view z-axis
from the Global Origin to the desired Active Depth.
If DEPTH is not within the view’s Display Depth, the Active
Depth is automatically changed to the front clipping plane.
The change is indicated in the status bar.

Show Display Depth
To key in the distance to move the Active Depth

1. Key in ACTIVE ZDEPTH RELATIVE <distance>.
or
Key in DZ= DISTANCE is the distance, in working units, to
move the Active Depth along the view z-axis.
If DISTANCE is not within the view’s Display Depth, the
Active Depth is automatically changed to the front clipping
plane. The change is indicated in the status bar.
Key-in: DEPTH ACTIVE
Show Display Depth
(3D only) Used to show a view’s Display Depth (see page 7-4) setting.
To show the Display Depth setting for a view

1. Select the Show Display Depth view control.
2. Select the view.
The view’s Display Depth setting is shown in the status bar.
3. Go back to step 2 to show the Display Depth for another view.
Key-in: SHOW DEPTH DISPLAY
A view’s Display Depth is set with the Set Display Depth

Show Active Depth
view control (see page 7-16) .
Show Active Depth
(3D only) Used to show a view’s Active Depth (see page 7-4) setting.
To show the Active Depth setting for a view

1. Select the Show Active Depth view control.
2. Select the view.
The view’s Active Depth setting is shown in the status bar.
3. Go back to step 2 to show the Active Depth setting for another view.
Key-in: SHOW DEPTH ACTIVE
A view’s Active Depth is set with the Set Active Depth

view control (see page 7-19) .
Change View Rotation
Opens the View Rotation dialog box (see page 7-25) , which can
be used, as an alternative to the Rotate View view control in

Change View Rotation
the view control bar, to control view rotation. Changes take

effect only if applied with the Apply button.
To rotate a view(s) to a specific orientation

with a key-in
1. Key in ROTATE VIEW ABSOLUTE <xx,yy,zz>.
xx, yy, and zz are the rotations, in degrees, about the view
x-, y-, and z-axes (by default, 0 for each).
To rotate a view(s) counterclockwise

about its center
1. Key in ROTATE VIEW RELATIVE <xx,yy,zz>.
or
RV=<xx,yy,zz>.
xx, yy, and zz are the relative, counterclockwise rotations,
in degrees, about the view x-, y-, and z-axes.
To rotate a view(s) to align it with a planar element

1. Key in ROTATE VIEW ELEMENT.
This data point also indicates the part of the element with
which to align the view’s x-axis.
The view is rotated so that its x-axis is aligned with
edge of identified element and its z-axis is perpendicular

View Rotation dialog box
to identified element.
Whether the view is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise is

determined by the direction of the identified element. The origin of
the x-axis is always towards the start point of the element.
Element: View x-axis is:

Linear Aligned with identified line segment.
Non-linear Tangent to identified element at the
identification point.
Key-in: DIALOG VIEWROTATION

Used to control view rotation. Opens when the Change View
Rotation view control (see page 7-23) is selected.
Std. (Standard)
Sets a standard orientation — Top, Bottom, Front, Back,
Left, Iso(metric), or Right Iso(metric).

Key-in: VIEW TOP | BOTTOM | FRONT | BACK

| LEFT | RIGHT | ISO
Key-in: VI
View
Sets the view for which rotation is displayed.
“+” control
Click to rotate the view in the positive direction by the Step
amount about the specified Axis.
“-” control
Click to rotate the view in the negative direction by the Step

amount about the specified Axis.
Step
Sets the rotation increment, in degrees, for each click
on a “+” or “–” control.
Axis
Sets the axes about which rotation is specified:
• View.
• Drawing — design cube.
Apply
Applies the displayed rotation to the chosen View. To discard changes

Camera Settings
(not apply them), choose a different view from the View option menu.
Camera Settings
Used to directly adjust the virtual camera (as an alternative to using

the Change View Perspective view control (see page 7-15) ).

Camera Settings
Tool Setting Effect

Camera Determines the operation to be performed:
Settings
Turn On—Used to turn on the camera
in a view(s).
Turn Off—Used to turn off the camera

in a view(s).
Set Up—Used to turn on the camera in a

view and set the camera target and position.
The position is the design cube location from
which the model is viewed with the camera.
The target is the focal point (center) of a
camera view. Objects beyond the camera
target appear smaller; objects in front of
the camera target appear larger and may
be outside of the viewing pyramid.
Move—Used to move the camera position.

This operation is analogous to focusing a
camera at an object and moving around
to obtain different views of it.
Target—Used to move the target. This

operation is analogous to standing in
one position and pointing the camera
at different objects.
Image Plane Sets the orientation of the plane on which
Orientation the camera image is represented.
Perpendicular—Perpendicular to the
camera direction.
Parallel to X Axis—Parallel to the view x-axis,

analogous to a Bellow camera.
Parallel to Y Axis—Parallel to the view y-axis,

analogous to a Bellow camera.
Parallel to Z Axis—Parallel to the view

z-axis. All vertical lines (along this
axis) appear parallel.

Camera Settings
Tool Setting Effect

Angle Sets the camera “lens” angle, in degrees.
Increasing this setting widens the field of
vision (and decreases the Focal Length).
Focal Length Sets the camera “lens” focal length,
in millimeters (MM). Decreasing this
setting widens the field of vision (and
increases the Angle).
Standard Sets the camera “lens” Angle and Focal
Lens Length to values associated with a standard
lens type commonly used by photographers.
Fisheye—93.3 ; focal length 20mm
Extra-wide—74.3 ; focal length 28mm
Wide—62.4 ; focal length 35mm
Normal—46.0 ; focal length 50mm
Portrait—28.0 ; focal length 85mm
Telephoto—12.1 ; focal length 200mm
Telescopic—2.4 ; focal length 1000mm
To turn on the camera in a view

1. Select the Camera Settings view control.
2. In the tool settings window, set Camera Settings to Turn On.

Camera Settings
Top Left: Fisheye;

Top Center:
Extra-wide; Top
Right: Wide; Bottom
Left: Normal;
Bottom Center:
Portrait; Bottom
Right: Telephoto.
To turn off the camera in a view

2. In the tool settings window, set Camera Settings to Turn Off.

Camera Settings
To turn on the camera and set the target

and position
2. In the tool settings window, set Camera Settings to Set Up.
3. Select the view.
4. Enter a data point to define the camera target — the
focal point (center) of the view.
A dynamic pyramid displays to show the viewing volume
with the camera at the pointer location.
5. Enter a data point to define the camera position.
The camera is turned on.
To move the camera

2. In the tool settings window, set Camera Settings to Move.
3. Select the view.
A dynamic pyramid shows the viewing volume with the
camera at the pointer location.
4. Enter a data point to define the new camera position.
If the camera was off, it is turned on.
To move the target

2. In the tool settings window, set Camera Settings to Target.
3. Select the view.
A dynamic pyramid shows the viewing volume with the

Render
camera target at the pointer location.

4. Enter a data point to define the new camera target.
If the camera was off, it is turned on.
Key-in: SET CAMERA áDEFINITION | OFF | ON

| POSITION | TARGETñ
Setting Image Plane Orientation to Parallel to Z Axis is useful

for architectural renderings as it ensures buildings appear
vertical from any camera position.
The virtual camera has advantages over conventional cameras.

All elements in the field of view are in focus, no matter how close
to or far from the camera. You need not worry about depth of
field, aberrations, astigmatism, or curvature of field — in a sense,
the virtual camera takes a “perfect” picture.
Render
Used to request on screen rendering, or ray tracing. The Render

settings window contains controls that determine what is to be
rendered, the rendering mode, and shading type.
Tool Setting Effect

Target Sets the entity or area to be rendered:
View—a selected view.
Fence—the contents of an existing fence.
Element—a selected element.

Render
Tool Setting Effect

Render Mode Sets the rendering mode:
• Wiremesh
• Hidden Line
• Filled Hidden Line
• Constant
• Smooth
• Phong
• Ray Trace
• Radiosity
Shading Sets the type of rendering:
Type
• Normal
• Antialias
• Stereo
To render a view
1. Select the Render view control.
2. From the Target option menu in the Render settings
window, select View.
3. From the Render Mode option menu, choose the desired rendering
mode — Wiremesh, Hidden Line, Filled Hidden Line, Constant,
Smooth, Phong, Ray Trace, or Radiosity.
4. From the Shading Type option menu, choose Normal
(default), Antialias (for antialiased rendering), or Stereo

Render
(for stereo rendering).

5. Select the view.
For ray tracing, the view’s back clipping plane and reference
file clip boundaries are ignored.
If Radiosity is selected, the Final Display option menu in the Radiosity

dialog box (Settings menu Rendering > Radiosity) is used to choose
which rendering method is used — Ray Trace, Smooth, or Wiremesh.
To render the fence contents

2. In the Render settings window, set Target to Fence.
3. Accept.
When Target is set to Fence, the Shading Type Antialias can be

used only when Render Mode is Ray Trace or Radiosity.
To render an element(s)
3. In the Render settings window, set Target to Element.
Alternative method — To render an element(s)

2. In the Render settings window, set Target to Element.
4. Accept.
Key-in: RENDER ICON

Key-in:RENDER VIEW | FENCE | ELEMENT áWIREMESH
| HIDDEN | FILLED | CONSTANT | SMOOTH | PHONG |
RAYTRACE | RADIOSITYñ NORMAL | ANTIALIAS | STEREO
If either Ray Trace or Radiosity is the selected Render Mode, View

Navigate Camera
or Fence are the only Target options available.
An alternate way to render a view is to use the Utilities menu’s

Render sub-menu. The sub-menu items Wiremesh, Hidden Line,
Filled Hidden Line, Constant, Smooth, Phong, Ray Trace, or Radiosity,
directly correspond to the Render view control’s Render Mode options.
Choosing one of these items is equivalent to selecting the Render view
control and setting Target to View. Choosing the Phong Stereo item is
equivalent to selecting the Render view control, setting Target to View,
and setting shading type to Stereo. Choosing the Phong Antialias
sub-menu item is equivalent to selecting the Render view control,
setting Target to View, and setting Shading Type to Antialias.
Navigate Camera
(3D only) Used to interactively move or “fly” through a design

using the keyboard and/or the mouse.
When you open the Navigate Camera view control for the first
time, it is in Basic Mode. In Basic Mode, navigation options for the
keyboard and the mouse are predefined, so you can move through a
design immediately, without adjusting any settings. In Advanced
Mode, you can change the default navigation options.
The following list contains all the keyboard shortcuts used to

control camera movement, speed, and orientation.

Navigate Camera
Keyboard
Key Effect
Left arrow, áAñ Same as moving the mouse to the left.
or áJñ
Right arrow, Same as moving the mouse to the right.
áDñ or áLñ
Up arrow, áWñ Same as moving the mouse forward.

or áIñ
Down arrow, Same as moving the mouse backward.
áSñ or áKñ
Home, áQñ or Resets the camera’s roll, elevation, and

áUñ orientation (see the Roll, Elevate, and
Orient fields under Camera Orientation
in the Define Camera tool settings
window). For example, pressing the
Home key on your keyboard: once -
resets the camera’s tilt angle to zero
degrees (roll). twice - resets the roll,
then resets the camera’s elevation angle
to zero degrees (camera is horizontal
to the ground). three times - resets
the roll, then resets the elevation,
then resets the camera’s orientation
angle to zero degrees (camera is in the
direction of the positive X-axis).
á+ñ Increases the Distance field by 10
percent. For example, if your Distance
is set to 10 (feet), pressing the á+ñ key on
your keyboard increases the Distance
to 11 feet. Changes are applied to both
the Arrow Keys and the Mouse column.
á[ñ Increases the Degrees field by 10
percent. For example, if your Degrees
is set to 30, pressing the á[ñ key on your
keyboard increases the Degrees to 33
degrees. Changes are applied to both

Navigate Camera
Keyboard
Key Effect
á-ñ Decreases the Distance field by
(approximately) 10 percent. For
example, if you had increased your
Distance by 10 percent (from 10 feet to
11 feet), pressing the á-ñ key on your
keyboard decreases the Distance back
to 10 feet. Changes are applied to both
á]ñ Decreases the Degrees fields by
(approximately) 10 percent. For
example, if you had increased your
Degrees by 10 percent (from 30
degrees to 33 degrees), pressing the
á]ñ key on your keyboard decreases the
Degrees back to 30 degrees. Changes
are applied to both the Arrow Keys
and the Mouse column.
Tool Setting Effect

Active View Sets the view in which to navigate the
camera. If you try to navigate in a view
which does not have a camera turned on, a
warning message displays. Once you dismiss
the message, the camera is turned on in
parallel projection for that view.
Basic Mode Uses the default keyboard and mouse settings
for controlling camera movement.

Navigate Camera
Tool Setting Effect

Advanced Allows the use of custom keymaps. The
Mode navigation option that you choose from
this location in the settings window only
applies to the keyboard.
Fly—Move forward/back, turn left/right:
Up arrow, or moving the mouse forward —

moves the camera forward along the current
angle of the camera. For example, if the
camera is pointed at an upward angle, you will
move forward and upward along that angle.
Down arrow, or moving the mouse backward

— moves the camera backward at the current
angle of the camera. For example, if camera
is pointed at an upward angle, you will move
backward and downward along that angle.
Left/right arrow, or moving the mouse to

the left/right — same as Turn.

Navigate Camera
Tool Setting Effect

Advanced Turn—Turn about camera axes:
Mode

turns the camera upward, perpendicular to
the ground (as if standing still and turning
your head toward the sky).

— turns the camera downward, perpendicular
to the ground (as if standing still and turning
your head toward the ground).
Left arrow, or moving the mouse to the left

— turns the camera to the left parallel to
your head toward the left).
Right arrow, or moving the mouse to the right

— turns the camera to the right parallel to
your head toward the right).

Navigate Camera
Tool Setting Effect

Advanced Slide—Move up/down/left/right in
Mode camera plane:

moves the camera up, perpendicular to the
ground (as if you were looking straight out
of a glass elevator that was going up).

— moves the camera down, perpendicular to
the ground (as if you were looking straight out
of a glass elevator that was going down).
Left arrow, or moving the mouse to the

left — moves the camera left, parallel to
the ground (as if you are looking straight
out of the window of a train moving in the
direction of your left shoulder).
Right arrow, or moving the mouse to the

right — moves the camera right, parallel to
the ground (as if you are looking straight
out of the window of a train moving in the
direction of your right shoulder).

Navigate Camera
Tool Setting Effect

Advanced Glide—Move forward/back/left/right
Mode in camera plane:
Up/down arrow, or moving the mouse

forward/backward — same as Fly.

the left/right — same as Slide.
Walk—Move forward/back at current

height, left/right swivel:

moves the camera forward, parallel to the
ground (as if walking into the design).

— moves the camera backward, parallel to the
ground (as if walking away from the design).

the left/right — same as Swivel.

Navigate Camera
Tool Setting Effect

Advanced Swivel—Turn about design axes:
Mode

forward/backward — similar to Turn,
except that the camera turns up or
down perpendicular to the tilt of the
camera, and stops when it points straight
up or straight down.
Left arrow, or moving the mouse to the left

— turns (swivels) the camera to the left,
parallel to the tilt of the camera.
Right arrow, or moving the mouse to the right

— turns (swivels) the camera to the right,

Navigate Camera
Tool Setting Effect

Advanced Float—Move up/down/left/right in
Mode design plane:

forward/backward — Similar to Slide,
except that the camera moves up or down
perpendicular to the tilt of the camera.

the left/right — Similar to Slide, except
that the camera moves to the left or right
Dolly—Move forward/back/left/right
at current height:

forward/backward — same as Walk.

the left/right — same as Float.

Navigate Camera
Tool Setting Effect

Advanced Tilt—Tilt camera about camera axes:
Mode

forward/backward — same as Turn.
Left arrow, or moving the mouse to the

left — tilts the camera to the left (as
if standing still and leaning your head
toward your left shoulder).
Right arrow, or moving the mouse to the

right — tilts the camera to the right (as
if standing still and leaning your head
toward your right shoulder).
Mouse If on, the mouse is enabled (in addition to the
Control keyboard) for controlling camera movements.
If off, only the keyboard is enabled for
controlling camera movements.
(Advanced Mode only) Using the Mouse
combo box, you can assign the same
navigation options to the mouse as you
can to the keyboard.
Arrow (Advanced Mode only) Clicking these
buttons buttons is analogous to pressing the
corresponding arrow keys on the keyboard.
The arrow buttons change depending on
the navigation option chosen.
Show Set- Shows/hides the Shift, Ctrl and Ctrl-Shift
tings/Hide settings (Advanced Mode only), the
Settings Distance and Degrees fields, and the
Display View Cone option.
Show Displays the default shortcuts for the keyboard
Shortcut and the mouse. Pressing the á?ñ key on the
Keys (?) keyboard also displays the default shortcuts.

Navigate Camera
Tool Setting Effect

Shift key (Advanced Mode only) Allows you to
assign a navigation option to the áShiftñ
key. Once set, you can control the
camera using the áShift-arrowñ key or
áShift-mouseñ combination.
Ctrl key (Advanced Mode only) Allows you to assign

a navigation option to the áCtrlñ key . Once
set, you can control the camera using the
áCtrl-arrowñ key or áCtrl-mouseñ combination.
Ctrl-Shift (Advanced Mode only) Allows you to assign

a navigation option to the áCtrl-Shiftñ key
combination. Once set, you can control the
camera using the áCtrl-Shift-arrowñ key or
áCtrl-Shift-mouseñ combination.
Distance Sets the distance, in working units, for

each camera movement.
For the mouse, the Distance field sets the
distance traveled (in working units) when you
move the mouse from the left-most point in
the view to the right-most point in the view.
Degrees Sets the angle for each camera movement.
Display View If on, displays the orientation of the camera
Cone in the non-active views.
To move the camera through a view window

using the Basic Mode
1. Select the Navigate Camera view control.
2. From the Active View option menu, select a view.
3. Set Mode to Basic.

Navigate Camera
4. If you want to use the mouse as well as the keyboard to control

the camera, turn on Mouse Control. If Mouse Control is off, all
settings pertaining to the mouse are disabled (dimmed).
5. (Optional) — Click the Show Shortcuts keys (?) button for a list of
the default keyboard and mouse navigation settings.
6. (Optional) — To display more settings, click the

Show Settings button.
7. (Optional) — In the Distance field, enter the distance for

each movement of the camera.
Distance is in Working Units.
8. (Optional) — In the Degree field, enter the angle for

9. (Optional) — Turn on Display View Cone.
10. Press any of the arrow keys, letter keys, or keyboard combinations
to move the camera through the active view.
or
If you are using the mouse, enter a data point to select the
active view, then move the mouse to move the camera. Enter
another data point to accept and stop moving the camera, or
Reset to restore the view’s starting position.
When using View Previous and View Next, only mouse accept
points are recognized as viewing operations. For example, if in a
view you Tilt the camera with the mouse, accept and then Walk
forward using the keyboard, when you click the View Previous
view control, the keyboard input is ignored, and the view is

Navigate Camera
restored to its condition before the Tilt operation.
To move the camera through a view window

using the Advanced Mode
1. Select the Navigate Camera view control.
2. From the Active View option menu, select a view.
3. Set Mode to Advanced.
When you choose the Advanced Mode, you also need to

select a navigation option, such as Fly.
4. If you want to use the mouse as well as the keyboard to control the
camera, turn on Mouse, and select a navigation option. If Mouse is
off, all settings pertaining to the mouse are disabled (dimmed).
5. (Optional) — Click the Show Shortcuts keys (?) button for a list of
the current keyboard and mouse navigation settings.
6. (Optional) — To display more settings and navigation

options, click the Show Settings button.

3D Elements
7. (Optional) — For each of the Shift key, Ctrl key, and Ctrl-Shift
combo boxes, select a navigation option.
8. (Optional) — In the Distance field, enter the distance for

Distance is in Working Units.
9. (Optional) — In the Degree field, enter the angle for

10. (Optional) — Turn on Display View Cone.
11. Press any of the arrow keys, letter keys, or keyboard combinations
to move the camera through the active view.
or
If you are using the mouse, enter a data point to select the
active view, then move the mouse to move the camera. Enter
another data point to accept and stop moving the camera, or
Reset to restore the view’s starting position.
When using View Previous and View Next, only mouse accept
points are recognized as viewing operations. For example, if in a
view you Tilt the camera with the mouse, accept and then Walk
forward using the keyboard, when you click the View Previous
view control, the keyboard input is ignored, and the view is
restored to its condition before the Tilt operation.
Key-in: CAMERA NAVIGATE
3D Elements
Many of the elements used in 3D design, including shapes, circles,
polygons, and arcs, are 2D and are therefore restricted to one plane,
even in a 3D design. 3D elements do not have this restriction,
and can be drawn freely in the design cube.
Open 3D elements
Open elements do not enclose an area or volume.

Primitive surfaces
Non-planar line strings and curves

To place a line string or point curve that is not constrained to one
plane, use these tools in the Linear Elements tool box:
To place a Use this tool in the Linear

non-planar Elements tool box
Line string Place SmartLine (see page 6-80)
Point curve Place Point or Stream Curve (see
page 1-42) with the tool setting
Non-planar turned on
The Extract Surface Rule Lines tool (see page 6-90) in the Create
Curves tool box (see page 6-68) and the Extract Face or Edge Geometry
tool (see page 7-137) in the 3D Utility tool box (see page 7-130) are
used to extract a curve from a B-spline surface.
Helixes
A helix is placed with the Place Helix tool (see page 6-88) .
Primitive surfaces
Primitive1 surfaces (often referred to by 3D modelers as
“primary” or “simple” surfaces) include the 3D surfaces that
are relatively simple to describe.
They are placed in the design with the tools in the 3D

Primitives tool box (see page 7-77) , which is in the top-left
1 Here the word “primitive” is used in a somewhat different sense than its normal meaning in .

Primitive surfaces
position in the 3D Main tool frame.
Slab
A slab (also referred to as a “3D block”) is placed with the

Place Slab tool (see page 7-78) .
Slab
A slab is defined in the design file as an extruded surface in

which the profile element is a block (rectangle). For information
about generating more complex extruded surfaces, see Extruded
surfaces and surfaces of revolution on page 7-52.
Sphere
A sphere’s geometry is defined by its center and its radius. It is placed

in the design with the Place Sphere tool (see page 7-81) .
Sphere
A sphere is defined in the design file as a surface of revolution

Primitive surfaces
in which the profile element is an arc. For information about

generating more complex surfaces of revolution, see Extruded
surfaces and surfaces of revolution on page 7-52.
Cone and cylinder

The ends of a cone are two circles lying in parallel planes. It is placed
in the design with the Place Cone tool (see page 7-87) .
Cone
A cylinder is a cone in which both ends have the same diameter. It is

placed in the design with the Place Cylinder tool (see page 7-83) .
Torus
A torus (also referred to as a “donut”) is defined by its radii
and Projection Angle. It is placed in the design with the
Place Torus tool (see page 7-88) .
Torus
A torus is defined in the design file as a surface of revolution

in which the profile element is circle.
Wedge
A wedge is placed in the design with the Place Wedge
tool (see page 7-90) .

Extruded surfaces and surfaces of revolution
Wedge
A wedge is defined in the design file as a surface of revolution

in which the profile element is a rectangle.
Extruded surfaces and surfaces of revolution

Many objects can be drawn by first drawing a planar profile element
(or cross-section) and then projecting or rotating the cross-section.
• An extruded surface or solid is formed by extruding a planar

element — line string, curve, shape, ellipse, B-spline curve,
complex chain, or complex shape. It is placed in the design with
the Extrude tool (see page 7-93) in the 3D Construct tool box.
• A surface or solid of revolution is formed by rotating a planar
element. It is placed in the design with the Construct Revolution
tool (see page 7-146) in the 3D Construct tool box.
Extruded
surface
Surface of
revolution
Complex chains and shapes can be extruded or rotated

to create elaborate surfaces.

Free-form (NURBS) surfaces
Free-form (NURBS) surfaces

A non-uniform rational B-spline (NURBS) surface is the most
mathematically flexible way to represent a surface in a design. A
B-spline surface is easy to modify because each pole of its control
net affects the shape of the surface only over a limited part. The
control net is analogous to a B-spline curve’s control polygon.
B-spline
surface.
Wireframe
view.
Smooth
shaded view.
Teapot
created using
B-spline
surfaces.
Before working with 3D NURBS surfaces, it is a good idea to

become familiar with 2D B-spline concepts and placement. For
more information, see Using Curves on page 6-54.

3D Fillets
3D Fillets
Tools in the 3D Modify tool box (see page 7-108) and the Fillet
Surfaces tool box (see page 7-177) let you round edges of solids and
blend existing surfaces, using a variety of fillets.
Drawing in 3D
By default, data points in a 3D design are placed at the view’s
Active Depth (see page 7-4) . You can snap a tentative point to
an existing element at any depth in a view. However, the new
element is moved to the view’s Active Depth.
• AccuDraw and its drawing plane, 3D data points and 3D
tentative points (see page 7-61) , and 3D auxiliary coordinate
systems (see page 7-61) , let you place elements away from
the Active Depth. Often this improves productivity, since you
need not constantly change the Active Depth.
• Boresite Lock makes Identifying existing elements easier.
Placing elements in 3D
Placing elements in a 2D design is like manual drafting — all
elements appear on the same plane, the sheet of paper.
In 3D, you place elements in space — horizontally (for example,

a floor), vertically (for example, a wall), or at any other angle
or direction (for example, a sloping roof).
Many elements rely on the orientation of the view, AccuDraw’s drawing

place, or the current auxiliary coordinate system if the ACS Plane Lock
is on for exact placement. To place elements such as blocks (rectangles),
circles (by center), polygons, cells, and text, you have these choices:
• Rotate a view so that the plane of the view (your screen) is

parallel to the required orientation.
• A more advanced method is using AccuDraw in 3D (see page 7-55)
or 3D auxiliary coordinate systems (see page 7-61) .

Using AccuDraw in 3D
Specifying whether an element encloses volume

The Type tool setting for the tools in the 3D Primitives tool box (see page
7-77) specifies whether a closed 3D element is either of the following:
• Solid — capped on its ends; encloses a volume.

• Surface — not capped on its ends; does not enclose volume.
For example, to draw a tube you can use the Place Cylinder tool (see
page 7-83) with Type set to Surface, while to draw an iron bar you
could use the Place Cylinder tool with Type set to Solid.
Top: Solids
with hidden
lines removed.
Bottom:
Surfaces with
hidden lines
removed.
To change an element from a surface to a solid

1. In the Modify Surfaces tool box, select the Convert 3D tool.
2. From the Convert To option menu, choose Solid.
3. Identify the element to modify.
4. Enter a data point to accept the modification.
In 3D AccuDraw provides the ability to actually work in a pictorial

view rather than the standard, orthogonal views.
This is possible because AccuDraw automatically constrains data

points to its drawing plane regardless of its orientation to the view.
Compass
tilted over
along the
top view
plane in a 3D
pictorial view
The AccuDraw window in 3D
In 3D, when using Rectangular coordinates, the AccuDraw window

has an additional field for the z-axis. For Polar coordinates in 3D,
the AccuDraw window has the same two fields as in 2D.
Orienting the drawing plane in 3D
Learning to orient AccuDraw’s drawing plane is essential to

mastering 3D drawing. For example, it is easy with AccuDraw to
place a non-planar complex chain or complex shape in an isometric
view in any direction without reverting once to an orthogonal
view. By simply rotating the drawing plane axes, you can “strike
off” at a right angle to the current segment.
This is most apparent during the creation of a true 3D drawing

normally portrayed as an isometric drawing — for example, a
plumbing riser diagram. By starting a pipe run along one view
axis and shifting it using the áFñ, áSñ, and áTñ keyboard shortcuts,
you can twist and turn the pipe through 3D space.

A simple
plumbing riser
diagram under
construction
showing the
compass at
each corner
and annotation
pointing out the
drawing plane
orientation at
each vertex
This ability to adhere to the standard view axes while manipulating

your drawing in a pictorial view is so important that AccuDraw
maintains the current orientation from tool to tool. You can still return
to the view orientation by using the áVñ keyboard shortcut.
The following table summarizes the AccuDraw keyboard shortcuts

available for fine tuning the drawing plane orientation so the
axes point where you want them to go:
Key Effect
áVñ Rotates the drawing plane to align with the view
axes. Pressing this key a second time restores
context-sensitive rotation.
áFñ Rotates the drawing plane to align with the axes in
a standard Front view. Pressing this key a second
áSñ Rotates the drawing plane to align with the axes in
a standard Right view. Pressing this key a second
áTñ Rotates the drawing plane to align with the axes
in a standard Top view. Pressing this key a second
áRñ, áQñ Used to quickly and temporarily rotate the
drawing plane by a single point.

Key Effect
áRñ, áA ñ Used to permanently rotate the drawing plane by three
points. Because it rotates the active ACS, this rotation
will still be active after the tool in use is exited. If on, the
tool setting Use Current Origin causes the drawing plane
origin to be used as the x-axis origin, thereby eliminating
the need to enter an extra data point. Of course, in many
cases it is desirable to be able to define the x-axis origin
at a different location than the drawing plane origin.
áRñ, áXñ Rotates the drawing plane 90 about its x-axis.
áRñ, áYñ Rotates the drawing plane 90 about its y-axis.

áRñ, áZñ Rotates the drawing plane 90 about its z-axis.
Arbitrary rotations
By default, AccuDraw orients the drawing plane to the view axes. This
is in keeping with the way it works in 2D. You can return AccuDraw to
this orientation at any time using the áVñ keyboard shortcut.
You can set up an arbitrary orientation that can be saved and

subsequently retrieved as an auxiliary coordinate system (ACS).
To rotate the drawing plane axes to align

with the current view
1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press the áVñ key.
To interactively rotate the drawing plane axes

1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press áRñ, áAñ.
2. Enter a data point to locate the x-axis origin.
3. Enter a data point to define the direction of the x-axis.
As a result, the direction of the y-axis is implied (perpendicular

to the x-axis), and the axes are rotated.
Graphically
rotating the
drawing
plane
axes. Left:
Defining
the x-axis
direction.
Right:
Defining
the y-axis
direction
(only
necessary
in 3D).
For information about saving and retrieving an ACS defined

using AccuDraw, see Using AccuDraw with auxiliary
coordinate systems on page 7-65.
The Front, Side and Top rotations

Three keyboard shortcuts, áFñ, áSñ, and áTñ, are used to orient
AccuDraw’s drawing plane to the standard Top, Front, and Side views.
Activating one of these shortcuts causes AccuDraw to dynamically
rotate the compass to indicate the orientation of the drawing plane.
Using
AccuDraw
with the Place
Slab tool


with the standard Top view
1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press the áTñ key.

with the standard Front view
1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press the áFñ key.
To rotate the drawing plane axes to align with

a standard side (Left or Right) view
1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press the áSñ key.
Rotating an axis by 90
When the drawing plane is rotated to orientations other than the
standard Top, Front, and side, it is often useful to be able to access
planes at 90 , AccuDraw has keyboard shortcuts that rotate the
drawing plane 90 along its individual axes. These shortcuts — áRñ,
áXñ, áR ñ, áYñ, and áRñ, áZñ — can be used to spin the drawing plane any
number of times until its orientation is exactly as you desire.
To rotate the drawing plane axes 90 about

an individual axis
1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, use one of the
following keyboard shortcuts.
To rotate 90 about Press
x-axis áR ñ, áXñ
y-axis áR ñ, áYñ
z-axis áR ñ, áZ ñ
The new orientation is maintained only until a data point

or Reset is entered. However, you can save this coordinate
system for subsequent recall (see Using AccuDraw with
auxiliary coordinate systems on page 7-65).

Precision input key-ins in 3D
Precision input key-ins in 3D

Precision input key-ins in 3D work much as in 2D, except that
the depth coordinate must also be entered.2
For more information about precision input key-ins, see

Precision Input Key-ins on page 2-65 and Precision input
key-ins with an ACS on page 7-68.
3D data points and 3D tentative points

3D data points and 3D tentative points can be used to position points
at a depth within the view volume other than at the Active Depth.
To enter a 3D data point or 3D tentative point

1. In a view, position the pointer at the desired x- and y- coordinates.
2. To enter a 3D data point, press the 3D Data button.
or
To enter a 3D tentative point, press the 3D Tentative button.
A boreline, in the view’s z-direction, displays in each view that is
not parallel to the view selected in step 1. (If no borelines display,
adjust the views so that at least one other view that shows the
same part of the design has a different orientation.)
3. Position the pointer on a boreline at the desired depth and again
press the 3D Data button or 3D Tentative button.
For information about the assignment of the 3D Data button and

the 3D Tentative button on your system, see Using the Mouse
or Digitizing Tablet in the Setup Guide.
3D auxiliary coordinate systems

An auxiliary coordinate system (ACS) is a coordinate system with
an orientation and, usually, an origin, different from those of the
2 If you omit the z-coordinate, or any other coordinate, it is the same as
keying in 0 for that coordinate.

design file coordinates. Although not exclusively a 3D concept, an

ACS is most useful in 3D design as a drawing aid.
By using an ACS that corresponds to the location and orientation

of a particular element, you can enter data points relative to
parts of the design rather than the global origin.
Although using ACSs may seem complicated, AccuDraw uses

them as a basic part of its 3D functionality, permanently storing
arbitrary rotations. It is not necessary to learn much about
ACSs to use them effectively with AccuDraw.
ACS is called UCS (user coordinate system) by some other CAD systems.
ACS Type
You can choose from these ACS types: Rectangular,
Cylindrical, and Spherical.
Rectangular
Like the design cube coordinate system, with coordinates
expressed in the form (X,Y,Z). You can use AccuDraw to define,
save, and retrieve rectangular ACSs (see Using AccuDraw with
auxiliary coordinate systems on page 7-65).
Rectangular
ACS

Cylindrical
Points are specified as two magnitudes (R and Z) and an angle
(θ), with coordinates expressed in the form (R, θ, Z).
The process of locating a point in a cylindrical ACS can

be thought of as follows:
1 . Moving from the origin along the x-axis a distance of R.
2 . Rotating about the z-axis an angle of θ.
3 . Finally, moving parallel to the z-axis a distance of Z.
Cylindrical
ACS
In 2D, there is no depth (z-axis), and cylindrical coordinates

are commonly known as polar coordinates.
These are used to position a data point with a Cylindrical ACS:
• AX=R, ,Z for an exact location, where:

R is the distance from the origin, along the x-axis.
is the angle counterclockwise from the x-axis about the z-axis.
Z is the distance in the z-direction.
• AD= R, , Z for locations relative to a tentative point, where:

R is the difference in distance from the origin, along the x-axis.
is the difference in the angle counterclockwise
from the x-axis.

Z is the difference in the distance in the z-direction.
Spherical
(3D only) Points are specified by a magnitude (R) and two angles (θ
and φ), with coordinates expressed in the form (R, θ, φ).
The process of locating a point in a spherical ACS can

be thought of as follows:
1 . Move from the origin along the x-axis a distance of R

to establish a radius vector.
2 . Rotate this vector about the z-axis an angle of θ.
3 . The angle φ is the angle between the radius vector

and the positive z-axis.
Spherical ACS
These key-ins are used to position a data point with a Spherical ACS:
• AX=R, , for an exact location, where:

R is the radius vector distance from the origin.
is the angle counterclockwise from the x-axis about the z-axis.
is the angle between the radius vector and the z-axis.
• AD= R, , for locations relative to a tentative point, where:

R is the difference in the radius vector distance from the origin.
is the difference in the angle, counterclockwise,

from the x-axis.

is the difference in the angle between the radius
vector and the z-axis.
Using AccuDraw with auxiliary coordinate systems
Unless you are using one of the four (Top, right Side, Front, View)
standard orientations, AccuDraw “forgets” the drawing plane
orientation at the end of the current design session. To overcome this,
there is a mechanism to save and retrieve arbitrary drawing plane
orientations as rectangular auxiliary coordinate systems.
The áRñ, áAñ keyboard shortcut is used to define an arbitrary drawing

plane orientation that can subsequently be saved as a rectangular
ACS. See Arbitrary rotations on page 7-58.
To save a drawing plane coordinate system

1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press áWñ, áAñ.
The Write To ACS dialog box opens.
2. In the Name field, key in a name for the coordinate system.

or
To save the coordinate system as the active (unnamed)
ACS, leave the Name field blank.

To recall a saved drawing plane coordinate system

1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press áGñ, áAñ.
The Get ACS dialog box opens.
2. In the Name field, key in the name of the coordinate

system to recall.
or
To retrieve the active (last used) ACS, leave the Name field
blank. (This has the same effect as setting Rotation to Auxiliary
in the AccuDraw Settings dialog box.)
3. (Optional) — To rotate the drawing plane to the saved orientation
without moving the drawing plane origin, turn off Origin.
or
To move the drawing plane origin to the saved location without
rotating the drawing plane, turn off Rotation.

The compass updates to show the effect of recalling
the saved coordinate system.
Other ways of working with auxiliary coordinate systems
In addition to the AccuDraw keyboard shortcuts for working with an

ACS, MicroStation also has an ACS tool box and dialog box. These are
the only mechanisms for working with a cylindrical or spherical ACS.
Defining an ACS
You can define an ACS (without using AccuDraw) in any
of the following ways:

To define an ACS Use this tool in the ACS tool box

That is aligned with
a planar element.

(see page 6-126)
By entering data
points.
Define ACS (By Points) (see page 6-126)

That is aligned with
a view.

(see page 6-127)
Making an ACS active

MicroStation lets you define and save multiple ACSs. At any time,
you can make one ACS active. This lets you work simultaneously
with three coordinate systems — the active ACS as well as the
design file and view coordinate systems.

To make a saved ACS the active ACS

(without using AccuDraw)
1. From the Utilities menu, choose Auxiliary Coordinates.
The Auxiliary Coordinate Systems dialog box opens.
2. Select an ACS from the list of saved ACSs.

3. Click the Attach button.
The selected ACS becomes the active ACS.
To identify an ACS to make it the active ACS

1. In the ACS tool box, select the Select ACS tool (see page 6-130) .
Triads appear, indicating the available saved ACSs.
2. Identify the required ACS at its origin.
ACS Plane Lock

If on, ACS Plane Lock forces all data points to be on the
active ACS’s xy plane.
Precision input key-ins with an ACS

While an ACS is active, precision input can be specified
as one of the following:

Manipulating and modifying elements in 3D
For precision input as ACS Type Key in

ACS coordinate Rectangu- AX=X VALUE, Y VALUE,
lar Z VALUE
Spherical AX=R VALUE, ANGLE,
Cylindrical ANGLE
AX=R VALUE, ANGLE,
Z VALUE
Distances, along the ACS Rectangu- AD=X VALUE, Y VALUE, Z
axes, from the most recently lar VALUE (X, Y, AND Z, AXES)
entered tentative point Spherical AD=R VALUE, ANGLE,
or data point Cylindrical ANGLE
AD=R VALUE, ANGLE,
Z VALUE
Manipulating an ACS
You can manipulate an ACS as follows:
To Use this tool in the ACS tool box

Rotate the active ACS.
Rotate Active ACS (see page 6-128)

Move the origin of the
active ACS.
Move ACS (see page 6-129)

For the most part, manipulating and modifying elements in 3D is
similar to 2D. 3D-specific aspects are discussed here.
Element manipulations (for example, scaling or rotation) are

performed relative to AccuDraw’s drawing plane. If AccuDraw
is not active, the manipulation is performed relative to the view
axes (see View coordinates on page 7-8).

Graphic groups work as they do in 2D.
Selecting elements in 3D
Most basic 3D element manipulations, including moving, scaling,

rotating, deleting, and copying, can be done with the Element
Selection tool, and are similar to 2D.
• As in 2D, you can select one or more elements and manipulate

them as a single entity (see Selecting Elements on page 3-1).
• By dragging one of the handles of a selected element,
you can modify it individually. The type of modification
allowed depends on the element (see To scale or modify
a selected element on page 3-12).
Identifying existing elements

When Boresite Lock is on, elements at any depth can be selected
or identified with a data point. Elements identified with a
data point remain at their depth in the design, regardless
of the Active Depth (see page 7-4) .
When Boresite Lock is off, only elements at or very near the Active
Depth can be selected or identified with a data point.
If you have difficulty selecting an element, check Boresite Lock,

as well as Grid Lock and Level Lock.
Tentative points and Boresite Lock

Tentative points override Boresite Lock. You can snap to elements at
any depth in a view, whether or not Boresite Lock is on.
Set Display Depth to a small range to be sure you snap to

the element at the desired depth.

SmartSolids/SmartSurfaces
Using the fence in 3D

When you place the fence, it is planar and specific to one view. In 3D,
the fence encloses the volume bounded by the area of the fence and the
view’s Display Depth — that is, the volume enclosed by moving the
fence from the front to the rear of the view volume along the view z-axis.
Even if an element is completely within the fence boundaries,

if it also intersects the view’s front or back clipping plane (see
View volume on page 7-3), it is considered to cross the fence and
is clipped if Fence (Selection) Mode is set to Clip.
This is important to remember, in particular, when creating

3D cells (see page 7-187) .
How elements such as shapes and solids are clipped by the

fence is affected by the preference Use Optimized Fence
Clipping (see page 7-75) .
Text cannot be clipped.
Certain viewing operations, such as rotating and zooming, can

cause the fence in a 3D view to disappear.
For basic information about the fence, see Using the Fence to
Manipulate and Modify Elements on page 3-16.
Using MicroStation’s SmartSolids and SmartSurfaces tools you can
quickly construct complex 3D models of your designs. For example,
starting with basic solids or surfaces, you then can:
• Add finishing touches, such as fillets and chamfers.
• Use a planar closed shape, or open element, as a template to
create a cut out in either a surface or a solid.
• Use the Shell Solid tool (see page 7-103) to quickly create a
“hollow” solid with defined wall thickness.

Settings that affect SmartSolids/SmartSurfaces
Settings that affect SmartSolids/SmartSurfaces

Several settings control the way in which SmartSolids and
SmartSurfaces are treated. These control both the display and
the method for selecting SmartSolids and SmartSurfaces, as well
how they are treated when exported as visible edges.
SmartSolids
The SmartSolid Settings dialog box (Element menu > SmartSolids)

controls the default display of SmartSolid elements.
Display
By default, SmartSolids and SmartSurfaces are displayed in
Wireframe display mode. This is the more efficient mode for working
with SmartSolids and SmartSurfaces in a design session. Surfaces
display mode should be used only where the design is to be rendered
with an earlier version of MicroStation (pre MicroStation/J).
Surface Rule Lines

In Wireframe (and Surfaces) display mode, curved surfaces are
represented both by their edge lines and a defined number of rule lines.
Surface rule lines provide a visual indication of a surface’s curvature.
With the default setting of 4, for example, a full cylindrical solid is

displayed with 4 surface rule lines, while the same solid cut in half
displays with 2 surface rule lines. Planar surfaces, which do not have
curvature, are represented by their edge boundaries only.

Locate By Picking Faces
To change the default display of SmartSolids

and SmartSurfaces
1. From the Element menu, choose SmartSolids.
The SmartSolid Settings dialog box opens.
2. Make the desired changes to the settings.
In non-rendered
views, curved
surfaces are
represented by
surface rule
lines. Top:
Surface Rule
Lines set to 4
(the default).
Bottom:
Surface Rule
Lines set to 10.
This setting, in the Input category of the Preferences dialog box,

affects that way that solids and closed elements are selected.
Generally, you select elements by snapping to their edges. When
Locate By Picking Faces is on, a data point anywhere on a solid or
surface will select that face element. This is particularly useful
in a rendered view, where you can identify a solid or surface with
a data point anywhere on the displayed surface.
Options for Locate By Picking Faces are:
• Never — in all views, solids and surfaces can only be identified

with a data point on an edge or surface rule line.

• Rendered Views Only (default) — where a view’s default display

mode is set to any of the rendering options, surfaces and solids
may be identified with a data point anywhere on their surface,
not necessarily on an edge line or surface rule line.
• Always — in all views (whether rendered or not) faces may be
identified with a data point anywhere on their surface.
To change the method of selecting surfaces

2. In the Category list, select Input.
The Set input preferences options display.
3. From the Locate By Picking Faces option menu, choose
the required setting.
4. Click OK.
With Locate By
Picking Faces: Off —
solids and surfaces
can be identified only
with a data point
on an edge or rule
line (for example,
1). On — solids
and surfaces may
be identified with a
data point anywhere
on any face (for
example, 2).

Use Optimized Fence Clipping
Use Optimized Fence Clipping
In the Operation section of the Preferences dialog box, the Use

Optimized Fence Clipping setting affects the way that SmartSolids
and SmartSurfaces are clipped. When this option is on (the
default), fence operations that involve clipping (Clip and Void Clip)
do not drop the solids or surfaces back to their basic components.
In effect, the fence operation works like a boolean subtraction,
where part of the solid or surface is removed.
As with other fence operations, in 3D the extent of the fence
volume is defined by the fence, and the display depth of the
view. When a circular fence is used, for example, it is similar to
using a cylinder as the clipping template.
Optimized fence clipping is supported in all views,

including camera views.
Using
optimized
fence
clipping.
Top: A block
with the
fence in
place ready
to delete.
Bottom:
The result
of deleting
the fence
contents
with Use
Optimized
Fence
Clipping
turned off
(left) and on
(right).

Exporting visible edges
Exporting visible edges
When Exporting Visible Edges, from a design that consists

primarily of SmartSolids, the SmartSolids option in the
Method menu may prove faster. While processing all element
types, it is optimized for SmartSolids.
Calculate Intersections is not supported with the SmartSolids

option. Also, for files containing a large number of elements,
another option may prove more suitable. You should experiment
to determine which option is best for your application.
To choose SmartSolids when exporting

visible edges
1. From the File menu, choose Export > Visible Edges.
The Export Visible Edges dialog box opens.
2. In the General section, from the Method option menu,
choose SmartSolids.
3D Main tool frame

Tools for creating and modifying solids and surfaces are accessed
from tool boxes in this tool frame.
To Use tools in the

Place a simple 3D element — 3D Primitives tool box (see
slab, sphere, cylinder, cone, page 7-77)
torus, or wedge.

3D Primitives tool box
To Use tools in the

Extrude a solid or surface, or 3D Construct tool box (see
construct a surface of revolution, page 7-92)
or
Extrude a solid or surface
along a path,
or
Construct a thin shell solid,
or
Thicken a surface into a solid.
Modify a solid, remove a face, 3D Modify tool box (see
or page 7-108)
Construct a new solid from the
union, intersection, or difference
of existing solids,
or
Cut, fillet, or chamfer an
existing solid.
Align elements relative to a 3D Utility tool box (see
face on each element, page 7-130)
or
Change the display of a
SmartSolid/SmartSurface,
or
Extract a face or edge from a solid,
or
Intersect a solid/surface with
a linear element.
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DTOOLS OFF | ON | TOGGLE
3D Primitives tool box

The tools in the 3D Primitives tool box are used to place a simple 3D
element — slab, sphere, cylinder, cone, torus, or wedge.

Place Slab
To Select in the 3D Primitives

tool box
Place a slab.
Place Slab (see page 7-78)

Place a sphere.
Place Sphere (see page 7-81)

Place a cylinder.
Place Cylinder (see page 7-83)

Place a cone.
Place Cone (see page 7-87)

Place a torus.
Place Torus (see page 7-88)

Place a wedge-shaped object.
Place Wedge (see page 7-90)
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DDRAWING OFF | ON | TOGGLE
Place Slab
(3D only) Used to place a volume of projection with a
rectangular cross-section.

Place Slab
Tool Setting Effect

Type Can be Surface (not capped) or Solid (capped).
Axis Sets the direction in which the height
is projected.
Orthogonal If on, the edges are orthogonal.
Length If on, sets the length (step 3).
Width If on, sets the width (step 4).
Height If on, sets the height (step 5).
To place a slab
1. Select the Place Slab tool.

When Axis is set to Points, a side of the slab is parallel to
the view in which this data point is entered.
3. Enter a data point to define the length and rotation angle.
If Length is on, this data point defines the rotation angle.
4. Enter a data point to define the width.
If Width is on, this data point accepts the width.
5. Enter a third data point to define the height.
If Height is on, this data point accepts the height.
If Orthogonal is on, the slab is orthogonal; the height and

Place Slab
length of the vertical edges are the same.
Place Slab,
constrained
to be
orthogonal.
Defining the
length, width,
and height
graphically.

Place Sphere
Placing the
same slab as
in previous
example, but
with length,
width,
and height
constrained
using
AccuDraw.
Key-in: PLACE SLAB ICON
Although the slab’s length, width, and height can be specified

as tool settings, it is generally quicker and easier to type these
distances into the AccuDraw window.
To place a volume of projection with a non-rectangular cross-section,

use the Extrude tool (see page 7-93) in the 3D Construct tool box.
Place Sphere
(3D only) Used to place a sphere — a volume of revolution
with a circular cross section.

Place Sphere
Tool Setting Effect

Axis Sets the direction of the sphere’s axis.
To place a sphere
1. Select the Place Sphere tool.
2. Enter a data point to define the sphere’s center.

3. If Radius is off, enter a data point to define the radius.
If Radius is on, this data point accepts the sphere.
Place Sphere.
Defining
the radius
graphically.

Place Cylinder
Placing
the same
sphere with
radius keyed
in using
AccuDraw.
Key-in: PLACE SPHERE ICON
Although the sphere’s radius can be specified as a tool

setting, it is generally quicker and easier to type the radius
into the AccuDraw window.
To place a volume of revolution with a non-circular cross-section,

use the Place Free-form Surface tool (see page 7-146) in
the Create Surfaces tool box.
Place Cylinder
(3D only) Used to place a cylinder.
Tool Setting Effect

Axis Sets the direction of the cylinder’s
axis (height).
Orthogonal If on, the cylinder is a right cylinder.

Place Cylinder
Tool Setting Effect

Height If on, sets the height.
To place a cylinder
1. Select the Place Cylinder tool.
2. Enter a data point to define the center of the base.

3. Enter a data point to define the radius.
If Radius is on, this data point accepts the base.
4. Enter a data point to define the height.
If Height is on, this data point accepts the cylinder.

Place Cylinder
Place Cylinder
with all constraints
turned off and all
data points entered
graphically.

Place Cylinder
Place Cylinder
with Orthogonal
turned on and all
data points entered
graphically.
Place cylinder with

orthogonal turned
on and AccuDraw
used to constrain
the radius “R” and
height “H.”
Key-in: PLACE CYLINDER ICON

Key-in: PLACE CYLINDER RADIUS | RIGHT | SKEWED
Although the cylinder’s radius and height can be specified as

Place Cone
tool settings, it is generally quicker and easier to type these

Place Cone
(3D only) Used to place a cone.
Tool Setting Effect

Axis Sets the direction of the cone’s axis (height).
Orthogonal If on, the cone is a right cone.
Top Radius If on, sets the second radius (step 5).
Base Radius If on, sets the first radius (step 3).
To place a cone
1. Select the Place Cone tool.

Place Torus
2. Enter a data point to define the center of the base.

3. Enter a data point to define the base’s radius.
If Base Radius is on, this data point accepts the base.
4. Enter a data point to define the height and the top’s center.
If Height is on, this data point defines the top’s center only. If
Orthogonal is also on, this data point accepts only.
If Orthogonal is on, this data point defines the height only.
5. Enter a data point to define the top radius.
If Top Radius is on, this data point defines the height only.
Key-in: PLACE CONE ICON

Key-in: PLACE CONE RADIUS | RIGHT | SKEWED
Although the cone’s radii and height can be specified as

tool settings, it is generally quicker and easier to type these
This tool works similarly to the Place Cylinder tool (see page 7-83) .
See the illustration after the procedure, “To place a cylinder.”
Place Torus
(3D only) Used to place a torus (a donut-shaped surface or solid).

Place Torus
Tool Setting Effect

Axis Sets the direction of the axis of revolution.
Primary If on, sets the primary radius (the one
Radius the torus is swept around).
Secondary If on, sets the secondary (inside) radius.
Radius
Angle If on, sets the sweep angle.
To place a torus
1. Select the Place Torus tool.
2. Enter a data point to define the start point.
Primary This data point defines:

Radius:
Off Center, primary radius, and start angle.
On Just the center and start angle.
4. Enter a data point to complete the torus, as follows:
If these are This data point defines:

on:
None3 Secondary radius and sweep angle.
Secondary Sweep angle.
Radius
Angle Secondary radius.
Secondary Direction of the sweep angle rotation.
Radius and
Angle

Place Wedge
3
The Primary Radius has no effect on this step.
Key-in: PLACE TORUS
Place Wedge
(3D only) Used to place a wedge — a volume of revolution
with a rectangular cross-section.
Tool Setting Effect

Axis Sets the direction of the axis of ion.
Radius If on, sets the primary radius.
Angle If on, sets the angle (of sweep).

Place Wedge
To place a wedge
1. Select the Place Wedge tool.
2. Enter a data point to define the outside start point.
3. Enter a data point to define the center and the start angle.
If Radius is on, this data point defines just the start angle.
4. Enter a data point to define the sweep angle.
If Angle is on, this data point defines the direction of the rotation.
5. Enter a data point to define the height.
If Height is on, this data point defines whether the wedge
is projected up or down from the start plane.
Placing
a Wedge
with all
constraints
off.

3D Construct tool box
Placing a
Wedge with
Primary
Radius “R,”
Angle “θ”,
and Height
“H” on.
Key-in: PLACE WEDGE
To place a volume of revolution with a non-rectangular

cross-section, use the Construct Revolution (see page 7-97)
tool in the 3D Primitives tool box.
3D Construct tool box

Tools in the 3D Construct tool box are used to extrude a surface or solid
linearly or along a path, construct a surface or solid of revolution,
create a shell solid, or thicken a surface to create a solid.

Extrude
To Select in the 3D Construct

tool box
Create a surface or solid by
extruding an element linearly.
Extrude (see page 7-93)

Create a surface or solid by
revolving an element.
Construct Revolution (see

page 7-97)
Create a surface or solid
by extruding an element
along a path.
Extrude Along Path (see
page 7-100)
Hollow out a solid to create a solid
with walls of constant thickness.
Shell Solid (see page 7-103)

Add thickness to a surface
to create a solid.
Thicken to Solid (see page

7-106)
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DCONSTRUCT OFF | ON | TOGGLE
Extrude
(3D only) Used to create a surface or solid — a complex 3D
element generated by linearly extruding a profile element (line,
line string, arc, ellipse, text, multi-line, complex chain, complex
shape, or B-spline curve) a defined distance. Surfaces formed
between the original profile element and its extrusion are indicated
by straight lines connecting the keypoints.

Extrude
Tool Setting Effect

Orthogonal If on, the profile element is extruded
orthogonally.
Distance If on, sets the distance, in working units,
the element is extruded.
Spin Angle If on, sets the spin angle.
X Scale If on, sets the scale factor in the x-direction.1
Y Scale If on, sets the scale factor in the y-direction.
Keep Profile If on, the original profile element is
kept in the design.
1 If X Scale or Y Scale are off, the profile element is not scaled in that direction.
To extrude a surface or solid

1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the profile element.
2. Select the Extrude tool.

Extrude
3. Enter a data point to define the start point.

4. Enter a second data point.
Distance Defines extrusion’s

Off Distance
On Direction
Alternative method — To extrude a surface or solid

1. Select the Extrude tool.
2. Identify the profile element.
Distance Defines extrusion’s

Off Distance
On Direction

Extrude
Extruding a solid
graphically (with
Orthogonal turned
off). Identify the
profile (1). Define
the distance and
direction (2).

Construct Revolution
Extruding a solid
using AccuDraw
to constrain the
extrusion distance
(D) and direction (to
make the extrusion
orthogonal).
Key-in: CONSTRUCT SURFACE PROJECTION
Although the extrusion distance can be specified as a tool

setting, it is generally quicker and easier to type this distance
into the AccuDraw window.
The Place Slab tool (see page 7-78) provides a faster way to
place an extrusion with a rectangular cross-section. The Place
Cylinder tool (see page 7-83) provides a faster way to place an
extrusion with a circular cross-section.
(3D only) Used to create a surface or solid of revolution — a complex
3D element that is generated by rotating a profile element (line, line
string, arc, ellipse, shape, complex chain, complex shape, or B-spline
curve) about an axis of revolution. Surfaces created by the profile
element, as it is rotated, are indicated by arcs connecting the keypoints.

Tool Setting Effect

Axis Sets the direction of the axis of revolution.
Angle Sets the rotation angle.
Keep Profile If on, the original profile element is
kept in the design.
To construct a solid or surface of revolution

1. Select the Construct Revolution tool.

3. Enter a data point3 .
If Axis is set to Points, this data point defines one point
on the axis of revolution. Otherwise, this data point
defines the axis of revolution.
4. If Axis is set to Points, enter a second data point to define
another point on the axis of revolution.
5. Reset to finish.
or
Return to step 3 to revolve the same profile element again.
3 To be sure the axis of revolution is defined at the exact location desired, use AccuDraw.

Construct
Revolution.
AccuDraw used to
constrain the axis of
rotation, defined by
points 2 and 3.
The completed solid

(of revolution).
Key-in: CONSTRUCT SURFACE REVOLUTION
The Place Sphere tool (see page 7-81) provides a faster way to place

Extrude Along Path
a solid of revolution with a circular cross-section.
To revolve a profile element n segments about the same axis of

revolution, repeatedly enter data points until 360 is reached.
The surface is then placed automatically.
Extrude Along Path

(3D only) Used to create:
• a tubular surface or solid extrusion along a path.

• a surface or solid by extruding a profile element (line,
line string, arc, ellipse, complex chain, complex shape, or
B-spline curve) along a path.
Tool Setting Effect

Defined By Circular—A tube with a circular
cross-section is generated.
Profile—Surface is constructed by extruding

one element (the profile) along another
element (the path). Orientation of the
profile is continually changed to follow
the orientation of the path.
Inside If on and Defined By is set to Circular,
Radius sets the inside radius.
Outside If on and Define By is set to Circular,
Radius sets the outside radius.

Extrude Along Path
To extrude a circular tube along a path

1. Select the Extrude Along Path tool.
2. In the tool settings window, set Defined By to Circular.
3. Identify the path element.

4. Accept the path element.
5. If Outside Radius is off, enter a data point to define
the outside radius.
or
If Outside Radius is on, accept the outside radius.
6. If Inside Radius is off, enter a data point to define the inside radius.
or
If Inside Radius is on, accept the inside radius.
The extrusion appears.
7. Accept to complete the extrusion.

Extrude Along Path
Extrude circular tube

along path (with
inside and outside
radii turned on).
Left: Identify the

path (1)
Right: Accept to
view the extrusion
(2), then accept
(3) to complete the
extrusion.
To extrude a profile along a path

1. Select the Extrude Along Path tool.
2. In the tool settings window, set Defined By to Profile.
3. Identify the path element.

5. Accept to view the extrusion
6. Accept to complete the extrusion.

Shell Solid
Extrude profile along

path.
Left: Identify the

path (1) and the
profile (2).
Right: Accept to view

the extruded profile
(3), then accept
(4) to complete the
extrusion.
Key-in: CONSTRUCT EXTRUDE ALONG
Shell Solid
(3D only) Used to create a hollowed out solid having faces

of a defined thickness. One or more selected faces also may
be removed to create an opening.
• After selecting, the solid, as you move the screen pointer over the
solid the face nearest the pointer highlights. A data point selects
the highlighted face, which remains highlighted.
• You can enter a Reset to deselect an incorrect face. Where
a number of faces have been selected, consecutive Resets
will deselect them in the reverse order (that is, the last face
selected is the first face deselected).

Shell Solid
Tool Setting Effect

Shell If on, material is added to the outside; the
Outward original solid defines the inside of the walls.
Shell Sets the wall thickness for the remaining faces.
Thickness
To construct a shell solid with no faces removed

1. Select the Shell Solid tool.
2. In the Shell Thickness field, key in the desired thickness value.

3. If required, turn on Shell Outward.
4. Identify the solid.
The solid highlights. Simultaneously, the face nearest the
screen pointer location highlights also.
5. Accept, away from the solid, to create the hollowed out shell solid.
To construct a shell solid with one or

more faces removed
1. Select the Shell Solid tool.
2. In the Shell Thickness field, key in the desired thickness value.
3. If necessary, turn on Shell Outward.

Shell Solid

5. Identify the face to remove.
The face highlights.
6. Accept, away from the solid, to create the shell solid
or
Identify further faces for removal.
7. Accept, away from the solid, to create the shell solid.
Creating a shell
solid. Left: Identify
the solid (1). Center:
Identify the faces to
remove (2 and 3).
Right: Accept (4),
away from the solid
to create the shell
solid.
Rendered view of the

shell solid.

Thicken to Solid
Key-in: CONSTRUCT SHELL
Thicken to Solid
(3D only) Used to add thickness to an existing surface to create

a solid. On identifying the solid, an arrow displays showing the
distance and direction of the thickening that will be added. If Add
To Both Sides is on, arrows display in both directions. If Thickness
is not turned on, then thickening is added graphically, with the
amount of thickening defined by the screen pointer.
Tool Setting Effect

Add To Both If on, the thickness value is added to
Sides both sides of the surface.
Thickness Sets the thickness value that is added
to the surface.
To add thickness to a surface to create a solid

1. Select the Thicken to Solid tool.

Thicken to Solid
2. Turn on Thickness.
3. In the Thickness field, enter the value for the thickening.
4. If necessary, turn on Add To Both Sides.
The surface highlights. An arrow(s) displays, showing the distance
and to which side(s) the thickness will be added.
6. If Add To Both Sides is off, move the pointer, using the arrows
as a guide, to select the side for thickening.
7. Accept.
Thickening an existing solid (a cylinder) to create a solid.

Top left, center, and right show the cylinder before applying
thickening to the outer, inner, and both sides, respectively. For
thickening to both the inner and outer sides of the surface,
the direction is defined by the location of the screen pointer
and indicated by an arrow. Where Add To Both Sides is
selected, the arrows point in both directions and the screen
pointer location has no bearing on the result.
Bottom left, center and right, show the results of the thickening

3D Modify tool box
for outer, inner, and both sides, respectively.
Key-in: CONSTRUCT THICKEN
3D Modify tool box
Tools in the 3D Modify tool box are used to:
• modify or remove faces of a solid

• construct a single solid from the union, intersection or
difference of existing solids
• place cuts, fillets, or chamfers on existing solids.
To Select in the 3D Modify

tool box
Relocate inwards or outwards
one or more faces of a solid.
Modify Solid (see page 7-109)

Remove one or more faces
from a solid.
Remove Faces and Heal

(see page 7-111)
Construct a single solid that is
the union of two or more existing
(overlapping) solids.
Construct Union (see page
7-114)
Construct a single solid that is
the intersection of two or more
existing (overlapping) solids.
Construct Intersection (see
page 7-116)

Modify Solid
To Select in the 3D Modify

tool box
Construct a single solid by
subtracting the volume of one
or more (overlapping) solids
from another. Construct Difference (see
page 7-119)
Create a cut, slot, or pocket
in a solid.
Cut Solid (see page 7-121)

Fillet one or more edges of a solid.
Fillet Edges (see page 7-125)

Chamfer one or more edges
of a solid.
Chamfer Edges (see page 7-127)
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DMODIFY OFF | ON | TOGGLE
Modify Solid
(3D only) Used to relocate a face of a solid inwards (negative) or

outwards (positive) relative to the center of the solid. Direction
of movement is normal to the selected face.
Tool Setting Effect

Distance If on, sets the distance that the face
is to be modified (moved) relative to
the center of the solid.

Modify Solid
To modify a face of a solid

1. Select the Modify Solid tool.
2. Turn on Distance.
3. In the Distance field, key in the desired value.
5. Identify the face to modify.
The face highlights. An arrow displays the direction and
distance of the modification, normal to the face.
6. Move the pointer, using the arrow as a guide to define
the direction of the modification.
If Distance is off, the pointer defines both the direction
and the distance of the modification.
7. Accept to modify the face.
Modifying a face on
a solid. Left: Identify
the solid (1), then
the face to modify
(2). Center: Move
the screen pointer to
define the direction
of the modification.
Right: Accept (3)
to complete the
modification.

Modifying a curved
face of a solid. Top
Left: Identify the
solid (1), then the
curved face to modify
(2). Use the screen
pointer to define
the direction of the
modification and
accept (3). Top
Right: The solid
after modification.
Bottom: Front views,
showing the solid
before (left) and
after (right) the
curved surface was
modified.
Key-in: STRETCH FACES
(3D only) Used to remove an existing face(s) or a feature from a

solid and then heal (close) the opening. Additionally, the Remove
Logical Faces toggle lets you remove all faces associated with a
feature by identifying any one of the feature’s surfaces.
For example, with Remove Logical Faces turned on, you can
remove all faces that are associated with:
• a cut
• a solid that has been added to or subtracted from the original

• a shell solid (returning the solid to its original form

with no hollowing out)
• a fillet or chamfer
by identifying any one face of the feature.
After identifying the solid, as you move the screen pointer over
it, the face nearest the pointer highlights. A data point selects
the highlighted face, which remains highlighted.
You can enter a Reset to deselect an incorrect face. Where a number of

faces have been selected, consecutive Resets will deselect them in the
reverse order (that is, the last face selected is the first face deselected).
Tool Setting Effect

Method Defines how faces are selected for removal:
Logical Groups—All associated faces are
processed. For example, a feature such
as a cut can be removed by selecting any
one face of the feature.
Faces—Only selected faces are processed.
To remove one or more faces from a solid

1. Select the Remove Faces and Heal tool.
2. From the Method option menu, choose Faces.


screen pointer location highlights.

4. Identify the face to remove.
The face remains highlighted.
5. Accept to remove the face.
or
Identify further faces to remove.
6. Accept to remove the selected faces.
Removing a single
face. Left: Identify
the solid (1) and the
face to remove (2).
Right: Accept (3) to
remove the selected
face.
Removing multiple
faces. Left: Identify
faces to remove (2
and 3). Right: Accept
(4) to remove the
selected faces.
To remove a cut feature from a solid

1. Select the Remove Faces and Heal tool.
2. From the Method option menu, choose Logical Faces.
The solid highlights. Simultaneously, the face nearest the screen

Construct Union
pointer location highlights in the active color and line style.

4. Identify one of the faces of the cut.
The face highlights.
5. Accept to remove all faces associated with the cut.
Removing a cut
feature from a solid.
Left: Identify the
solid (1). Center: one
of the faces of the cut
(2). Right: Accept
to remove all faces
associated with the
cut (3).
Key-in: REMOVE FACES
Construct Union
(3D only) Used to unite two or more overlapping solids.

Construct Union
Tool Setting Effect

Keep Determines whether or not the original solids
Originals are retained after constructing the solid.
None—If set, none of the original
solids are retained.
All—If set, all of the original solids

are retained.
First—If set, the first original solid

identified is retained.
Last—If set, the last original solid

To construct a union between overlapping solids

1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the solids.
2. Select the Construct Union tool.
The solids are united into a single solid.
Alternative method — To construct a union

between overlapping solids
1. Select the Construct Union tool.
2. Identify the first solid.
3. Identify the second solid.
4. Accept to construct the union.
or
Identify further solids.
5. Accept to construct the union.

Construct Intersection
Using the Element Selection tool

to unite several elements into a
single solid.
Left: Use the Element Selection

tool to select the elements to be
united (1 and 2).
Right: Select the Construct Union

tool to unite the selected elements.
Selecting elements individually to

unite into a single solid.
Left: After selecting the Construct

Union tool, select the elements to
unite (1 and 2).
Right: Accept (3) to complete the

construction.
Key-in: CONSTRUCT UNION
(3D only) Used to construct a solid that is the intersection

of two or more overlapping solids.
Typically, you can use this tool to create a solid from the projected
front and side elevations of an object.
Tool Setting Effect


are retained.


To construct a solid at the intersection

of overlapping solids
1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the solids.
2. Select the Construct Intersection tool.
Alternative method — To construct a solid at

the intersection of overlapping solids
1. Select the Construct Intersection tool.
2. Identify the first solid.
3. Identify the second solid.
4. Accept to construct the intersection.
or
Identify further solids.
5. Accept to construct the intersection.

Creating a solid from the front and side elevations of an object.

Left: Front and side elevations of the required object.
Center: After projecting the front and side “through” each
other, select the Construct Intersection tool and identify
each of the solids (1 and 2).
Right: Accept (3) to create the solid at the intersection
of the two original elements.
Rendered view
showing the two
projected elements
formed from the
intersection of the
two projections.

Construct Difference
Rendered view
showing the
completed item
formed from the
intersection of the
two projections.
Key-in: CONSTRUCT INTERSECTION
(3D only) Used to subtract the volume of one or more

overlapping solids from another solid.

Tool Setting Effect


are retained.


To construct a solid that is the difference between

one solid and one or more overlapping solids
1. Select the Construct Difference tool.
2. Identify the solid from which the other solid(s) will be subtracted.
3. Identify the solid to subtract.
4. Accept to subtract the second solid from the first.
or
Identify further solids to subtract.
5. Accept to subtract the latter solids from the First.

Cut Solid
Example of
subtracting several
solids from another.
Left: Identify the

solid from which
the others will be
subtracted (1), and
then the solids to
subtract from the
first (2,3,4,5˙).
Accept (6) to complete

the subtraction.
Key-in: CONSTRUCT DIFFERENCE
Cut Solid
(3D only) Used to place a cut in a solid, using a cutting profile.

Cutting profiles may be open or closed elements. Open elements
must extend to the edge of the solid. When an open element is the
cutting profile, the identification point for the solid determines the
portion of it that is retained. If Split Solid is on then no material
is removed, the solid is split at the cutting profile.

Cut Solid
Tool Setting Effect

Cut Sets the direction of the cut, relative to the
Direction cutting profile’s Surface Normal.
Both—Both directions from the profile’s plane.
Forward—Forward from the profile’s plane.
Back —Back from the profile’s plane.

Cut Mode Sets the limits of the cut.
Through—Cuts through all faces of the solid.
Define Depth—Cuts into the solid a

defined distance.
Cut Depth (Cut Mode set to Define Depth only) Sets
the cut’s projection distance.
Split Solid If on, no material is removed from the solid;
it is split into two or more segments.
Keep Profile If on, the original cutting profile remains
in the design.
To create a cut in a solid using an element

as the profile
1. Select the Cut Solid tool.

Cut Solid
2. (Optional) — To retain the cut portion, turn on Split Solid.
3. Identify the solid to cut.

4. Identify the cutting element.
An arrow(s) indicates the direction of the cut.
5. Accept to complete the cut.
Using a closed planar

element as a cutting
profile to create a cut
in a solid.
Top Left: Identify

cutting profile (2).
Top Right: Accept (3)
to create the cut.
Front views show

the solid and cutting
profile (left) and the
completed cut (right).

Cut Solid
Where open elements

are used as cutting
profiles, they must
extend at least to the
edge of the solid as
shown here in the
front view (bottom
left). Additionally,
the identification
point for the solid
(1) determines which
part of the solid is
retained.
When Split Solid is

on, the solid is split
into segments by the
cutting profile.

Fillet Edges
Key-in: CONSTRUCT CUT
Fillet Edges
(3D only) Used to fillet, or round, one or more edges of a solid,

projected surface, or a surface of revolution.
• After identifying the solid, as you move the screen pointer over
the solid the edge nearest the pointer highlights. A data point
selects the highlighted edge, which remains highlighted.
• You can enter a Reset to deselect an incorrect edge. Where
a number of edges have been selected, consecutive Resets
will deselect them in the reverse order (that is, the last edge
selected is the first edge deselected).
• Alternatively, you can deselect any highlighted edge
by selecting it again.
Tool Setting Effect

Radius Defines the radius of the fillet
Select If on, edges that are tangentially continuous
Tangent are selected and rounded in one operation.
Edges

Fillet Edges
To fillet one or more edges of a solid or

projected surface
1. Select the Fillet Edges tool.
2. In the Radius field, enter the required radius.
3. If required, turn on Select Tangent Edges.
4. Identify an edge to fillet.
The solid highlights, with the selected edge highlighted.
5. Accept to fillet the edge.
or
Identify further edges to be filleted.
6. Accept to fillet the edges.
Applying fillets to
edges of a solid
(Top) and a projected
surface (Bottom).
Left: Identify the
edges (1 and 2),
which highlight.
Accept (3) to fillet the
selected edges.

Chamfer Edges
Effect of “Select
Tangent Edges”
setting. Left: Off —
only the identified
section of the edge is
selected for filleting.
Right: On — the
identified section
plus all edges that
are tangentially
continuous are
selected for filleting.
Key-in: FILLET EDGES
Chamfer Edges
(3D only) Used to chamfer one or more edges of a solid, projected

surface, or a surface of revolution.
• After selecting, the solid, as you move the screen pointer over
the solid the edge nearest the pointer highlights. A data point
selects the highlighted edge, which remains highlighted.
• You can enter a Reset to deselect an incorrect edge. Where
a number of edges have been selected, consecutive Resets
will deselect them in the reverse order (that is, the last edge
selected is the first edge deselected).
Alternatively, you can deselect any highlighted edge
by selecting it again.

Chamfer Edges
Tool Setting Effect

Distance Sets the distances to trim back the
1/Distance 2 faces. If the Lock control is on, they are
constrained to the same value.
Lock control • If on (closed) Distance 1 and Distance
2 are the same value.
• If off (open) Distance 1 and Distance
2 can be different.
Select If on, edges that are tangentially continuous
Tangent are selected and rounded in one operation.
Edges
Flip Where Distance 1 and Distance 2 are different,
Direction reverses the direction of the chamfer and the
values that the faces are trimmed.
To chamfer one or more edges of a solid

1. Select the Chamfer Edges tool.
2. In the Distance 1 and Distance 2 fields, enter the required values.

3. If required, turn on Select Tangent Edges.
4. Identify an edge to chamfer.
The solid highlights, with the selected edge highlighted.
5. Accept to chamfer the edge.
or
Identify further edges to be chamfered.
6. Accept to chamfer the edges.

Chamfer Edges
Applying a chamfer
to an edge of a solid
(Top) and a projected
surface (Bottom).
Left: Identify the

edge (1), which
highlights.
Right: Accept to
chamfer the selected
edge (2).
Effect of “Select
Tangent Edges”
setting. Left: Off —
only the identified
section of the edge
is selected for
chamfering. Right:
On — the identified
section plus all edges
that are tangentially
continuous are
selected for
chamfering.

3D Utility tool box
To correct a chamfer that is constructed in

the wrong direction (that is, Distances 1 and
2 are applied to the wrong faces)
1. Undo the chamfer.
2. Turn on Flip Direction.
3. Reconstruct the chamfer.
Key-in: CHAMFER EDGES
3D Utility tool box
Tools in the 3D Utility tool box are used to:
• Relocate elements so their faces are aligned.

• Change the display of SmartSolids.
• Extract a face or edge from a solid.
• Intersect a solid or surface with a linear element.
To Select in the 3D Utility

tool box
Move an element and align a
selected face of it to the selected
face of a second element.
Align Faces (see page 7-131)
Change the display of
Change SmartSolid Display

(see page 7-135)

Align Faces
To Select in the 3D Utility

tool box
Extract a face, or edge, from
a solid.
Extract Face or Edge Geometry

(see page 7-137)
Find the intersection point
between a solid/surface and
a linear element.
Intersect Solid/Surface with
Curve (see page 7-138)
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DQUERY OFF | ON | TOGGLE
Align Faces
Used to relocate an element to align the selected face of the first

element to the selected face of a second element.
Tool Setting Effect

Method Sets the way that the planes of the
faces are selected.
Use AccuDraw—AccuDraw’s drawing plane is
used to define the orientation of the faces.
By 3 Points—The orientation of the planes

are defined by 3 points.

Align Faces
Tool Setting Effect

Use ACS for (Method set to By 3 Points only) Sets the
way that the orientation of the selected
face’s plane is calculated.
Neither—Orientation for both faces is
defined by 3 points.
Element—Orientation for the first element is

taken from the ACS. If no ACS is active, the
design file coordinate system is used.
Placement—Orientation for the placement

of the first element is taken from the
ACS. If no ACS is active, the design file
coordinate system is used.
Make Copy If on, a copy of the first element is used and
the original element is not manipulated.
Flip Lets you reverse the direction of the
Direction aligned element.
To align the faces of two elements using AccuDraw

1. Select the Align Faces tool.
2. Set Method to Use AccuDraw.
3. Identify the element to align.
The element highlights.
4. Move the pointer over the element to highlight the
required face and accept.
6. Move the pointer over the element to highlight the
required face and accept.
The first element is relocated with the selected faces
aligned. The first element is positioned symmetrically on
the face of the second element.

Align Faces
Aligning faces of
two elements using
AccuDraw.
Identify the first

element (1) and the
face to be aligned (2),
the second element
(3), and the face to
align with (4).
To align the faces of two elements without

using AccuDraw
1. Select the Align Faces tool.
2. Set Method to By 3 Points.
3. Set Use ACS for to Neither.
4. Identify the element to align.
The element highlights.
6. Define the “from” coordinate origin. This defines the origin

Align Faces
point for the element that is being aligned.

7. Define the “from” coordinate first axis point.
A red arrow appears, showing the direction of the first (x) axis.
8. Define the “from” coordinate second axis point.
Green and blue arrows appear, showing the direction of the second
(y) axis and the third (z) axis’ directions, respectively.
9. Define the “to” coordinate origin. This defines the origin
point for the relocation. The first element’s origin point
will be located at this point.
10. Define the “to” coordinate first axis point.
A red arrow appears, showing the direction of the first (x) axis.
11. Define the “to” coordinate second axis point.
Green and blue arrows appear, showing the direction of the second
(y) axis and the third (z) axis’ directions, respectively.
Simultaneously, the first element is relocated with its defined
axes aligning exactly with those of the second element.

Aligning faces of two

elements
Identify and accept

the first element
(1,2).
Define the “from”

coordinate origin
(3), first axis point
(4) and second axis
point (5).
Define the “to”

coordinate origin
(6), first axis point
(7) and second axis
point (8).
Key-in: ALIGNFACE
(3D only) Used to change the number of Surface Rule Lines used to
display SmartSolids and SmartSurfaces, and to change the display
from Wireframe mode to Surface mode and vice-versa. This is
useful where the design is to be rendered with earlier versions of

MicroStation. In these instances the SmartSolid display must be set

to Surface Mode for hidden line removal and the rendering modes to
function correctly (with the earlier MicroStation versions).
Tool Setting Effect

Display Sets the display mode for SmartSolids
and SmartSurfaces:
Surfaces—Required only if design is to be
rendered with earlier versions of MicroStation.
Wireframe—The default display mode,

which should be used unless the design
is to be rendered with an earlier version
of MicroStation.
Surface Rule Sets the number of rule lines that represent a
Lines full 360 of curvature of a curved surface.
To change the SmartSolid display settings

of an element
1. Select the Change SmartSolid Display tool.
2. From the Display option menu, choose the display mode required.
3. Optionally, change the Surface Rule Lines setting.
5. Accept.

Changing the SmartSolid display from Wireframe Mode to Surface

Mode (with Surface Rule Lines set at 5). Left: Identify the solid (1).
Center: Accept to effect the change (2). Right: The same solid displayed
in surface mode with Surface Rule Lines increased from 5 to 10.
Key-in: CHANGE BREP DISPLAY
(3D only) Used to extract a face or edge from a solid. Tool

settings let you define the symbology (level, color, weight, and
style) of the extracted face or edge.
Tool Setting Effect

Extract Sets the type of element to be extracted:
Faces—Extract selected faces from the solid.
Edges—Extract selected edges from the solid.

Level Defines the level on which the extracted
element is placed.
Color Defines the color of the extracted element.

Intersect Solid/Surface with Curve
Tool Setting Effect

Weight Defines the line weight of the extracted
element.
Style Defines the line style of the extracted element.
To extract a face from a solid

1. Select the Extract Face or Edge Geometry tool.
2. If required, turn on and set symbology settings.

4. Identify one or more faces on the solid.
5. Accept.
Key-in: EXTRACT FACE
(3D only). Used to find the intersection point between a

solid/surface and a linear element (curve).

Tool Setting Effect

Intersection Locates the intersection point of the curve
Points with the solid/surface.
Normals at Displays the surface normal at the point of
Intersections intersection of the curve with the solid/surface.
To construct points and surface normals at the

intersection of a line with a solid
1. Select the Intersect Solid/Surface with Curve tool.
2. Turn on Intersection Points and Normals at Intersections.

4. Identify the line.
5. Accept.
Constructing points
and surface normals
at the intersection of
a line with a solid.

Surface Modeling tool frame
Above: Identify the

solid (1) and the line
(2).
Below: Accept to
construct the points
and surface normals.
Key-in: INTERSECT CURVE SURFACE
Surface Modeling tool frame

The Surface Modeling tool frame provides access to all of the
“child” 3D surface modeling tool boxes.

Create Surfaces tool box
To Use tools in the

Place or construct a free-form Create Surfaces tool box
B-spline surface. (see page 7-141)
or
Construct a skin surface; or a surface by
section, network, edges, or offset.
or
Construct a surface by sweeping
an element along two traces or
along a helical curve.
Trim, extend, stitch, split, or Modify Surfaces tool box
punch surfaces. (see page 7-159)
or
Change B-spline specific element
attributes.
or
Remove a trim boundary from a surface.
Construct a fillet or blend between Fillet Surfaces tool box
surfaces. (see page 7-177)
Evaluate surfaces. 3D Queries tool box

(see page 7-182)
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX SURFACE OFF | ON | TOGGLE

The tools in the Create Surfaces tool box are used to place or construct
a free-form, helical, or offset surface, and to construct a surface by
cross-sections, edges, skin, or by sweeping along two traces.

To Select in Create Surfaces

tool box
Construct a B-spline surface
that is transformed between
section elements, or elements
of a network. Construct Surface by Section or
Network (see page 7-143)
Construct a B-spline surface that
contains selected elements
as edges.
Construct Surface by Edges
(see page 7-145)
Place or construct a free-form
B-spline surface.
Place Free-form Surface

by transforming one element
(section) to a second element
(section) as it is projected along Construct Skin Surface (see
a linear element (the trace). page 7-151)
Create a B-spline surface by

sweeping one or two section
profile curves along two
trace curves. Sweep Along Two Traces
(see page 7-152)
Create a helical-shaped B-spline
surface by sweeping a section
profile curve along a pre-defined
helix curve. Construct Helical Surface
(see page 7-155)
Construct a B-spline surface that
is offset from another surface.
Construct Offset Surface

(see page 7-158)
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DFREEFORM OFF | ON | TOGGLE

Construct Surface by Section or Network
(3D only) Used to construct a B-spline surface that is transformed

between section elements, or elements of a network.
All section elements must be in the same direction to avoid the resulting
surface from being “twisted”. Before using Construct Surface by Section
or Network, use the Change Element Direction (see page 6-106) tool
in the Modify Curves tool box to change the sections’ directions and
start points so they are in a similar position to each other. As a final
check, visual aids display each element’s direction as it is selected.
Tool Setting Effect

Define By Sets how the surface is constructed.
Section—Transformed between sections (lines,
line strings, arcs, ellipses, complex chains,
complex shapes, or B-spline curves). The
order in the u-direction is 4. The order in the
v-direction is determined by the sections.
Network—A Gordon surface is constructed,

interpolating a network of elements.
Each element in the network’s u-direction
should intersect all elements in its
v-direction, and vice-versa.
Apply If off, the continuities of the constructed
Smoothing surface are those of the input cross-sections.
If on, each input cross-section is approximated
by a smooth B-spline curve within the
specified Tolerance value, and the surface is
created from the approximation curves.

To construct a B-spline surface by cross-sections

1. Select the Construct Surface by Section or Network tool.
2. In the tool settings window, set Define By to Section.
3. Identify the sections in the order that the transformation is
to follow. (You can Reset to reject a section.)
4. Accept to display the B-spline surface.
5. Accept the B-spline surface.
Top Left: Identify

the section elements
(1,2,3, and 4).
Arrows display to
verify the element
direction.
Top Right: Accept to

display the B-spline
surface (5) and
accept again to create
the surface (6).
With Apply
Smoothing
turned on, each
section element is
approximated by a
B-spline curve, with
the resulting surface
being smoother.

To construct a surface that interpolates

a network of elements
1. Select the Construct Surface by Section or Network tool.
2. In the tool settings window, set Define By to Network.
3. Identify the first curve in the u-direction.
4. Identify the other curves in the u-direction.
5. Accept the curves.
6. Identify the first curve in the v-direction.
7. Identify the other curves in the v-direction.
8. Accept the curves.
Key-in: CONSTRUCT SURFACE CROSSSECTION
Each element (curve) in the u-direction must intersect each

element (curve) in the v-direction of the network.
(3D only) Used to construct a B-spline surface that has elements

(lines, line strings, shapes, arcs, curves, B-spline curves, complex
chains, and complex shapes) as edges. Where the number of edges is
three to six inclusive, they must meet at their endpoints.
• If there are two edges, a ruled surface, connecting either the closest
or the farthest ends, is constructed between the boundaries.
• If there are three edges, the tool settings let you choose
between a Coons patch, or an n-sided patch.
• If there are four edges, a bi-cubically blended Coons patch is created.
• If there are five or six edges, then three five or six surfaces,
respectively, are joined to form one patch.

Tool Setting Effect

Method For Lets you choose how the surface is
3 Edges constructed from 3 edges:
Degenerate Coons Patch
N-sided Patch
To construct a surface by edges

1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the edges.
2. Select the Construct Surface by Edges tool.
Alternative method — To construct a

surface by edges
1. Select the Construct Surface by Edges tool.
2. Identify the first edge.
3. Identify the other edge(s).
4. Enter a data point to display the surface.
Key-in: CONSTRUCT SURFACE EDGE
If there are two edges, Resetting during the final step causes
an alternative surface to be displayed. This surface then
can be accepted or rejected.
(3D only) Used to place or construct a free-form B-spline surface.

Method Surface is defined as follows

Define Poles Poles (vertices) of the control net are
defined by data points or vertices of
elements. The number of poles in the u-
and v-direction must be greater than or
equal to the order in that direction.
Through Points Surface passes through the points
defined by the data points or vertices
of elements and is interpolated at each
point. One pole is defined for each data
point, the number of which must be
greater than or equal to the Order.
L[east]- The surface is approximated based on
Square[s] By the points defined by the data points or
Tol[erance] the vertices of the identified line string
or shape. The maximum deviation
of the input points from the surface
is adjustable using the Tolerance
setting. After the approximation
surface is created, the maximum
deviation and the mean deviation are
displayed in the status field.
L[east]- The sum of the squares of the distances
Square[s] By from the data points or vertices of
Num[ber] elements to corresponding points on the
surface is minimized. The control net
has the active number of Poles in the u-
and v-direction. If the maximum error
exceeds the Tolerance, the maximum
error is displayed in the status bar. 1
Catmull-Rom Fourth-order NURBS surface that
is interpolated to closely resemble
the overall shape defined by the
data points entered or vertices of
the selected line strings.
1 The Tolerance is set in the B-splines dialog box (Element > B-splines (see
Chapter 4, “Element Menu,” in the on-line Reference Guide).

Tool Setting Effect

Method Sets how the surface is generated (see
large table above).
Define By Sets how the surface is created.
Placement—the surface is placed by
entering data points.
Construction—the surface is constructed

based on the vertices of line strings or shapes.
Closure Sets whether surface is Open or Closed
in the u- or v-direction.
Order The order of the equation that defines the
surface in the u- or v-direction (2-15).
Poles The number of poles in the u- or v-direction,
if Method is Least Squares (3–101).
Tolerance Sets the fitting or approximation tolerance,
when Method is set to L-Square By Tol. The
minimum distance from any one of the input
data points to the surface is less than this
value. The minimum distance is computed
by projecting a point to the surface.
To place a free-form surface with data points

1. Select Place Free-form Surface tool.
2. Set Define By to Placement.
3. Enter a series of data points to define the first row
(in the u-direction).

Define Poles One of the control net’s poles.


Through Points A point through which the
surface must pass.
L-Square By One of a set of points that
Tol or L-Square is approximated.
By Num
4. Reset to complete the first row.

The number of data points in the first row must be greater
than or equal to the Order in the u-direction.
5. Enter more data points to define other rows. After the same
number of data points as in the first row is entered, the row
is completed and a new row is started.
6. Reset to complete the definition.
If at least as many rows as the Order in the v-direction are
completely defined, a B-spline surface is generated.
Placing a free-form
surface by entering
data points (Method
set to Define Poles).
A Reset was entered
after data points 4
and 12.

To construct a free-form surface based on

an element’s vertices
1. Select the Place Free-form Surface tool.
2. Set Define By to Construction.
3. Identify the elements in the sequence that the B-spline
surface is to follow.
Alternative method — To construct a free-form

surface based on an element’s vertices
1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the elements in the
sequence that the B-spline surface is to follow.
2. Select the Place Free-form Surface tool.
Left: Identify the

elements, in the
sequence that the
B-spline surface is to
follow (points 1 to 4).
create the B-spline
surface.

Construct Skin Surface

B-spline surface.
Key-in: PLACE SURFACE
Construct Skin Surface
(3D only) Used to construct a B-spline surface by transforming

two elements (sections) along another element (the trace). The
sections and trace can be lines, line strings, arcs, ellipses, complex
chains, complex shapes, or B-spline curves.
Tool Setting Effect

Orthogonal If on, each section is rotated to be
perpendicular to the trace.
To construct a B-spline surface by skin

1. Place the section elements in their correct position (orientation

Sweep Along Two Traces
and location) on the trace element.

2. Select the Construct Skin Surface tool.
3. Identify the trace.
4. Identify the first section.
5. Identify the second section.
6. Enter a data point to display the B-spline surface.
Key-in: CONSTRUCT SURFACE SWEEP
(3D only) Used to create a B-spline surface by sweeping one or

two section profile curves along two trace curves.
Tool Setting Effect

Method Sets the number of section profile curves.
Sweep One Along Two—one section
profile curve.
Sweep Two Along Two—two section

profile curves.

Tool Setting Effect

Scale To If on, the section profile curve is scaled as it
Second Trace sweeps along the two trace curves. If off, the
second trace curve simply serves to control
orientation. This option is enabled only if
Method is set to Sweep One Along Two.
Scale Section If on, the section profile curve is also scaled in
Height the height direction. This option is enabled
only if Method is set to Sweep One Along
Two and Scale To Second Trace is on.
To sweep a section profile curve(s) along

two trace curves
1. Select the Sweep Along Two Traces tool.
2. Identify the first trace curve.
3. Identify the second trace curve.
4. Identify the first (or only) section profile curve.
5. If Method is set to Sweep Two Along Two, identify the
second section profile curve.
6. Accept.
The surface is generated and displayed.

Sweep One Along

Two: Identify the
first (1) and second
(2) trace curves
followed by the
profile curve (3).
Enter a data point (4)
to view the surface.
Accept/Reject the
surface.
Left: With Scale to

Second Trace turned
off, the profile curve
is swept along the
first trace.
Center: With Scale

to Second Trace
turned on, the profile
(width) is scaled to
the second trace, as
it is swept along the
first trace.
Right: With Scale

Section Height
turned on, both the
width and the height
of the profile are
scaled as it is swept
along the first trace.

Construct Helical Surface
Sweep Two Along

Two: Identify the
first (1) and second
(2) trace, followed
by the first (3) and
second (4) profile
curves. Enter a
data point (5) to
view the surface.
Accept/Reject the
surface.
The surface is scaled

to the second trace
as it is swept along
the first. At the same
time it transitions
from the first profile
to the second.
Key-in: CONSTRUCT SURFACE TRACE

(3D only) Used to construct a helical-shaped B-spline surface by

sweeping a section profile curve along a pre-defined helix curve. The
section profile curve needs to be placed at one end of the helix curve.
Before using this tool, you must also place a line that represents the
axis direction of the helix curve; only the direction of the line matters.
Tool Setting Effect

Scale Section Sets the factor by which the section profile
in X curve is scaled as it sweeps along the helix
curve in the direction from the starting
point of the helix curve to its center point
— that is, the radius direction.
Scale Section Sets the factor by which the section profile
in Y curve is scaled as it sweeps along the helix
curve in the direction of the helix axis —
that is, the height direction.
Spin Angle Sets the angle at which the profile is spun
as it sweeps along the helix curve.
To construct a helical-shaped B-spline surface

1. Select the Construct Helical Surface tool.
2. Identify the trace helix curve.
3. Identify the section profile curve.
4. Identify the line that represents the axis direction of the helix curve.
5. Accept.
The surface is generated and displayed.

Left: Identify the

helix (1) the profile
(2) and a line
defining the direction
of the helix axis (3).
Right: Accept
(4) to view the
helical surface.
Accept/Reject the
surface.

helical surface.
Key-in: CONSTRUCT SURFACE HELICAL
Even though this tool is designed for helical sweeping situations,

the trace curve does not have to be a helix curve. It can be

considered as a more generalized rigid sweep tool.
(3D only) Used to construct a B-spline surface by offsetting an

extruded surface, surface of revolution or a B-spline surface.
Tool Setting Effect

Distance If on, sets the offset distance in the
surface normal direction.
To construct an offset surface

1. Select the Construct Offset Surface tool.
Surface normals display, indicating the direction and distance of
the offset surface. If distance is on, their length is fixed.
If Distance is off, this data point defines the distance
to offset the surface.

Modify Surfaces tool box
If Distance is on, this data point defines the direction only.
Key-in: CONSTRUCT SURFACE OFFSET

The tools in the Modify Surfaces tool box are used to create new
surfaces from the union, intersection, or difference between
surfaces; to trim, extend, stitch, split, punch, or extrude surfaces;
or to change B-spline specific attributes.
To Select in the Modify Surfaces

tool box
Trim two elements to their
common intersection.
Construct Trim (see page 7-161)

Punch a hole in a surface, or
to project a B-spline curve
onto a surface.
Project Trim (see page 7-164)
Switch between surface types,
or add caps to extrusions and
surfaces of revolution.
Convert 3D (see page 7-167)
To stitch two surfaces together
to form a single surface.
Construct Stitch (see page

7-168)

To Select in the Modify Surfaces

tool box
Change the normal direction
of a surface element.
Change Normal Direction

(see page 7-169)
Reverse the sense of the
boundaries of a B-spline surface.
or
Remove one or all boundaries Modify Trim Boundary (see
(holes) from a B-spline surface. page 7-170)
Change a surface’s
B-spline-specific attributes
to the active B-spline settings.
Change to Active Surface
Settings (see page 7-172)
Split, or break, an element into
two separate surfaces.
Split Surface (see page 7-173)

extension to an element.
Extend Surface (see page 7-174)

Smooth a B-spline surface by
reducing its number of control
points (poles).
Reduce Surface Poles (see
page 7-175)
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DMODSURF OFF | ON | TOGGLE

Construct Trim
Construct Trim
(3D only) Used to do the following:
• Trim two elements to their common intersection

• Trim one element to its intersection with a second.
• Impose boundaries onto the first selected element, or both
elements, at their common intersection.
• Construct a curve along the common intersection
of the two elements.
When using this tool, before accepting the trim, you can
adjust the various tool settings to suit.
When selecting elements for trimming, the portion of the element that
is identified is retained. Before accepting the trim, you can turn on Flip
1st, or Flip 2nd, for the first or second selected element respectively.
These toggles reverse the portion that is retained and are useful if
you inadvertently select the wrong portion to be retained.
Tool Setting Effect
Intersection If on, a curve is constructed along the common

Curve intersection of the surfaces.
Trim 1st The first surface identified is trimmed to its
Surface intersection with the second element.

Construct Trim
Tool Setting Effect

Trim 2nd The second surface identified is trimmed to
Surface its intersection with the first element.
Flip 1st Sets which portion of the 1st selected
element is retained after trimming. If on,
the selected portion is deleted; if off, the
selected portion is retained.
Flip 2nd Sets which portion of the 2nd selected
element is retained after trimming. If on,
the selected portion is deleted; if off, the
selected portion is retained.
Copy 1st If on a copy is made of the first selected
element, and the original element is
retained in the design.
Copy 2nd If on a copy is made of the first selected
element, and the original element is
retained in the design.
To trim two elements to their common intersection

1. Select the Construct Trim tool.
This data point identifies the portion of the surface to be trimmed.
If Flip 1st is off, then the identified portion is kept, and vice versa.
This data point identifies the portion of the surface to be trimmed.
If Flip 2nd is off, then the identified portion is kept, and vice versa.
4. Accept to view the trim.
5. Accept to trim the elements.

Construct Trim
Trimming two
elements to at their
common intersection
point.
Top Left: Identify the

two surfaces (1 and
2).
Top Right: Accept to

view the trim (3) and
accept to complete
the trim (4).
Bottom: Front views

showing the surfaces
before (left) and after
(right) trimming.
With Flip 1st. turned

on, the opposite
portion of the first
surface is retained
after trimming.

Project Trim
Key-in: CONSTRUCT TRIM
Project Trim
(3D only) The Project Trim tool is used to:
• Punch a hole in a surface by projecting a cutting profile.

• Project a B-spline curve onto a surface.
Tool Setting Effect

Direction Sets the direction of the projection.
Orthogonal—Projection is taken normal
to the cutting profile.
View—Projection is taken normal to

the active view.
Vector—Direction of projection is determined

by two points.
Normal to Surface—Projection is taken normal

to the plane of the surface being trimmed.

Project Trim
Tool Setting Effect

Output Mode Sets the method used to trim the surface.
Trim Surface— The region either inside
or outside the projected curve is trimmed
away. The identified portion of the
surface is retained.
Split Surface—The surface is divided into two

regions, one inside the projected profile and
the other outside the projected profile.
Project Curve—Projects a B-spline curve on

the surface. No boundary is created.
Impose Onto—The profile curve is imposed

onto the surface as a boundary.
Keep Profile If on, the profile curve is retained.
To punch a hole in a surface

1. Select the Project Trim tool.
2. Identify the surface to punch, on a portion of the surface that
is to remain after the punching operation.
3. Identify the curve to project.
4. Accept to create hole.

Project Trim
Trimming a surface
(orthogonal to
profile).
Left: Identify the

surface anywhere in
the region that is to
be retained (1) and
the cutting profile (2).

create the hole.
Alternative method — To punch a hole in a surface

1. Select the Project Trim tool.
2. Identify the surface to punch, on a portion of the surface that
is to remain after the punching operation.
3. Identify the curve to project.
4. If Project Along is set to Vector, enter first point to

Convert 3D
define vector direction.

5. Enter second point to define vector direction and create hole.
Key-in: PROJECT TRIM
Convert 3D
(3D only) Used to convert a surface element to a B-spline surface,

capped solid, or simple surface (Type 18).
Tool Setting Effect

Convert To Sets how the element is converted.
Solid—Converts the element to a capped solid.
Surface—Converts the element to a

simple surface.

Construct Stitch
To convert a surface element to a capped solid

1. Select the Convert 3D tool.
2. Turn on Convert To Solid by Capping.
Key-in: CONVERT 3D
Construct Stitch
(3D only) Used to stitch two open surfaces (extruded surfaces,

surfaces of revolution, B-spline surfaces or shapes) into one
surface, along their abutting edges.
To stitch two surfaces together

1. Select the Construct Stitch tool.
2. Identify the first surface to be stitched.
3. Identify the second surface to be stitched.
4. Accept to create the stitched surface.

Left: Identify the first

and second surfaces
(1 and 2). Right:
Accept to create the
stitched surface (3).
Key-in: CONSTRUCT STITCH
(3D only) Used to change the surface normal direction for a surface
(cone, extruded surface, surface of revolution, or B-spline surface).
Used in conjunction with other tools in the Modify Surfaces tool

box to control the way that elements are treated.

Modify Trim Boundary
To change a surface’s normal direction

1. Select the Change Normal Direction tool.
The surface normals display.
3. Accept to change the direction of the surface normals.
Alternative method — To change a surface’s

normal direction
1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the surface(s).
2. Select the Change Normal Direction tool.
The normal direction is changed for the selected surface(s).
Key-in: CHANGE NORMAL
(3D only) Used to:
• Reverse the sense of the boundaries of a B-spline surface —

that is, convert holes to surfaces and vice-versa.
• Remove one or more boundaries (holes) from a B-spline surface.

Tool Setting Effect

Trim Sets the boundary area.
Boundary
Reverse—Reverse the sense of the boundaries.
Remove All—Remove all boundaries.
Remove One—Remove one boundary.
To change a B-spline surface boundary

1. Select the Modify Trim Boundary tool.
2. In the tool settings window, set Trim Boundary to Reverse.
To remove a B-spline surface boundary

1. Select the Modify Trim Boundary tool.
2. In the tool settings window, set Trim Boundary to
Remove All or Remove One.
4. If Trim Boundary is set to Remove One, identify the
boundary to remove.
5. Accept the removal.
Key-in: MODIFY TRIM BOUNDARY
Modify Trim Boundary is for use with B-spline surfaces only and

does not apply to SmartSolids/SmartSurfaces.
(3D only) Used to change a B-spline surface’s B-spline attributes

to the active B-spline settings, as follows:
Tool Setting Effect

Polygon If on, changes the control net’s display:
Invisible—the control net is hidden.
Visible—the control net is displayed.

Surface If on, changes the surface’s display:
Invisible—the surface is hidden.
Visible—the surface is displayed.

Closure If on in the u- or v-direction, sets the surface
to Open or Closed in that direction(s).
The appearance is not changed, only the
internal representation.

Split Surface
Tool Setting Effect

Order If on in the u- or v-direction, sets the
order in that direction.
Rules If on in the u- or v-direction, sets the number
of rule lines in that direction.
Preserve (Order on only) Preserves the original shape
Shape of the surface when the order is changed.
To change B-spline attributes of a surface

1. Select the Change to Active Surface Settings tool.
2. Set the tool settings as desired.
4. Accept the changes.
Key-in: CHANGE SURFACE SETTINGS
Split Surface
(3D only) Used to separate a surface (cone, extruded surface,

surface of revolution, or B-spline surface) into two B-spline
surfaces along its rule lines.

Extend Surface
To split a surface
1. Select the Split Surface tool.
3. Select the first end point of splitting.
4. (Optional) — Reset to change the direction of splitting.
5. Select the second end point of splitting to complete the procedure.
Key-in: SPLIT SURFACE
Extend Surface
(3D only) Used to extend a surface (cone, extruded surface, surface

of revolution, or B-spline surface) along one of its edges.
Tool Setting Effect

Tangential If on, extension is tangent continuous
at the joint of extension
By Angle If on, extension is at an angle specified
in the Angle field.
Distance Sets the distance of the extension.

Reduce Surface Poles
Tool Setting Effect

Angle (By Angle on only) Sets the angle at which
the extension is made. An angle of 0
creates a tangential extension.
Make Copy The original surface is retained.
To extend a surface
1. Extend Surface tool.
2. Identify the surface near the edge to be extended.
3. Adjust the settings if necessary.
4. Accept the extension.
Key-in: EXTEND SURFACE
(3D only) Used to smooth a B-spline surface by reducing its

number of control points (poles). The smaller the Tolerance
setting, the fewer control points removed.

Tool Setting Effect

Make Copy If on, the original surface is not deleted upon
creation of the replacement surface.
Tolerance Sets the maximum distance allowed between
the replacement surface and the original
surface. To make the replacement surface
appear identical to the original, even though
its complexity is reduced, experiment with
different Tolerance values.
To reduce the number of poles in a B-spline surface

1. Select the Reduce Surface Poles tool.
2. Identify a B-spline surface.
3. Accept the reduction in the number of poles.
The number of control points reduced in both parametric U
and V directions are displayed in the status field.
Identify a B-spline
surface (1).
Accept the reduction

in the number of
poles (2) to modify
the surface.

Fillet Surfaces tool box
The number of
control points
reduced in the U
and V directions
are displayed in
the status field.
Key-in: CONSTRUCT SURFACE REDUCE
To check the number of control points in a B-spline surface,

use the Analyze Element tool in the Primary tool box or choose
Information from the Element menu.
Fillet Surfaces tool box

The tools in the Fillet Surfaces tool box are used to create fillets
between surfaces, and to join surfaces by blending.
To Select in the Fillet Surfaces

tool box
Construct a fillet of constant
radius between two surfaces.
Fillet Surfaces (see page 7-178)

Construct a blend surface
from two surfaces.
Blend Surfaces (see page 7-179)

Construct a blend surface
between two B-spline surfaces
along their rail curves.
Blend Surface Between Rail
Curves (see page 7-181)

Fillet Surfaces
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DFILLET OFF | ON | TOGGLE
Fillet Surfaces
(3D only) Used to create a 3D fillet between two surfaces (shapes,

cones, extruded surfaces, surfaces of revolution, or B-spline
surfaces) by sweeping an arc of constant radius along the common
intersection curve — commonly referred to as a constant radius
rolling ball fillet. The fillet is created in the area pointed to
by the surface normals of both surfaces.
Tool Setting Effect

Truncate Defines which surface(s) are to be truncated:
Both—Both surfaces are trimmed.
Single—The first surface identified

is trimmed.
None—Neither surface is trimmed.

Radius Sets the fillet’s radius.
To place a fillet between two surfaces

1. (Optional) — Use the Change Normal Direction tool to set
the normal directions for both surfaces.
2. Select the Fillet Surfaces tool.

Blend Surfaces
3. From the Truncate option menu, choose a truncating option.

4. In the Radius field, key in the required radius.
5. Identify the first surface.
The surface normal orientation displays.
6. Identify the second surface.
The surface normal orientation displays.
7. Accept to view the fillet.
The fillet displays.
8. Accept to create the fillet.
Creating a fillet
between two surfaces.
Left: Identify the two

surfaces (1 and 2).

view the fillet, then
accept (4) to create
the fillet.
Key-in: BLEND SURFACES
Blend Surfaces
(3D only) Used to construct a blend between two elements (extruded

surfaces, surfaces of revolution, cones, or B-spline surfaces) with a

Blend Surfaces
specified order of continuity. The resulting B-spline surface consists of

the trimmed original elements and a transition connecting them.
The direction of the first and last tangents of the transition is

the direction of the tangents of the original elements at their
trimmed edges. The relative magnitudes of these tangents can
be adjusted to achieve the desired blend.
Tool Setting Effect

Continuity Sets the order of continuity — Position,
Tangent, or Curvature.
Factor 1 Sets the magnitude of the initial tangent.
Factor 2 Sets the magnitude of the final tangent.

Blend Surface Between Rail Curves
To construct a blend between two surfaces

1. Select the Blend Surfaces tool.
2. Identify the point on the first element where the blend is to start.
3. Identify the edge of the first element to trim.
4. Identify the point on the second element where the blend is to end.
5. Identify the edge of the second element to trim.
6. (Optional) — Adjust the settings to achieve a satisfactory blend.
7. Accept the blend.
Key-in: BLEND SURFACE
Blend Surface Between Rail Curves
(3D only) Used to construct a blending B-spline surface between

two surfaces (extruded surfaces, surfaces of revolution, cones,
or B-spline surfaces) along their rail curves. A rail curve is an
element (line, arc, line string, ellipse, complex shape, complex
chain, or B-spline curve) lying on the surface.4
4 Rail curves can be created with the Extract Surface Rule Lines tool in the Create Curves tool
box, the Extract Face or Edge Geometry (see page 7-137) tool in the 3D Utility tool box, or with
the Project Trim (see page 7-164) tool, with Project Curve on, in the Modify Surfaces tool box.

3D Queries tool box
Tool Setting Effect

Blend Type Sets the type of blend
Round—smooth circular blend.
Chamfer—chamfer blend.
Tolerance Determines the number of (sampled) points
used to create the blend.
To construct a blending surface between two

B-spline surfaces along their rail curves
1. Select the Blend Surface Between Rail Curves tool.
2. Identify the first B-spline surface.
3. Identify the first rail curve.
4. Identify the second rail curve.
5. Enter a data point to display the blending surface.
6. Accept the blending surface.
Key-in: BLEND RAILS
If a rail curve is closed, use the Change Element Direction (see page
6-106) tool in the Modify Curves tool box to re-orient the curve to
match the direction and starting point of the other rail curve.
3D Queries tool box

Tools in the 3D Queries tool box are used to extract curves
from B-spline surfaces.

Evaluate Surface
To Select in the 3D Queries

tool box
Graphically and numerically
evaluate the attributes of
a B-spline surface at given
locations on the surface. Evaluate Surface (see page
7-183)
Visualize the curvature of a
curve or Gaussian curvature
of a surface.
Analyze Curvature
Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX EXTRACT OFF | ON | TOGGLE
Evaluate Surface
(3D only) Used to graphically and numerically evaluate attributes

of a B-spline surface, other than order, poles, and knots, at given
locations on the surface. There are four ways to define locations
on a surface, and two output options.
The attributes that can be computed are points, tangents, and

normal directions. Computed attributes can be used as reference
points or reference lines for other purposes.

Evaluate Surface
Tool Setting Effect

Attribute(s) Sets the method used to output the
Output By computed attributes:
Display Only
Save In File—The attributes are saved in the

active design file with the same graphic group
number for easy manipulation.
Location(s) Sets the manner in which the locations on
Input By the surface are defined:
Enter Data Point—interactively define a single
location on the surface.
Parameter—using the Parameter Value U and V

settings. The values, which must be in the range
0–1, specify the location from the domain to map
to the displayed object. Within MicroStation,
the domain is from 0.0 to 1.0.
Dist[ance] Along Curve—using the Dist From

Start(%) U and V settings. The values are each a
percentage of the total length of the u or v curve on
the surface. For example, to extract the tangent
direction of a surface at its middle point, set Dist.
From Start(%) U and V each to 50.
Point Array option—using the Number of Points

U and V settings. The values are the number of
evenly spaced locations on the u and v curves,
respectively. For example, to evaluate at 200 evenly
spaced locations on the surface, set Number of
Points U to 10 and Number of Points V to 20.
Tangent Plot Sets the scale factor applied to the magnitude
Scale display. If set to 1.0, the computed tangents
will be the true derivative vector — that is, the
tangent direction with the magnitude.
Normal Plot Sets the scale factor applied to the perpendicular
Scale line segments in Normal output. If set to 1.0,
the true normal vector is displayed — that is,
the direction plus its true magnitude.

Evaluate Surface
Tool Setting Effect

Parameter Sets the parameter values applicable to the
Value U/V Parameter option for defining locations on the
surface; see Location(s) Input By above.
Dist[ance] Sets the distance values applicable to the Dist.
From Along Curve option for defining locations on the
Start(%) U/V surface; see Location(s) Input By above.
Number of Sets the numeric values applicable to the Point
Points U/V Array option for defining locations on the surface;
see Location(s) Input By above.
[Compute] If on, the points on the surface at which evaluation
Points is performed are displayed in the output.

Evaluate Surface
Tool Setting Effect

[Compute] If on, the surface’s tangents are computed. In
Tangents the context of this tool’s operation, a tangent is
computed as the partial derivatives of the surface
in both parametric u and v directions.
[Compute] If on, the surface’s normal directions are computed.

Normal

Using Cells in 3D
To evaluate a B-spline surface

1. Select the Evaluate Surface tool.
If Location(s) Input By is set to Enter Data Point, this data point
also determines the location on the surface at which to evaluate.
The surface is evaluated, and the desired attributes
are computed and output.
Key-in: EVALUATE SURFACE
This tool can also be used to evaluate 3D primitive surfaces.
Using Cells in 3D
Cells are used in 3D design in a manner similar to 2D (see Using Cells
on page 4-1). 3D-specific details are covered in this section.
You can attach a 2D cell library to a 3D design, but not vice-versa.
Creating 3D cells
The procedure for creating a cell in 3D is similar to that in 2D (see
Creating and Editing Cells on page 4-6), with these differences:
• 3D cells must be saved in a 3D cell library.

• In 3D, the cell retains the orientation in which it was created.
For example, a cell created in a Top view is always placed as
though it is a Top view, regardless of the orientation of the view in
which it is placed. Normally, cells should be created in one of the
Orthogonal views (see page 7-6) to simplify future placement.
• 3D cells are created in a volume determined by the fence
area and the view’s Display Depth.
It’s a good idea to create the cell on a level(s) of its own.

Before adding the cell to the cell library, the view should be
fitted to minimize the Display Depth.

Patterning in 3D
Patterning in 3D
In 3D, any element that is closed, planar, and solid can be
patterned. Hole elements on the same level are not patterned if
they are on the same plane as the solid element.
The Active Pattern Angle sets the angle of the pattern in the view
in which the element is identified. If the element is parallel to the
view, the actual pattern angle and the apparent angle are the same.
Therefore, it is usually preferable, although not necessary, to identify
the element to pattern in a view that is parallel to the element.

Index
3D ACCUDRAW SETTINGS CONTEXTSENS
AccuDraw’s drawing plane in . . . . . . . . 7–55 ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–34
creating cells in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–187 ACCUDRAW SETTINGS INDEXTOL . . . 2–31
data points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–60 ACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–61, 6–125
drawing in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–54 Active Angle field
manipulating and modifying elements popup calculator for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–26
in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–69 ACTIVE ANGLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–96
panning in views in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10 ACTIVE CELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
placing elements in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–54 Active Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13
selecting elements in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–70 Active Color Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13
tentative points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–60 Active Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4, 7–54
using the fence in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–71 set by key-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–21
3D and B-splines tool frame . . . . . . . . . . 7–140 set by keying in distance to move . . . . . 7–21
3D Queries tool box set graphically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
Evaluate Surface tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–183 Active Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
tool summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–182 Active Line Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17
3D View Control Active Line Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15
Change View Perspective . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15 ACTIVE MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–98
Navigate Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–35 Active Point
Show Active Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22 set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–64
settings group component . . . . . . . . . . . 1–83
A ACTIVE RCELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
AC= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14 Active Scale field, popup calculator for . . . 2–26
AccuDraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13 ACTIVE STYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19
3D operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–55 ACTIVE TERMINATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21
ACS and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–65 ACTIVE TEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–72
activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17 ACTIVE TOLERANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–96
compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–18, 2–45 ACTIVE TSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21
deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–18 ACTIVE UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–96
drawing plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–21 ACTIVE ZDEPTH ABSOLUTE . . . . . . . . 7–21
keyboard shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–34, 2–58 ACTIVE ZDEPTH RELATIVE . . . . . . . . . 7–21
Place Arc and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–52 Add to Graphic Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–20
Place Block and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–53 Angle
Place Circle and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–51 between lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–74
Place Ellipse and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–53 AR= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
Place SmartLine and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–54 Arc
popup calculator for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–26 by endpoint, center and sweep angle . . 1–75
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–23 elliptical (180 sweep angle) . . . . . . . . . 1–77
tolerance shortcut in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–31 elliptical (90 sweep angle) . . . . . . . . . . 1–78
unit roundoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–43 extend or shorten to intersection . . . . . 3–102
window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–22 thru 3–103
ACCUDRAW BUMP TOOLSETTING . . . 2–58 modify angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–80
MicroStation/J User’s Guide i–1

Index
modify axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–81 align with view coordinates . . . . . . . . . 6–127
modify radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–79 attach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–67, 6–130
placement with AccuDraw . . . . . . . . . . . 2–52 by data points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–126
semi-circular segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–56 cylindrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–63
tangent segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–55 define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–122, 6–126
arcs, Fence Stretch function and . . . . . . . . 3–29 defining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–66
Area identify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–68
Active (solid/hole) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26, 3–62 make active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–67
change element to Active . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–62 move origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–129
change fence contents to Active . . . . . . . 3–62 plane lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–68
closed element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76 precision input using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–68
enclosed by elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76 rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–62
enclosed by fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76 rotate from top orientation . . . . . . . . . 6–128
measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76 save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–122
of element difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76 select and attach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–130
of element intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76 spherical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–64
of element union . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76 triad display on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–122
pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–26 type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–62
Area Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–63 Auxiliary Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–124
Array AZ= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–21
polar coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–55
rectangular coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–55 B
ARRAY ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–58 B-spline
ARRAY POLAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–58 closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59
ARRAY RECTANGULAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–58 control polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–55, 6–58
Arrowhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21 curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–55, 6–68
Association order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–55, 6–58
cell with another element . . . . . . . . . . . 6–47 periodic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59
drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–82 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–55
multi-line with another element . . . . . . 6–47 surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–141
point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–82 B-spline curves
Associative Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–41 cleaning up those with large number of
drop (convert to lines, line strings, and/or control points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–103
arcs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–84 data points to place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–74
Attach from data points with tangent directions 6–79
Reference File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1, 5–30 to pass through element vertices . . . . . . 6–79
reference raster file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–38 B-spline Curves tool frame . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–66
ATTACH ACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–130 B-spline surfaces
Attributes based on element’s vertices . . . . . . . . . 7–149
element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–146
view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1 evaluating attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–183
Auxiliary Coordinate System (ACS) . . . . . 7–61, Fence Stretch function and . . . . . . . . . . 3–29
6–122 helical-shaped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–156
AccuDraw and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–65 reducing number of poles . . . . . . . . . . . 7–176
active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–67 Backward Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–30
align with element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–126
i–2 MicroStation/J User’s Guide

Index
Bézier Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–60 orphan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
Bisector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6 pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–27, 4–29
angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–44 place Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18
Blend point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–108 rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
Surface Between Rail Curves . . . . . . . 7–181 select in design and place . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–179 Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
BLEND CURVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–110 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
BLEND RAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–182 settings group component . . . . . . . . . . . 1–83
BLEND SURFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–181 shared . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11, 6–47
Block symbology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
3D (slab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50 terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21
isometric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–51 type (graphic/point) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–55 Cell Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
placement with AccuDraw . . . . . . . . . . . 2–53 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–187
Boreline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–60 attach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
Boresite Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–70 browse contents of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
breaks, Fence Stretch function to create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
manipulate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–29 Cell Settings
Active cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18
C active cell (for placement) . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
Calculate Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–61, 6–93 active pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–41
calculator, popup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–26 Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5, 6–47
Camera replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–22
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–27 tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
CAMERA NAVIGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–48 Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–11
Catenary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–93 Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–115
Catmull-Rom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–57 CHAMFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–116
Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1 Change
associate shared . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–47 element attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–62
create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7 Multi-line to Active Definition . . . . . . . . 3–67
define origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20 Surface Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–169
delete from library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9 to Active Area (Solid/Hole) . . . . . . . 6–5, 3–62
derived . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–53 to Active Curve Settings . . . . . . 6–59, 6–102
designate active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10 to Active Solid or Surface Status . . . . . 7–167
dimension-driven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–53 to Active Surface Settings . . . . . 7–55, 7–172
display name and level (identify) . . . . . 4–20 View Perspective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15
drop association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–82 CHANGE AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–63
edit name/description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8 CHANGE COLOR FILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–63
graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6 CHANGE COLOR OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . 3–63
how to create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–187 CHANGE CURVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–103
instance of shared . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12 CHANGE DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–107
levels and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11 Change Element
line terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21 Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19, 3–61
origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1, 4–7, 4–20 Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–106
to Active Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–62

Index
to Active Fill Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–63 elements) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2, 3–79
to Active Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–61 drop status of fence contents . . . . . . . . . 3–33
CHANGE FILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–64 Complex Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
CHANGE ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–62 create automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–14
CHANGE MLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–67 create manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–14
CHANGE SURFACE CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–168 difference of elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–16
CHANGE SURFACE NORMAL . . . . . . . 7–170 flood fill to create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–16
CHANGE SURFACE SETTINGS . . . . . . 7–173 intersection of elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–16
CHANGE VIEW PERSPECTIVE . . . . . . . 7–16 union of elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–16
Circle Cone
by center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–48 place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50, 7–87
by diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–48 Configuration Variables
by edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–48 MS_RFDIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
by radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–48 Conic Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59, 6–85
isometric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–52 Construct
measure radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–73 Active Point at Intersection . . . . . . . . . . 1–69
placement with AccuDraw . . . . . . . . . . . 2–51 Active Points Along Element . . . . . . . . . 1–71
radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–73 Active Points Between Data Points . . . . 1–67
Clipping Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–31 Angle Bisector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–44
Clipping Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–31 Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–55
Clipping, optimized fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–20 Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–115
Close Circular Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–113
element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–33, 1–39 Closed Cross Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–32
CLOSE ELEMENT . . . 1–33, 1–39, 1–58, 6–82 Closed Tee Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–37
CM= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18 Corner Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–40
Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13 Line at Active Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–46
Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–13 thru 1–15 Merged Cross Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–34
change element to Active . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–61 Merged Tee Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–39
change fence contents to Active . . . . . . . 3–61 Minimum Distance Line . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–45
fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–63 Offset Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–158
fill area with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26 Open Cross Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–33
match Active to element . . . . .3–68 thru 3–69 Open Tee Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–38
palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13 Parabolic Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6
select elements by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120 Parametric Line String . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–100
value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13 Skin Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–151
Color Table Surface by Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–145
attach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13 Surface by Section or Network . . . . . . 7–143
Complex Surface or Solid of Projection . . . . . . . . . 7–93
chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–79 Surface or Solid of Revolution . . . . . . . . 7–97
shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–79 CONSTRUCT BISECTOR ANGLE . . . . . 1–45
string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–79 CONSTRUCT BSPLINE CURVE . . . . . . . 6–77
Complex Chain CONSTRUCT CURVE OFFSET . . . . . . . . 6–90
create automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–11 CONSTRUCT CURVE REDUCE . . . . . . 6–104
create manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–11 Construct Helical Surface tool . . . . . . . . 7–155
Complex Element CONSTRUCT LINE AA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–47
drop status (return to primitive CONSTRUCT LINE MINIMUM . . . . . . . . 1–46

Index
CONSTRUCT PARAMETRIC CURVE . . . 6–99 CREATE CHAIN AUTOMATIC . . . . . . . . 6–13
CONSTRUCT PARAMETRIC CREATE CHAIN MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . 6–13
LINESTRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–100 Create Curves tool box
CONSTRUCT POINT ALONG . . . . . . . . . 1–72 Extract Surface Rule Lines . . . . . . . . . . 6–90
CONSTRUCT POINT BETWEEN . . . . . . 1–68 CREATE REGION DIFFERENCE . . . . . . 6–20
CONSTRUCT POINT DISTANCE . . . . . . 1–73 CREATE REGION FLOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–20
CONSTRUCT POINT INTERSECTION . 1–70 CREATE REGION INTERSECTION . . . . 6–20
CONSTRUCT POINT PROJECT . . . . . . . 1–69 CREATE REGION UNION . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–20
CONSTRUCT SURFACE CROSSSEC- CREATE SHAPE AUTOMATIC . . . . . . . . 6–15
TION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–145 CREATE SHAPE MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . 6–14
CONSTRUCT SURFACE EDGE . . . . . . 7–146 Create Surfaces tool box
CONSTRUCT SURFACE HELICAL . . . 7–157 Construct Helical Surface tool . . . . . . . 7–155
CONSTRUCT SURFACE OFFSET . . . . 7–159 Place Free-form Surface tool . . . . . . . . 7–146
CONSTRUCT SURFACE PROJECTION . 7–97 Sweep Along Two Traces tool . . . . . . . . 7–152
CONSTRUCT SURFACE REDUCE . . . . 7–177 tool summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–141
CONSTRUCT SURFACE REVOLUTION 7–99 Cross Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–32, 6–34
CONSTRUCT SURFACE SKIN . . . . . . . 7–152 Crosshatch Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–27, 4–40
CONSTRUCT SURFACE TRACE . . . . . 7–155 CROSSHATCH DIFFERENCE . . . . . . . . . 4–41
CONSTRUCT TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–164 CROSSHATCH ELEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–41
control points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–103 CROSSHATCH FENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–41
CONVERT BSPLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–108 CROSSHATCH FLOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–41
Convert Element to B-spline . . . . . . . . . . 6–107 CROSSHATCH ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–41
Coons Patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–145 CROSSHATCH INTERSECTION . . . . . . . 4–41
Coordinate CROSSHATCH POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–41
view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8 CROSSHATCH UNION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–41
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–35 Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–54
element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11, 3–35 3D B-spline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–88
fence contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–35 B-spline . . . . . . . .6–55, 6–69, 6–85 thru 6–86
Copy Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–35 Bézier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–54, 6–60, 6–80
from reference file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13 blend B-spline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–108
parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–39 calculate based on formula . . . . . 6–61, 6–93
rectangular array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–55 Catmull-Rom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–57
to different level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–116 change to active settings . . . . . . . . . . . 6–102
to polar array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–55 composite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59, 6–80
using fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–35 conic section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59
COPY ELEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–37 convert element to B-spline . . . . . . . . . 6–107
COPY ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–37 derive from existing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–65
COPY PARALLEL DISTANCE . . . . . . . . . 3–40 digitizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–134
COPY PARALLEL KEYIN . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–40 extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–105, 3–110
Corner Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–40 formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–61, 6–93
Create hyperbola . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59
cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–187 least squares approximation . . . . . . . . . 6–56
cell library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3 library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–61, 6–93
Complex Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–11 match settings to existing . . . . . . . . . . . 3–75
Complex Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–14 non-planar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–48
Region (complex shape) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–16 parabola . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59

Index
parametric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–99 thru 6–100 creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–78
partial ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59 DD= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18
point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–42, 6–55 Define
pre-defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–93 auxiliary coordinate system . . . 6–122, 6–126
reduce B-spline pole count . . . . . . . . . . 6–103 Cell Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7, 4–20
space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–48 Reference File Back Clipping Plane . . . 5–31
stream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–42, 6–134 Reference File Clipping Mask . . . . . . . . 5–31
transitional spiral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59 Reference File Front Clipping Plane . . . 5–32
curve-type elements, flattening . . . . . . . . 6–112 Define ACS
Custom Line Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–18 Aligned with Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–126
active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–18 Aligned with View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–127
definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17 By Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–122, 6–126
modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19 DEFINE ACS ELEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–126
name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19 DEFINE ACS POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–127
point symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17 DEFINE ACS VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–128
scale factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17, 1–20 DEFINE CELL ORIGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20
stroke pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17 Delete
width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17, 1–19 Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–15
Cut Fence Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19, 3–32
All Component Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–36 Part of Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–100
Single Component Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–35 Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–53
CUT ALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–37 Reference File Clipping Mask . . . . . . . . 5–31
CUT SINGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–36 Vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–112
Cylinder DELETE PARTIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–101
place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50, 7–83 DELETE VERTEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–113
deleting
D AccuDraw shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–36
Data Button variables in popup calculator . . . . . . . . . 2–30
3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–60 DEPTH ACTIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
Data Point DEPTH DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–60 Design Cube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2
absolute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–66 Detach
along design plane axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–67 Reference File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–24, 5–34
along drawing plane axes . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–38 DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DDRAWING . . . . . 7–78
along view axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–68 DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DFILLET . . . . . . . 7–178
angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–42, 2–67 DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DFREEFORM . . . 7–142
coordinate system for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–66 DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DMODSURF . . . . 7–160
distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–41, 2–67 DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DVIEWING . . . . . . 7–13
precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–65 DIALOG TOOLBOX ACS . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–126
preview with tentative point . . . . . . . . . 2–10 DIALOG TOOLBOX ARC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–74
relative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–67 DIALOG TOOLBOX BSPLINE . . . . . . . . . 6–67
data points DIALOG TOOLBOX CHANGE . . . . . . . . . 3–60
placing free-form surface with . . . . . . . 7–148 DIALOG TOOLBOX CURVECREATE . . . 6–69
to place B-spline curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–74 DIALOG TOOLBOX CURVEMODIFY . . 6–102
with tangent directions for B-spline curve DIALOG TOOLBOX DROP . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–79
DIALOG TOOLBOX EXTRACT . . . . . . . 7–183

Index
DIALOG TOOLBOX FENCE . . . . . . . . . . 3–23 perpendicular from element . . . . . . . . . . 2–70
DIALOG TOOLBOX FILLET . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6 Donut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–51, 7–88
DIALOG TOOLBOX GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . 6–9 DP= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18
DIALOG TOOLBOX ISOMETRIC . . . . . . 6–51 Drawing Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–21
DIALOG TOOLBOX JOINTS . . . . . . . . . . 6–32 coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–21, 7–65
DIALOG TOOLBOX LINEAR . . . . . . . . . . 1–30 in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–55
DIALOG TOOLBOX MANIPULATE . . . . 3–35 indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–19
DIALOG TOOLBOX MATCH . . . . . . . . . . 3–71 lock axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–40
DIALOG TOOLBOX MEASURE . . . . . . . 2–70 orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–47
DIALOG TOOLBOX MODIFY . . . . . . . . . 3–89 origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–19, 2–45
DIALOG TOOLBOX PATTERNS . . . . . . . 4–33 rotate axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–48, 7–56
DIALOG TOOLBOX POINTS . . . . . . . . . . 1–64 Drop
DIALOG TOOLBOX POLYGONS . . . . . . . 1–55 Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–82
DIALOG TOOLBOX REFERENCE . . . . . 5–30 Associative Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–84
DIALOG TOOLBOX SELECTION . . . . . . . 3–2 Complex Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2, 3–79
DIALOG TOOLBOX SURFACE . . . . . . . 7–141 Complex Status of Fence Contents . . . . 3–33
DIALOG VIEWROTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25 Dimension Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–86
Digitizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–130 Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2, 6–9
curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–42, 6–134 From Graphic Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–21
line string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–40, 6–134 Line String/Shape Status . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–80
panning while digitizing . . . . . . . . . . . 6–134 Line Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–83
setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–130 Multi-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–29, 3–85
tablet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–130 Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–81
working units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–131 DROP ASSOCIATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–83
Digitizing Tablet DROP COMPLEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–80
map to design plane coordinates . . . . . 6–133 DROP DIMENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–87
partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–131 DROP ELEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–11
Dimension DROP LINESTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–84
drop (convert to lines, arcs, and text) . . 3–86 DROP MLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–86
drop association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–82 DROP PATTERN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–85
insert extension line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–110 DROP STRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–81
remove extension line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–112 DROP TEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–82
Dimension Attributes DZ= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–21
match Active to element . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–74
Dimension-driven Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–53 E
modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–54 Edit
place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–54 Multi-line Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–45
Display Depth Edit Menu
set by key-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18 Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
set by keying in distance to move . . . . . 7–19 Select All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
set graphically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16 Select By Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–121
Distance Ungroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
along element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–70 Element
between points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–70 association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–46
measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–70 attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
minimum between elements . . . . . . . . . 2–70

Index
boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–52 scaling and stretching in fence . . . . . . . 3–44
complex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2 selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
filter display of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–121 stretching in fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–36
handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11 Ellipse
hole(s) in solid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5 axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–73
identify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–19, 7–70 fourth (quarter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–78
intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6 half . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–77
keypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10 measure .................................................... 2–73
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1 partial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59, 6–85
midpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6 placement with AccuDraw . . . . . . . . . . . 2–53
modify geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11 Environment Variables
move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11 MS_WEBFILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11
outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26 EVALUATE CURVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120
scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11 Evaluate Curve tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–114
select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3 EVALUATE SURFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–187
Selection . . . . . . . .3–3 thru 6–4, 3–11, 6–120 Evaluate Surface tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–183
selection criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120 evaluate, B-spline surface . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–186
type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120 Evolute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–93
vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1 Extend
volume enclosed by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–55 Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–105
Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1, 3–69 Element to Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–103
area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26 Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–101
area (solid/hole) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–62 multiple elements simultaneously . . . 3–105
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–61 Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–174
class (primary/construction) . . . . . . . . . 1–28 Two Elements to Intersection . . . . . . . 3–102
color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13 EXTEND CURVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–106
direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–106 EXTEND ELEMENT 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–103
fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26, 3–63 EXTEND ELEMENT INTERSECTION . 3–104
level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3 EXTEND LINE DISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . 3–102
line style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17 EXTEND LINE KEYIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–102
line weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15, 3–61 EXTEND SURFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–175
match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–68 thru 3–69 EXTRACT SURFACE RULE LINES . . . . 6–93
opacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26 Extract Surface Rule Lines tool . . . . . . . . 6–90
selection criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120
symbology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2 F
Element Menu Fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–16
Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–14 accept contents for manipulation . . . . . 3–19
Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5, 6–47 area enclosed by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76
Multi-lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–25 array contents of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–55
Element Selection tool box block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–24, 3–26
PowerSelector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5 change attributes of contents . . . . . . . . . 3–61
elements change contents to Active Area . . . . . . . 3–62
B-spline curves to pass through vertices 6–78 circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–26
B-spline surfaces based on vertices . . . 7–149 clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–16 thru 3–17
rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34 contents selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–17
rotating and stretching in fence . . . . . . 3–48

Index
copy contents of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–35 FENCE MIRROR ORIGINAL HORIZON-
copy contents to new design file . . . . . . 3–21 TAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–53
delete contents of . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19, 3–32 FENCE MIRROR ORIGINAL LINE . . . . 3–53
drop associations with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–82 FENCE MIRROR ORIGINAL VERTICAL 3–53
drop complex status of contents . . . . . . 3–33 FENCE MOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–39
drop dimensions contained in . . . . . . . . 3–86 FENCE ROTATE ORIGINAL . . . . . . . . . . 3–51
drop multi-lines contained in . . . . 6–29, 3–85 FENCE ROTATE POINTS COPY . . . . . . . 3–51
extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–29 FENCE ROTATE POINTS ORIGINAL . . 3–51
hatch area enclosed by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–37 FENCE SCALE COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–46
manipulate contents of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–29 FENCE SCALE ORIGINAL . . . . . . . . . . . 3–46
mirror contents of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–51 FENCE SCALE POINTS COPY . . . . . . . . 3–46
modify vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–28 FENCE SCALE POINTS ORIGINAL . . . . 3–46
move contents of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–38 FENCE SEPARATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–22
move contents to new design file . . . . . . 3–22 FENCE STRETCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–32
optimized clipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–20 Fence Stretch function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–21
pattern area enclosed by . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–45 and arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–29
perimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76 and B-spline surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–29
place block (rectangular boundary) . . . . 3–24, and multi-lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–29
3–26 FENCE TATE COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–51
place shape (non-rectangular boundary) 3–25 FENCE THAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–85 thru 3–86
reject contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19 FF= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–21
remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–17 File
rotate contents of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–46 curve library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–61
scale contents of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–41 reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
selection mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–17 update sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–46
shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–25 thru 3–26 File Menu
stretch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–29 Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–23 Save Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–130
use in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–71 Fill
void . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–16 thru 3–17 area with color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26
FENCE ARRAY POLAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–58 change element to active type . . . . . . . . 3–63
FENCE ARRAY RECTANGULAR . . . . . . 3–58 display on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–27
fence contents, rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34 shape with color of outline . . . . . . . . . . . 3–63
FENCE COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–37 type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26
FENCE DELETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–33 with Active Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26
FENCE DROP ASSOCIATION . . . . . . . . . 3–83 with Active Fill Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26
FENCE DROP COMPLEX . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–33 Fillet
FENCE DROP DIMENSION . . . . . . . . . . 3–86 chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–115
FENCE DROP MLINE . .6–29, 3–85 thru 3–86 circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–113
FENCE FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–21 horizontal parabolic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6
FENCE FREEZE . . . . . . . . . . . .3–85 thru 3–86 parabolic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6
FENCE ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–32 symmetric parabolic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6
FENCE MIRROR COPY HORIZONTAL . 3–53 FILLET MODIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–115
FENCE MIRROR COPY LINE . . . . . . . . . 3–53 FILLET NOMODIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–115
FENCE MIRROR COPY VERTICAL . . . . 3–53 FILLET SINGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–115
Fillet Surfaces tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–177

Index
Fillets 4–45
Construct Parabolic Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6 area defined by data points . . . . . . . . . . 4–40
Filter area enclosed by bounding elements . . . 4–39
element display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–121 area of element difference . . . . . . . . . . . 4–38
FLATTEN CURVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–114 area of element intersection . . . . . . . . . 4–37
Flatten Curve tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–111 area of element union . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–37
Flood Fill . . . . . . . 6–16, 6–19, 4–39, 4–47, 2–76 attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–33
FORMULA LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–63 cross . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–40
FORMULA UNLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–63 element area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–35
free-form surface, placing with data fenced area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–37
points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–148 flood fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–39
FREEZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–30, 3–85 thru 3–86 lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–27
HATCH DIFFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–40
G HATCH ELEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–40
Graphic Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11 HATCH FENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–40
Graphic Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3 HATCH FLOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–40
add element(s) to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3, 6–20 HATCH INTERSECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–40
drop status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–21 HATCH POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–40
lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4 HATCH UNION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–40
manipulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4 helical-shaped B-spline surface . . . . . . . . 7–156
Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–61 Helix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–49, 6–88
aspect ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–63 Hole
display on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–63 in solid element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
isometric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–62 Hyperbola . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59, 6–85
lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–61, 2–64 thru 2–65
offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–62 I
orthogonal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–62 IDENTIFY CELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21
references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–61 Image File
units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–61 formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–36
Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3 Image File
also called orphan cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3 monochrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–35
break up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3 true color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–36
create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3 types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–35
graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3, 6–20 Input
Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5, 6–22 precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–65
solid and associated hole(s) . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5 Input Focus
GROUP ADD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–21 AccuDraw window and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–23
GROUP DROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–22 Insert
GROUP HOLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–23 Vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–110
INSERT VERTEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–112
H IntelliTrim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–105
Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–11 thru 3–12 intersecting lines, selecting elements that . 3–9
Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–26 Intersection
Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–33 extend element to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–103
area between multi-line components . . 4–36, extend two elements to . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–102

Index
trim element to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–104 move element to Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–61
trim multiple elements simultaneously move element to different . . . . . . . . . . 3–117
to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–105 move fence contents to Active . . . . . . . . 3–61
Involute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–93 name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
Isometric number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–49 reference file display by . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–14
plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–48 select elements by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120
pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–50 structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–50 symbology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15, 1–21
view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7, 7–23 Level Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
Library
J curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–61
JOIN CORNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–41 Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–30, 1–36
JOIN CROSS CLOSED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–33 angle between . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–74
JOIN CROSS MERGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–35 angle bisector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–44
JOIN CROSS OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–34 at Active Angle to element . . . . . . . . . . . 1–46
JOIN TEE CLOSED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–38 chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–115
JOIN TEE MERGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–40 extend by adding line segment . . . . . . 3–110
JOIN TEE OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–39 extend or shorten by key-in . . . . . . . . . 3–101
Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–30 extend or shorten graphically . . . . . . . 3–101
closed cross . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–32 extend or shorten to intersection . . . . . 3–102
closed tee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–37 thru 3–103
corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–40 minimum distance between elements . . 1–45
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–28 terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21
merged cross . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–34 zero length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–65
merged tee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–39 Line Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–36, 1–57
multi-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–23 Line String
open cross . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–33 delete vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–112
open tee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–38 digitizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–134
drop (convert to individual line
K segments) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–80
extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–110
Keyboard Shortcuts
insert vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–110
AccuDraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–34, 2–58
non-planar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–48
parametric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–99 thru 6–100
L
space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–48
LC= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19 stream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–40, 6–134
Least Squares, to define B-spline surface 7–146 Line Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17, 3–69
Length Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–18
measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–75 change element to Active . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–61
Lengthen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–102 change fence contents to Active . . . . . . . 3–61
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3 custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17
Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–3, 1–12 thru 1–13 drop (convert to lines, line strings and/or
copy element to different . . . . . . . . . . . 3–116 arcs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–83
map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–10 thru 1–11 match Active to element . . . . .3–68 thru 3–69
match Active to element . . . . .3–68 thru 3–69 modify existing element . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–65

Index
select elements by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120 MATCH SURFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–77
standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–21 MATCH WEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–69
user-defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17 Matrix
Line Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15 of Active Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16
Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15 MATRIX CELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18
change element to Active . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–61 MDL LOAD CURVCALC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–95
match Active to element . . . . .3–68 thru 3–69 Measure
select elements by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120 Angle Between Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–74
value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15 Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76
Linear Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–49 area defined by data points . . . . . . . . . . 2–76
Lock area of element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76
ACS plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–68 area of element difference . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76
boresite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–70 area of element intersection . . . . . . . . . 2–76
graphic group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4 area of element union . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76
grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–61, 2–64 Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–70
isometric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–49 distance along element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–70
Smart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–38 distance between points . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–70
snap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2, 2–11 fenced area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76
Locks Full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–64 flood fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76
LT= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21 Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–75
LV= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13 minimum distance between elements . . 2–70
perpendicular distance from element . . 2–70
M Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–73
Manage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–84 Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–81
Manipulate Fence Contents . . . . . . 3–21, 3–29 volume enclosed by element(s) . . . . . . . 2–81
Manipulate tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–34 MEASURE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–75
Mass Properties MEASURE AREA DIFFERENCE . . . . . . 2–81
analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–82 MEASURE AREA ELEMENT . . . . . . . . . 2–81
window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–82 MEASURE AREA FENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–81
Match MEASURE AREA FLOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–81
All Element Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–69 MEASURE AREA INTERSECTION . . . . 2–81
Curve Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–75 MEASURE AREA POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–81
Dimension Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–74 MEASURE AREA UNION . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–81
Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–68 MEASURE DISTANCE ALONG . . . . . . . . 2–73
Multi-line Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–73 MEASURE DISTANCE MINIMUM . . . . . 2–73
Pattern Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–52 MEASURE DISTANCE PERPENDICU-
tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–70 LAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–73
MATCH COLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–69 MEASURE DISTANCE POINTS . . . . . . . 2–73
MATCH CURVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–76 MEASURE LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76
MATCH DIMENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–74 MEASURE RADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–74
MATCH ELEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–70 MEASURE VOLUME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–82
MATCH ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–69 MENU CLEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–98
MATCH LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–69 MENU DUPLICATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–98
MATCH MLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–73 MENU NEWFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–97
MATCH STYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–69 MENU OPENCURVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–97
MENU OPENFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–97

Index
MENU SAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–97 Modify Surfaces tool box
MENU SAVETO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–98 Reduce Surface Poles tool . . . . . . . . . . 7–175
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–51 tool summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–159
element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–51 MODIFY TRIM BOUNDARY . . . . . . . . . 7–171
fence contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–51 Moments of Inertia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–83
Reference File About Horizontal . . . . . . 5–33 Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–38
Reference File About Vertical . . . . . . . . 5–34 ACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–129
MIRROR COPY HORIZONTAL . . . . . . . . 3–53 element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–38
MIRROR COPY LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–53 fence contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–38
MIRROR COPY VERTICAL . . . . . . . . . . . 3–53 Multi-line Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–43
MIRROR ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–53 Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–39
MIRROR ORIGINAL HORIZONTAL . . . . 3–53 Reference File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–32
MIRROR ORIGINAL LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–53 MOVE ACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–129
MIRROR ORIGINAL VERTICAL . . . . . . . 3–53 Move Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11, 3–38
MLINE EDIT CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–46 parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–39
MLINE EDIT PROFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–45 to Active Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–61
MLINE PARTIAL DELETE . . . . . . . . . . . 6–43 to different level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–117
Modify using fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–38
Arc Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–80 MOVE ELEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–39
Arc Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–81 MOVE FENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–29
Arc Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–79 MOVE ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–39
delete part of element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–100 MOVE PARALLEL DISTANCE . . . . . . . . 3–40
delete vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–112 MOVE PARALLEL ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–40
Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–89 MOVE PARALLEL KEYIN . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–40
Fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–28 Multi-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–23
insert vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–110 associate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–47
Trim Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–170 break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–35
using handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–80 change to active definition . . . . . . . . . . . 3–67
MODIFY ARC ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–81 connect component line segments . . . . . 6–41
MODIFY ARC AXIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–82 cut all component lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–36
MODIFY ARC RADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–80 cut component line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–35
Modify Curves tool box definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–25
Evaluate Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–114 delete part of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–42
Flatten Curve tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–111 drop (convert to lines, line strings, and/or
Reduce Curve Data tool . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–103 arcs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–29, 3–85
tool summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–100 drop association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–82
MODIFY DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–55 end cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–27, 6–45
MODIFY ELEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–99 hatch area between components . 4–36, 4–45
MODIFY FENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–29 joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–30
MODIFY LINESTYLE DASHSCALE . . . 3–66 match definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–73
MODIFY LINESTYLE ENDWIDTH . . . . 3–66 move profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–43
MODIFY LINESTYLE GAPSCALE . . . . . 3–66 offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–26
MODIFY LINESTYLE ICON . . . . . . . . . . 3–66 Partial Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–42
MODIFY LINESTYLE SCALE . . . . . . . . . 3–66 place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–37
MODIFY LINESTYLE SHIFT . . . . . . . . . 3–66 profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–43
MODIFY LINESTYLE STARTWIDTH . . 3–66 remove break in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–41

Index
settings group component . . . . . . . . . . . 6–28 PATTERN AREA UNION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–48
start cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–27 Pattern Attributes
uncut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–41 angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–41
Multi-lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–25 associative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–28, 4–41
multi-lines, Fence Stretch function and . . 3–29 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–52
match active to placed pattern . . . . . . . 4–52
N show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–52
normal direction, computing for B-spline snappable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–29, 4–41
surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–183 PATTERN LINE ELEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . 4–51
normal plot scale, for B-spline surface . . 7–183 PATTERN LINE MULTIPLE . . . . . . . . . . 4–51
NURBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–53, 6–93 PATTERN LINE SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–51
PATTERN LINE SINGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–51
O Patterning Settings
active cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–29, 4–41
Orphan Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
display on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–26
Orthogonal
group component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–83
shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–59
tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–31
Perimeter
P
measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76
Parabola . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59, 6–85 Perpendicular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
as curve element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6 Perspective Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6 Place
projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8 Active Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16
Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–26 Active Cell Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–27, 4–41 Active Line Terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21
area defined by data points . . . . . . . . . . 4–48 Active Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–65, 6–133
area enclosed by bounding elements . . . 4–47 Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–52, 1–75
area of element difference . . . . . . . . . . . 4–47 B-spline Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–69
area of element intersection . . . . . . . . . 4–46 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–53, 1–55
area of element union . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–46 cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–26 Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–48, 2–51
cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–27, 4–29 Composite Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59, 6–80
delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–53 Cone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50, 7–87
element area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–43 Conic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59, 6–85
fenced area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–45 Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50, 7–83
flood fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–47 Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–51, 2–53
in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–188 Fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–24
linear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–49 Free-form Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–146
part of area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–29 Half Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–77
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–26 Helix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–49, 6–88
tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–32 Isometric Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–48, 6–51
PATTERN AREA DIFFERENCE . . . . . . . 4–48 Isometric Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–48, 6–52
PATTERN AREA ELEMENT . . . . . . . . . . 4–48 Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–36
PATTERN AREA FENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–48 Multi-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–37, 6–47
PATTERN AREA INTERSECTION . . . . . 4–48 Orthogonal Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–59
PATTERN AREA POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–48 Parametric Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–99

Index
Parametric Line String . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–99 PLACE CYLINDER SKEWED . . . . . . . . . 7–86
Point or Stream Curve . . . 1–42, 7–48, 6–134 Place Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–75
Quarter Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–78 PLACE ELLIPSE CENTER CON-
Regular Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–60 STRAINED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–54
Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–57 PLACE ELLIPSE EDGE CONSTRAINED 1–53
Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50, 7–78 PLACE ELLIPSE HALF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–78
SmartLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–48, 2–54 PLACE ELLIPSE ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–54
Sphere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50, 7–81 PLACE ELLIPSE QUARTER . . . . . . . . . . 1–79
Spiral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59, 6–86 PLACE FENCE ACTIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–27
Stream Line String . . . . . . . . . . . 1–40, 6–134 PLACE FENCE ALLFILES . . . . . . . . . . . 3–27
Torus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–51, 7–88 PLACE FENCE BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–27
Wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–51, 7–90 PLACE FENCE CIRCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–27
Place Active Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14, 6–47 PLACE FENCE DESIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–27
at Active Angle and Active Scale . . . . . . 4–14 PLACE FENCE ELEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . 3–27
at graphically defined angle and scale . 4–14 PLACE FENCE SHAPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–27
interactive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14 Place Fence tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–36
Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16 PLACE FENCE UNIVERSE . . . . . . . . . . . 3–27
relative to active level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14 PLACE FENCE VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–27
PLACE ARC CENTER CONSTRAINED . 1–77 Place Free-form Surface tool . . . . . . . . . . 7–146
PLACE ARC EDGE CONSTRAINED . . . 1–75 PLACE HELIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–89
PLACE ARC ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–77 PLACE LINE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–37
PLACE BLOCK ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–56 PLACE LINE CONSTRAINED . . . . . . . . . 1–37
PLACE BLOCK ISOMETRIC . . . . . . . . . . 6–52 PLACE LSTRING STREAM . . . . . . . . . . . 1–41
PLACE BLOCK ORTHOGONAL . . . . . . . 1–55 PLACE MLINE CONSTRAINED . . . . . . . 1–40
PLACE BLOCK ROTATED . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–55 PLACE PARABOLA HORIZONTAL
PLACE BSPLINE CURVE . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–77 MODIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–8
PLACE CELL DIMENSION . . . . . . . . . . . 4–54 PLACE PARABOLA HORIZONTAL
PLACE CELL ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16 NOMODIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–8
PLACE CIRCLE CENTER CON- PLACE PARABOLA MODIFY . . . . . . . . . . 6–8
STRAINED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–50 PLACE PARABOLA NOMODIFY . . . . . . . 6–8
PLACE CIRCLE DIAMETER . . . . . . . . . . 1–51 PLACE PARAMETRIC CURVE ABSO-
PLACE CIRCLE EDGE CONSTRAINED 1–50 LUTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–99
PLACE CIRCLE ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–51 PLACE PARAMETRIC CURVE RELA-
PLACE CIRCLE ISOMETRIC . . . . . . . . . 6–54 TIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–99
PLACE COMPOSITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–83 PLACE PARAMETRIC LINESTRING
PLACE CONE ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–88 ABSOLUTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–99
PLACE CONE RADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–88 PLACE PARAMETRIC LINESTRING
PLACE CONE RIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–88 RELATIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–99
PLACE CONE SKEWED . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–88 PLACE POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–66
PLACE CONIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–86 PLACE POLYGON CIRCUMSCRIBED . . 1–63
PLACE CURVE POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–44 PLACE POLYGON EDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–63
PLACE CURVE SPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–44 PLACE POLYGON ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–63
PLACE CURVE STREAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–44 PLACE POLYGON INSCRIBED . . . . . . . 1–63
PLACE CYLINDER ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–86 PLACE SHAPE CONSTRAINED . . . . . . . 1–58
PLACE CYLINDER RADIUS . . . . . . . . . . 7–86 PLACE SHAPE ORTHOGONAL . . . . . . . 1–60
PLACE CYLINDER RIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . 7–86 PLACE SLAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–81

Index
PLACE SPHERE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–83 snap mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
PLACE SPIRAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–88 popup calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–26
PLACE SURFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–151 PowerSelector tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
PLACE TERMINATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–22 Precision Input
PLACE TORUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–90 at auxiliary coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–68
PLACE WEDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–92 Precision Input Key ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–65
planar data points, entering, and Precision Input Key-ins
calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–27 in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–60
Plot using auxiliary coordinates . . . . . . . . . . 7–68
reference raster file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–46 Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–50
Plotter Driver File Records Primitive Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–49
RASTER_RESOLUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–46 cone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50
Point cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50
Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–65 slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–49
at intersection of two elements . . . . . . . 1–69 sphere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50
monument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–133 Principal Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–84
project onto element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–68 Principal Moments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–84
symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17 Products of Inertia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–83
tentative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1 Project Active Point Onto Element . . . . . . 1–68
POINT ABSOLUTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–65
POINT DELTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–65 R
POINT DISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–65 Radii of Gyration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–85
Point Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17 Radius
POINT VDELTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–65 measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–73
Pointer Raster File
isometric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–50 attach as reference file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–38
points plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–46
computing for B-spline surface . . . . . . 7–183 Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–55
Points Rectangular
along element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–71 array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–55
between data points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–67 coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–31
Polar rectangular area, selecting elements contained
array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–55 or overlapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–31 Reduce Curve Data tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–103
poles Reduce Surface Poles tool . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–175
reducing number in B-spline curve . . . 6–104 Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
reducing number in B-spline surface . 7–176 files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
setting number for B-spline curve . . . . . 6–69 REFERENCE DETACH ALL . . . . . . . . . . 5–24
to define B-spline surface . . . . . . . . . . . 7–146 Reference Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
Polygon attach active design file to itself . . . . . . . 5–6
circumscribed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–60 attach coincidentally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
inscribed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–60 attach raster file at previous location . . 5–40
regular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–60 attach raster file interactively . . . . . . . . 5–39
polygonal area, selecting elements contained or attach to active design file . . . 5–1, 5–4, 5–30
overlapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8 attach using saved view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
Pop-up Menus

Index
attaching remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11 fence contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34
clipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–31 using Utilities menu Render . . . . . . . . . 7–34
clipping mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–31 views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33
clipping plane (back) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–31 rendering modes
clipping plane (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–32 choosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33
configuration variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7 Replace
copy elements from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13 cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–22
detach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–24, 5–34 Reset
hide part of from view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–31 effect on fence operations . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19
identify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–25 Rotate
mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–31 Active ACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–128
merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–27 element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–46
mirror about horizontal axis . . . . 5–33, 5–44 fence contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–46
mirror about vertical axis . . . . . . 5–34, 5–44 Reference File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–33
move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–32, 5–42 view contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4, 7–23
path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7 ROTATE ACS ABSOLUTE . . . . . . . . . . . 6–129
plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–46 ROTATE ACS RELATIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–129
portable attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7 ROTATE COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–51
reload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–32 ROTATE ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–51
resize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–43 ROTATE ORIGINAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–51
rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–33, 5–43 ROTATE POINTS COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–51
scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–32 ROTATE POINTS ORIGINAL . . . . . . . . . 3–51
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13 ROTATE VIEW ABSOLUTE . . . . . . . . . . . 7–24
tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–28 ROTATE VIEW ELEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . 7–24
tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–28 ROTATE VIEW RELATIVE . . . . . . . . . . . 7–24
Reference Files Settings rotating elements, and stretching in fence 3–48
display on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13
level display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–14 S
level symbology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15 Save Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–130
locate elements in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–19 Saved Views
locate file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7 attach to drawing sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
snap to elements in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–18 in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
Reference Raster File Settings . . . . . . . . . 5–37 reference file attachments using . . . . . . . 5–4
REFERENCE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–23 saving
Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–16 variables in popup calculator . . . . . . . . . 2–28
relative offset, creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–27 Scale
Reload Reference File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–32 element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11, 3–41
Remote Attach function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11 fence contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–41
Render (Utilities menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34 Reference File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–32
RENDER ALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32 SCALE COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–46
RENDER FENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34 SCALE ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–46
RENDER ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34 SCALE ORIGINAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–46
Render Settings window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33 SCALE POINTS COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–46
RENDER VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34 SCALE POINTS ORIGINAL . . . . . . . . . . . 3–46
Render view control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32 scaling elements, in fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–44
rendering

Index
Screen Level Symbology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–23
partition of digitizing tablet . . . . . . . . . 6–132 Locks Full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–64
section profile curve, sweeping along 2 trace Manage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–84
curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–153 Snaps Button Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
Select ACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–68, 6–130 View Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–122
Select All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4 SF= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–22
Select and Place Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9, 4–18 shading types for rendering
Select By Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–121 choosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33
SELECT CELL ABSOLUTE . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20 Shape
SELECT CELL ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20 complex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2, 6–14
SELECT CELL RELATIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20 delete vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–112
Select Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3 drop (convert to individual line
by area (Solid/Hole) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120 segments) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–80
by class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120 insert vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–110
by color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120 orthogonal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–59
by level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120 Shorten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–102
by line style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120 Show
by line weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120 Pattern Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–52
by property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120 SHOW DEPTH ACTIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–23
by type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120 SHOW DEPTH DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120 Sinusoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–93
in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–70 Slab
selecting place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50, 7–78
elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5 Smart Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–38
Set SmartLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–54
Active Depth (graphically) . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19 Snap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
Display Depth (graphically) . . . . . . . . . . 7–16 divisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
SET AUTOPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–134 lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2, 2–11
SET CAMERA DEFINITION . . . . . . . . . . 7–32 mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
SET CAMERA POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32 to cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
SET CAMERA TARGET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32 to element keypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
SET DDEPTH ABSOLUTE . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18 to reference file elements . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–18
SET DDEPTH RELATIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18 Snap Mode
SET VALUE VARIABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–95 bisector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
Settings button bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–83 center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6, 2–50
stream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–134 intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6, 2–50
Settings Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–82 keypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–82 midpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–83 nearest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6, 2–50
drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–83 origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–85 override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
working units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–85 parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
Settings Menu perpendicular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
Design File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–61 perpendicular from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
Level Names... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3 point on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6

Index
pop-up menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5 NURBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–53
tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6 of projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–93
tangent from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6 of revolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–52, 7–97
through point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6 primary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–49
Solid primitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–49
change to surface . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–55, 7–167 ruled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–145
extruded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–52 sense of boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–170
of projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–93 separate into two along rule lines . . . . 7–173
of revolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–52, 7–97 simple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–49
Sphere status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–167
place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50, 7–81 Sweep Along Two Traces tool . . . . . . . . . 7–152
Spiral Symbology
planar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–93 level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15, 1–21
transitional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59, 6–86
Split Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–173 T
SPLIT SURFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–174 tangency, setting for B-spline curve . . . . . 6–69
Square . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–55 Tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
Start AccuDraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17 tangent directions for data points, to create
STITCH SURFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–169 B-spline curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–78
Stream Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–134 tangent plot scale
stretching elements, in fence . . . . . . . . . . . 3–36 for B-spline surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–183
Stroke Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17 tangents
shift distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–20 computing for B-spline surface . . . . . . 7–183
shift fraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–20 target
Style for rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33
line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–68 thru 3–69 Tee Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–39
Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–55 Tentative Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
B-spline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–146 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–61
B-spline blending between two . . . . . . 7–181 Tentative Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
B-spline by cross-section . . . . . . . . . . . 7–143 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–60
blend between two . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–179 AccuDraw and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–45
boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–170 as reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13
by edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–145 Boresite Lock and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–70
by skin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–151 snap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
change settings to active surface . . . . . 7–172 Terminator
change to solid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–55, 7–167 arrowhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21
construct by interpolating network of line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21
elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–144 Text
control net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–53 drop status (convert to individual graphic
Coons patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–145 elements) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–81
extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–174 THAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–85 thru 3–86
extruded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–52 tolerance
free-form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–53, 7–146 for B-spline curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–69
holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–170 tolerance shortcut, in AccuDraw . . . . . . . . 2–31
match settings of existing . . . . . . . . . . . 3–77 Tool Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
normal direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–169

Index
3D Primitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–77 pointer type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–50
3D View Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11 User-Defined Line Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17
ACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–125 Utilities menu
Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–74 Auxiliary Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–124
Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13 Render . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34
Change Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–59
Create Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–68 V
Create Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–141 variables, in popup calculator . . . . . . . . . . 2–28
Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–77 Vertex
Element Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2 delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–112
Ellipses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–47 insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–110
Fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–23 VI= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–26
Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5 View
Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–8 axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
Isometric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–50 clipping planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
Linear Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–29 coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
Manipulate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–34 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–70 Isometric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–69 levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11
Modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–87 perspective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
Modify Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–159 Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
Multi-line Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–30 Right Isometric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–32 rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–23
Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–63 rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
Polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–54 standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
Reference Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–28 Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
Torus zoom in or out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–51, 7–88 VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–26
Trim View Attributes
Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–54, 3–104 ACS triad on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–122
multiple elements simultaneously . . . 3–105 active depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–105 display depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
TRIM MULTI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–109 fill on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–27
TS= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21 grid on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–63
level on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–10
U pattern on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–26
UNCUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–42 symbology (element/level) . . .1–24 thru 1–25
Uncut Component Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–41 views
Ungroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3 rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33
Update Volume
sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–46 enclosed by element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–55
URLs measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–81
downloading files from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11
User Preferences W
pointer size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–50 Wedge

Index
place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–51, 7–90 Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–50
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–61
Window Z
Select Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–82 Zoom
Working Units 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
digitizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–131 ZOOM 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
Workspace Menu
Digitizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–132

Guide Micro Station V7 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Guide Micro Station V7 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MicroStation/J®

Java™ and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks

Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation.

Other brands and product names are the trademarks of

United States Patent Nos. 5,815,415 and 5,784,068.

MicroStation ©1998 Bentley Systems, Incorporated.

MicroStation/J User’s Guide

MicroStation/J User’s Guide i

Construct Active Points Between Data Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–67

ii MicroStation/J User’s Guide

Working with AccuDraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–24

MicroStation/J User’s Guide iii

Precision Input Key-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–65

3. Manipulating and Modifying Elements

iv MicroStation/J User’s Guide

Change Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... . . . . . . 3–61

MicroStation/J User’s Guide v

Controlling the level on which cells are placed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11

vi MicroStation/J User’s Guide

Modifying attachment information from the system command line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–25

6. Advanced 2D Drafting Techniques

MicroStation/J User’s Guide vii

Construct Open Cross Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–33

viii MicroStation/J User’s Guide

Offset Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–89

7. 3D Design and Modeling

MicroStation/J User’s Guide ix

Perspective projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8

x MicroStation/J User’s Guide

Other ways of working with auxiliary coordinate systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–66

MicroStation/J User’s Guide xi

Construct Surface by Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–145

xii MicroStation/J User’s Guide

• Setting the Active Element Attributes (see page 1-1)

• Using Tools in the Ellipses tool box (see page 1-47)

• Using Tools in the Polygons tool box (see page 1-54)

• Using Tools in the Points tool box (see page 1-63)

• Using Tools in the Arcs tool box (see page 1-74)

• Using the Select Settings Window (see page 1-82)

Setting the Active Element Attributes

What are element attributes?

MicroStation/J User’s Guide 1–1

Attributes are determined by settings. For example, while the Active

Changing an active setting has no effect on previously placed

1 An exception is that the corresponding attribute (for example, color) of each

1–2 MicroStation/J User’s Guide

Each element in a design is on one of 63 levels, which are numbered

You can set up a level structure to make it easy to manipulate the

For information about changing an element’s level and making

MicroStation/J User’s Guide 1–3

To apply an existing level structure to the design

3. From the dialog box’s File menu, choose Open.

1–4 MicroStation/J User’s Guide

Alternative method — To apply an existing

4. In the Level Name dialog box, enter the level number

MicroStation/J User’s Guide 1–5

7. Click the OK button.

Alternative method — To name a level

3. In the Level Name dialog box, enter the level number

1–6 MicroStation/J User’s Guide

6. Click the OK button.

To sort the levels shown in the Level Names

4. (Optional) — From the Sort Criteria dialog box’s Third Priority